Wms User Guide 9yz 04157 0014 Pczza - Issue - 3

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Wireless Management System | LR14.2.W
User Guide
9YZ-04157-0014-PCZZA
Issue 3 | September 2015
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2015 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Trademarks
Oracle, Oracle Corporation, and the Oracle logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Contents
About this document

Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv
xxxv
What's new ................................................................................................................................................................................ xxxv

xxxv
Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

xxxv
Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvi

xxxvi
How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

xxxvi
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvi

xxxvi
Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

xxxvi
Related information ............................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

xxxvii
Document support .................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

xliii
Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

xliii
How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................... xliv

xliv
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xliv

xliv
1 Introduction to 9353 WMS
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
The 9353 WMS NSP
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-4
Brief description about NSP ................................................................................................................................................. 1-5

1-5
System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP ...................................................................................................................... 1-7

1-7
Using the WMS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

1-8
Viewing the managed network .......................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-10
Modifying layouts .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

1-12
Finding network resources .................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
9YZ-04157-0014-PCZZA LR14.2.W Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Issue 3 September 2015
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layout Selector ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1-17
Overview of UTRAN service view ................................................................................................................................. 1-22

1-22
9353 WMS GUI
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30

1-30
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-31

1-31
Graphical User Interface description ............................................................................................................................... 1-32

1-32
9353 WMS menu bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-34

1-34
WMS contextual menus ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-43

1-43
Edit toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-51

1-51
Status bar ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-57

1-57
Navigator window .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-60

1-60
Layout Editor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-61

1-61
Local language display setting ......................................................................................................................................... 1-78

1-78
General principles .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-81

1-81
9353 WMS Helpset
Overview of 9353 WMS Helpset ..................................................................................................................................... 1-90

1-90
9353 WMS basic procedures
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-94

1-94
About 9353 WMS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-96

1-96
Opening a WMS session ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-98

1-98
Defining default GUI lock setting ................................................................................................................................. 1-102

1-102
Displaying and hiding shortcuts ..................................................................................................................................... 1-104

1-104
Performing actions from shortcuts ................................................................................................................................ 1-105

1-105
Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset ........................................................................................... 1-106

1-106
Opening the Navigator window ...................................................................................................................................... 1-110

1-110
Opening a Network Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 1-111

1-111
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Use pursuant to applicable agreements 9YZ-04157-0014-PCZZA LR14.2.W
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Layout Editor window .................................................................................................................................. 1-113
1-113
Opening several Layout Editor windows .................................................................................................................... 1-115

1-115
Adding new group icons .................................................................................................................................................... 1-116

1-116
Moving objects within the current view ...................................................................................................................... 1-118

1-118
Moving objects to different locations ........................................................................................................................... 1-119

1-119
Automatically grouping NEs ........................................................................................................................................... 1-120

1-120
Resizing rectangle group icons ....................................................................................................................................... 1-123

1-123
Reshaping polygon or linear group icons ................................................................................................................... 1-124

1-124
Changing a group icon fill color ..................................................................................................................................... 1-125

1-125
Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern ............................................................................................................... 1-126

1-126
Adding new text objects .................................................................................................................................................... 1-127

1-127
Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names ................................................................................. 1-128
1-128
Changing the font properties of group names or text objects .............................................................................. 1-129
1-129
Importing a graphic image ................................................................................................................................................ 1-130

1-130
Showing objects in alarmed and unalarmed states .................................................................................................. 1-131

1-131
Duplicating objects .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-132

1-132
Creating NE shortcuts ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-133

1-133
Creating annotations for a resource ............................................................................................................................... 1-134

1-134
Setting the background image ......................................................................................................................................... 1-135

1-135
Saving and closing layouts ............................................................................................................................................... 1-137

1-137
Creating a group for RNS View ..................................................................................................................................... 1-138

1-138
Creating links using the Link Creation tool ............................................................................................................... 1-140

1-140
Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link) ............................................................................................. 1-142

1-142
Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link ...................................................................................... 1-144

1-144
Changing the technology layer of an NE .................................................................................................................... 1-146

1-146
Deleting links ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-148

1-148
Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector .................................................................................................. 1-149

1-149
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Resource Browser window ......................................................................................................................... 1-150
1-150
Opening several Resource Browser windows ........................................................................................................... 1-151

1-151
Defining a default layout ................................................................................................................................................... 1-152

1-152
Clearing the JWS cache on Windows operating systems ...................................................................................... 1-153

1-153
Opening the Find window ................................................................................................................................................ 1-154

1-154
Finding a network resource .............................................................................................................................................. 1-155

1-155
Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser ............................................................................................... 1-156

1-156
Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor ............................................................................................ 1-157

1-157
Locking the WMS desktop GUI ..................................................................................................................................... 1-159

1-159
WMS interfaces and tools
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-161

1-161
WICL ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1-162

1-162
TIL ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-164

1-164
PAI ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-165

1-165
WCE Platform
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-166

1-166
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1-167

1-167
Shadow mechanism ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-169

1-169
2 Fault management
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1
Fault management GUI description
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2-4
Resource Browser ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5

2-5
Alarm display ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-35

2-35
Alarm Manager ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-57

2-57
Historical Fault Browser ................................................................................................................................................... 2-136

2-136
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment monitor .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-138
2-138
OSI State Reporting ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-190

2-190
FM Audit Request ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-194

2-194
Manual FM Audit ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-195

2-195
FM Synchronize ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-196

2-196
Notifications Log Tool ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-197

2-197
Incorrectly provisioned Node B list .............................................................................................................................. 2-203

2-203
Alarm customization
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-204

2-204
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set .......................................................................................................................... 2-205

2-205
Auto-acknowledgement of alarms ................................................................................................................................. 2-207

2-207
Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations ................................................................................................................. 2-208

2-208
Operator annotation on alarm type ................................................................................................................................ 2-210

2-210
Persistent Alarm Manager user preferences ............................................................................................................... 2-212

2-212
Analyzing alarms and faults
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-213

2-213
Opening the UTRAN Service View window ............................................................................................................. 2-215

2-215
Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display ......................................................................................... 2-216

2-216
Configuring alarm severity colors ................................................................................................................................. 2-218

2-218
Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms ................................................................................................... 2-220

2-220
Updating the Alarm List .................................................................................................................................................... 2-223

2-223
Modifying the Alarm List display .................................................................................................................................. 2-224

2-224
Viewing raw alarm details ................................................................................................................................................ 2-225

2-225
Viewing the alarm description with the online help ................................................................................................ 2-226
2-226
Manually clearing an alarm .............................................................................................................................................. 2-228

2-228
Applying alarm severity filters ....................................................................................................................................... 2-229

2-229
Managing advanced alarm filters ................................................................................................................................... 2-230

2-230
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting private advanced alarm filters ....................................................................................................................... 2-233
2-233
Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms ......................................................................................................... 2-234

2-234
Annotating an alarm ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-236

2-236
Navigating from the Alarm Manager to the Equipment Monitor ....................................................................... 2-237
2-237
Managing the alarm stream .............................................................................................................................................. 2-238

2-238
Modifying an alarm rule .................................................................................................................................................... 2-240

2-240
Creating an alarm rule ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-241

2-241
Forwarding an alarm ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-243

2-243
Toggling the audible alarm tone ..................................................................................................................................... 2-245

2-245
Opening the alarm Network Banner ............................................................................................................................. 2-247

2-247
Opening the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window .................................................................................... 2-248

2-248
Managing the Notifications Log ..................................................................................................................................... 2-249

2-249
Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules .................................................................................................... 2-252

2-252
Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only .......................................................................................................... 2-254

2-254
Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation) .................................................................................... 2-256

2-256
Enabling Maintenance Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 2-257

2-257
Disabling Maintenance Mode for an NE ..................................................................................................................... 2-258

2-258
Choosing the Resource Browser graphical view ...................................................................................................... 2-259

2-259
Filtering the display of the technology layers ........................................................................................................... 2-260

2-260
Opening a link continuation icon ................................................................................................................................... 2-261

2-261
Opening an Equipment Monitor window .................................................................................................................... 2-262

2-262
Launching a Diagnose command on a OneBTS ....................................................................................................... 2-264

2-264
Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window ...................................................................................... 2-268

2-268
Finding a component instance from an Equipment Monitor tree view ............................................................ 2-270
2-270
Finding a character string in the displayed components of an Equipment Monitor tree view ................ 2-271
2-271
Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from an RNC- Equipment Monitor

window ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-272
2-272
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor
window ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-273
2-273
Localizing an NE in the Resource Browser from the Equipment Monitor ..................................................... 2-274
2-274
Modifying the shelf level display ................................................................................................................................... 2-275

2-275
Launching a PowerTest / an rxAntennaTest action on a OneBTSCell ............................................................. 2-276

2-276
Launching a cancelSelfSurvey / an inititateSelfSurvey action on a OneBTS GRS object ....................... 2-279

2-279
Opening the OSI State Reporting window ................................................................................................................. 2-282

2-282
Navigating from the OSI State Reporting window to the Equipment Monitor ............................................. 2-283
2-283
Requesting an FM audit ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-284

2-284
Launching a manual FM audit ........................................................................................................................................ 2-285

2-285
Launching an FM Synchronize ....................................................................................................................................... 2-286

2-286
Configuring the server for Sendemail and SendSMS ............................................................................................. 2-288

2-288
Customizing external alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 2-289

2-289
3 Configuration management
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Command Manager
RNC 9771 .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-5
Command Manager overview .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7

3-7
Opening a Command Manager window ........................................................................................................................ 3-18

3-18
Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization ............................................................................................................... 3-19

3-19
Configuration from the Object Editor
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-21

3-21
Object Editor overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-22

3-22
Opening an Object Editor window .................................................................................................................................. 3-30

3-30
Modifying a parameter online ........................................................................................................................................... 3-31

3-31
Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager ............................................................................................ 3-33

3-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing CM XML Export
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-35

3-35
CM XML Export overview ................................................................................................................................................. 3-36

3-36
Configuration from the Sessions Manager
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-40

3-40
Configuration overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-41

3-41
Creating a session ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-47

3-47
Verifying session details ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-53

3-53
Performing actions on a session ........................................................................................................................................ 3-61

3-61
Aborting a session .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-64

3-64
Terminating a session ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-67

3-67
Scheduling a session ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-68

3-68
Interrupting a session ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-70

3-70
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the Resource Browser
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-74

3-74
Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration ..................................................................................... 3-75

3-75
Auditing a MIB ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-77

3-77
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window menu bar .............................................................. 3-81
3-81
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command Manager window ................................................... 3-83
3-83
Canceling a MIB rebuild ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-85

3-85
Rebuilding a MIB ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-87

3-87
Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM cache ................................................................ 3-89
3-89
Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB ....................................................................... 3-91

3-91
Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS .......................................................................................................... 3-96

3-96
Setting Administrative State ............................................................................................................................................... 3-98

3-98
Shutting down an FDDCell .............................................................................................................................................. 3-100

3-100
Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State .......................................................................................................... 3-102

3-102
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting a board or a card ............................................................................................................................................... 3-104
3-104
Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps ......................................................................................................................... 3-107

3-107
Performing a Switchover LP ........................................................................................................................................... 3-108

3-108
Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment ................................................................................................... 3-110

3-110
Resetting a RNC ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-113

3-113
Launching SSH for SR and SAR ................................................................................................................................... 3-115

3-115
Launching SSH for OneBTS ........................................................................................................................................... 3-117

3-117
Creating a CM image for a OneBTS ............................................................................................................................. 3-119

3-119
Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS .......................................................................................................................... 3-122

3-122
Backup RNC .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-125

3-125
Configuration with the Job Scheduler
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-127

3-127
Job scheduler configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 3-128

3-128
Scheduling a job ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-135

3-135
Viewing a scheduled job details ..................................................................................................................................... 3-142

3-142
Viewing pending jobs ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-144

3-144
Managing the scheduled jobs .......................................................................................................................................... 3-147

3-147
Modifying or Rescheduling a job .................................................................................................................................. 3-149

3-149
Deleting a scheduled job ................................................................................................................................................... 3-152

3-152
Aborting a pending job ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-153

3-153
Displaying the scheduled job result .............................................................................................................................. 3-154

3-154
Configuration from the Node B Address GUI
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-156

3-156
Node B address GUI .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-157

3-157
Opening a Node B Address GUI window ................................................................................................................... 3-163

3-163
Displaying Node B site information ............................................................................................................................. 3-164

3-164
Customizing Province and City ...................................................................................................................................... 3-166

3-166
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding Site Name information to a Node B .............................................................................................................. 3-168
3-168
Updating NodeB site information .................................................................................................................................. 3-170

3-170
Unsetting or deleting a Node B site .............................................................................................................................. 3-171

3-171
Exporting site information in HTML format ............................................................................................................. 3-173

3-173
IPv6 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-174

3-174
Network boundary data synchronization activation
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-175

3-175
Network boundary data synchronization activation ................................................................................................ 3-176

3-176
Configuring Network boundary data ............................................................................................................................ 3-183

3-183
Launching the network boundary data synchronization ........................................................................................ 3-184

3-184
Related Feature Activation Procedures & Network Reconfiguration Procedures
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-185

3-185
Reference list ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-186

3-186
Monitoring logical & physical resources
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-187

3-187
Resource monitoring ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-188

3-188
RSSI Monitoring
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-200

3-200
RSSI monitor ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-201

3-201
Monitoring ATM interface status and VPI/VCI occupancy
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-210

3-210
Status and occupancy monitoring .................................................................................................................................. 3-211

3-211
Configuration of RET on OneBTS via WMS
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-218

3-218
Check onebts alarms ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-219

3-219
Download traditional software to OneBTS ................................................................................................................ 3-223

3-223
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download ALD/ACF software to OneBTS ............................................................................................................... 3-235
3-235
Activate traditional software ............................................................................................................................................ 3-246

3-246
Activate ALD/ACF software ........................................................................................................................................... 3-252

3-252
Configuration of RET on iBTS via WMS
Download & Activate ALD/ACF software to Node B ........................................................................................... 3-258

3-258
4 WMS administration and security
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1
Managing users and user permissions
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4-2
User and user permissions .................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4-3
User rights configuration ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-11

4-11
Application management and customization
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18

4-18
Application management and customization ............................................................................................................... 4-19

4-19
Software Repository Manager (SRM)
SRM overview ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-22

4-22
Custom commands
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-26

4-26
Custom command overview ............................................................................................................................................... 4-27

4-27
Managing custom commands ............................................................................................................................................ 4-31

4-31
5 Software administration and security
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1
Software Inventory and Upgrade Session ........................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2
NE software download ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-4

5-4
NE software upgrade ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-17

5-17
AISG upgrade .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18

5-18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Backup and Restore ............................................................................................................................................ 5-31
5-31
Download software patches using the SRM ................................................................................................................. 5-32

5-32
6 Resource Browser and Alarm Manager
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1
Launching a Resource Browser from an external application
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2
Launching the Alarm Manager from an external application
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8

6-8
ALLP
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-11

6-11
ALLP overview ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-12

6-12
Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP ........................................ 6-13
6-13
Establishing communication with the Desktop UI ..................................................................................................... 6-16

6-16
Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop UI ....................................................................... 6-19
6-19
Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin ............................................................................................................ 6-20

6-20
A Document issue history
Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1

A-1
Reissue history .......................................................................................................................................................................... A-2

A-2
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of tables
1 Document changes from Issue 2, August 2015 ........................................................................................... xxxv
1-1 Search Results list description ............................................................................................................................ 1-15
1-2 Find window command button descriptions ................................................................................................. 1-16
1-3 UTRAN service view information .................................................................................................................... 1-22
1-4 File menu .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-34

1-34
1-5 Fault menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-35

1-35
1-6 Configuration menu ............................................................................................................................................... 1-37

1-37
1-7 Performance menu .................................................................................................................................................. 1-39

1-39
1-8 Security menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-39

1-39
1-9 Admin menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-40

1-40
1-10 Window menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-41

1-41
1-11 Help menu .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-41

1-41
1-12 Editing tool description ......................................................................................................................................... 1-52

1-52
1-13 Property tool description ...................................................................................................................................... 1-53
1-14 Network definition toolbar buttons ................................................................................................................... 1-55
1-15 Navigator object commands when open with the Layout Editor .......................................................... 1-62
1-16 Layout Editor menu bar ........................................................................................................................................ 1-64
1-17 Layout Editor NE commands ............................................................................................................................. 1-67
1-18 Layout Editor NE shortcut commands ............................................................................................................ 1-67
1-19 Layout Editor text object commands ............................................................................................................... 1-68
1-20 Layout Editor image commands ........................................................................................................................ 1-68
1-21 Layout Editor group commands ........................................................................................................................ 1-69
1-22 Layout Editor background commands ............................................................................................................ 1-70
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-23 Group NEs - Summary window table columns ............................................................................................ 1-75
1-24 Group NEs - Summary window command buttons .................................................................................... 1-75
1-25 Status and state comparison ................................................................................................................................ 1-82
1-26 Administrative .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-83

1-83
1-27 Operational ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-83

1-83
1-28 Availability ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-84

1-84
1-29 Control ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-85

1-85
1-30 InAccessOperational .............................................................................................................................................. 1-85

1-85
1-31 MIB .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-86

1-86
1-32 CMSync (939x OneBTS only) ........................................................................................................................... 1-86
1-33 OAMLinkAdm ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-86

1-86
1-34 Standby ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-86

1-86
1-35 Unknown .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-87

1-87
1-36 Upgrade ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-87

1-87
1-37 NE associated icons ................................................................................................................................................ 1-88

1-88
1-38 Object associated icons ......................................................................................................................................... 1-88

1-88
1-39 Desktop Master Helpset icon description ....................................................................................................... 1-91
1-40 Desktop Master Helpset tab description ......................................................................................................... 1-92
2-1 Navigator with Resource Browser object menu commands ...................................................................... 2-7
2-2 Resource Browser menu bar ............................................................................................................................... 2-11
2-3 Resource Browser NE object menu commands ........................................................................................... 2-13
2-4 Grid view NE information ................................................................................................................................... 2-18
2-5 NE shortcut object added menu commands .................................................................................................. 2-20
2-6 Link continuation object menu commands .................................................................................................... 2-21
2-7 Group object menu commands ........................................................................................................................... 2-22
2-8 Grid view Group information ............................................................................................................................. 2-23
2-9 Network panel object menu commands .......................................................................................................... 2-23
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-10 Grid view display options .................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2-11 RNS view display options .................................................................................................................................... 2-31
2-12 NE detailed information ....................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2-13 Details of alarm information displayed on NEs ........................................................................................... 2-41
2-14 Node state labels ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-43

2-43
2-15 OSI node state attributes ....................................................................................................................................... 2-44
2-16 OSI node states ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-44

2-44
2-17 OSI node states for NEs not reporting usage state information ............................................................. 2-45
2-18 Mapping NE alarm types to 9353 WMS alarm types ................................................................................ 2-52
2-19 Alarm Manager menu bar .................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-20 Alarm list information ........................................................................................................................................... 2-62

2-62
2-21 Alarm List options pane ....................................................................................................................................... 2-65
2-22 Unsupported characters in the fault codes and help volume fields ....................................................... 2-70
2-23 Unsorted alarm list .................................................................................................................................................. 2-77

2-77
2-24 Unsupported characters in Rule Name field ................................................................................................. 2-93
2-25 Items in the Action pane of the Rule Definition window ......................................................................... 2-93
2-26 Precedence of actions in rules ............................................................................................................................ 2-95
2-27 Inhibit Alarm rule definition settings ............................................................................................................... 2-96
2-28 Delay Alarm rule definition settings ................................................................................................................ 2-97
2-29 Modify Severity rule definition settings ......................................................................................................... 2-98
2-30 Acknowledge Alarms rule definition settings ............................................................................................... 2-99
2-31 Toggling Alarm rule definition settings ........................................................................................................ 2-101
2-32 Threshold Alarm rule definition settings ..................................................................................................... 2-105
2-33 Launch Application rule definition settings ................................................................................................ 2-109
2-34 Unsupported character strings in Address field or Appended Text field .......................................... 2-111
2-35 Fields in emails that are sent when rule conditions are met .................................................................. 2-113
2-36 Fields in short messages that are sent when rule conditions are met ................................................. 2-115
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-37 Alarm Specific tab in Rule Definition window ......................................................................................... 2-118
2-38 NE Specific tab in Rule Definition window ............................................................................................... 2-119
2-39 Problem Specific tab in Rule Definition window ..................................................................................... 2-121
2-40 Probable cause mapping derived from standard X.721 .......................................................................... 2-122
2-41 Alarmed Component tab in Rule Definition window ............................................................................. 2-127
2-42 Attribute value assignments .............................................................................................................................. 2-130
2-43 Predefined Rule Group rules ............................................................................................................................ 2-135
2-44 ALD errors .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-166

2-166
2-45 Non-ALD errors .................................................................................................................................................... 2-170
2-46 Description of the display functions .............................................................................................................. 2-185
3-1 Description of the displayed days ................................................................................................................... 3-131
3-2 Description of the display functions .............................................................................................................. 3-131
4-1 Command set table ................................................................................................................................................. 4-28

4-28
6-1 Configuration information ...................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-2 Alarm manager configuration information ...................................................................................................... 6-8
6-3 System properties to set when starting the Desktop UI ............................................................................ 6-16
6-4 Allowable values for Facility and Args attributes ....................................................................................... 6-21
6-5 Status code ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-23

6-23
A-1 Document changes from Issue 2, August 2015 ............................................................................................. A-2
A-2 Issue 1, January 2015, Reason for reissue ....................................................................................................... A-2
A-3 Issue 0.08, October 2014, Reason for reissue ................................................................................................ A-2
A-4 Issue 0.07, September 2014, Reason for reissue ........................................................................................... A-3
A-5 Issue 0.06, September 2014, Reason for reissue ........................................................................................... A-3
A-6 Issue 0.05, July 2014, Reason for reissue ........................................................................................................ A-4
A-7 Issue 0.04, May 2014, Reason for reissue ....................................................................................................... A-4
A-8 Issue 0.03, March 2014, Reason for reissue ................................................................................................... A-5
A-9 Issue 0.02, January 2014, Reason for reissue ................................................................................................. A-5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-10 Issue 0.01, December 2013, Reason for reissue ............................................................................................ A-6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xix
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
1-1 Login window ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-5

1-5
1-2 NSP window ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-6

1-6
1-3 Layout in view mode in topology view ........................................................................................................... 1-11
1-4 Layout in Edit mode ............................................................................................................................................... 1-12

1-12
1-5 Find window ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
1-6 Layout Selector window ....................................................................................................................................... 1-18
1-7 Fault - Server Hard Limit window .................................................................................................................... 1-19
1-8 Server Hard Limit dialog box ............................................................................................................................. 1-20
1-9 Server Hard Limit - Warning window ............................................................................................................. 1-20
1-10 Alarm display limit ................................................................................................................................................. 1-21

1-21
1-11 UTRAN Service View window .......................................................................................................................... 1-22
1-12 UTRAN Service View, information on item ................................................................................................. 1-25
1-13 UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns ............................................................................................... 1-26
1-14 UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns, information on item ...................................................... 1-27
1-15 9353 WMS GUI ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-32

1-32
1-16 Editing tool icon ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-51

1-51
1-17 Property tool icons .................................................................................................................................................. 1-53

1-53
1-18 Network definition toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 1-54
1-19 9353 WMS window status bar ........................................................................................................................... 1-57
1-20 Layout in Edit mode ............................................................................................................................................... 1-64

1-64
1-21 Group NEs - Options window ............................................................................................................................ 1-71
1-22 Group NEs - Progress window ........................................................................................................................... 1-74
1-23 Group NE - Summary window .......................................................................................................................... 1-76
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxi
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-24 Desktop Master Helpset window ...................................................................................................................... 1-90
1-25 About 9353 WMS ................................................................................................................................................... 1-96
1-26 Login window .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-99

1-99
1-27 NSP window ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-100

1-100
1-28 Exact search example .......................................................................................................................................... 1-108

1-108
1-29 Desktop Master Helpset - Favorites tab ....................................................................................................... 1-109
1-30 Layout Editor .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-114

1-114
1-31 Import Image window ......................................................................................................................................... 1-130
1-32 Background Image window .............................................................................................................................. 1-135
1-33 Edit Link Properties dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 1-144
1-34 Edit NE Properties dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 1-146
1-35 Screen locked ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-159

1-159
1-36 Settings: Screen Lock window ........................................................................................................................ 1-160
1-37 WCE Overview ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-168

1-168
2-1 Resources tab in Navigator .................................................................................................................................... 2-6
2-2 Network tree ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-7

2-7
2-3 Resource Browser window: Topology view .................................................................................................... 2-8
2-4 Resource Browser window: Grid view .............................................................................................................. 2-9
2-5 Resource Browser window: RNS view ........................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6 View selection icons ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2-13
2-7 NE icons ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2-16
2-8 Alarmed NE icon ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2-16
2-9 NE shortcut icon ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2-20
2-10 Link continuation icon .......................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2-11 Loop link icon .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-21

2-21
2-12 Topology view groups ........................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2-13 Technology layer filter .......................................................................................................................................... 2-25

2-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-14 Show/Hide layer check boxes ............................................................................................................................ 2-25
2-15 Grid view display options .................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2-16 NEs sorted by name in RNS view ..................................................................................................................... 2-29
2-17 NEs sorted by severity in RNS view ................................................................................................................ 2-30
2-18 RNS view sort and filter options ....................................................................................................................... 2-31
2-19 Details pane: General tab ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33

2-33
2-20 Alarm monitoring displays .................................................................................................................................. 2-36
2-21 Alarm Color Chooser window ........................................................................................................................... 2-38
2-22 Loss of communication indicator ...................................................................................................................... 2-40
2-23 Node state display ................................................................................................................................................... 2-42

2-42
2-24 Maintenance Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management On ................................... 2-47
2-25 Maintenance Mode icon in pending state ....................................................................................................... 2-48
2-26 Maintenance Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management off ................................... 2-48
2-27 Schedule Maintenance Mode ON window .................................................................................................... 2-49
2-28 Schedule Maintenance Mode OFF window .................................................................................................. 2-51
2-29 Network banner ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-54

2-54
2-30 9353 WMS window status bar ........................................................................................................................... 2-54
2-31 Navigator Resources alarm column ................................................................................................................. 2-55
2-32 Resource Browser alarm indicators .................................................................................................................. 2-55
2-33 Alarm Manager window ....................................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-34 Trouble Ticket information .................................................................................................................................. 2-61
2-35 Alarm List options pane ....................................................................................................................................... 2-66
2-36 Alarm Details - Details tab .................................................................................................................................. 2-67

2-67
2-37 Alarm Details - Additional Text tab ................................................................................................................. 2-68
2-38 Alarm Details - Note on Alarm Type tab ........................................................................................................ 2-69
2-39 Alarm Record Viewer window ........................................................................................................................... 2-72
2-40 Open Window Limit dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 2-73
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxiii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-41 Maximum advance filter dialogs open ............................................................................................................ 2-74
2-42 Sort Alarm List dialog box .................................................................................................................................. 2-76
2-43 Sorted Alarm List showing numbered columns ........................................................................................... 2-78
2-44 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window .................................................................................................. 2-79
2-45 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window - NE Specific tab ............................................................... 2-83
2-46 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window - Problem Specific tab ..................................................... 2-85
2-47 Private Filter Management window ................................................................................................................. 2-87
2-48 Filter name in Alarm Manager Advanced Filtering text field ................................................................. 2-87
2-49 Alarm Stream Management window ............................................................................................................... 2-89
2-50 Alarm stream management .................................................................................................................................. 2-89
2-51 Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window ............................................................................................. 2-91
2-52 Rule Definition window ....................................................................................................................................... 2-92
2-53 Rule Definition window - Inhibit action ......................................................................................................... 2-96
2-54 Rule Definition window - Delay action .......................................................................................................... 2-97
2-55 Rule Definition window - Modify Severity action ..................................................................................... 2-99
2-56 Rule Definition window - Acknowledge action ........................................................................................ 2-100
2-57 Rule Definition window - Toggling action .................................................................................................. 2-102
2-58 Toggling alarm in the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab ................................................................. 2-104
2-59 Rule Definition window - Threshold action ............................................................................................... 2-106
2-60 Threshold alarm in the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab ............................................................... 2-108
2-61 Rule Definition window - Launch Application action ............................................................................ 2-109
2-62 Rule Definition window - Send Email action ............................................................................................. 2-114
2-63 Rule Definition window - Send SMS action .............................................................................................. 2-117
2-64 Rule Definition window - Alarm Specific tab ............................................................................................ 2-118
2-65 Rule Definition window - NE Specific tab .................................................................................................. 2-119
2-66 Short Label Lookup window ............................................................................................................................ 2-120
2-67 Rule Definition window - Problem Specific tab ....................................................................................... 2-121
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-68 Rule Definition window - Alarmed Component tab ................................................................................ 2-127
2-69 Rule Definition window - Action list after adding a configuration file ............................................ 2-129
2-70 Alarm Manager - Correlated alarms sorted by correlation alarm type ............................................. 2-133
2-71 Alarm Correlation Rule Set window ............................................................................................................. 2-134
2-72 Historical Fault Browser .................................................................................................................................... 2-137
2-73 Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370) ...................................................................................... 2-139
2-74 Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9771) ...................................................................................... 2-140
2-75 Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment .................................................................................. 2-141
2-76 Equipment Monitor window for OneBTSEquipment ............................................................................. 2-142
2-77 temperatureCheck Action Window ................................................................................................................ 2-143
2-78 Scan Bus Action Window .................................................................................................................................. 2-144
2-79 Equipment Monitor window with AISG Devices tab ............................................................................. 2-145
2-80 Equipment Monitor window for WCE platform ....................................................................................... 2-146
2-81 Calibrate AISG device ........................................................................................................................................ 2-147

2-147
2-82 Calibrate Action Window - BTSEquipment ............................................................................................... 2-148
2-83 Reset Action Window - BTSEquipment ....................................................................................................... 2-148
2-84 Scan Action Window ........................................................................................................................................... 2-149
2-85 Set TILT Action Window ................................................................................................................................... 2-150
2-86 Set TMA Gain Action Window ....................................................................................................................... 2-151
2-87 Set TMA Mode Action Window ...................................................................................................................... 2-152
2-88 Select AISG device .............................................................................................................................................. 2-153

2-153
2-89 Get Device Data Action Window .................................................................................................................... 2-154
2-90 AISG Device Data ................................................................................................................................................ 2-154

2-154
2-91 Set Device Data Action Window .................................................................................................................... 2-155
2-92 Get Alarm Status Action Window .................................................................................................................. 2-156
2-93 AISG Alarms Code .............................................................................................................................................. 2-156
2-94 Clear Alarm Action Window ............................................................................................................................ 2-157
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxv
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-95 AISG devices tab - OneBTSEquipment ....................................................................................................... 2-157
2-96 Activate AISG Software ..................................................................................................................................... 2-159
2-97 Activate AISG Software Action Window .................................................................................................... 2-160
2-98 Apply AISG ACF ................................................................................................................................................. 2-161
2-99 Apply AISG ACF Action Window ................................................................................................................. 2-161
2-100 Calibrate Action Window - OneBTSEquipment ....................................................................................... 2-162
2-101 Action succeeded .................................................................................................................................................. 2-162

2-162
2-102 Reset Action Window - OneBTSEquipment .............................................................................................. 2-163
2-103 Restart Reference RTWP Self Learning Action Window ...................................................................... 2-164
2-104 LightRadio Outdoor Cabinet ............................................................................................................................ 2-165
2-105 Equipment Monitor, Element relationship .................................................................................................. 2-172
2-106 Equipment Monitor, summary objects .......................................................................................................... 2-173
2-107 Equipment Monitor, information on object alarms .................................................................................. 2-174
2-108 Equipment Monitor, information on object states and statuses ........................................................... 2-174
2-109 Filtering and search options .............................................................................................................................. 2-175
2-110 Equipment Monitor, Filter window ................................................................................................................ 2-176
2-111 Equipment Monitor, detailed filter criteria .................................................................................................. 2-177
2-112 Equipment Monitor, Search window ............................................................................................................. 2-178
2-113 Graphical view of hardware inventory ......................................................................................................... 2-181
2-114 LTE board in a d4U rack .................................................................................................................................... 2-183
2-115 MC-TRX graphical representation ................................................................................................................. 2-184
2-116 RRH and TRDU graphical representation ................................................................................................... 2-184
2-117 Equipment Monitor, information on equipment states and statuses .................................................. 2-185
2-118 Equipment Monitor, Details for <object icon> <object type/object name> pane ......................... 2-187
2-119 Feature activation tab for FDDCell object .................................................................................................. 2-188
2-120 State and status icon meaning .......................................................................................................................... 2-189
2-121 OSI State Reporting window ............................................................................................................................ 2-191

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-122 Notifications Log Tool window ....................................................................................................................... 2-198
2-123 Notifications Log Tool - Advanced Filter window ................................................................................... 2-201
2-124 Notifications Log Tool - Find window ......................................................................................................... 2-202
2-125 Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window ............................................................................................... 2-203
2-126 Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window ........................................................................................... 2-206
2-127 Rule definition window - auto-acknowledge options .............................................................................. 2-207
2-128 Rule Definition window - Alarm forwarding ............................................................................................. 2-208
2-129 Alarm Details ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-209

2-209
2-130 Note on Alarm Type window ........................................................................................................................... 2-210
2-131 Alarm Manager - Note on alarm type ........................................................................................................... 2-211
2-132 Online help of a selected alarm ....................................................................................................................... 2-227
2-133 Alarm Manager - Correlation alarm group ................................................................................................. 2-255
2-134 Diagnose Action Window .................................................................................................................................. 2-264
2-135 Command Manager - Diagnose ....................................................................................................................... 2-266
2-136 Notifications Log Tool - test result ................................................................................................................. 2-267
2-137 PowerTest Action window ................................................................................................................................. 2-276
2-138 rxAntennaTest Action window ........................................................................................................................ 2-277
2-139 initiateSelfSurvey Action window .................................................................................................................. 2-279
2-140 cancelSelfSurvey Action window ................................................................................................................... 2-280
3-1 Command Manager, Current Commands tab .................................................................................................. 3-7
3-2 Command Manager - Filters .................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3-3 Command Manager - Filters ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3-4 Upgrade download RNC software - validation report information ...................................................... 3-12
3-5 BTS software download information ............................................................................................................... 3-13
3-6 Command Manager, Commands History tab ................................................................................................ 3-14
3-7 Wildcards Support Help window ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
3-8 Command Manager - Commands History - Export .................................................................................... 3-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxvii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-9 Command Manager, Errors tab .......................................................................................................................... 3-17
3-10 Command Manager - CM Audit jobs .............................................................................................................. 3-20
3-11 Object Editor window ........................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-12 Object Editor, search in Attributes .................................................................................................................... 3-25
3-13 Object Editor, Search Panel window ............................................................................................................... 3-28
3-14 CM XML Export window .................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3-15 Sessions Manager window - Sessions List pane .......................................................................................... 3-42
3-16 Find for "RNC" in the Sessions List ................................................................................................................ 3-44
3-17 Find for "BTS" in the Sessions List ................................................................................................................. 3-45
3-18 Sessions Manager window - Details pane ...................................................................................................... 3-45
3-19 Create Session window - Workorder(s) selection pane ............................................................................. 3-48
3-20 Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane .......................................................................................... 3-50
3-21 Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab ............................................................................ 3-54
3-22 Creation tab - Creation for <session name> pane - Steps tab ................................................................. 3-56
3-23 Summary & Action tab - Summary for <session name> pane ............................................................... 3-57
3-24 Summary & Action tab - Actions for <session name> pane ................................................................... 3-61
3-25 Sessions Manager - Abort tab - Abort for <session name> ..................................................................... 3-65
3-26 Schedulable Task window from the Create Session ................................................................................... 3-69
3-27 Summary & Action tab - Action for <session name> - Release Nodes window ............................. 3-71
3-28 Audit Action window ............................................................................................................................................. 3-77
3-29 Audit Result window ............................................................................................................................................. 3-79

3-79
3-30 Audit Result Browser ............................................................................................................................................ 3-82

3-82
3-31 Command Manager - Commands History - Logs tab ................................................................................ 3-84
3-32 Reset Action Window ............................................................................................................................................ 3-85

3-85
3-33 Rebuild Action Window ....................................................................................................................................... 3-87
3-34 Synchronize Action window ............................................................................................................................... 3-89
3-35 Equipment Monitor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB Details ............................................................................ 3-92
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 CM Synchronize Action window ...................................................................................................................... 3-93
3-37 Command Manager window - CM Synchronize command .................................................................... 3-94
3-38 Object Editor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB attributes .................................................................................... 3-95
3-39 Enable pre-provisioning Mode Action window ........................................................................................... 3-96
3-40 Set Administrative State Action window - Lock/Unlock ......................................................................... 3-98
3-41 Set administrative State Action window - Shutdown .............................................................................. 3-100
3-42 OAM Link Administrative State Action window ..................................................................................... 3-102
3-43 Reset Hardware Action window ...................................................................................................................... 3-104
3-44 Reset OneBTSEquipment Board Action window ..................................................................................... 3-105
3-45 Switchover LP Action window ........................................................................................................................ 3-108
3-46 Reset BTSEquipment Action window .......................................................................................................... 3-110
3-47 Reset OneBTSEquipment Action window .................................................................................................. 3-111
3-48 Reset RNC Action Window .............................................................................................................................. 3-113
3-49 Launch SSH for a 7750 SR ............................................................................................................................... 3-116
3-50 Lauching SSH for OneBTS ............................................................................................................................... 3-118
3-51 CreateBackupImage Action window ............................................................................................................. 3-119
3-52 Command Manager - CreateBackupImage ................................................................................................. 3-121
3-53 RestoreBackupImage Action window ........................................................................................................... 3-122
3-54 Browser window ................................................................................................................................................... 3-123

3-123
3-55 RNC backup action window ............................................................................................................................. 3-125
3-56 RNC backup confirmation window ............................................................................................................... 3-126
3-57 Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab ................................................................................................... 3-129
3-58 Job Scheduler window - Pending Job tab .................................................................................................... 3-130
3-59 Job Scheduler window - Running Job tab ................................................................................................... 3-132
3-60 Job Scheduler window - Historical Job tab ................................................................................................. 3-133
3-61 Create Schedule window ................................................................................................................................... 3-136
3-62 Scheduled job shown in the Job Scheduler calendar ............................................................................... 3-140
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxix
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-63 Job Scheduler - Pending job tab with the schedules of a unique job ................................................. 3-143
3-64 Job Scheduler window - Pending job tab ..................................................................................................... 3-145
3-65 Job Management - Schedule list Print ........................................................................................................... 3-147
3-66 Job Management - Historical job Export ..................................................................................................... 3-148
3-67 Modify Schedule window .................................................................................................................................. 3-150
3-68 Modify pending job window ............................................................................................................................ 3-151
3-69 Job Result window ............................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3-70 Node B Address GUI window ......................................................................................................................... 3-158
3-71 Node B Address GUI - Show/Hide Columns window ............................................................................ 3-160
3-72 Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows ................................................................................ 3-161
3-73 address.xml file format ....................................................................................................................................... 3-166
3-74 ExternalOMC.csv file ......................................................................................................................................... 3-177

3-177
3-75 param.cfg file ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-179

3-179
3-76 Logical & Physical Resources window ........................................................................................................ 3-189
3-77 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical RNC window ......................................................................... 3-190
3-78 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical RNC (red line) ....................................................................... 3-191
3-79 Logical & Physical Resources - OVSF window ....................................................................................... 3-192
3-80 Logical & Physical Resources - Physical BTS window ......................................................................... 3-193
3-81 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical Node B window .................................................................... 3-194
3-82 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical Node B (red line) .................................................................. 3-195
3-83 Logical & Physical Resources - Common Channel window ................................................................ 3-196
3-84 Logical & Physical Resources - BTS Radio Power window ................................................................ 3-197
3-85 RSSI gathering scheduler panel ...................................................................................................................... 3-202
3-86 RSSI gathering error message .......................................................................................................................... 3-203
3-87 OCNS configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 3-203
3-88 RSSI graphical viewer ........................................................................................................................................ 3-204
3-89 OCNS information ............................................................................................................................................... 3-205

3-205
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-90 RSSI graph .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-206
3-206
3-91 RSSI graph filter ................................................................................................................................................... 3-207

3-207
3-92 Multiple graph configuration ........................................................................................................................... 3-208
3-93 Multiple graph result ........................................................................................................................................... 3-209

3-209
3-94 Interface Monitor (RNC INode selected) ..................................................................................................... 3-211
3-95 Interface Monitor (POC selected) ................................................................................................................... 3-212
3-96 RNC Basic information ...................................................................................................................................... 3-213
3-97 VPI/VCI occupancy table .................................................................................................................................. 3-214
3-98 INode port placement .......................................................................................................................................... 3-215
3-99 OSI state link component information .......................................................................................................... 3-215
3-100 Tool Tip .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-217

3-217
3-101 How to open Alarm window ............................................................................................................................. 3-219
3-102 OSI State Reporting window ............................................................................................................................ 3-220
3-103 Check calls at RNC side ..................................................................................................................................... 3-221
3-104 Check calls on linked FDDCells ..................................................................................................................... 3-222
3-105 Download wizard: Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3-224
3-106 Download wizard: Select the Network Element type .............................................................................. 3-225
3-107 Download wizard: Select the Software type ............................................................................................... 3-226
3-108 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download .................................................................... 3-227
3-109 Download wizard: Select Search Method .................................................................................................... 3-228
3-110 Download wizard: Search Criteria Summary ............................................................................................. 3-229
3-111 Download wizard: Retrieved Node(s) ........................................................................................................... 3-230
3-112 Download wizard: Download Action Require ........................................................................................... 3-231
3-114 Download: Command Manager ...................................................................................................................... 3-233
3-115 Select NE with status DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED ............................................................................ 3-234
3-116 Download wizard: Select the software type ................................................................................................ 3-236

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxi
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-117 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download (ALD software) ................................... 3-237
3-118 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download (ACF software) .................................... 3-238
3-119 Download wizard: Set Search Filter .............................................................................................................. 3-239
3-120 Download wizard: Set RNC filter .................................................................................................................. 3-240
3-121 Download wizard: Retrieved Node(s) ........................................................................................................... 3-241
3-122 Download wizard: Download Action Require ........................................................................................... 3-243
3-124 Download wizard: Validation Summary ...................................................................................................... 3-245
3-125 Activation wizard: Set Passive Version Filter ............................................................................................ 3-247
3-126 Activation wizard: Set RNC filter .................................................................................................................. 3-248
3-127 Activation wizard: Retrieved Node(s) .......................................................................................................... 3-249
3-128 Activation wizard: Search Criteria Summary ............................................................................................ 3-250
3-129 Activation wizard: Command Manager ....................................................................................................... 3-251
3-130 Activation wizard: Retrieved Node(s) .......................................................................................................... 3-254
3-131 Activation wizard: Search Criteria Summary ............................................................................................ 3-256
3-132 Activation wizard: Validation Summary ...................................................................................................... 3-257
3-133 Download Software Wizard: ALD UNA ..................................................................................................... 3-261
3-134 Upgrade message .................................................................................................................................................. 3-261

3-261
3-135 Equipment monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 3-262
4-1 Change password dialog box ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4-2 Configure Disclaimer Text ..................................................................................................................................... 4-5

4-5
4-3 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & Session Manager GUI ...................................................................... 4-8
4-4 Access Control : Network Elements window ................................................................................................. 4-9
4-5 Access Control Group Maintenance window ............................................................................................... 4-10
4-6 User Groups window ............................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4-7 Create User Group: Assign tasks window ...................................................................................................... 4-13
4-8 Edit User Group window ...................................................................................................................................... 4-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-9 Assign users .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-16
4-16
4-10 Custom Commands window ............................................................................................................................... 4-20
4-11 Audible Alarms window ....................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4-12 Software Repository Manager window ........................................................................................................... 4-23
4-13 Delete software delivery tab ................................................................................................................................ 4-23
4-14 Continue deletion .................................................................................................................................................... 4-24

4-24
5-1 Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window ........................................................................................... 5-2
5-2 Download Software Wizard ................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-3 Download Software Wizard - NE selection ..................................................................................................... 5-6
5-4 Select Software Version to Download ............................................................................................................... 5-7
5-5 Download Software Wizard - Software selection .......................................................................................... 5-8
5-6 Download Software Wizard - Select Search Method ................................................................................... 5-9
5-7 Download Software Wizard - Set Active Version Filter ........................................................................... 5-10
5-8 Download Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary .......................................................................... 5-11
5-9 Download Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes ........................................................................................... 5-12
5-10 Download Software Wizard - Download Action Require ........................................................................ 5-13
5-11 Download Software Wizard - NodeB MIB Modification ........................................................................ 5-14
5-13 Download Software Wizard - Download Software Wizard Complete ................................................ 5-15
5-14 Download Software Wizard ................................................................................................................................ 5-18
5-15 Download Software Wizard - Select the Software type ............................................................................ 5-19
5-16 Download Software Wizard - Select Software Version to Download ................................................. 5-20
5-18 Download Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes ........................................................................................... 5-22
5-19 Download Software Wizard - Download Action Require ........................................................................ 5-23
5-21 Download Software Wizard - Download Software Wizard Complete ................................................ 5-25
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxiii
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-22 Activation Software Wizard ................................................................................................................................ 5-26
5-23 Activation Software Wizard - Select the Software type ........................................................................... 5-27
5-24 Activation Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary ......................................................................... 5-28
5-25 Activation Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes ........................................................................................... 5-29
5-26 Activation Software Wizard Completed ......................................................................................................... 5-30
6-1 Parent application launches the Desktop UI with port argument (and optionally hostname) ..... 6-14
6-2 Parent application launches the Desktop without port argument .......................................................... 6-15
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
About this document
About this document
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to describe the Graphical User Interface (GUI)
commands available in the Alcatel-Lucent Wireless Management System (WMS) solution
and how to perform operation using the WMS.
What's new
This is a reissue of Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - User Guide ,
9YZ-04157-0014-PCZZA. This is Issue 3.
The major changes introduced in this issue of the document are described in the following
paragraphs. Changes introduced in prior issues of the document are shown in Appendix
A, “Document issue history”.
Document changes from the previous software release
The document changes from LR14.2.W, Issue 2 are shown in the following table.
Table 1 Document changes from Issue 2, August 2015
Feature/enhancement Description Location

Features
None None None
Document changes
Updated the document with Included the xCCM based “RSSI monitor” (p. 3-201)
the AR: RSSI monitor NodeB’s support in the RSSI
monitor
Intended audience
The audience for this document is network supervision personnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxv
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supported systems
This publication applies to Alcatel-Lucent lightRadio Release 14.2.W (LR14.2.W) system
release.
How to use this document

No specific recommendation applies regarding the way readers should read this
document.
Prerequisites
It is recommended that readers become familiar with the following publications:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Configuration Management,
9YZ-04157-0008-ACZZA.
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Fault Management,
9YZ-04157-0010-ACZZA
Conventions used
Vocabulary conventions
Generic term Refers to

RNC Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network
Controller (9370 RNC)
Alcatel-Lucent 9771 Radio Network
Controller (9771 RNC)
POC MSS-based POC
ESE Alcatel-Lucent 7670 Edge Services Extender
(ESE)
RSP Alcatel-Lucent 7670 Routing Switch Platform
(7670 RSP)
BTS All NodeBs: Alcatel-Lucent 931x Node B,
Alcatel-Lucent 932x Node B, Alcatel-Lucent
933x Node B, and Alcatel-Lucent 939x
OneBTS
OneBTS The Alcatel-Lucent 939x OneBTS
SR Alcatel-Lucent 7710 Service Router (7710 SR)
and Alcatel-Lucent 7750 Service Router (7750
SR)
SAR Alcatel-Lucent 7705 Service Aggregation
Router (7705 SAR)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Generic term Refers to

WMS Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS, 9353 WMS
Typographical conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this document:
Appearance Description
italicized text • File and directory names
• Emphasized information
graphical user interface text Text that is displayed in a graphical user interface or in a
hardware label
variable A value that the user supplies
key name The name of a key on the keyboard
command-syntax Command names that the user types
input text Text that the user types or selects as input to a system
output text Text that a system displays or prints
IP reference, IP number Related document that is referenced in the document
Related information
For information on subjects related to the content of this document, refer to the
documents listed in the following table:
Refer to this document At this location For more information on

Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA http://support.alcatel- List of terms used in
System - Terminology, lucent.com Alcatel-Lucent 9300
3MN-01111-0001-TQZZA W-CDMA documents.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The UMTS Access Network
Management System - lucent.com applications of the OAM
Performance Management performance server, and the
Fundamentals, associated data collected.
9YZ-04157-0067-TQZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxvii
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- System-level security
Management System - lucent.com information, such as: security
Security Fundamentals, fundamentals, security
9YZ-04157-0015-TQZZA implementation, monitoring
and managing security, and
user configuration and
account management.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The Network Services
Management System - User lucent.com Platform (NSP) interface
Configuration and features that provide security
Management, management for the WMS.
9YZ-04157-0017-TCZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- A user-oriented guide for the
Management System - lucent.com Stability Data Analyzer
Stability Data Analyzer User (SDA), a Network Stability
Guide, 9YZ-04157-0066- Analysis tool applicable to
UFZZA Alcatel-Lucent UMTS Access
Network.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The operation and
Management System - lucent.com administration of the
Historical Fault Browser, Historical Fault Browser
9YZ-04157-0059-UFZZA (HFB) and contains
procedures for its use and
maintenance.
OAM CM operational http://support.alcatel- Operational guidelines about
guidelines, lucent.com OAM CM.
UMT/OAM/INF/023960
UTRAN supervision http://support.alcatel- Supervision guidelines about
guidelines, lucent.com UTRAN.
UMT/SYS/INF/007308
Customer Product Overview, http://support.alcatel- Overview of customer
UMT/OAM/INF/0005 lucent.com products.
UTRAN alarm correlation http://support.alcatel- Alarm correlation rules in
rules definition, lucent.com UTRAN.
UMT/SYS/DD/022602
UTRAN Alarm correlation http://support.alcatel- Alarm correlation rules for
rules definition for 939x lucent.com 939x OneBTS
OneBTS, UMT/SYS/DD/
024426
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxxviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The installation and
Provisioning System - lucent.com administration procedures of
Installation and the WPS tool.
Administration Guide,
9YZ-06348-0001-RJZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The user manual of the
Provisioning System - User lucent.com Wireless Provisioning System
Guide for W-CDMA, (WPS) for UMTS Access
9YZ-06348-0005-PCZZA Network.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- A user-oriented guide to
Management System - lucent.com perform the Command Line
Commands Reference Guide Interface (CLI) commands
(WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013- available in the UMTS
RKZZA Network Operating,
Administration, and
Maintenance (OAM) system.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Management System - lucent.com Wireless Management System
Administration Management (9353 WMS) security and
and Security, administration principles.
9YZ-04157-0011-ACZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The procedures for installing
Management System - lucent.com required and optional clients
Workstation Client / and applications on the local
Application Installation, workstation, including NSP
9YZ-04157-0073-RJZZA (Nortel NMS GUI), and
configuring Exceed (X
interface)
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The System Management
Management System - lucent.com (SMG) administration
Administration: System platform for UMTS
Management, operations, administration,
9YZ-04157-0018-PCZZA and maintenance (OAM)
solutions.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The list and description of the
Management System - OAM lucent.com OAM configuration
Parameters Reference Guide, parameters applicable to the
9YZ-04157-0025-RKZZA UMTS Access Network
Elements, and which user can
access using the WMS
application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxxix
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- Parameter references in RAN
Management System - RAN lucent.com Model
Model Parameters Reference
Guide, 9YZ-04157-0020-
RKZZA
Management System - HSxPA lucent.com activate the HSDPA feature
Feature Activation Procedure and EDCH feature (also
(FAP), 9YZ-04157-0031- known as HSUPA) in the
PGZZA OMC, emphasizing the
impact of data filling on the
UTRAN subsystem of a
UMTS system.
Management System - IuPC lucent.com perform the activation
AGPS Location Services operations for the
(FAP), 9YZ-04157-0032- IuPC-AGPS Location
PGZZA Services feature in the OMC,
emphasizing the data fill
impact on the UTRAN
subsystem of the UMTS
system.
Management System - WMS lucent.com perform the Network
Scrambling Code Update Reconfiguration Procedure
(NRP), 9YZ-04157-0052- (NRP) applicable to the
PGZZA update of the Scrambling
Code plan in a UMTS Access
network.
Management System - 93xx lucent.com perform the Network
Node B Addition (NRP), Reconfiguration Procedure
9YZ-04157-0053-PGZZA (NRP) applicable to the
introduction of new Node
B(s) in an UMTS Access
network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xl Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Management System - Node B lucent.com perform the Network
Reparenting (NRP), Reconfiguration Procedure
9YZ-04157-0054-PGZZA (NRP) applicable to
inter-RNC Node B
reparenting in a UMTS
Access network.
Management System - 3G to lucent.com activate the "3G to 2G
2G Handover with or without Handover with or without
Compressed Mode (FAP), Compressed Mode" feature in
9YZ-04157-0033-PGZZA the OMC, emphasizing the
impact of data filling on the
UTRAN subsystem of a
UMTS system.
Management System - lucent.com perform the Network
Neighboring Plan Update Reconfiguration Procedure
PGZZA update of the neighboring
plan in a UMTS Access
network.
Management System - lucent.com activate the OCNS feature in
Orthogonal Channel Noise the OMC, emphasizing the
Simulation (FAP), impact of data filling on the
9YZ-04157-0034-PGZZA UTRAN subsystem of a
UMTS system.
Management System - lucent.com perform the Network
LAC/RAC Plan Update Reconfiguration Procedure
PGZZA update of the LAC/ RAC plan
in a UMTS Access network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xli
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- Node B Capacity Licensing
Management System - lucent.com feature, the usage, the process
Capacity and Feature for implementing the feature,
Licensing, 9YZ-04157-0028- the creation and acquiring of
PGZZA the licenses, the license token
distribution on the NodeBs
and the monitoring and the
modification of the Capacity
Licensing parameters.
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless http://support.alcatel- The procedures used to
Management System - lucent.com implement IuPS over IP
Activation of IuPS over IP, feature and the order in which
9YZ-04157-0035-PGZZA they are used.
Management System - lucent.com implement the hybrid IuB
Activation of Hybrid Iub, feature and the order in which
Management System - lucent.com implement the native IP IuB
Activation of Native IP Iub, feature and the order in which
Management System - lucent.com implement the IuR over IP
Activation of IuR over IP, feature and the order in which
Management System - lucent.com implement the IuCS over IP
Activation of IuCS over IP, feature and the order in which
Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio http://support.alcatel- The preventive and corrective
Network Controller - lucent.com maintenance manual of the
Maintenance Guide, 9370 RNC.
3MN-00507-0002-REZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio http://support.alcatel- The software remote upgrade
Network Controller - Software lucent.com of RNCs using the OAM08.x
Upgrade Procedure Using system release.
OAM LR14.W: Intra Release
Upgrade, 9YZ-04157-0076-
RJZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xlii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio http://support.alcatel- How to perform the software
Network Controller - Software lucent.com upgrade of RNCs using the
Upgrade Procedure Using OAM08.x system release.
OAM LR14.W: Inter Release
Upgrade, 9YZ-04157-0077-
RJZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9300 http://support.alcatel- How to perform a software
W-CDMA Product Family lucent.com upgrade of Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent Node B - NodeBs using the OAM8.1.
Software Upgrade Procedure
Using OAM LR14.W: Inter
Release Upgrade,
9YZ-04157-0078-RJZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 9300 http://support.alcatel- How to perform a software
W-CDMA Product Family lucent.com upgrade of Alcatel-Lucent
Alcatel-Lucent Node B - NodeBs using the V8.1 OAM.
Software Upgrade Procedure
Using OAM LR14.W: Intra
Release Upgrade,
9YZ-04157-0079-RJZZA
Document support
For support in using this or any other Alcatel-Lucent document, contact Alcatel-Lucent at
the following telephone numbers.
From United States
• If you are using a landline, a cellular phone or VoIP, dial this number: 1-888-582-3688
From other countries
• If you are using a cellular phone or VoIP, dial this number: +1-630-224-2485
• If you are using a landline (phone without a plus [+] character), replace the plus sign
with the corresponding exit code. Dial this number: Exit code for the country of
origin: 1-630-224-2485. See the country-specific exit codes listed here.
These numbers apply for document support only. For details about product hardware,
software, and technical support, see the section “Technical support”.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xliii
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xliv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
1 Introduction to 9353 WMS
1
Overview
Purpose
The 9353 WMS is a multi-domain, network management platform. This chapter contains
the following topics:
Contents
The 9353 WMS NSP 1-4

Brief description about NSP 1-5
System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP 1-7
Using the WMS 1-8
Viewing the managed network 1-10
Modifying layouts 1-12
Finding network resources 1-13
Layout Selector 1-17
Overview of UTRAN service view 1-22
9353 WMS GUI 1-30
Introduction 1-31
Graphical User Interface description 1-32
9353 WMS menu bar 1-34
WMS contextual menus 1-43
Edit toolbar 1-51
Status bar 1-57
Navigator window 1-60
Layout Editor 1-61
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
Introduction to 9353 WMS Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local language display setting 1-78

General principles 1-81
9353 WMS Helpset 1-90
Overview of 9353 WMS Helpset 1-90
9353 WMS basic procedures 1-94
About 9353 WMS 1-96
Opening a WMS session 1-98
Defining default GUI lock setting 1-102
Displaying and hiding shortcuts 1-104
Performing actions from shortcuts 1-105
Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset 1-106
Opening the Navigator window 1-110
Opening a Network Layout 1-111
Opening a Layout Editor window 1-113
Opening several Layout Editor windows 1-115
Adding new group icons 1-116
Moving objects within the current view 1-118
Moving objects to different locations 1-119
Automatically grouping NEs 1-120
Resizing rectangle group icons 1-123
Reshaping polygon or linear group icons 1-124
Changing a group icon fill color 1-125
Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern 1-126
Adding new text objects 1-127
Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names 1-128
Changing the font properties of group names or text objects 1-129
Importing a graphic image 1-130
Showing objects in alarmed and unalarmed states 1-131
Duplicating objects 1-132
Creating NE shortcuts 1-133
Creating annotations for a resource 1-134
Setting the background image 1-135
Saving and closing layouts 1-137
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a group for RNS View 1-138

Creating links using the Link Creation tool 1-140
Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link) 1-142
Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link 1-144
Changing the technology layer of an NE 1-146
Deleting links 1-148
Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector 1-149
Opening a Resource Browser window 1-150
Opening several Resource Browser windows 1-151
Defining a default layout 1-152
Clearing the JWS cache on Windows operating systems 1-153
Opening the Find window 1-154
Finding a network resource 1-155
Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser 1-156
Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor 1-157
Locking the WMS desktop GUI 1-159
WMS interfaces and tools 1-161
WICL 1-162
TIL 1-164
PAI 1-165
WCE Platform 1-166
Introduction 1-167
Shadow mechanism 1-169
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9353 WMS NSP.
Contents
Brief description about NSP 1-5

System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP 1-7
Using the WMS 1-8
Viewing the managed network 1-10
Modifying layouts 1-12
Finding network resources 1-13
Layout Selector 1-17
Overview of UTRAN service view 1-22
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Brief description about NSP
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Brief description about NSP

Purpose
The Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS is the solution for network planning, building, operation,
and maintenance. WMS is built on NSP.
To open an NSP session, see “Opening a WMS session” (p. 1-98) procedure.
Figure 1-1 Login window
The Figure 1-2, “NSP window” (p. 1-6) enables to launch and display other applications.
The Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18) enables to open network layouts for
viewing or editing.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Brief description about NSP
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Figure 2-2, “Network tree” (p. 2-7) opens automatically when you open a layout and
shows a hierarchical tree display of the resource groups in the opened layout.
Figure 1-2 NSP window
For an overview of how to use the NSP, see the following:

• “System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP” (p. 1-7)
• “Using the WMS” (p. 1-8)
• “Viewing the managed network” (p. 1-10)
• “Modifying layouts” (p. 1-12)
• “Finding network resources” (p. 1-13)
• “Layout Selector” (p. 1-17)
• “Overview of UTRAN service view” (p. 1-22)
For an overview of the WMS, see Alcatel-Lucent W-CDMA System - Access Network
Management Overview, 9YZ-04157-0003-ACZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP

Operating System
The following 9353 WMS GUI client OSs are supported:
• Windows® Vista
• Windows® 7
• Solaris 10 Update 11
Java versions
Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version up to 1.7.0_51 with 64-bit JAVA SE 5.0 SDK.
Browsers
For a PC workstation, one of the following web browsers is required:
• Mozilla Firefox 28
• Windows® Internet Explorer 11
• Chrome on Windows 7 platform
For more information on installation of 9353 WMS GUI and Main server applications,
see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Workstation Client / Application
Installation, 9YZ-04157-0073-RJZZA.
Languages supported
The following languages are supported:
• Chinese (simplified and traditional)
• English
• Hebrew
• Japanese
• Korean-Hangul
To display languages other than english (listed above), see the required configuration in
“Requirements for displaying languages other than English” (p. 1-79).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Using the WMS
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the WMS

Overview
The WMS is a graphical network management platform that includes the following:
• A “9353 WMS menu bar” (p. 1-34) from which all other applications are launched
• A display area in which these applications open
• A “Status bar” (p. 1-57) that provides:
– A “Management Network Health Indicator” (p. 1-57) to show the alarm states of
the managed network (view mode only)
– A “Message area” (p. 1-58) to show the status of actions you perform in the WMS
window
WMS layout
A layout is a view of all or part of the network managed by the WMS.
Ensure to choose the layout, before performing operations on the network.
Depending on the operations you want to perform from the WMS, you can choose to
view or edit the network layout. In the Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18),
select:
• Edit mode for tasks related to changing the layout, for example grouping NEs, or
adding NEs in a group. For more information, see “9353 WMS basic procedures”
(p. 1-94).
• View mode for:
– Fault management tasks, see “Analyzing alarms and faults” (p. 2-213)
– Configuration tasks, see Chapter 3, “Configuration management”
– Monitoring tasks, see “Monitoring logical & physical resources” (p. 3-187) and
“Monitoring ATM interface status and VPI/VCI occupancy” (p. 3-210)
For more information on the Layout Selector, see “Layout Selector” (p. 1-17).
The WMS GUI displays the layout and menu commands depending on the mode, see
“9353 WMS GUI” (p. 1-30).
Configuration management commands and software administration commands are
available for both the modes.
Only one layout can be opened at a time. To open a layout, see “Opening a Network
Layout” (p. 1-111).
Note: Avoid switching workspaces when using WMS on a Windows PC client. The
WMS window is always displayed on the current workspace, regardless of the
workspace it occupies.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Using the WMS
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Do not create a layout called Default or Creation. Access control
permission settings do not work correctly with layouts named Default or Creation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Viewing the managed network
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing the managed network

Overview
For fault management tasks, open the layout in View mode, see “Opening a Network
Layout” (p. 1-111).
The selected layout determines the group, or set of groups of network resources for which
information is shown in the WMS displays.
In the View mode, WMS displays the following layouts graphically:
• The Resource Browser, (graphical browser) displays the following views:
– Topology view, which provides information on network structure.
This view shows the subgroups, NEs, and links of a selected group in the current
layout as icons on a background map or graphic, see Figure 1-3, “Layout in view
mode in topology view” (p. 1-11) window in topology view.
For detailed information, see Topology view under “Network elements” (p. 2-13).
– Grid view, which shows the subgroups and NEs as icons in selectable sizes.
This view omits network structure information to display a larger number of NEs
and groups in a Resource Browser window. For detailed information, see Grid
view under “Network elements” (p. 2-13).
– RNS view, which shows only RNCs and Node Bs.
This view enables a large number of RNCs and Node Bs to be displayed in a
single view, and provides an overview of the Radio Network Subsystem (RNS).
This view also shows the relation between the RNC and the Node B, where each
cluster consists of one RNC and its related Node Bs. For detailed information, see
RNS view under “Network elements” (p. 2-13).
To open the Resource Browser, see “Opening a Resource Browser window”
(p. 1-150).
To choose the Resource Browser graphical view, see “Choosing the Resource
Browser graphical view” (p. 2-259).
For more information see “Resource Browser” (p. 2-5).
• The Navigator, which is a hierarchical tree display of the groups within the selected
layout that displays alarm summary information at a glance and allows you to quickly
navigate through the hierarchy. This display opens automatically when you open a
layout from the Layout Selector, see Figure 1-3, “Layout in view mode in topology
view” (p. 1-11) window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Viewing the managed network
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-3 Layout in view mode in topology view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Modifying layouts
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying layouts
Overview
To manage layouts, see “Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector” (p. 1-149).
In Edit mode, the 9353 WMS shows:
• the Navigator, which is a hierarchical tree display of the groups within the selected
layout that allows quick navigation through the hierarchy. This display opens
automatically when opening a layout from the Layout Selector. In Edit mode, alarm
summary information is not available.
• the Layout Editor, which looks like the Resource Browser, with the addition of a
toolbar to access the layout editing functions. To open the Layout Editor, see
“Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
The following figure shows both displays.
Figure 1-4 Layout in Edit mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Finding network resources
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Finding network resources

Overview
The Layout Editor is used with the Find utility, which is a search utility for managed
network resources, such as NEs, groups, or text objects in the Resource Browser or
Layout Editor.
This utility is useful for editing layouts, as you use Find to add NEs to groups.
Figure 1-5 Find window
For Find window tasks, see:

• “Opening the Find window” (p. 1-154)
• “Finding a network resource” (p. 1-155)
• “Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser” (p. 1-156)
• “Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor” (p. 1-157)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a description of the Find utility, see:
• “Find window menu bar” (p. 1-14)
• “Search criteria” (p. 1-14)
• “Search Results list” (p. 1-15)
• “Command buttons” (p. 1-16)
• “Status bar” (p. 1-16)
Find window menu bar

The Find window menu bar contains the File menu.
The File menu contains one command: Close. Select this command to exit the Find
window.
Search criteria
The Search Criteria pane is collapsible and can be shown or hidden by toggling the
arrow next to the label Search criteria. Use the Search criteria pane to set the criteria to
search for a network resource. The Search criteria pane includes:
• Search for pane
• Search in pane
• Results pane
• Find button, to launch the search
The Search for pane contains a list from which you select the type of resource to search
for. You can select:
• NE
• Group
• Graphical Text
• Link
To find a link, the link must have an entry in the Annotation tab (to create an
annotation, see “Creating annotations for a resource” (p. 1-134)) and in the Find
window, Annotation must be selected.
• NE Shortcut
• All Resources
To search for a text string, select one or more of the following By types:
• resource type Name
• resource type Local Name
• Annotation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Containing text search facility is based on text matching. It does not support wild
card characters and is not case specific except when searching by local name. Base your
search on text segments. An empty field matches all resources. The list box for this field
displays previously searched text only.
When you search for an NE by Annotation, the search supports only English words. If an
NE annotation contains both English and non-English words, the search operates only on
the English words. The Find operation for non-English words is not supported. For more
information on languages, see “Local language display setting ” (p. 1-78). You can view
annotations in the Resource Browser window, when the Details pane is expanded. For
instructions on how to create an annotation, see “Creating annotations for a resource”
(p. 1-134) procedure.
The Search in pane contains the available list where to search for NEs:
• layout
• group
• NE Store
• All Layouts, which is the only search option if no layout is currently loaded.
Select Includes Subgroups to include all the selected item subgroups in the search.
When a layout is loaded, you can limit the search to the current layout, one of the groups
in the layout, or the NE Store.
The Results pane contains a Limit list. Use this field to select the maximum number of
results you want to display. The menu for this field lists the available limits.
Click Find or press Enter to begin your search after you have set the criteria you want.
Search Results list

The Search Results list displays the matches to your search query. Each match is
displayed as one line of information (see Table 1-1, “Search Results list description”
(p. 1-15)). The Search Results list displays a maximum of 1000 matches to your search
criteria.
Table 1-1 Search Results list description
Column Description
Type (untitled) Shows the icons for the type of resource of each result.
ID Shows the NE identifier for an NE.
Resource Indicates the name of the resource.
Links are not named. For links, the NE end points of the links are
displayed.
Containing Group Shows the group in which the network resource appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-1 Search Results list description (continued)
Column Description
Layout Shows the layout in which the network resource appears.
Text found in Indicates if the matching text string was found in the resource
name or in the annotation.
Command buttons
The bottom of the Find window includes:
• an Open Group/Move To button
• a status bar
Once you have found and highlighted the network resource you want, the button at the
bottom of the window is activated and the label changes to either Move To or Open
Group (see Table 1-2, “Find window command button descriptions” (p. 1-16)).
Table 1-2 Find window command button descriptions
Command button Description

Move to This button is available when you select one or more network
resources that are in the NE Store from the Results list.
The button is only active if the Layout Editor is open.
See “Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor”
(p. 1-157).
Open Group This button is available when the selected item in the Results list
is not from the NE Store. You can only select one group at a time.
Click this button to view the highlighted group in the Resource
Browser.
Status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the Find window displays messages that indicate the status
of your search.
When the mouse cursor rests on the status bar, a tooltip is displayed in yellow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Layout Selector
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layout Selector
Overview
Use the Layout Selector to select a layout, and:
• view it in the Resource Browser window.
When viewing, you can monitor the state of all the network resources in the layout.
• edit it in the Layout Editor window.
When editing, you can organize the network resources into a manageable hierarchy of
groups.
To open a layout, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111) procedure.
Use the Layout Selector to manage layouts (see “Managing network layouts in the
Layout Selector” (p. 1-149) procedure), you can:
• create a layout
• duplicate a layout
• rename a layout
• delete a layout
For a description of the Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18), see:
• “Available Network Layouts list” (p. 1-18)
• “Layout Management pane” (p. 1-18)
• “Command buttons” (p. 1-19)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Layout Selector window
Available Network Layouts list

This list displays all of the available layouts. Use this list to select a layout to view or edit.
You can select one layout as the default layout. The default layout is automatically
opened in a Resource Browser window after you log on. In the Available Network
Layouts list, the default layout name is followed by (default).
See “Defining a default layout” (p. 1-152) procedure.
Layout Management pane

The Layout Management pane is a collapsible pane that you can show and hide by
toggling the arrow beside the Layout Management label. The Layout Management pane
contains the following management functions:
• New
• Duplicate
• Rename
• Delete
The management functions, except for New, are applied to the layout selected in the
Available Network Layouts list. Click New, Duplicate, or Rename to open a dialog box
for the name of the new, duplicated, or renamed layout. Once you have entered a name
and selected OK, the new, duplicated, or renamed layout appears in the Layout Selector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Important! Do not create a layout called Default or Creation. Access control
permission settings do not work correctly with layouts called Default or Creation.
Command buttons
Click one of the following buttons to perform the main actions of the Layout Selector:
• View, which enables to open the layout selected in the “Available Network Layouts
list” (p. 1-18) in the Resource Browser
• Edit, which enables to open the layout selected in the “Available Network Layouts
list” (p. 1-18) in the Layout Editor
• Close, which enables to exit the Layout Selector without loading a layout
• Help, which enables to access this help.
Setting the alarm display limit

The display of a large number of alarms can have a negative impact on performance.
When you open a network layout for the first time, the Figure 1-7, “Fault - Server Hard
Limit window” (p. 1-19) prompts you to set the fault hard limit. The fault hard limit
determines the maximum number of alarms that are loaded into the Alarm Manager.
Figure 1-7 Fault - Server Hard Limit window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the initial Fault-Server Hard Limit dialog box, you can select:
• Cancel to accept the default value of 10,000
• OK to open a second Fault-Server Hard Limit window where you can set the alarm
display limit
Figure 1-8 Server Hard Limit dialog box
Attention: If you accept the default value of 10,000 alarms, when the number of
alarms exceeds 10,000 alarms, no alarms appear. A warning window indicates that
you must increase the limit to more than 10,000 to view alarms.
Figure 1-9 Server Hard Limit - Warning window
To reset the limit of more than 10,000 alarms, you have to re-login. When prompted about
the alarm limit, see Figure 1-8, “Server Hard Limit dialog box” (p. 1-20), click OK, and
then set the limit to a number greater than 10,000 alarms. Also see“Clearing the JWS
cache on Windows operating systems” (p. 1-153).
Limit on alarm display for multiple NEs
If you select to display alarms for multiple NEs, and the number of alarms exceeds 1000,
then a warning message is displayed (see Figure 1-10, “Alarm display limit” (p. 1-21)). If
you click:
• Cancel, no alarms are displayed
• OK, the alarms are displayed
This warning is not displayed if you select only one NE, and that NE has more than 1000
alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-10 Alarm display limit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Overview of UTRAN service view
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview of UTRAN service view

Overview
The UTRAN Service View window enables easy service and status-based monitoring. It
displays the count of objects in bad state, for each group in the current layout. Any change
in the Navigator is reflected in the UTRAN Service View window and is used as a first
alert.
Introduction
The UTRAN Service View window automatically opens after the network layout or
group(s) is displayed in the view mode. For information on the network layout, see
“Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111).
To open the UTRAN Service View window, see “Opening the UTRAN Service View
window” (p. 2-215).
Figure 1-11 UTRAN Service View window
The UTRAN Service View window is described in detail in Table 1-3, “UTRAN service
view information” (p. 1-22).
Table 1-3 UTRAN service view information
Icon Name Description Available by

default
Cell information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-3 UTRAN service view information (continued)

default
Cells Indicates the total number of FDDCells:
• locked cells
• enabled cells
• cells in total outage
• cells in partial outage
• cells with suspended services
• cells with reduced services
• not counted cells, which are cells in not counted states,
temporary states, or in buggy states
Locked cells Indicates the total number of FDDCells that have:
• administrativeState: locked
• availabilityStatus: empty or dependency
• operationalState: disabled
Cells in Total Indicates the number of FDDCells that have: X
Outage • administrativeState: unlocked
• availabilityStatus: failed or dependency
• operationalState: disabled
Cells in Indicates the number of FDDCells that have: X
Partial Outage • administrativeState : unlocked
• availabilityStatus: degraded
• operationalState: enabled
Fully Indicates the count of FDDCells that have: X
Operational • administrativeState: unlocked
Cell Ratio
• availabilityStatus: <empty>
• controlStatus: <empty>
Cells with Indicates the percentage of FDDCells that have:
Suspended • administrativeState: unlocked
Services
• controlStatus: suspended"
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

default
Cells with Indicates the percentage of FDDCells that have:
Reduced • administrativeState: unlocked
Services
• controlStatus: partOfServicesLocked
Note:
In some cases EdchResource and HsdpaResource can have an availablilityStatus with multiple values
("Dependency" + "Offline")
Link information
Link count Indicates the total number of Iux links provisioned in the
group:
• Iub
• Iur
• IuCS
• IuPS
Disabled link Indicates the total number of disabled links in the group. X
count These Iux have operationalStatus: disabled.
Locked link Indicates the total number of locked or shutting down links
count in the group. These Iux have:
• administrativeState: locked or shutting down
Enabled link Indicates the percentage of provisioned interfaces that have:
ratio • administrativeState: unlocked
• controlStatus: <empty>
Alarm information
alarm not Indicates the total number of active unacknowledged alarms
acknowledged in the group
alarm Indicates the total number of active acknowledged alarms in
acknowledged the group
alarm count Indicates the total number active alarms of the highest X
severity in the group
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

default
The most severe alarm count is displayed. Cell color, alarm severity letter, and plus information
are displayed according to this most severe alarm as defined in “Alarm display” (p. 2-35). A white frame
indicates that there are unacknowledged alarms.
Group name
Group name Indicates the name of the group Always
displayed
The UTRAN Service View window enables to highlight new changes, see “Time
bookmark” (p. 1-29). The UTRAN Service View window display is refreshed every 30
seconds. Click Reset to delete all highlighted indications: bold characters turn to normal
character and arrows disappear.
When the mouse cursor remains on a column header, a tooltip is displayed providing
detailed information on the item. See Figure 1-12, “UTRAN Service View, information
on item” (p. 1-25).
Figure 1-12 UTRAN Service View, information on item
UTRAN Service view display modification

To modify the UTRAN Service View window display, see “Modifying the UTRAN
Service View window display” (p. 2-216). The modifications are saved as profile settings.
The UTRAN Service View window always opens with the same settings and display as
last closed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Move the mouse over a column cell header to indicate the icon meaning as shown in
Figure 1-13, “UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns ” (p. 1-26).
To show or hide columns in the table, right-click a column header and select Show/Hide
Columns. In the Figure 1-13, “UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns ” (p. 1-26),
select the columns you want to display, and click OK.
Figure 1-13 UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns
Move the mouse cursor on an item to display a tooltip providing detailed information. See
Figure 1-14, “UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns, information on item”
(p. 1-27).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-14 UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns, information on item
Link count
Actual state changes are used to compute the required counts. The following table details
each object class along with the recovered attributes and their count.
Object class Attributes to State counted as Object counted as

recover
RNC/ administrativeState +1 locked if not +1 link
CsCoreNetworkAc- unlocked
cess operationalState +1 disabled if
disabled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Object class Attributes to State counted as Object counted as

recover
RNC/ administrativeState +1 locked if not +1 link
PsCoreNetworkAc- unlocked
cess operationalState +1 disabled if
disabled
RNC/Node B administrativeState +1 locked if not +1 link
unlocked
RNC/Node controlPortType +1 disabled if both: N/A
B/ControlPort operationalState • controlPortType
ControlPortType = = nodeBCP
nodeBCP • operationalState
= disabled
RNC/ administrativeState +1 locked +1 link
NeighbouringRNC operationalState +1 disabled
RNC/FDDCell administrativeState +1 locked +1 cell
operationalState +1 disabled
Navigation from the UTRAN Service View window

To perform actions from the UTRAN Service View, see “Contextual menus on the
UTRAN Service View” (p. 1-47). For each column corresponding to the cell or link
information, open the Equipment Monitor window of up to five RNCs with the most
severe service degradation.
RNCs are labeled as RNCxxx (y):
• xxx is the name of the RNC
• y is the RNC contribution value for the total value of the column type.
RNCs are ordered by decreasing severity. For both percentage columns, the RNCs with
the lowest percentage are listed by increasing order.
Navigate from the UTRAN Service View window as follows:
• To open an RNC Equipment Monitor window, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor
window” (p. 2-262).
• To open a Resource Browser window, see “Opening a Resource Browser window”
(p. 1-150).
• To open an Alarm Manager window, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing
alarms” (p. 2-220).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 9353 WMS NSP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Time bookmark
The UTRAN Service View window is automatically updated.
At any instance, define a time bookmark, that defines a snapshot of the current alarm and
status summary.
At each new change, since the bookmark, the corresponding cell turns to bold characters
and an ascending or descending arrow is added to indicate the trend from the snapshot
time.
Once all alerts are identified or resolved, click Reset to delete all highlighted indications:
bold characters turn to normal character and arrows disappear.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information about 9353 WMS Graphical User Interface.
Contents
Introduction 1-31
Graphical User Interface description 1-32
9353 WMS menu bar 1-34
WMS contextual menus 1-43
Edit toolbar 1-51
Status bar 1-57
Navigator window 1-60
Layout Editor 1-61
Local language display setting 1-78
General principles 1-81
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Introduction
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
The 9353 WMS GUI contains the following:
• Common windows
• Dedicated network management windows
The network management capabilities of the WMS are built using the 9353 WMS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Graphical User Interface description
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Graphical User Interface description

Overview
Use the 9353 WMS GUI to perform the following actions:
• Navigate large UMTS networks using a point-and-click interface
• Partition the network by geography or technology
• Determine the current operational status of network resources
• Access network management applications
Figure 1-15 9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Graphical User Interface description
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The key elements of the 9353 WMS GUI are:
• The “9353 WMS menu bar” (p. 1-34) and the “WMS contextual menus” (p. 1-43),
which provide a standardized functional grouping of menus based on
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) recommendations.
• The “Edit toolbar” (p. 1-51), only displayed when you choose to edit a network
layout.
• The “Status bar” (p. 1-57), which provides information on active alarms in the
network.
• The “Navigator window” (p. 1-60), which provides a hierarchical view of the network
organized in a Windows Explorer style tree, based on NE groups. The navigator also
provides a summary count of alarms at each level in the network hierarchy.
• The Figure 1-11, “UTRAN Service View window” (p. 1-22), which details alarm and
status counts on radio cells and interfaces.
• The “Layout Editor” (p. 1-61), displayed when you choose to edit a network layout.
• The “Resource Browser” (p. 2-5), displayed when you choose to view a network
layout.
• The “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57), which provides information on active alarms in the
network.
• The “Management Network Health Indicator” (p. 1-57) (lower part of the frame),
which provides a summary of active alarms in the network, and any problems with the
9353 WMS.
The 9353 WMS GUI includes the following features that make it easy to visualize large,
complex UMTS networks:
• Variable-sized nodes. When an NE has an alarm, its icon is enlarged to draw the user
attention to the problem.
• Grouping of NEs so that a number of NEs (for example an RNC and its associated
Node Bs) are shown as a single-group icon. Double-click the group icon to see an
exploded view of all the NEs.
The 9353 WMS provides simple, in-context access to tools for each NE. Right-click an
NE or group icon, to access a pop-up menu. This popup contains both generic tools (such
as the Alarm Manager that provides list-based alarm management), and tools that are
tailored to the NE type (for example, specific Element Management System tools such as
the Equipment Monitor).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS 9353 WMS menu bar
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS menu bar

Overview
Use the 9353 WMS menu bar commands to launch applications or to configure 9353
WMS. The system administrator or applications can add commands to the menu bar or to
the menus. A default set of menu commands is added to the menu bar as part of the basic
9353 WMS window configuration (see Table 1-4, “File menu” (p. 1-34)).
The 9353 WMS application uses the Fault, Configuration, Performance, and Security
(FCPS) menus. These menus do not appear on the 9353 WMS window menu bar unless
applications are installed, which add the required functionality to run the commands. In
addition, you must have the appropriate Access Control permissions to access the FCPS
menu commands.
The 9353 WMS window menu bar commands are explained in the Table 1-4, “File menu”
(p. 1-34). Some of the displayed menu options are only available after you have chosen a
Network Layout and selected a specific NE:
• RNC
• POC
• ESE/RSP
• Node B (931x, 932x, 933x Node B, and 939x OneBTS).
Availability of commands also depends on whether you choose to edit or view the
network layout.
Menu shortcuts are available in the Table 1-4, “File menu” (p. 1-34), to:
• Activate menu shortcuts, see “Displaying and hiding shortcuts” (p. 1-104)
• Perform actions from menu shortcuts, see “Performing actions from shortcuts”
(p. 1-105).
The WMS window menu and sub-menus are described in the tables below:
Table 1-4 File menu
Menu option Description

Select Network Layout Opens the Layout Selector.
Use the Layout Selector window to select
which layout you want to work with.
Close Network Layout Closes the currently open layout and the
Navigator.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-4 File menu (continued)

Find Opens the Find window, a utility for finding
network resources.
Only one instance of the Find utility can be
opened at a time.
Save Network Layout Appears only if you choose Edit in Layout
selector.
Group NEs Appears only if you choose Edit in Layout
Contains the following submenus: selector.
• Options
• Show Summary
Exit Closes the 9353 WMS window.
Table 1-5 Fault menu
Menu option Sub-menu Description

Launch Historical Fault Launches Historical Fault
Browser Browser.
Alarm Correlation Rule Set To activate or deactivate
predefined correlation rules.
Alarm Stream Rule Set To define the content of the
managed alarm stream.
Radio Access Lists all the sub-menus.
FM Audit Request (939x Opens a window to request an
OneBTS and RNC I-node) FM audit.
Manual FM Audit (SR or SAR Opens a window to perform a
selected) manual FM audit.
Incorrectly Provisioned Lists all the Incorrectly
NodeB List (NA for 939x Provisioned NodeBs.
OneBTS)
OSI State Reporting On Lists the OSI State Reports
Whole Layout
Notifications Log Tool Opens the Notifications Log
Tool.
(NE selected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-5 Fault menu (continued)

Open Network Banner Provides alarm counts for all
active alarms at each severity
level in the current layout
(there are no alarm counts for
alarms of unknown severity).
Show Alarms Opens the Alarm Manager,
with alarm details for the
entire layout. You can
acknowledge or clear alarms,
or view details of current
alarms from the Alarm
Manager.
Show Alarms in New Opens the Alarm Manager,
Window with alarm details for the
entire layout, the selected
group, or the selected NE.
You can acknowledge or clear
alarms, or view details of
current alarms. You can open
up to five Alarm Manager
windows.
Manage Audible Alarms Opens the Audible Alarms
Management window used to
manage audible alarms.
Manage Alarm Stream Opens the Alarm Stream
Management window used to
turn alarm stream
management on or off.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-6 Configuration menu

Radio Access Lists all the sub-menus.
Software These menus are used to
• Inventory & Upgrade update or upgrade the WMS
Session application.
• Download
• Activate
Online Neighbouring Opens the Online
Management Neighbouring Management
application.
Job Scheduler Opens a window to schedule
jobs automatically at a
specified time.
Logical & Physical Resources Lists all the Logical and
Physical Resources.
RSSI Monitor Opens the RSSI Monitor
plug-in.
NodeB Address GUI To obtain all Node B related
information.
Set NEs OAM Link To set NEs into an
Administrative State administrative state.
MIB (NA for POC, ESE/RSP, To perform audit related
and 939x OneBTS): tasks.
• Audit (RNC or BTS
selected)
• Audit all BTS (RNC
selected)
• Cancel Reset Online
(RNC selected)
• Rebuild (RNC or BTS
selected)
• View Audit Results
Equipment Monitor (RNC, To view the current
POC, or BTS selected) configurations set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Radio Access Synchronize (POC selected) Performs the synchronize

action.
Backup (939x OneBTS To backup the data from the
selected): WMS application.
• CreateBackupImage
• RestoreBackupImage
CM Synchronize ( 939x Performs the synchronize

OneBTS selected) action for OneBTS
equipments.
TIL (BTS selected, NA for Opens the TIL window for a
939x OneBTS) selected NodeB.
Reset BTSEquipment (BTS Resets the BTSEquipment.
selected, NA for 939x
OneBTS)
Reset OneBTSEquipment Resets the OneBTSEquip-
(939x OneBTS selected) ment.
Reset RNC (RNC selected) Resets the RNC.
RNC Backup (RNC selected) To backup the RNC.
Wireless Internet Command Opens the WICL application
Language (WICL) for command line operations
to be executed.
Sessions Manager Opens the Sessions Manager
window.
Object Editor (RNC, POC, or Opens the Object Editor
BTS selected) window.
CM XML Opens the Object Editor
Contains the following window.
submenus:
• Export NE
• Export NE Grouping
(RNC selected)
• Export Network
Command Manager Opens the Command
Manager window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network Definition Opens the Network Definition

Available in Edit mode only. tool bar, which allows you to
add links.
Preventive Maintenance Launches a diagnostic test on
(939x OneBTS selected) the selected 939x OneBTS.
Contains Diagnose sub-menu

WICL Script Editor Opens the ScripEditor::WICL
window.
Interface Monitor Opens the Interface Monitor
window.
Table 1-7 Performance menu

Radio Access Counter Lists Management Lists the counters available.
Realtime Counter Monitor Opens the counter monitor
window.
Call Trace Wizard for UMTS Opens the Call trace
Configuration Wizard.
Realtime Call Trace Lists the call traces
Table 1-8 Security menu

Change Password Opens the Change Password
dialog box.
When you change a
password, the system shuts
down. You must then reopen
the 9353 WMS window.
This command is also
available from 9353 WMS -
User & Session Manager
GUI.
Configure Disclaimer Text Opens the Configure
Disclaimer Text window,
used to change the Login
Warning text.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-8 Security menu (continued)

Security administration Opens the 9353 WMS - User
& Session Manager GUI to:
• Create and manage users/
user groups/entities/entity
groups/tasks groups
• Manage security
preferences
• Change password
• Manage user sessions, IP
addresses and
sub-networks
AC Group Maintenance Opens the Access Control
Group Maintenance window.
Show Access Control Opens the Access Control
window, which allows an
administrator to define or
change access control
permission settings to
applications for users.
Screen Lock Lock Screen Locks the screen.
Settings Sets the parameters to enable
or disable Automatic Screen
Locking.
Table 1-9 Admin menu

Private Filter Management Opens the Private Filter Management
window used to view and delete all private
alarm filters of user ID(s).
Configure Alarm Colors (no network selected) Configures the alarm severity colors that are
displayed.
All of the layouts must be closed before you
can access the Alarm Color Chooser.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-9 Admin menu (continued)

Configure Applications Opens the Application Management
Configuration GUI used to view and modify
applications and their interfaces.
You must provide the root user password of
the 9353 WMS server.
Monitor Applications Opens the Application Management
Monitoring GUI used to view the current
status of applications and their interfaces.
Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands window, used
to create commands that can be added to 9353
WMS window menu bar.
Table 1-10 Window menu

Close Window Closes the selected window.
Cascade Used to organize window display.
Tile Horizontally Tiles the active window horizontally.
Tile Vertically Tiles the active window vertically.
Tile Maximizes the active window.
<Window Title> Any opened windows is displayed by window
title, used to select a window by its title, which
brings it to the front of the display.
Show UTRAN Service View Displays the UTRAN Service View window on
the front side.
Show Navigator Displays the Navigator window on the front
side.
Table 1-11 Help menu

Help Opens the online help window.
Getting Started Opens the online help window with the getting
started page to help new users to understand
the WMS NSP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-11 Help menu (continued)

Help on Window Opens the online help for the currently active
window.
What's This? Opens the online help for the respective
window the user clicks.
Selected Item Help (only appears after Helps the user to get information on the alarm
selecting an alarm in the Alarm Manager) manager.
About Details about the WMS NSP.
About 9353 WMS Details the load and build information for
WMS NSP.
For NE naming, see “Vocabulary conventions” (p. xxxvi).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS WMS contextual menus
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS contextual menus

Overview
This section describes the contextual menus in the WMS GUI.
For all NE naming conventions, see “Vocabulary conventions” (p. xxxvi).
Contextual menus on the Resource Browser

The following are the contextual menus available on the Resource Browser:
• Equipment Monitor (NA for ESE/RSP, SR, and SAR)
• Show Alarms
• Show Alarms in New Window
• LMT (931x Node B selected)
• 5620 EMS (ESE or RSP selected)
• Telnet on NE (ESE or RSP selected)
• Configuration:
– Logical and Physical Resources (RNC or BTS selected, NA for 939x OneBTS)
– Set NEs' OAM Link Administrative State
– Launch SSH (SR or SAR selected, secure manual mode for OneBTS)
– MIB (NA for POC, ESE/RSP, 939x OneBTS, SR, and SAR), see “Extended
Resource Browser configuration sub-menus” (p. 1-44)
– Object Editor (NA for ESE/RSP, SR, and SAR)
– CM XML, see “Extended Resource Browser configuration sub-menus” (p. 1-44)
– Backup (939x OneBTS selected), see “Extended Resource Browser configuration
sub-menus” (p. 1-44)
– Enable pre-provisioning Mode (939x OneBTS selected)
– Synchronize (POC selected)
– CM Synchronize (939x OneBTS selected)
– TIL (BTS selected and 939x OneBTS)
– Reset BTSEquipment (BTS selected, and 939x OneBTS)
– Reset OneBTSEquipment (939x OneBTS selected)
– RNC Backup (RNC selected)
– Reset RNC (RNC selected)
– Software (RNC or BTS selected), see “Extended Resource Browser configuration
sub-menus” (p. 1-44)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Fault (RNC I-node):
– FM Audit Request (RNC or BTS selected, NA for 939x OneBTS)
– Notifications Log Tool
– Manual FM Audit (SR or SAR selected)
– OSI State Reporting (RNC or BTS selected)
– FM Synchronize (939x OneBTS selected)
• Preventive Maintenance (939x OneBTS selected)
– Diagnose
• Information (ESE or RSP selected)
• Set Maintenance Mode On
• Schedule Maintenance Mode On
• Schedule Maintenance Mode Off
Extended Resource Browser configuration sub-menus

The Resource Browser configuration sub-menus are as follows:
• MIB menu
– Audit (RNC or BTS selected)
– Audit All BTSs (RNC selected)
– Cancel Reset Online (RNC selected)
– Rebuild (RNC or BTS selected)
• CM XML
– Export NE
– Export NE Grouping (RNC selected)
• Backup (939x OneBTS selected):
– CreateBackupImage
– RestoreBackupImage
• Software ( RNC or BTS selected):
– Activate
– Download
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contextual menus on the Equipment Monitor
Select an item from the Graphical Equipment pane and right-click to perform the
following actions:
• Preventive Maintenance (939x OneBTS item selected, item dependent)
– Diagnose (item dependent)
• Follow (Figure 2-105, “Equipment Monitor, Element relationship” (p. 2-172) selected
only)
• Fault
– Notifications Log Tool (BTS item, specific cards selected)
– Show Alarms
– Show Alarms in New Window
– Show Alarms on Whole Subtree
• Find in its group (on specific cards)
• Configuration
– Object Editor
– Set Administrative State (card dependent)
– Reset Board (BTS, specific cards, NA for 939x OneBTS)
– Reset OneBTSEquipment Board (939x OneBTS selected, item dependent)
– Reset Card (RNC or POC object selected)
– Scan (RRH selected)
• Retrieve Associated Lps (CP card on RNC)
Select an object in one of the tree view panes and right-click to perform the following
actions:
• Open RNC Equipment Monitor (RNC selected)
• Open BTS Equipment Monitor (Node B instance selected)
• Open BTS Equipment Monitor in New Window (Node B instance selected)
• Collapse all instances of this class (instance in a summary object selected)
• Configuration
– CM Synchronize (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
• Fault
– FM Synchronize (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– Notifications Log Tool
– Show Alarms in New Window
– Show Alarms
– Show Alarms on Whole Subtree (RNC, BTSEquipment, or OneBTSEquipment
object selected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– OSI State reporting (RNC, BTSEquipment, or OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– FM Audit Request (RNC or BTSEquipment object selected)
• Preventive Maintenance (939x OneBTS selected):
– Diagnose (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– PowerTest (OneBTSCell object selected)
– rxAntennaTest (OneBTSCell object selected)
– cancelSelfSurvey (GRS object selected)
– initiateSelfSurvey (GRS object selected)
• Find BTSEquipment (Node B instance selected in the left-hand tree view)
• Configuration
– Set NEs' OAM Link Administrative State (RNC, BTSEquipment,
OneBTSEquipment, or POC object selected)
– Backup (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– CreateBackupImage
– RestoreBackupImage
– MIB (RNC, BTSEquipment, or OneBTSEquipment object selected), “Equipment
Monitor MIB sub-menus” (p. 1-47)
– Synchronize (POC or RNC I-node object selected)
– Switchover LP (Lp instance on RNC or POC object selected)
– Object Editor
– Logical & Physical Resources
– Interface Monitor
– Reset RNC
– Reset BTSEquipment (BTSEquipment object selected)
– Reset OneBTSEquipment (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– CM Synchronize (OneBTSEquipment object selected)
– TIL (BTSEquipment object selected)
– Set Administrative State (component instance selected in the sub-tree)
• Performance (RNC object or FDDCell object selected)
– Realtime Counter Monitor
• Find in its group (RNC, POC, BTSEquipment, or OneBTSEquipment object selected)
• Retrieve Associated Lps (Card object selected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In one of the Details panes, select one or several rows (to select the whole table, press
Ctrl + A) and right-click to perform the following actions:
• Export the selected attribute names and values
• Copy (alternatively, use the shortcut: press Ctrl + C) the selected attribute names and
values in html format
• Print the selected attribute names and values
Contextual menus on the AISG devices tab
The contextual menus on the AISG devices tab are as follows:
• Reset
• Calibrate
• Scan
• Set TILT
• Set TMA Gain
• Set TMA Mode
• Export
• Copy
• Print
For more information on contextual menus on the AISG devices tab, see Figure 2-79,
“Equipment Monitor window with AISG Devices tab” (p. 2-145).
Equipment Monitor MIB sub-menus

The sub-menus for the Equipment Monitor MIB are as follows:
• Configuration > MIB - right-click on the equipment at the top of the hierarchical tree
and perform the following actions:
– Audit (RNC or BTSEquipment selected)
– Audit all BTSs (RNC selected)
– Rebuild (RNC or BTSEquipment selected)
Contextual menus on the UTRAN Service View

In the UTRAN Service View window, right-click on a row to use the following contextual
menus:
• RNC/RNCxxx (y), to open the RNCxxx Equipment Monitor window
– xxx is the name of the RNC
– y is the RNC contribution value for the total value of the column type
• Show Alarms, to open the Alarm Manager window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Show Alarms in New Window, to open another Alarm Manager window
• Open Group, to open the Resource Browser window
• Open Group in New Window, to open another Resource Browser window
• Export
• Copy
• Print
Double-click a group row in the UTRAN Service View window to open the Resource
Browser window.
Contextual menus on the Command Manager

In the Command Manager window, right-click on a row to use the following contextual
menus:
• Clear (available in Current Commands tab only)
• Export
• Copy
• Print
Contextual menus on the Alarm Manager

In the Alarm Manager window, right-click on a row to use the following contextual
menus:
• Acknowledge
• Unacknowledge
• Manual Alarm Clear
• Open Group
• View Raw Details
• Expand Selected Groups in Current Window
• Expand Selected Groups in New Window
• Equipment Monitor
• Notifications Log Tool
• OSI State Reporting
• Selected Item help
• Create Trouble Ticket (when the Trouble Ticketing application is installed only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contextual menus on the OSI State Reporting
In the OSI State Reporting window, right-click on a row to use the following contextual
menus:
• Export
• Copy
• Print
Contextual menus on the Object Editor

Select a row in the Object Editor window and in the <NE Name> - <Object Name> pane
right-click to use the following contextual menus:
• Select All, to select all the displayed <NE Name> - <Object Name>
• Remove All, to remove all the displayed <NE Name> - <Object Name>
Select a row in the Object Editor window and in the Attribute for <NE Name>/<Object
Name> pane right-click to use the following contextual menus:
• Export
• Copy
• Print
Contextual menus on the Logical and Physical Resources

In the Logical and Physical Resources tab, right-click on a row to use the following
contextual menus:
• Export
• Copy (alternatively press Ctrl + C)
• Print
Contextual menus on the Notifications Log Tool

In the Notifications Log Tool - Notifications List pane, right-click on a row to use the
following contextual menus:
• Detailed Export
• Export
• Copy
• Print
In the Notifications Log Tool - Details pane, right-click on a row to use the following
contextual menus:
• Find
• Export
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Copy
• Print
Contextual menus on the Software Inventory and Upgrade Session

In the Software Inventory and Upgrade Session - Details pane, right-click on a row to
use the following contextual menus:
• Export
• Copy
• Print
• Abort upgrade session
• Fallback (939x OneBTS selected)
Contextual menus on the Audit Result Browser

In the Audit Result Browser window, right-click on a row to use the following contextual
menus:
• View
• Delete
• Save As HTML
• Save As XML
• Export
• Copy
• Print
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Edit toolbar
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Edit toolbar
Overview
The edit toolbar is only displayed if you choose to edit the network layout. For more
details, see “Opening a WMS session” (p. 1-98) procedure.
Description
Use the toolbar icons to select the following tools:
• “Editing tools” (p. 1-51)
• “Property tools” (p. 1-52)
• “Network definition tools” (p. 1-54)
Editing tools
Position the cursor over the tool icon to see the name of the tool (see Figure 1-16,
“Editing tool icon” (p. 1-51)). Use the tools to add graphical objects to your layout ( Table
1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52)).
Editing tools work in two modes:
• Single action: single-click a tool to use it for a single action
• Repeated actions: double-click a tool to use it for repeated actions
When you double-click a tool, a small + appears on the tool icon. The import image tool
does not support double-clicking.
Figure 1-16 Editing tool icon
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-12 Editing tool description
Buttons Tool name Description

Selection While this tool is active, you can:
• select individual or multiple objects (multiple
objects can be selected by shift-clicking objects, or
dragging a bounding box around them)
• right-click to select actions to perform on the
selected object (see “Graphical Editing area”
(p. 1-66))
• move the selected object(s) to another location in the
current window (see “Moving objects within the
current view” (p. 1-118))
(default editing tool for the Layout Editor)
Reshape Enables you to edit the shape of group icons
(see “Resizing rectangle group icons” (p. 1-123) and
“Reshaping polygon or linear group icons”
(p. 1-124) procedures)
Text Enables you to create and edit text objects
(see “Adding new text objects” (p. 1-127) and “Editing
text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names”
(p. 1-128) procedures)
Import Image Enables you to add new image objects to a layout
(see “Importing a graphic image” (p. 1-130) procedure)
Polygon Group Enables you to add new polygon group icons
(see “Adding new group icons” (p. 1-116) procedure)
Rectangle Group Enables you to add new rectangle group icons
Line Group Enables you to add new line group icons
Property tools
Use the property tools (see Figure 1-17, “Property tool icons” (p. 1-53)) to set the no
alarm state fill color for group icons, the fill pattern for polygon group icons, and the font
and color for group names, shortcut labels, and text objects (see Table 1-13, “Property
tool description” (p. 1-53)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-17 Property tool icons
Table 1-13 Property tool description

Fill Color icon Click:
and selector • the Fill Color icon to apply the displayed
color
• the Fill Color selector to pull down a list
of color options for the Fill Color icon,
see “Changing a group icon fill color”
(p. 1-125).
Fill Pattern icon Click:
and selector • the Fill Pattern icon to apply the
displayed pattern to a selected polygon
group icon
• the Fill Pattern selector to pull down a
list of pattern options for the Fill Pattern
icon, see “Changing a polygon group
icon fill pattern” (p. 1-126).
Text Color icon Click:
and selector • the Text Color icon to apply the
displayed color to selected text objects
• the Text Color selector to pull down a
list of color options for the Text Color
icon, see “Changing the font properties
of group names or text objects”
(p. 1-129).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-13 Property tool description (continued)

Font Family The Font Family selector is a menu of the
selector font family options available on your system
that can be applied to text objects, see
“Changing the font properties of group
names or text objects” (p. 1-129).
Font Size The Font Size selector is a menu of the font
selector size options available on your system that
can be applied to text objects, see “Changing
a polygon group icon fill pattern” (p. 1-126).
Bold, and These icons apply to the font family options
Italicize icons available on your system.
Network definition tools

Use the Network Definition toolbar to create and edit connections (and their properties)
between NEs in the Layout Editor. The created links are then visible in the Resource
Browser.
Prerequisites
To use this toolbar:
• a layout must be opened in the Layout Editor, see “Opening a Layout Editor
window” (p. 1-113),
• you must have the appropriate Access Control permissions.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Network Definition to
toggle the Network Definition toolbar on and off.
A link represents a connection between two NEs. A link can represent either a physical
connection, such as a fibre, or a virtual connection, such as voice over IP.
Figure 1-18 Network definition toolbar
Attention: The Network Definition toolbar can be opened in conjunction with the
Layout Editor. When the Layout Editor is open, the Network Definition toolbar
select tool operates in the same manner as the Layout Editor select tool. In addition to
selection operations, it provides moving and nudging functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Table 1-14, “Network definition toolbar buttons” (p. 1-55) Table describes each
button in detail.
Table 1-14 Network definition toolbar buttons
Buttons Definition
Edit mode Select mode
buttons Use this mode to edit the properties of selected
NE(s) or link(s) and navigate through the
Layout Editor
(default mode)
Link creation mode
• Single Link mode:
To use this mode, click the Link Creation
button. To create links between two NEs in
the same group, click and drag from one
NE to another. To create links between
NEs in different groups, click on the
originating NE in one group window, then
click on the terminating NE in the other
group window. Once a link is created, you
return to Select mode.
• Multiple Link mode:
To use this mode, double-click the Link
Creation button. When you enter this
mode, a small + appears in the lower right
corner of the tool.
Use this mode to remain in Link Creation
mode after you have created a link. This
mode allows you to create as many links as
you want.
To exit Multiple Link mode, click the
Select button or press Esc.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-14 Network definition toolbar buttons (continued)
Buttons Definition
Layer Used to select the technology layer on which
selection links created in the Link Creation mode are
menu displayed
The default selection is Optical
The choices available are:
• Optical
• SDH/Sonet
• ATM/FR
• IP
• Circuit Sw
• Wireless
For more information, see “Creating a link
from an NE back to itself (loop link)”
(p. 1-142) (Link Creation mode)
Physicality Allows you to set the lowest physical layer for
check box a link
Select this check box for links that are not
carried on any other technology layer
For more information, see “Creating a link
from an NE back to itself (loop link)”
(p. 1-142) (Link Creation mode)
Save the modifications by selecting Save Network layout in File menu.

When the Network Definition toolbar is activated, the following commands are added to
the Edit menu on the Layout Editor menu bars:
• Delete Link, to delete the currently selected link(s)
• NE Properties, to modify the technology layer that the NE belongs to
• Link Properties, to modify the technology layer that the link belongs to and to
specify whether it is a physical or virtual link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Status bar
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Status bar
Overview
The bottom of the 9353 WMS window is divided into the following areas, see Figure
1-19, “9353 WMS window status bar” (p. 1-57) when you select and open a network
layout in the 9353 WMS window:
• “Management Network Health Indicator” (p. 1-57)
• “NE counter” (p. 1-58)
• “Alarm counts” (p. 1-58)
• “Message area” (p. 1-58)
• “Navigator icon” (p. 1-58)
• “Alarm Stream Management indicator” (p. 1-58)
• “Loss of Communication indicator” (p. 1-58)
• “Stop current audible alarm icon” (p. 1-58)
• “Tooltips” (p. 1-58)
Figure 1-19 9353 WMS window status bar
Management Network Health Indicator

The Management Network Health Indicator indicates the number of active critical alarms
reported by the Light Sysmon. Double-click this icon to launch the System Management
(SMG) GUI, see “PAI” (p. 1-165).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE counter
The NE counter opens when you view a layout. It shows the number of NEs in the layout
and the number of NEs in the network. The counter shows NEs as X/Y, where X is the
number of NEs in the layout and Y is the number of NEs in the network.
Alarm counts
The status bar at the bottom of the 9353 WMS window contains alarm counts for each
alarm severity level for the entire layout in current use. The status bar displays the same
information as the Network Banner. See “Network Banner and status bar alarm
indicators” (p. 2-53) for more information.
Message area
The status bar along the bottom of the 9353 WMS window displays status messages about
the commands and applications launched from the 9353 WMS window menu bar. For
example, the status line indicates whether a command is still processing, or whether a
command is successful or not.
The message area is a collapsible area that can be expanded or collapsed by toggling the
arrow on its right edge. When expanded, the message area displays more than 12 status
messages. The messages in the list are in order of most to least recent.
Navigator icon
Click the Navigator icon to open the Navigator window.
Alarm Stream Management indicator

The alarm stream from the server can be filtered. The Alarm Stream Management
indicator shows if alarm filtering is on or off. For more information, see “Manage the
alarm stream sent from the server” (p. 2-87).
Loss of Communication indicator

The Loss of Communication indicator shows that an NE has become unreachable. For
more information, see “Loss of communication indicator” (p. 2-40).
Stop current audible alarm icon

Click this icon to stop the current audible alarm from sounding.
Tooltips
When the mouse cursor rests on certain items in the status bar or on an area displaying the
time, a tooltip is displayed in yellow.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For time changes, such as Daylight Savings Time (DST), exit from, and then relaunch the
9353 WMS window to refresh the timestamp displayed in tooltips.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Navigator window
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigator window
Overview
The Navigator window opens automatically when you open a layout from the Layout
Selector. The Navigator display depends on if you open a layout for viewing or editing.
The Resources tab is the only tab included in the default Navigator. Other applications
can add tabs.
The Navigator window can be minimized or closed. To reopen the Navigator, see
“Opening the Navigator window” (p. 1-110).
For more details on the Navigator window, see:
• “Navigator with the Layout Editor” (p. 1-61) (Navigator in Edit mode)
• “Navigator with the Resource Browser” (p. 2-5) (Navigator in View mode).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Layout Editor
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Layout Editor
Overview
A network layout is a graphical representation of the managed resources or NEs contained
in the network. You can use different layouts to represent the network using different
grouping schemes (for examples by organization, geographic area, or technology). Each
layout contains all of the NEs in the managed network. Layouts are selected for viewing
or editing using the Layout Selector.
Do not use layouts to partition access to the network. Use Access Control to partition
access to different segments of the network.
A layout presents the managed network as a hierarchy of resource groups:
• at the lowest level are individual resources, such as NEs and links
• at the highest level is the managed network
• in between is a configurable hierarchy of nested groups called the Network tree.
The Network tree is displayed in the Navigator, and the groups are edited in the
Layout Editor window.
For procedures associated with layouts, see “9353 WMS basic procedures” (p. 1-94).
The description of layout tools contains the following topics:
• “Navigator with the Layout Editor” (p. 1-61):
– “Network tree” (p. 1-62)
– “NE store” (p. 1-62)
• “Layout Editor” (p. 1-62)
• “Automatic grouping” (p. 1-70)
• “Annotations” (p. 1-76)
• “Local language display setting ” (p. 1-78)
Navigator with the Layout Editor

The Navigator is a tool for finding information quickly. It automatically opens when you
open a layout from the Layout Selector. The Navigator window display changes
depending on whether the layout is opened in View mode, see Figure 2-1, “Resources tab
in Navigator” (p. 2-6)or in Edit mode, see Figure 1-20, “Layout in Edit mode” (p. 1-64).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Resources tab is the only tab included in the basic Navigator. Other applications can
add tabs. In the Layout Editor, the Resources tab consists of:
• the “Network tree” (p. 1-62)
• the “NE store” (p. 1-62)
Network tree
The Network tree displays the hierarchy of groups and subgroups of your network, see
Figure 2-1, “Resources tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6). Use this column to select a group or
subgroup to display it in a Layout Editor window.
Double-click a group or subgroup to display it in the Layout Editor. If several Layout
Editor windows are open, the top-most instance of the Layout Editor window displays
the selected group, and the window is displayed in front of the other windows.
Shift-double-click a group or subgroup to display it in a new Layout Editor window.
Right-click any group in the Network tree to display a list of object commands, see Table
1-15, “Navigator object commands when open with the Layout Editor” (p. 1-62).
Table 1-15 Navigator object commands when open with the Layout Editor
Command Description
Open Group Open the selected group in a currently open instance of the Layout
Editor
The group is displayed in the top-most instance of the Layout
Editor that is currently open
Open Group in a New Open the selected group in a new instance of the Layout Editor
Window window
Group NEs Open the Group NE Options window for automatic grouping of
NEs
Find Open the Find window
NE store
The NE store is a system group for the NEs that have not yet been placed in a group.
Double-click the NE Store icon in the Navigator to open the Find window. With the Find
window, you can move NEs from the NE Store to a selected group in the Layout Editor
window, see “Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor” (p. 1-157).
When you have selected a layout for editing, you can right-click the NE Store to open the
Find window or the Group NE Options window (see “Automatic grouping” (p. 1-70)).
Layout Editor
Use the Layout Editor to create and edit layouts for viewing with the Resource Browser.
You must have the appropriate Access Control permissions to access the Layout Editor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can use various tools to add and organize groups, move NEs between groups, and
enter textual information to a layout. However, you cannot add NEs and links directly
with the Layout Editor:
• use Find to add NEs from the NE Store to a layout
• use the Network Definition toolbar to add links
You must select a layout, using the Layout Selector, and open the layout Navigator
before you can edit in the Layout Editor window. Existing layouts are opened, and new
layouts are created, with the Layout Selector. When you are editing a layout, anyone
viewing the layout you are editing in a Resource Browser window does not notice any
changes until you save the edited layout.
For a description of:
• the Figure 1-20, “Layout in Edit mode” (p. 1-64), see:
– “Menu bar” (p. 1-64)
– “Graphical Editing area” (p. 1-66)
• the Edit toolbar, see “Edit toolbar” (p. 1-51)
• the Technology layer filter and the Details pane, see the “Resource Browser window”
(p. 2-8) window information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-20 Layout in Edit mode
Menu bar
The content of the Layout Editor menu bar varies depending on the applications installed.
The default menu contains the File, Edit, View, and Go options, see Table 1-16, “Layout
Editor menu bar” (p. 1-64). Installing applications may add menu items.
Table 1-16 Layout Editor menu bar
Menu Menu option Description

File New Window Opens a new Layout Editor window displaying the same group as
the current window
Open Group Opens the currently selected group
Open Group in Opens the currently selected group in a new window
New Window
Close Window Closes the current window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-16 Layout Editor menu bar (continued)

Edit Create Shortcut Creates a shortcut icon to the NE
Duplicate Duplicates the currently selected object(s)
Delete Deletes the currently selected object(s)
Cannot be used to delete links
Opens the Network Definition toolbar to enable the Delete Link
command
Delete Link When a link is selected, deletes the link
Move to Moves the currently selected object or objects to one of the groups
listed in the submenu
Background Opens a window for specifying a background image
image
NE Properties When an NE is selected, allows the editing of properties
Available when the 9353 WMS Configuration > Network
Definition menu is selected
Link Properties When a link is selected, allows the editing of properties
Definition menu is selected
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-16 Layout Editor menu bar (continued)

View Global Settings Contains the following submenus of commands:
• Filter Pane, which toggles display of the technology layer
filter
• Background, which toggles display of the layout background
image
• Highlighting, which toggles display of alarm balloons
• Snap to Grid, which toggles snap to grid when dragging an
object in a Layout Editor window
Filters Contains the following submenus of commands for toggling
display of specific technology layers (similar to technology layer
filter):
• Wireless
• Circuit Sw
• IP
• ATM/FR
• SDH/Sonet
• Optical
Refresh Group Updates the current group with network changes.
Most network changes are immediate. However, a change to a link
requires a refresh. Changes made using the Network Definition
tool (adding, deleting, and editing links or NE properties) are not
immediately propagated to other users and require a refresh to
appear.
Go Open Parent Opens the parent group of the current group
Group
Open Top Group Opens the group at the top of the layout
Graphical Editing area

The Toolbar and object menus add editing functions to the Layout Editor.
You can perform various actions on network objects, by selecting and right-clicking the
object. When you use the Duplicate, Delete, or Move To commands, you can select
multiple objects by clicking Shift, or click and drag a bounding box around the objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Layout Editor adds commands to those available in the Resource Browser. Layout
Editor commands are described below:
• NE commands: right-click any NE icon to display commands available in the Layout
Editor
Table 1-17 Layout Editor NE commands
Command Description
Move To Presents a cascading menu of all other open groups in this layout,
as well as the NE Store.
When you make a selection from this menu, the selected NEs are
removed from the current group and added to the group selected
from the menu. You can move one or more NEs at the same time.
Set Maintenance Mode Sets Maintenance Mode on, if it is currently off.
On Alarms are not displayed when set to on. Maintenance mode does
not necessarily mean that any maintenance is being performed on
the corresponding NEs.
See “Maintenance mode” (p. 2-46).
NE Properties When an NE is selected, allows editing of the properties.
Definition menu is selected.
Create Shortcut Creates a shortcut icon to the original NE.
• NE shortcut commands: right-click any NE shortcut to display commands available

in the Layout Editor
Table 1-18 Layout Editor NE shortcut commands
Command Description
Go to Original NE in Opens the group containing the original NE in the current window.
Current Window The original NE is selected and the window scrolls to display the
NE.
Go to Original NE in New Opens the group containing the original NE in a new Layout
Window Editor window.
The original NE is selected and the window scrolls to display the
NE.
Create Shortcut Creates a shortcut icon to the original NE.
Move To Moves the shortcut icon to another group.
The group that you are moving the icon to must be open in a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-18 Layout Editor NE shortcut commands (continued)
Command Description
Delete Deletes the shortcut icon
Set Maintenance Mode Sets Maintenance Mode on, if it is currently off.
On Alarms are not displayed when set to on. Maintenance mode does
not necessarily mean that any maintenance is being performed on
the corresponding NEs.
See “Maintenance mode” (p. 2-46).
NE Properties When an NE shortcut is selected, allows editing of the properties.
Definition menu is selected.
• Text object commands: right-click a text object to display commands available in the
Layout Editor
Table 1-19 Layout Editor text object commands
Command Description
Duplicate Creates a duplicate of the text object.
Delete Deletes the selected text object from the layout.
Move To Presents a cascading menu of all other open groups in this layout,
as well as the NE Store.
When you select from this menu, the selected text object is
removed from the current group and added to the group selected
from the menu.
• Image commands: right-click an image to display commands available in the Layout

Editor
Table 1-20 Layout Editor image commands
Command Description
Duplicate Creates a duplicate of the image object.
Delete Deletes the selected image object from the
layout.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-20 Layout Editor image commands (continued)
Command Description
Move To Presents a cascading menu of all other open
groups in this layout, as well as the NE Store.
When you select from this menu, the selected
image object is removed from the current
group and added to the group selected from
the menu.
• Group commands: right-click a group to display commands available in the Layout

Editor
Table 1-21 Layout Editor group commands
Command Description
Open Group in New Window Opens the currently selected group.
Find Finds network resources that are placed in the
current layout or in other layouts.
Duplicate Creates a duplicate group with the same shape,
color, name, and so on.
The duplicate group contains no NEs.
Delete Deletes the selected group from the layout
only.
Only empty groups can be deleted.
Move To Presents a cascading menu of all other open
groups in this layout.
When you make a selection from this menu,
the selected group in the display area becomes
a subgroup of the group selected from the
menu.
Group NEs Opens the Group NE Options window.
Use this window to automatically group NEs
in the layout (see “Automatic grouping”
(p. 1-70)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Background commands: right-click the background to display commands available in
the Layout Editor
Table 1-22 Layout Editor background commands
Command Description
Open Parent Group Opens the parent group of the current group.
Refresh Group Updates the current group with network
changes.
Background Image Identifies the Universal Resource Locator
(URL) for background image.
Background Toggles display of the background image
associated with the layout, if any.
Highlighting Displays all objects capable of raising an
alarm (NEs and groups) in grey, with alarm
balloons attached, and NE icons are shown in
their active alarm size.
This is a global action that is applied to all
Layout Editor windows. Highlighting
represents how the object changes when an
alarm is received, not actual alarms.
Snap to Grid When you drag an object in a Layout Editor
window, snaps the object to the nearest grid
position. The grid is preset to 5x5 pixels.
Automatic grouping
Use the automatic grouping feature to quickly organize the NEs in a layout. NEs are
automatically placed into groups based on grouping criteria you define. New groups are
created as required. Use the Group NEs command to open the Group NEs - Options
window. Perform one of the following to display the Group NEs command:
• right-click the NE Store
• right-click groups in the Navigator or in a Layout Editor
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File > Group NEs > Options
Use the Group NEs - Options window (see Figure 1-21, “Group NEs - Options window”
(p. 1-71)) to configure an automatic grouping operation. You can define the grouping
criteria and specify which NEs should be considered for grouping based on those criteria.
See the following sections:
• “Selecting NEs to consider for grouping” (p. 1-72)
• “Defining automatic grouping criteria” (p. 1-73)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Group NEs - Progress window” (p. 1-73)
• “Group NEs - Summary window” (p. 1-74)
See “Automatically grouping NEs” (p. 1-120) for step-by-step instructions.
Figure 1-21 Group NEs - Options window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Selecting NEs to consider for grouping
In the Group NEs - Options window, use the Select NEs to group pane to define which
NEs will be considered for grouping. The available options in the from field depends on
where the Group NE - Options window was opened. The possible from options are:
• NE Store: all NEs in the NE Store are considered for grouping.
• <layout name>: if Include NEs from all subgroups is selected, all NEs in the
specified group, plus all NEs in any sub-groups of the specified group are considered
for grouping.
• <group name>: if Include NEs from all subgroups is not selected, then only NEs in
the specified group are considered for grouping.
Use the Select a parent group under which to group NEs field to determine where
grouped NEs will be placed. The available options depend on where the Group NEs -
Options window was opened. At a minimum, the list contains the layout name. If you
opened the Group NEs - Options window by right-clicking a group, the additional options
are:
• the currently selected groups (where the Group NEs - Options window was opened).
• any parent groups of the currently selected group.
The placement of grouped NEs is also influenced by the selection of one of the Choose
method to group NEs. You can choose to place NEs either:
• first in existing groups with matching criteria under parent group, then in new
groups under the parent group.
• first in existing groups with matching criteria anywhere in the layout, then in new
groups under the parent group.
Select the grouping method depending on how you want to organize your layout and add
new NEs to that layout. If you want to use a fixed hierarchy of groups (for example,
Location > Controller > Type), then select the first radio button and select the hierarchy of
criteria from 1 to 3 in the Grouping criteria fields. If you want more flexibility in placing
groups across a layout, select the second radio button and create groups based on a
criteria. New groups can then be manually moved to the required location.
Selecting the second radio button to search for groups with matching criteria anywhere in
the layout restricts the grouping criteria definition to a value. Grouping criteria fields 2
and 3 are disabled.
For both placement options, the automatic grouping utility first looks for existing groups
with matching criteria. Existing groups that match must have been created by a previous
automatic grouping operation. If no existing groups match the criteria, then a new group
is created for the criteria value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you choose to group using multiple criteria under a parent group, the automatic
grouping utility first searches the parent group (but not subgroups) for existing groups
that match the first grouping criteria. If matches are found, these matching groups are
searched for subgroups that match the second criteria. These subgroups are then searched
for any subgroups that match a third grouping criteria.
Defining automatic grouping criteria
In the Group NEs - Options window, the Group criteria pane contains three lists. Use the
lists to define up to three criteria for an automatic grouping operation. You can select
none in the second and third lists to group using only one or two criteria.
The order of the criteria determines the nesting of new groups. The specified NEs are first
grouped according to the primary criteria in the first list. Then, sub-groups are created
based on the second and third criteria.
The grouping criteria are as follows:
• Controller: NEs are grouped based on their primary controller.
• Location: NEs are grouped based on location value.
• Type: NEs are grouped based on type.
• Device-specified group: NEs are grouped based on a group value specified by their
device adapter.
When you perform a grouping operation, NEs that do not contain the grouping criteria are
not impacted and remain in their current group. That is, NEs that do no have a primary
controller, a location value, or a value specified by their device adapter, are not grouped
during grouping operations that specify these criteria.
Group NEs - Progress window
The Group NEs - Progress window (see Figure 1-22, “Group NEs - Progress window”
(p. 1-74) window) opens when you click Group NEs in the Group NEs - Options window
to initiate an automatic grouping event. You can expand the Group NE Options pane at
the top of the window to display the options used to perform the grouping operation.
Select the black triangle at the left of Group NE Options to expand the window.
The Group NEs - Progress window displays the status of the automatic grouping event as
it progresses. As the automatic grouping progresses, the table in the Group NEs -
Progress window creates one entry for each group that has had at least one NE
transferred to it during the grouping operation. The table contains the following columns:
• New, which indicates whether the group has been created as part of the automatic
grouping.
• Group, which indicates the name of the modified group.
• NEs Added, which indicates the number of NEs that were transferred to the group.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once an automatic grouping is initiated with the selection of Group NEs in the Group NEs
- Options window, the Group NEs - Progress window displays a Stop button. Click Stop
to abort the grouping operation at its current state of completion. Once you make the Stop
request, no additional NEs are grouped. However, NEs you have moved, remain in their
new group.
Closing the Group NEs - Progress window by clicking the close window X in the right
corner of the menu bar does not stop the grouping operation.
Once you click Stop, it takes a few moments for the grouping operation to stop. Once an
automatic grouping is stopped or completed, the Group NEs - Summary window displays
Save Layout, Revert to last saved Layout, and Close buttons. To discard the grouping
results of a stopped automatic grouping, click Revert to last saved Layout.
Figure 1-22 Group NEs - Progress window
Group NEs - Summary window

The Figure 1-23, “Group NE - Summary window” (p. 1-76) window opens once the
grouping is complete or stopped. The Group NEs - Summary windows includes:
• Group NE Options pane, which display the grouping operation options.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Click the arrow to expand the window.
• Summary pane, which summarizes information for each group that has had at least
one NE transferred to it during the grouping operation.
See Table 1-23, “Group NEs - Summary window table columns” (p. 1-75).
• Status pane, which details:
– the number of NEs placed in the number of groups
– the percent of the operation that was completed
– if the results of the grouping operation were saved
The Group NEs - Summary window contains four command buttons detailed Table 1-24,
“Group NEs - Summary window command buttons” (p. 1-75).
The results of the last grouping operation, as displayed in the Group NEs - Summary
window, are kept in memory. To re-open the Group NEs - Summary window and view the
results of the last grouping operation, from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File
> Group NEs > Show Summary.
Table 1-23 Group NEs - Summary window table columns
Column name Description

New Indicates if the group has been created as a result of the automatic
grouping.
Group Indicates the name of the modified group.
NEs Added Indicates the number of NEs that have been transferred to the
group.
Table 1-24 Group NEs - Summary window command buttons

Open Group Opens the group currently selected in the table in a Layout Editor
window.
Save Layout Saves all changes made to the layout.
Performs the same function as the Save Network Layout command
in the File menu.
All editing changes made before and after the automatic grouping
are saved.
Revert to last saved Discards the results of the grouping operation by closing the
Layout current layout without saving and then reopening the layout.
All associated layout windows and the Group NEs - Summary
window close.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-24 Group NEs - Summary window command buttons (continued)

Close Closes the Group NEs - Summary window.
Figure 1-23 Group NE - Summary window
Annotations
You can create descriptive annotations for a resource. Annotations appear in the
Annotations tab in the Details pane of the Resource Browser and Layout Editor. In the
Layout Editor text field is editable.
See “Creating annotations for a resource” (p. 1-134).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See also “Local language display setting ” (p. 1-78).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Local language display setting
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local language display setting

Overview
Following is a description of how the languages appear in each of the 9353 WMS
windows. For languages supported, see “System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP”
(p. 1-7).
Only English is supported in Layout Editor, Resource Browser, Find, and Alarm
Manager windows. Following are the ways to view local name in these windows.
Local name display in all views of the Resource Browser and in the Layout Editor
If the NE has a valid local NE name, it is displayed in the following places in the
Resource Browser and Layout Editor windows:
• Below the NE icons in the Layout Editor.
• In the Topology view and in the large and medium size grid views of the Resource
Browser.
• In tooltips: Iif you move the mouse cursor over the NE icon, a multi-line tooltip is
displayed containing the English name and the local name for the NE. If the NE does
not have a local name, the tooltip contains only the English name. These tooltips are
not directly displayed for the icons in the network panel of the RNS view of the
Resource Browser. However, if you rest the mouse cursor over an item in the RNS
view, the In Focus field provides a summary of the NE information, including the NE
name or Local name if applicable, the Total Alarm Count, and whether Maintenance
Mode is on or off.
• In the Details pane -General tab : If the NE local name attribute is configured with a
non-zero-length local name, the local name is displayed in the Local Name field. In
addition, if the tooltip for the local name is enabled, then a tooltip is displayed when
you move the mouse cursor over the Local Name label. If, however, the NE local
name attribute is configured with a zero-length local name, then the Local Name field
is empty, and the tooltip is turned off.
Local name display in the Find window

In the Find window (to open the Find window, see “Opening the Find window”
(p. 1-154)), select Local Name to search for NEs by local name. You can enter a
maximum of 256 characters in the Containing Text field.
If you select Name only, the search is performed on the English name. If both Name and
Local Name are selected, then both English and name in the local language are searched.
The results for Local Name searches are displayed in the Search Results table, and the
local name attribute for each item in the table is displayed in the NE Local Name column.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local name display in the Alarm Manager window
If the NE has a valid local NE name, it is displayed in the following places in the Alarm
Manager window:
• In the NE Name column of the Alarm List.
• In tooltips: if you move the mouse cursor over the name in the NE Name column, a
multi-line tooltip is displayed containing the English name and the local name for the
NE. If the NE does not have a local name, the tooltip contains only the English name.
• In the Alarm Details pane -Details tab: if the NE local name attribute is configured
with a non-zero-length local name, the local name is displayed in the Local NE Name
field. In addition, if the tooltip for the local name is enabled, then a tooltip is
displayed when you move the mouse cursor over the Local NE Name label. If,
however, the NE local name attribute is configured with a zero-length local name,
then the Local NE Name field is empty, and the tooltip is turned off.
Requirements for displaying languages other than English

To display language other than English, the NE attribute for local name must be
configured in the data model of the NE. If it is not configured, then English is displayed.
The local name must not contain the following:
• non-printable characters
• non-visible characters
• carriage return and line feed
In addition, to display and sort language other than English for the NE local name, you
must configure the local settings in the 9353 WMS GUI client operating system.
To display the special characters for languages other than English in the 9353 WMS
window, configure the 9353 WMS GUI client operating system as follows:
• For, Windows Vista and Windows 7 set the default language in the Regional and
Language Options window, and restart the system.
• For the Solaris 10 systems connected through Exceed: before you log in, choose the
appropriate session language that supports Unicode characters.
Limitations for local name display

• The special writing features of certain languages depend on the OS and on the JRE.
For example, Hebrew should be displayed from right to left, except for numbers and
embedded English text, which are displayed from left to right. Right-to-left display is
not supported in the 9353 WMS GUI.
• For changes to local names, you must refresh the appropriate 9353 WMS application
by closing and reopening the window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• NE shortcuts are not supported for NE names for languages other than English.
• Find window does not support searching of annotations in languages other than
English.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS General principles
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General principles
Overview
In the 9353 WMS GUI, RNC, all kinds of BTS, POC, ESE, RSP, SR, and SAR NEs are
represented by squares, referred to as managed objects. Each object is marked with
illustrations and icons to show:
• states and statuses
• alarms
The illustrations and icons are continuously updated to give real-time information.
In the Resource Browser and Equipment Monitor windows, when:
• up to two states and/or statuses apply to an object, the corresponding icons are
displayed.
For the meaning of the icons, see “State display” (p. 1-81).
• more than two states and/or statuses apply to an object, an Information indicator (
) replaces the icons.
Click the Information indicator to display the object state and/or status information, see
Figure 2-108, “Equipment Monitor, information on object states and statuses”
(p. 2-174) and Figure 2-117, “Equipment Monitor, information on equipment states and
statuses” (p. 2-185).
Once the information on the object states and statuses has been displayed the Information
indicator background color changes from white to transparent. As soon as there is a
change in the object state and/or status information the Information indicator
background color comes back to white.
State display
The 9353 WMS provides an interface that uses illustrations to show changes in equipment
statuses/states and alarms.
The illustrations are the following:
• basic representations for NEs, links, and cards
• variable visual parameters for links and groups (thickness, line style, color, pattern)
• sets of decorations (icons, labels, balloons)
States and statuses are reflected both in the drawing base of the object and with icons.
Primary and secondary OSI states are displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A primary state is a set that includes the following states:
• Table 1-26, “Administrative” (p. 1-83)
• Table 1-27, “Operational” (p. 1-83)
• usage
Note that in the Resource Browser window - Details pane, the operational state for the
RNC is not refreshed; do not rely on its value.
For both BTSEquipment/OneBTSEquipment and RNC, the administrative state is always
set to Unlock. The usage state is not managed and set to Idle, while the operational state is
significant and can be updated.
The secondary OSI state groups are:
• Table 1-28, “Availability” (p. 1-84)
• Table 1-29, “Control” (p. 1-85)
• Table 1-30, “InAccessOperational” (p. 1-85)
• Table 1-31, “MIB” (p. 1-86)
• Table 1-33, “OAMLinkAdm” (p. 1-86)
• Table 1-34, “Standby” (p. 1-86)
• Table 1-35, “Unknown” (p. 1-87)
• Table 1-36, “Upgrade” (p. 1-87)
Whether or not an OSI status applies to an object depends on the state of the object:
• Out Of Service (OOS):
– Operational: Disabled, Administrative: Locked
– Operational: Disabled, Administrative: Unlocked
• In Service, Carrying No Traffic (NT):
– Operational: Enabled, Administrative: Locked
• In Service, Carrying Traffic (CT):
– Operational: Enabled, Administrative: Unlocked
The Table 1-25, “Status and state comparison” (p. 1-82) table shows the applicability of
OSI statuses with respect to the object state.
Table 1-25 Status and state comparison
When Applicable
Status name OOS NT CT
Availability status
Degraded X X
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-25 Status and state comparison (continued)
When Applicable
Status name OOS NT CT
Degraded (sleepy cell X
cause)
Failed X
Intest X X X
LogFull X X X
NotInstalled X
OffDuty X X
PowerOff X
Control status
Reserved for test X X X
Subject to test X X
The following tables show a summary of the graphical representations the 9353 WMS
uses. Each table represents a state category, its available statuses, and applicable icons.
Table 1-26 Administrative
State Type Icon Displayed

Locked
Unlocked none
Shutting down
Table 1-27 Operational

Disabled
Disabled,
(Administrative: locked)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-27 Operational (continued)

Disabled,
(Administrative: unlocked)
Enabled none
Enabled
(Administrative: locked)
Enabled
(Administrative: unlocked)
Table 1-28 Availability

Idle none
Degraded
Degraded (sleepy cell cause)
Dependency
Failed
Intest
logFull
notInstalled
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-28 Availability (continued)

offDuty
offLine
powerOff
Notes:
1. Sleepy cells are cells that are in "unlocked / enabled" state but not carrying any traffic.
2. Sleepy cell icon is shown when FDDCell availabilityStatus = "degraded" and FDDCell
rncAvailabilityStatus = "<empty>".
3. For detailed information on sleepy cell icon and sleepy cells detection, see UTRAN
Supervision guidelines, UMT/SYS/INF/007308.
Table 1-29 Control

Idle none
partOfServiceLocked
reservedForTest
subjectToTest
Suspended
Table 1-30 InAccessOperational

Disabled
Enabled none
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-31 MIB

notBuild
updateInProgress
waitingForActivation
failed none
builtNotUpToDate
resetRequested
resetRunning
inconsistency
waitingForActivation
Table 1-32 CMSync (939x OneBTS only)

*_failed
*_in_progress
others none
Table 1-33 OAMLinkAdm

locked
unlocked none
Table 1-34 Standby

coldStandby
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-34 Standby (continued)

hotStandby
Table 1-35 Unknown

false none
true
Table 1-36 Upgrade

ACTIVATION_IN_PROGRESS
DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED/performed
DOWNLOAD_IN_PROGRESS/inProgress
DOWNLOAD_REQUESTED
FALLBACK_IN_PROGRESS
PROBATIVE
INSTALLATION_IN_PROGRESS
Object icons
In the GUI, associated icons spot the object types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For information on NE naming in this document, see “Vocabulary conventions”
(p. xxxvi).
Table 1-37 NE associated icons
NE Associated icon
BTS
RNC
POC
ESE
RSP
SR
SAR
Table 1-38 Object associated icons
RAN object Associated icon

BTSEquipment
OneBTSEquipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-38 Object associated icons (continued)
RAN object Associated icon

RNC
POC
ESE/RSP
SR
SAR
physical object
logical object
summary object
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Overview of 9353 WMS Helpset
9353 WMS Helpset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS Helpset
Overview of 9353 WMS Helpset

About 9353 WMS Helpset
The 9353 WMS has a configurable web-based help system that contains a set of
publications on NEs.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Help > Help to open the Desktop Master
Helpset window.
Figure 1-24 Desktop Master Helpset window
Note: The above figure shows an example of a wildcard search with "manage".
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS Helpset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Desktop Master Helpset window includes:
• Table 1-39, “Desktop Master Helpset icon description” (p. 1-91), which enable to
perform the following actions:
– navigate through the pages previously displayed in the right-pane,
– print and setup the print of the page currently displayed in the right-pane,
– add a search result page in the Favorites folder.
• Table 1-40, “Desktop Master Helpset tab description” (p. 1-92), which enable to
perform actions and display the results in the left-pane.
For detailed information on actions, see “Performing actions from the Desktop Master
Helpset” (p. 1-106).
• a right-pane, which displays the result of the item selected in the left-pane.
You can click:
• the left-oriented arrow to display the right-pane only.
• the right-oriented arrow to display the left-pane only.
Table 1-39 Desktop Master Helpset icon description
Icon Name Description

Previous Page Enables to navigate to the previous search result.
Next Page Enables to navigate through the next search result.
Print Enables to print the search result displayed in the right pane.
Page Setup Enables to configure the printing page setup.
Add to Enables to perform both of the following actions on the page

Favorites displayed in the right-pane: Favorites tab.
• store the page in the <home_directory>/.JavaHelp/
favorites.xml file.
• add the page in the list of favorites in the Favorites tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS Helpset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-40 Desktop Master Helpset tab description
Tab Name Description

Table Of Enables to navigate through all the documentation.
Contents
Exact Search The results of this fast search are the exact text string occurrences
only.
The exact search can be used on any text string.
For an example, see Figure 1-28, “Exact search example”
(p. 1-108) for "alarm correlation".
Favorites Enables to view in the right-pane any page previously stored with
Add to Favorites.
Favorites are stored in the <home_directory>/.JavaHelp/
favorites.xml file and available as last saved each time the
Desktop Master Helpset is launched.
Wildcard Search The results of this search are all the text string occurrences,
whether it is a word or part of a word.
The wildcard search can be used on any text string, which includes
English characters or numbers in a single string only (a multiple
keyword search is not supported). The string must include more
than one character. If both of these conditions are not met, nothing
is returned.
For an example, see Figure 1-24, “Desktop Master Helpset
window” (p. 1-90) for "manage".
For detailed information on how to perform actions from the Desktop Master Helpset,
see “Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset” (p. 1-106) procedure.
A new search starts only once the previous search is finished. It is recommended to wait
for the current search to be finished before launching a new search. Note that during the
search, the cursor appears as:
• a busy cursor when it is inside the left pane of the search window only,
• a normal cursor anywhere else.
Attention: Search use efficiency
The wildcard search is not as fast as an exact search. The duration depends on the help
file amount included in the result and on the server performance.
Note that the wildcard search cannot be stopped or cancelled once launched, even if
the online help window is closed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9353 WMS Helpset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For a better performance, the search result limits the number of matched items to a
maximum of 10000. When the matched item number reaches this limit, the 100000
first matched items are returned only. For the matched help files, the first 100 hit
items in one html file are highlighted only.
A single 9353 WMS server supports only two search operations executed concurrently.
When the limit is reached, the subsequent search actions are not executed and the
originator users get a busy message until the number of concurrent search threads
decreases.
Contextual online help is available for alarms, see “Viewing the alarm description with
the online help” (p. 2-226).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the 9353 WMS basic procedures.
Contents
About 9353 WMS 1-96

Opening a WMS session 1-98
Defining default GUI lock setting 1-102
Displaying and hiding shortcuts 1-104
Performing actions from shortcuts 1-105
Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset 1-106
Opening the Navigator window 1-110
Opening a Network Layout 1-111
Opening a Layout Editor window 1-113
Opening several Layout Editor windows 1-115
Adding new group icons 1-116
Moving objects within the current view 1-118
Moving objects to different locations 1-119
Automatically grouping NEs 1-120
Resizing rectangle group icons 1-123
Reshaping polygon or linear group icons 1-124
Changing a group icon fill color 1-125
Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern 1-126
Adding new text objects 1-127
Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names 1-128
Changing the font properties of group names or text objects 1-129
Importing a graphic image 1-130
Showing objects in alarmed and unalarmed states 1-131
Duplicating objects 1-132
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating NE shortcuts 1-133

Creating annotations for a resource 1-134
Setting the background image 1-135
Saving and closing layouts 1-137
Creating a group for RNS View 1-138
Creating links using the Link Creation tool 1-140
Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link) 1-142
Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link 1-144
Changing the technology layer of an NE 1-146
Deleting links 1-148
Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector 1-149
Opening a Resource Browser window 1-150
Opening several Resource Browser windows 1-151
Defining a default layout 1-152
Clearing the JWS cache on Windows operating systems 1-153
Opening the Find window 1-154
Finding a network resource 1-155
Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser 1-156
Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor 1-157
Locking the WMS desktop GUI 1-159
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS About 9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
About 9353 WMS

Overview
The About 9353 WMS sub-menu is available under the Help menu in the 9353 WMS
window. This sub-menu provides the load and build information for the WMS NSP.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Help > About 9353 WMS.
Result: The Figure 1-25, “About 9353 WMS” (p. 1-96) appears. This window lists the
details of the load and build information for the WMS NSP.
Figure 1-25 About 9353 WMS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 The “About 9353 WMS” (p. 1-96) also displays the following unexpected product errors:
product ISCDHCPV6: package ALdhcpv6 expected version: 10, actual
version: 4.2.3-P1
product CONVERTER: package NNconvert expected version: L_CONVERTERTOOL_
V09D1.0_E07.0, actual version: L_CONVERTERTOOL_V09D1.1_E01.1
Note: These two product errors are expected and must be ignored as they do not have
any impact on the WMS NSP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS About 9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to exit from the About 9353 WMS sub-menu.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a WMS session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a WMS session

Overview
This section describes the procedure to open a WMS session.
Prerequisites
The prerequisites for launching a WMS session are as follows:
• Ensure to meet the “System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP” (p. 1-7)
• Locate the URL for the WMS GUI
• Install and run the main server applications
• Check if the access network OAM is operational
• Activate the NEs in the running view
Attention: Troubleshooting
If the WMS GUI fails to respond correctly while using the WMS application, the
cause may be related to a client-server communication failure. If a firewall or network
failure occurs, a socket failure message appears in the Java console traces.
If the problem is related to a socket failure, close the WMS application GUI and
launch a new session.
Procedure
To launch the WMS GUI, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In a web browser, enter the WMS URL:

http://<server host name>:8080/NSP/
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click LAUNCH.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The WMS login window appears as shown in Figure 1-1, “Login window”
(p. 1-5).
Figure 1-26 Login window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the User ID and Password. Click Login.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The NSP window appears as shown in Figure 1-2, “NSP window” (p. 1-6) and
the 9353 WMS session opens.
Figure 1-27 NSP window
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Citrix client installation

As a part of java 1.7_51 alignment, the NGSEC certificates have to be downloaded.
To download a certificate during client installation, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Download the NGSEC certificates from the NSP GUI launch and Sysmon GUI launch
page.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the Java configuration panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Press Windows+R to open the Run dialog.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Type javaws –viewer and press Enter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Import the Alcatel-Lucent certificate as signer CA (downloaded from NSP GUI launch
page).
Note: This step has to be performed once.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Import the NGSEC certificate as Secure Site and Signer CA (downloaded from Sysmon
GUI launch page).
Note: This step has to be performed for each WMS server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Add the NGSEC URL in the exception site list of the Java control panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 For each Citrix client, repeat steps 1 to 5.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Defining default GUI lock setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Defining default GUI lock setting

Overview
After you install the WMS application, the system uses the default GUI lock setting. The
default GUI setting locks the GUI for a system idle-time of 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
The Administrator, can define the default GUI lock setting, such as enable or disable GUI
lock and set default system idle-time, and apply this setting to all the users.
Before you begin

The GUI lock must be disabled for all the users.
Procedure
Perform the following steps to define the default GUI lock setting:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a new configuration file, defaultLockScreen.cfg in the /opt/nortel/data/

PresideNSP/apache/ftp/docs/filestorage/Framework/lockScreen directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Assign -rw-r--r-- 1 permission to the defaultLockScreen.cfg file.

For example, -rw-r--r-- 1 nobody nobody 10 Jul 25 14:29 defaultLockScreen.cfg.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open the file in an editor and do one of the following:

• To enable GUI lock for all the users, type the string true;<idle-time in
seconds>.
For example, true;1800.
• To disable GUI lock for all the users, type the string false;<idle-time in
seconds>.
For example, false;1800.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Save and close the file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Restart NSP to apply the default GUI lock settings to all the users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Defining default GUI lock setting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The GUI lock setting is applied to all the users.
Note: A user can modify the default GUI lock and the Administrator defined GUI lock
settings, if necessary. To modify, see “Locking the WMS desktop GUI” (p. 1-159).
The system stores the user modifications in a user configuration file, for example,
ls_xxx.config, where xxx is the user name. If a user configuration file (ls_xxx.config)
already exists, then this file overrides the defaultLockScreen.cfg file and the default
GUI lock settings. Hence, the system applies the GUI lock setting in the following
order of priority; ls_xxx.config > defaultLockScreen.cfg > default GUI lock setting.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Displaying and hiding shortcuts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying and hiding shortcuts

Overview
Use this procedure to display available shortcuts on all the 9353 WMS menus or buttons.
For the list of shortcuts available on:
• menus in the 9353 WMS window menu bar, see “9353 WMS menu bar” (p. 1-34).
• menus in the Authorization Manager window menu bar, see “User & Session
administration” (p. 4-5).
• buttons in the NodeB Address GUI window, see “Configuration from the Node B
Address GUI” (p. 3-156).
Prerequisite
A 9353 WMS session is open, see “Opening a WMS session” (p. 1-98).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 At any time, press Alt to display shortcuts.

Result: The available shortcuts on all the menus and buttons included in the 9353
WMS are activated. As soon as you open a window for which shortcuts are available,
these shortcuts are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 At any time, when shortcuts are displayed, press Alt to hide shortcuts.
Result: The available shortcuts on all the menus and buttons included in the 9353
WMS are hidden and deactivated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Performing actions from shortcuts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing actions from shortcuts

Overview
Use this procedure to perform actions using shortcut menus or buttons.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Activate the shortcuts, see “Displaying and hiding shortcuts” (p. 1-104).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Alt + "Shortcut letter".

Result: The corresponding action is launched.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset

Overview
At any time you can perform actions from the Figure 1-24, “Desktop Master Helpset
window” (p. 1-90). You can:
• navigate through the documentation set.
• perform an exact search or a wildcard search.
• create, consult, and organize favorites.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Help > Help.
Result: The Figure 1-24, “Desktop Master Helpset window” (p. 1-90) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Desktop Master Helpset window, click the icon corresponding to the selected
Table 1-40, “Desktop Master Helpset tab description” (p. 1-92).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Find field, enter the text string to search for.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Press Enter.
Result: Wait for the list of Figure 1-28, “Exact search example” (p. 1-108) to be
displayed. Depending on the number of search results (especially for a wildcard
search), the search result can take time.
Attention: A new search starts only once the previous search is finished. It is
recommended to wait for the current search to be finished before launching a new
search.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To store the displayed search result in the Favorites tab, click Add to favorites.
Result: The search result page displayed in the right-pane is added in the list of the
Favorites tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To remove a favorite from the list, in the Favorites tab, right-click the selected item and
select Remove.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The favorite item is removed from the Favorites tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To organize the favorites, you can:

1. Create a folder: right-click into the Favorites tab and select New Folder.
2. Rename the <New Folder> name.
3. In the favorite list, right-click an item and either:
• drag and drop the selected item in the <New Folder> or somewhere else.
• select Cut/Copy and Paste in the <New Folder> or somewhere else.
For an example of organized favorites, see Figure 1-29, “Desktop Master Helpset
- Favorites tab” (p. 1-109).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-28 Exact search example
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-29 Desktop Master Helpset - Favorites tab
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening the Navigator window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the Navigator window

Overview
The Navigator window automatically appears when you open a Layout from the Layout
Selector.
Use this procedure to show on the front side or re-open the Navigator window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To show or re-open the Navigator window, from the 9353 WMS window:
• menu bar, select Window > Show Navigator.
• status bar, click the Figure 1-19, “9353 WMS window status bar” (p. 1-57) icon.
Result: The Figure 2-1, “Resources tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6) window appears on the
front side.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a Network Layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Network Layout

Overview
Use this procedure to open a Network Layout. To view and edit layouts, you must have a
layout open.
You can open only one layout at a time.
To create or manage a Network Layout, see “Managing network layouts in the Layout
Selector” (p. 1-149)
Prerequisite
You know in which mode you want to open the layout, see “Using the WMS” (p. 1-8).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File > Select Network Layout.
Result: The Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Available Network Layouts name list, select a layout.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Depending on the operations you want to perform, open the layout:

• in View mode: double-click the layout, or click View, or
• in Edit mode: click Edit.
Result: In both cases, the Figure 2-1, “Resources tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6) window
appears.
In View mode only, the Figure 1-11, “UTRAN Service View window”
(p. 1-22) window also appears.
To re-open:
• the Navigator window, see “Opening the Navigator window” (p. 1-110),
• the UTRAN Service View window, see “Opening the UTRAN Service View
window” (p. 2-215).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a Network Layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
According to the chosen mode, you can:
• in Edit mode, open a Figure 1-30, “Layout Editor” (p. 1-114) window, see
“Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
• in View mode, open a Figure 2-3, “Resource Browser window: Topology view”
(p. 2-8) window, see “Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a Layout Editor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Layout Editor window

Overview
Use this procedure to display a Layout Editor window from the Figure 1-2, “NSP
window” (p. 1-6) window.
Prerequisite
A Network Layout is open in Edit mode, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Navigator window, in the Resources tab, select the layout, NE group, or NE
you want to open, and either:
• double-click, or
• right-click and select Open Group or Open Group in new window.
Result: The Figure 1-30, “Layout Editor” (p. 1-114) window appears.
To open several Layout Editor windows, see “Opening several Layout Editor
windows” (p. 1-115).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a Layout Editor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-30 Layout Editor
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening several Layout Editor windows
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening several Layout Editor windows

Overview
Use this procedure to display several Layout Editor windows in a layout.
You can open several Layout Editor windows at the same time, each with a different
view of a part of the current layout.
Although you can have many Layout Editor windows opened, you can only have one
layout open at a time.
To open a new layout, you must first close the open layout, then use the Layout Selector.
Prerequisite
A layout is open in Edit mode, see “Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To open several Layout Editor windows:

• to view a different group in the current Layout Editor window, in the Navigator
window, double-click the group or right-click the group and select Open Group.
• to view the same group in another Layout Editor window:
– in the Navigator window, shift-double-click the group; or right-click the group
and select Open Group in a New Window.
– from a Layout Editor window menu bar, select File > New Window.
Result: A new Layout Editor windows appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Repeat Step 1 to open another Layout Editor window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Adding new group icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding new group icons

Overview
Use this procedure to add new group icons to the Layout Editor window.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Edit toolbar, click the Figure 1-16, “Editing tool icon” (p. 1-51) to select the type of
group icon you want to add:
• single-click for single-action mode,
• double-click for repeated-action mode.
To exit repeated-action mode, select another tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Edit toolbar, click the Figure 1-17, “Property tool icons” (p. 1-53) to select the
properties you want to attribute to the new group:
• Select the fill color.
• Select the fill pattern, if you are adding polygon group icons, for the new group icon.
• Select the text properties (color, font and size) for the group name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Layout Editor window, if you are adding:

• a rectangle group icon: click to create a group of default size, or click and drag to
define the shape of the rectangle group icon, then release the mouse button.
• a polygon group icon: click to draw each vertex of the polygon. As you click to draw
the vertices, a ghost image of hair-lines and fill pattern appear between each new
vertex and the previous one you created. The most recently created vertex links back
to the first vertex added. Double-click to finish.
• a line group: click to draw each vertex of the line group. As you click to draw the
vertices, a hair-line appears between the new vertex and the previous one you created.
Double-click to finish.
The new group icon has the fill color (and fill pattern, if it is a polygon group) and text
properties selected in the Toolbar.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Adding new group icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 This step is action-mode specific.

• In single-action mode, an editable text field displaying "New Group" appears. Enter
the name for the new group.
• In repeated-action mode, each added group is labelled "New Group".
After adding groups, you can rename them. See “Adding new text objects” (p. 1-127).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can now perform any of the other typical tasks associated with adding a group icon:
• To change the placement of the new group icon, see “Moving objects within the
current view” (p. 1-118) or “Moving objects to different locations” (p. 1-119).
• To reshape the new icon, see “Resizing rectangle group icons” (p. 1-123) or
“Reshaping polygon or linear group icons” (p. 1-124).
• To change the fill color or pattern of the new group icon, see “Changing a group icon
fill color” (p. 1-125) or “Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern” (p. 1-126).
• To edit the label of the new group icon, see “Adding new text objects” (p. 1-127).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Moving objects within the current view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moving objects within the current view

Overview
Use this procedure to move objects within the current view or to a different group. The
objects can be groups, NEs, NE shortcuts, text objects, or added graphic images.
This procedure describes how to move all objects (except links) from one position to
another position in a Layout Editor window. To move one or more group or NE icons to
another window, see “Moving objects to different locations” (p. 1-119).
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Selection tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To move:
• one object:
– click and drag the object to its new location.
– to move a selected object one pixel at a time, use the arrow keys.
• multiple objects:
1. Shift-click the objects, or drag a bounding box around the objects you want to
move.
2. Drag the objects into position.
For multiple object moves, the relative positions of the selected objects are
maintained.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If you want the object to snap to the grid when you drag it in the Layout Editor window,
either:
• from the Layout Editor menu bar, select View > Global Settings > Snap to Grid, or
• right-click the Layout Editor background and select Snap To Grid.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Moving objects to different locations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moving objects to different locations

Overview
Use this procedure to move an object within the current view to a different group or to the
NE Store. These objects can be groups, NEs, NE shortcuts, text objects, or added graphic
images. NE shortcuts cannot be moved to the NE Store.
This procedure describes how to move objects (except links) from one Layout Editor
window to another.
To move one or more groups or NE icons to a different position in the same window, see
“Moving objects within the current view” (p. 1-118).
9353 WMS can manage up to 100 NEs per group. Alcatel-Lucent recommends keeping
groups to a manageable size.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open Layout Editor windows for the group in which the object resides, and the group to
which you want to move the object, see “Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Selection tool,
and either:
• right-click the object you want to move, and select Move To, or
• select the object you want to move and from the Layout Editor menu bar select Edit >
Move To.
Result: A cascading menu listing all of the open groups appears. You can also move
an NE to the NE Store. Groups cannot be moved to the NE Store.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the location to which you want the object moved.

Result: The object is removed from the current group and appears in the new location.
Links to the NE icon from objects in the original window terminate at line
continuation icons in both windows. Conversely, if you move a group or NE into a
window, any line continuation icons are replaced with links.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Automatically grouping NEs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Automatically grouping NEs

Overview
Use this procedure to automatically group NEs into groups based on defined grouping
criteria.
This procedure contains instructions for performing an automatic grouping from the 9353
WMS window File menu. You can also use the Group NEs command by right-clicking an
object in the Navigator or in the Layout Editor. Options in the Group NEs - Options
window vary depending on how the window is opened.
See “Automatic grouping” (p. 1-70) for an overview of automatic grouping.
Stopping an automatic grouping

Once an automatic grouping has been initiated by clicking Group NEs in the Group NEs -
Options window (Step 8), the Group NEs - Progress window displays Stop. Click Stop to
abort the grouping operation at its current state of completion. Once the Stop request has
been made, no additional NEs are grouped. However, NEs that have been moved remain
in their new group. Closing the Group NEs - Progress window by clicking on the close
window X in the right-hand corner of the menu bar does not stop the grouping operation.
Once you click Stop, it takes a few moments for the grouping operation to stop.
Once an automatic grouping has stopped or completed, the Group NEs - Summary
window displays Save Layout, Revert to last saved Layout, and Close. To discard the
grouping results of a stopped automatic grouping, click Revert to last saved Layout.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the layout in which you want to group the NEs and open the layout in edit mode,
see “Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File> Group NEs > Options.
Result: The Group NEs - Options window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Select NEs to group pane, in from, specify the scope of the grouping operation.
This field determines which NEs will be examined for automatic grouping based on the
grouping criteria.
Select Include NEs from all subgroups if you want to include NEs in any subgroups of
the from selection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In Select a parent group under which to group NEs, specify the group in which new
subgroups will be created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In Choose method to group NEs, you can choose to place NEs either in groups with
matching criteria only under the parent group or anywhere in the layout. See “Selecting
NEs to consider for grouping” (p. 1-72) for more information on grouping methods.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In Grouping criteria, specify the grouping criteria. You can select up to three criteria. The
order of the criteria (1, 2, or 3) determines the nesting of new groups.
Select First in existing groups with matching criteria anywhere in the layout, then
in new groups under the parent group if you want to restrict the automatic grouping to
one grouping criteria.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Choose the shape for any new group icons by selecting Rectangle or Polygon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Group NEs.

Result: The Group NEs - Progress window opens and displays status and details as
the grouping operation progresses. Stop is enabled (see the description of Stop
function in “Stopping an automatic grouping” (p. 1-120)).
NEs moved to a new or existing group are positioned at the bottom of the group in a
grid pattern. New groups are positioned at the bottom of the specified parent group in
a grid pattern.
Once the grouping operation is complete or is stopped, the Group NEs - Summary
window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Save Layout or from the File menu, select Save Network Layout.
Result: All editing changes made before and after the automatic grouping are saved.
If you want to discard the automatic grouping results, click Revert to last saved
layout. The current layout is closed without saving and then reopened. All associated
layout windows and the Group NEs - Summary window close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 If required, select a group in the table and click Open Group to open the group in a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Click Close.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Resizing rectangle group icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resizing rectangle group icons

Overview
Use this procedure to resize a rectangle group.
To reshape a polygon or linear group icon, see “Reshaping polygon or linear group icons”
(p. 1-124).
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Reshape tool:
• single-click for single-action mode
• double-click for repeated-action mode
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor window, click the rectangle group icon you want to resize.
Result: Eight small squares representing vertices appear on the outer edge of the
rectangle icon. There is one vertex on the middle of each side and one vertex at each
corner.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Drag the appropriate vertex to resize the rectangle group icon.

Result: Move the vertices on the sides to move a side. The vertices on the corners
resize the rectangle by moving the adjacent sides.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you are in repeated-action mode, you can resize one rectangle after another. When you
are finished resizing one group, click another group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To stop resizing:
• in single-action mode, click the background.
• in repeated-action mode, select a new tool.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Reshaping polygon or linear group icons
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reshaping polygon or linear group icons

Overview
Use this procedure to reshape a polygon or linear group.
To resize a rectangle group icon, see “Resizing rectangle group icons” (p. 1-123).
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Reshape tool:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor window, click the polygon group icon you want to reshape.
Result: Small squares representing vertices appear on the outer edge of the polygon
icon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Drag a vertex to reshape the icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Control-click the edge of the icon where there is no vertex to add a vertex.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Control-click a vertex to delete the vertex.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If you are in repeated-action mode, you can reshape one group after another. When
finished reshaping one group, just click another one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To stop reshaping:
• in single-action mode, click the background
• in repeated-action mode, select a new tool
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing a group icon fill color
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing a group icon fill color

Overview
Use this procedure to change the default (no alarm state) color of a group icon.
To change the fill pattern of a polygon group icon, see “Changing a polygon group icon
fill pattern” (p. 1-126).
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor window:

• click one group for which you want to change the fill color
• shift-click or draw a bounding box to select many groups for which you want to
change the fill color
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Apply the new color. If the color shown on the Fill Color icon:
• is the one you want, click the color icon.
• is not the color you want, pull down the Fill Color options list and select the fill color
you want (the four colors below the label "Tech layer" match the colors used to
identify a network resource technology layer).
Result: The color is applied to the group icon, and the Fill Color icon is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern

Overview
Use this procedure to change the fill pattern of a polygon group icon.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• click one polygon group for which you want to change the fill pattern
• shift-click or draw a bounding box to select many polygon groups for which you want
to change the fill pattern
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Apply the new pattern. If the pattern shown in the Fill Pattern icon:
• is the one you want, click the Fill Pattern icon
• is not the pattern you want, pull down the Fill Pattern options list and select the fill
pattern that you want
Result: The pattern is applied to the group icon, and the Fill Pattern icon is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Adding new text objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding new text objects

Overview
Use this procedure to add text objects in the Layout Editor.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Text tool:
Attention: To exit repeated-action mode, select another tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor window, click the background.

Result: An empty editable text field appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the text field, enter the required text.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In repeated-action mode, click the background again to add another text field and repeat
Step 3.
To stop adding text objects, select a new tool.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names

Overview
Use this procedure to edit text in the Layout Editor, whether the text is a text object, an
NE shortcut name, or a group name.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Text tool:
Attention: To exit repeated-action mode, select another tool.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the object that you want to edit.

Result: An editable text field displaying the current text string appears on top of the
selected group name or text object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the text field, enter the required text.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In repeated-action mode, select another object, and repeat Step 3.

To stop editing group names and text objects, select a new tool.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing the font properties of group names or text
9353 WMS basic procedures objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing the font properties of group names or text objects

Overview
Use this procedure to change the font family, font size, font style, or font color of a group
name or a text object.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• click one group name or text object for which you want to change the font properties
• shift-click or draw a bounding box to select many group names and text objects for
which you want to change the font properties
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, select the font family, font
size, font style, or font color you want to apply to the selected objects.
Result: Your selections are applied to the selected object or objects.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Importing a graphic image
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Importing a graphic image

Overview
Use this procedure to add image objects to a Layout Editor window.
Figure 1-31 Import Image window
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Table 1-12, “Editing tool description” (p. 1-52) icon bar, click the Import Image
tool.
Result: The Figure 1-31, “Import Image window” (p. 1-130) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Import Image window, enter the URL of the image file you want to add to the
layout. To enter a file address, type: http://<image address>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to add the file to the current Layout Editor window.

Result: The added graphic appears in the center of the top-most Layout Editor
window. To move the graphic into position, see “Moving objects within the current
view” (p. 1-118).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Showing objects in alarmed and unalarmed states
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Showing objects in alarmed and unalarmed states

Overview
Use this procedure to change how the Layout Editor displays objects capable of raising
an alarm. Objects capable of raising an alarm can be displayed in either their alarmed or
unalarmed state.
This is useful for positioning an object so that it does not obscure other objects when it is
in an alarm state in the Resource Browser.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In a Layout Editor window, right-click the background and select Highlighting.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can:
• enable Highlighting to show all objects as they appear when there are active alarms
• disable Highlighting to show all objects as they appear when there are no active
alarms
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Duplicating objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Duplicating objects
Overview
Use this procedure to duplicate group and text objects in Layout Editor windows.
This is useful for rapidly creating groups and text objects based on existing ones.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• select the object you want to duplicate
• shift-select or draw a bounding box to select multiple objects that you want to
duplicate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Either:
• right-click one of the selected objects and select Duplicate, or
• from the Layout Editor window menu bar, select Edit > Duplicate
Result: The selected object or objects, including the group names and text objects are
duplicated. Duplicated group objects are empty.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 You can now perform any of the other tasks associated with objects.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating NE shortcuts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating NE shortcuts
Overview
Use this procedure to create an NE shortcut. An NE shortcut is a duplicate icon of the
original NE icon. NE shortcuts enable you to represent NEs in multiple locations in your
network layout.
Rules
When working with shortcuts in the Layout Editor, following rules apply:
• If a layout group contains both the original NE and an NE shortcut, all links connect
to the original NE, not the shortcut.
• If a layout group contains more than one shortcut to an original NE, links connect to
only one shortcut; links are not repeated.
• NE shortcuts replace link continuation icons.
• You cannot connect an NE shortcut to another NE shortcut.
• If the original NE is removed from the network, the shortcut icon remains but is no
longer linked or does not display any information. It is referred to as a dangling
shortcut.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Layout Editor, right-click an NE icon and select Create Shortcut.

Result: An Figure 2-9, “NE shortcut icon” (p. 2-20) is created next to the selected NE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Rename and move the NE shortcut to the required location as described in:
• “Moving objects to different locations” (p. 1-119)
• “Editing text objects, NE shortcut names, and group names” (p. 1-128)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating annotations for a resource
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating annotations for a resource

Overview
Use this procedure to create descriptive annotations for a resource. Annotations are
displayed in the Annotation tab of the Details pane in the Resource Browser and Layout
Editor.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Identify the layout that contains the resource you want to create an annotation for and
open the layout in edit mode, see “Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the resource to create an annotation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Layout Editor window, click the Details arrow to expand the Details pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click on the Annotation tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Type the annotation into the text field.

See “Local language display setting ” (p. 1-78).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File > Save Network Layout.
Result: The annotations are saved.
Attention: It takes a few moments for the menu item Save Network Layout in the
File menu to be enabled after you create or edit an annotation.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Setting the background image
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting the background image

Overview
Use this procedure to set the background image for a layout view. Default background
maps are stored in the directory
/opt/nortel/data/PresideNSP/apache/ftp/docs/backgroundmaps.
When you select Image in the Background Image window, the Image Source (URL) field
contains the default URL http://<hostname>:8080/NSP/data/backgroundmaps/
This URL point to files in the directory.
Figure 1-32 Background Image window
Prerequisites
Background map images must be in GIF or JPG file format.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Layout Editor window, either

• right-click the window background and select Background Image, or
• from the Layout Editor window menu bar, select Edit > Background Image.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Setting the background image
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 1-32, “Background Image window” (p. 1-135) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Background Image window, select Image.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 in the Image Source (URL) field, enter a file address or URL for the image you want to
use, followed by the filename of the image. To enter a file address, type http:// followed
by the address for the image, and the image file name.
Example: http://poire:8080/NSP/data/backgroundmaps/world.gif
If you do not have access to the server, contact the system administrator for the list of
image files.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result: The Background Image dialog box closes and the background image appears
in the background of the Layout Editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Saving and closing layouts
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Saving and closing layouts

Overview
Use this procedure to save and close a layout. You must save the layout before other users
can see the changes.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To save a layout in the Layout Editor window, from the 9353 WMS window, select File >
Save Network Layout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To close the layout, select File > Close Network Layout.

If the layout has unsaved changes, you are prompted if you want to save your changes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating a group for RNS View
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a group for RNS View

Overview
Use this procedure to create a group that can display RNCs and Node Bs in RNS View.
Attention: NE number in RNS view
The maximum number of NEs that can be included in one RNC group is 1000. For
very large networks, it is recommended that more than one RNS view layout be
created. Opening an RNS View containing more than 1000 NEs is possible but
performance can be adversely affected.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 If a layout exists, open the layout in Edit mode, see “Opening a Layout Editor window”
(p. 1-113). Continue to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If no layouts were created, create a new layout, see “Managing network layouts in the
Layout Selector” (p. 1-149).
Use the following to populate the new layout:
• “Opening the Find window” (p. 1-154)
• “Finding a network resource” (p. 1-155)
• If you have named the RNC and the Node B NEs in a way that identifies the
relationship between the Node Bs and their related RNC, you can use the Find tool to
find each RNC and its related Node Bs, and then add them to the same group
• “Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor” (p. 1-157)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Open the Layout Editor window, see “Opening a Layout Editor window” (p. 1-113).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Create a group for the RNS View, see “Adding new group icons” (p. 1-116).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File > Group NEs > Options.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Group NEs - Options window, in the Grouping criteria pane, select Device
Specified Group, then click Group NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating a group for RNS View
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The sub-groups are created based on the Device Specified Group. The NEs
are grouped based on the RNC and Node B relationship, because the group
information that identifies the relationship is that of Device Specified Group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Move the NEs in the groups that have related RNC and Node Bs to the RNS View group.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating links using the Link Creation tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating links using the Link Creation tool

Overview
Use this procedure to create links using the Link Creation tool from the Network
Definition toolbar. Use multiple link mode to make it faster to create one link after
another. Set the Link Creation tool to multiple link mode by double clicking the Link
Creation icon.
You can create links only between NEs in the same domain. In a distributed server
configuration with multiple Topology Server domains, you cannot create links between
NEs that reside in different domains.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Network Definition.
Result: The Figure 1-18, “Network definition toolbar” (p. 1-54) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Network Definition toolbar, set the Layer selection menu tool to the appropriate
technology layer for the link you are adding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Network Definition toolbar, select Physical if the link is carried on this technology
layer. Unselect Physical if the link is a virtual link carried on another technology layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Network Definition toolbar, click the Link Creation icon. Double-click to create
multiple links. A small + appears in the lower right corner of the tool when in Multiple
Link Creation mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To create a link, either:

• Click and drag from the originating NE to the terminating NE. Both NEs must be in
the same Layout Editor window.
• Click on the originating NE, then click on the terminating NE. Use this method to
create a link between NEs in different Layout Editor windows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating links using the Link Creation tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The link appears between the two NEs, or a dialog box appears warning you
that the link is not visible due to the current settings in the Technology layer filter. If
you started in Multiple Link Creation mode, you can repeat this procedure to add
more links (click the Select Mode icon in the Network Definition toolbar to exit the
Multiple Link Creation mode). If you started in Link Creation mode, you are now in
Select mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Once created, links can be modified using the following procedures:

• “Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link” (p. 1-144).
• “Changing the technology layer of an NE” (p. 1-146).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link)

Overview
Use this procedure to create a loop link using the Network Definition toolbar.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration -> Network Definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Network Definition toolbar, set the Layer selection menu tool to the appropriate
technology layer for the link you are adding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
layer.
Unselect Physical if the link is a virtual link carried on another technology layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Network Definition toolbar, click the Link Creation icon.

Double-click to create multiple links.
Result: A small + appears in the lower right corner of the tool when in Multiple Link
Creation mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click the originating NE, then click it again.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A Figure 2-11, “Loop link icon” (p. 2-21) icon appears above the NE, or a
dialog box appears warning you that the link is not visible because of the current
settings in the Technology layer filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Once created, links can be modified by the following procedures:

• “Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link” (p. 1-144)
• “Changing the technology layer of an NE” (p. 1-146)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link

Overview
Use this procedure to modify link properties using the Network Definition toolbar.
Figure 1-33 Edit Link Properties dialog box
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor, right-click the link that you want to modify and select Link
Properties.
Result: The Figure 1-33, “Edit Link Properties dialog box” (p. 1-144) appears
showing the originating and terminating NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Edit Link Properties dialog box, select the technology Layer on which you want
the link displayed from the Layer list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing the technology layer and physicality of a link
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
layer.
Unselect Physical if the link is a virtual link carried on another technology layer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result: If the current Technology layer filter settings prevent the display of your link,
an error message appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing the technology layer of an NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Changing the technology layer of an NE

Overview
Use this procedure to modify NE properties using the Network Definition toolbar.
Figure 1-34 Edit NE Properties dialog box
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor, right-click the NE that you want to modify and select NE
Properties.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Changing the technology layer of an NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 1-34, “Edit NE Properties dialog box” (p. 1-146) appears showing
the name of the NE, with the technology layers for which the NE provides
cross-connections indicated by checks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select or clear the check boxes for the technology layers on which the NE is to be
displayed. If you clear all technology layers, OK is disabled and the settings cannot be
saved.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
Result: If the current Technology layer filter settings prevent the display of your link,
an error message appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Deleting links
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting links
Overview
Use this procedure to delete links using the Network Definition toolbar.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Layout Editor, select the link or links you want to delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To delete the link, either:

• right-click the link and select Delete Link, or
• from the Layout Editor window menu bar, select Edit -> Delete.
Result: The selected link is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing network layouts in the Layout Selector

Overview
Use this procedure to manage layouts in the Layout Selector.
The first time you open a network layout, you must set the fault hard limit. See “Setting
the alarm display limit” (p. 1-19).
Prerequisite
The first time you open a Network layout, you must set the fault hard limit. See “Setting
the alarm display limit” (p. 1-19).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS menu bar, select File > Select Network Layout.
Result: The Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Layout Management arrow.

Result: The Layout Management pane expands.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click New, Duplicate, Rename to manage network layouts.

Click Delete and confirm if you want to delete the layout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the layout name.

Do not create or rename a layout called Default or Creation. Access control permission
settings do not work correctly with layouts named Default or Creation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening a Resource Browser window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Resource Browser window

Overview
Use this procedure to display a Resource Browser window from the Figure 1-2, “NSP
window” (p. 1-6) window.
Prerequisites
A Network Layout is open in View mode, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111).
Attention: Contact an administrator if you are not able to view NEs that you believe
you should be viewing. If a new server instance is added, or if NEs are moved from
one server to another one, you cannot view the alarms or details of the related NEs,
unless an administrator resets access permissions.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can open a Resource Browser window:

• From the Figure 2-1, “Resources tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6) window, in the Resources
tab, select the layout or group you want to open, and either:
– Double-click, or
– Right-click, and select Open Group.
• From an Equipment Monitor window:
– Right-click an RNC, a BTSEquipment/OneBTSEquipment, or a POC object, and
select Find in its group,
– Right-click a NodeB object, and select Find BTSEquipment,
– Right-click an associated NodeB object, and select Find RNC.
• From the Figure 1-11, “UTRAN Service View window” (p. 1-22) window, select the
layout or NE group you want to open, and either:
– Double-click, or
– Right-click, and select Open Group.
Result: The Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid view” (p. 2-9) window
opens.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening several Resource Browser windows
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening several Resource Browser windows

Overview
Use this procedure to display several Resource Browser windows in a layout.
You can open several Resource Browser windows at the same time, each with a different
view of a part of the current layout.
Although you can have many Resource Browser windows opened, you can only have
one layout open at a time.
To open a new layout, you must first close the open layout, then use the Layout Selector.
Prerequisite
A Resource Browser window is open, see “Opening a Resource Browser window”
(p. 1-150)
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To open several Resource Browser windows:

• to view a different group in the current Resource Browser window, in the Navigator
window, double-click the group or right-click the group and select Open Group.
• to view the same group in another Resource Browser window, either:
– from the Navigator window, shift-double-click the group; or right-click the group
and select Open Group in a New Window, or
– from the Resource Browser window menu bar, select File -> New Window
Result: A new Resource Browser windows appears in front of the other Resource
Browser window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To open another Resource Browser window, repeat Step 1.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Defining a default layout
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Defining a default layout

Overview
Use this procedure to define a default layout in the Layout Selector. The default layout is
automatically opened in a Resource Browser window after login.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File-> Network Layout.
Result: The Figure 1-6, “Layout Selector window” (p. 1-18) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Available Network Layouts list, right-click the layout you want to define as the
default layout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Set as the Default Layout.

Result: In the Available Network Layouts list, (default) is added to the selected
layout name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To remove the default status from the layout, right-click the layout and then click Set as a
Non-Default Layout.
If you select a second layout as the default layout, the default status is removed from the
first layout. You can only define one layout as the default.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Clearing the JWS cache on Windows operating systems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clearing the JWS cache on Windows operating systems

Overview
Use this procedure to clear the Java Web Start (JWS) cache on the Windows operating
system when you are unable to reset the Fault - Server Hard Limit as described in
“Setting the alarm display limit” (p. 1-19).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Exit from the 9353 WMS client user session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Clear the related muff files from the following cache folders:
• <home_directory>/Application Data/Sun/Java/Deployment/cache/6.0/muff/xxxxx-
xxxxx.muff
Edit the muff file to identify which server it belongs to:
47c0a31a-549de4aa.muf belongs to Casto server:
0
1024
(http://casto.vxlab-wcdma.fr.alcatel-lucent.com:8080/UI/HardLimit)
Example: For casto server, clear 47c0a31a-549de4aa.muf files from:
• D:/Documents and Settings/mcelton/Application Data/Sun/Java/Deployment/
cache/6.0/muffin
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Log on to the 9353 WMS client again, and when prompted about the alarm limit (see
Figure 1-8, “Server Hard Limit dialog box” (p. 1-20)), click OK and set the limit to a
number greater than 10000 alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Opening the Find window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the Find window

Overview
Use this procedure to open the Find window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use one of the following methods to open a Figure 1-5, “Find window”
(p. 1-13) window:
• From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select File > Find.
• In the Resource Browser, right-click a group and select Find.
• In the Navigator, right-click a group and select Find.
• In the NE store area of the Navigator, double-click, or right-click and select Find.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Finding a network resource
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Finding a network resource

Overview
Use this procedure to find a network resource.
You can find only links that have annotations. To find a link, the link must have an entry
in the Annotation tab and in the Find window, Annotation must be selected.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Figure 1-5, “Find window” (p. 1-13) window, see “Opening the Find window”
(p. 1-154).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Search for list, select the resource type to search for.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select By to select whether you want to search for a text string in the resource type name
or in the annotation field or both.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter your search string in Containing text.

The search string can have a maximum of 256 characters. Leave the field empty to match
all resources. This search facility is based on string matching. It does not support wildcard
characters and is not case sensitive, except in the case of local name which is case
sensitive. Base your search on string segments.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Search in list, select the group you want to start the search from.
The default Search in value is the current layout. If you open a layout, the Search in
value defaults to the current layout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In Limit, set the maximum number of results you want to be displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select Includes Subgroups to indicate whether you want to search subgroups.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Find or press Enter.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing a found resource in the Resource Browser

Overview
Use this procedure to view a network resource in the Resource Browser.
Prerequisite
The network resource must be listed in the Results list of the Find window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a search as described in “Finding a network resource” (p. 1-155).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Results list, click the network resource that you want to view, or select the network
resource and click Open Group.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor

Overview
Use this procedure to add NEs to the Layout Editor using the Find window. Before you
can add an NE to a group, you must open the group for editing.
Prerequisite
A layout is open in Edit mode, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Navigator window, in the Resources tab, right-click the group where you want
to add a network resource.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Open Group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To open additional groups, right-click a group and select Open Group in New Window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Navigator window, right-click the NE Store and select Find.

Result: The Figure 1-5, “Find window” (p. 1-13) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Find window, click Find or press Enter.

Result: The NEs appear in the Search Results list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Search Results list, select the row that describes the NE you want to add to the
currently open group. To select multiple NEs, control-click them.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Move To.

9353 WMS can manage up to 100 NEs per group. Keep groups to a manageable size.
Adding more than 500 NEs can cause system problems.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select in the list the group to which you want to add the NE(s).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Moving an NE from the NE Store to a Layout Editor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The new NE icons appears in the Layout Editor.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Locking the WMS desktop GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Locking the WMS desktop GUI

Overview
The WMS desktop GUI session locks automatically in case of user inactivity. Use this
procedure to enable or disable the inactivity lock.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the WMS desktop menu, click on the Security menu and select Screen Lock.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can lock the screen by clicking on Lock Screen.
Figure 1-35 Screen locked
Note: You can also lock the WMS desktop GUI session manually from the Lock it
icon at the right button of the desktop screen.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Locking the WMS desktop GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you want to set the screen lock parameters, click on the Security menu and select
Screen Lock > Settings.
Result: The following window opens.
Figure 1-36 Settings: Screen Lock window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To enable or disable the automatic screen lock, select or deselect the Enable Automatic
Screen Locking option.
If you select the Enable Automatic Screen Locking, you can configure the timer by
entering a number of minutes in the Wait: field.
Note: The inactivity lock mechanism is per login account.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information on the interfaces and tools accessible through the 9353
WMS.
Contents
WICL 1-162
TIL 1-164
PAI 1-165
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS WICL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WICL
Overview
The 9353 WMS GUI includes the following WICL windows that enable command line
operations on scripts:
• The WICL window, enables to perform operations on the Access Network OAM
through a command line interface using a specific script language.
To open WICL, in the 9353 WMS menu bar, select Configuration > Wireless Internet
Command Language (WICL).
• The WICL Script Editor enables to perform actions on WICL scripts.
To open the WICL Script Editor, in the 9353 WMS menu bar select Configuration >
WICL Script Editor.
• The Job Scheduler helps to schedule jobs created by users or provided by
Alcatel-Lucent to get the related results in a dedicated GUI.
To open the Job Scheduler, in the 9353 WMS menu bar, select Configuration >
Radio Access > Job Scheduler.
A job is a set of OAM commands written in WICL format.
Launch the following wiclets from the 9353 WMS menu bar:
• Online Neighbouring Management: select Configuration > Radio Access > Online
Neighbouring Management
• Counter List Activation: select Performance > Radio Access > Counter Lists
Management
Command specification
Use the WICL window to perform the following operations in a UMTS network:
• RAN object manipulation: get or update object parameters
• Multi-Service Switch object manipulation
• Operations on NEs
• High-level OAM operations such as CM XML export, software management, upgrade
of BTS equipment and trace session management
Use the graphical web-oriented interface to write scripts in HTML called wiclets and
publish them by putting the associated files on the main server to make them available to
authenticated users.
Use the WICL Script Editor to perform the following operations on WICL scripts:
• Edit
• Modify (add or delete commands, or insert new commands in the script)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS WICL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Run
• Create a new job
• Schedule
Use the Job Scheduler to perform the following:
• Schedule jobs
• View the scheduled jobs in a calendar
• View the details of each job
For more details about the WICL commands and wiclets, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-
RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS TIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TIL
Overview
The Terminal for Local Installation (TIL) GUI enables to perform configuration
operations on a BTS (NA for 939x OneBTS). The TIL is run locally at the BTS site or
remotely through the 9353 WMS.
For more information about the TIL, see Alcatel-Lucent 9100 and 93xx Node B -
Commissioning and Fault Management User Manual: TIL, 9YZ-04157-0090-PCZZA.
Prerequisite
A dedicated authorization is required to use the TIL.
To open the TIL from the 9353 WMS GUI, use one of the following methods:
• From the Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid view” (p. 2-9), select a BTS
and either:
– select Configuration > Radio Access > TIL, or
– right-click the BTS and select Configuration > TIL.
• From the Figure 2-75, “Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment” (p. 2-141),
in the hierarchical tree, right-click BTSEquipment and select Configuration > TIL.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS PAI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PAI
Overview
The Platform Administration Infrastructure (PAI) is an Alcatel-Lucent solution-
independent framework that is integrated with the Light Sysmon. The Light Sysmon
client is accessible through a GUI using the Java Webstart. The PAI is used to monitor the
server hardware and manage the application processes. The PAI provides process
management, process monitoring, file purge, and zap functionalities for the 9353 WMS
system.
For detailed information on the WMS implementation of Light Sysmon, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Administration: System
Management, 9YZ-04157-0018-PCZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WCE Platform
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WCE Platform
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information on the Wireless Cloud Element (WCE) Platform.
Contents
Introduction 1-167
Shadow mechanism 1-169
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WCE Platform
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
Overview
The WCE is a new RNC product that provides additional capacity compared to RNC
9370 and introduces the concept of virtualization.
The WCE is platform designed to host highly available and/or real-time applications of a
wireless network. The WCE aligns with the ETSI NFV (referred to as Virtual Network
Functions (VNF) or tenants) specification and maps to this standard. WCE Platform is a
new NE to manage the RNC tenant directly. The WMS interacts with NE WCE Platform
through the NetConf protocol to run operations for the shadow mechanism at the RNC
level.
The WCE supports 2G or 3G nodes, and is composed of several distinct components such
as:
• WCE Platform element: managed from WMS through the NETCONF interface
• WCE 3G element: managed from WMS through SEPE interface for CNode and
NETCONF interface for WNode
• Disk Access element: not managed from WMS
The Figure 1-37, “WCE Overview” (p. 1-168) shows the graphical representation of
WCE:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WCE Platform
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-37 WCE Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Shadow mechanism
WCE Platform
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shadow mechanism
Overview
This section describes how WMS manages the shadow mechanism triggered by RNC
configuration management changes. The shadow mechanism is introduced for RNC 9771
to use cloud capabilities to reduce system downtime.
9771 RNC flag to reduce impact on 9370

The 9771 RNC shares the same code with 9370 for CM session part, to reduce impacts on
9370. WMS introduces a FLAG to differ 9771 from 9370.
This FLAG is isWceRNC and is of boolean type. It has the following values:
• True: 9771 RNC
• False: 9370 RNC or iBTS
To set a value for this FLAG:
• if ClassType == RNC && rncFamily == rncWCE => the value is 9771 RNC
• else it can be 9370 or iBTS
Shadow service
In order to handle shadow mechanism centrally and reduce impacts on other
functionalites, WMS introduces a new service ShadowService to handle operations
related to the shadow mechanism.
The ShadowService can be accessed from the Netconf NodeMgr and SePe NodeMgr. So,
it has to be declared in the CP Kernel level or Node General Layer. The implementation
can be done in the Netconf NodeMgr. The ShadowService means that a new API is used
to perform actions related to the Shadow mechanism.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction to 9353 WMS Shadow mechanism
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Fault management
2
Overview
Purpose
To locate and isolate problems in real time, the WMS solution delivers a set of fault
management tools to simplify the task of fault management in large, complex UMTS
networks.
Contents
Fault management GUI description 2-4

Resource Browser 2-5
Alarm display 2-35
Alarm Manager 2-57
Historical Fault Browser 2-136
Equipment monitor 2-138
OSI State Reporting 2-190
FM Audit Request 2-194
Manual FM Audit 2-195
FM Synchronize 2-196
Notifications Log Tool 2-197
Incorrectly provisioned Node B list 2-203
Alarm customization 2-204
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set 2-205
Auto-acknowledgement of alarms 2-207
Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations 2-208
Operator annotation on alarm type 2-210
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Persistent Alarm Manager user preferences 2-212

Analyzing alarms and faults 2-213
Opening the UTRAN Service View window 2-215
Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display 2-216
Configuring alarm severity colors 2-218
Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms 2-220
Updating the Alarm List 2-223
Modifying the Alarm List display 2-224
Viewing raw alarm details 2-225
Viewing the alarm description with the online help 2-226
Manually clearing an alarm 2-228
Applying alarm severity filters 2-229
Managing advanced alarm filters 2-230
Deleting private advanced alarm filters 2-233
Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms 2-234
Annotating an alarm 2-236
Navigating from the Alarm Manager to the Equipment Monitor 2-237
Managing the alarm stream 2-238
Modifying an alarm rule 2-240
Creating an alarm rule 2-241
Forwarding an alarm 2-243
Toggling the audible alarm tone 2-245
Opening the alarm Network Banner 2-247
Opening the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window 2-248
Managing the Notifications Log 2-249
Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules 2-252
Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only 2-254
Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation) 2-256
Enabling Maintenance Mode 2-257
Disabling Maintenance Mode for an NE 2-258
Choosing the Resource Browser graphical view 2-259
Filtering the display of the technology layers 2-260
Opening a link continuation icon 2-261
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an Equipment Monitor window 2-262

Launching a Diagnose command on a OneBTS 2-264
Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window 2-268
Finding a component instance from an Equipment Monitor tree view 2-270
Finding a character string in the displayed components of an Equipment 2-271
Monitor tree view
Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from an RNC- 2-272
Equipment Monitor window
Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- 2-273
Localizing an NE in the Resource Browser from the Equipment Monitor 2-274
Modifying the shelf level display 2-275
Launching a PowerTest / an rxAntennaTest action on a OneBTSCell 2-276
Launching a cancelSelfSurvey / an inititateSelfSurvey action on a OneBTS GRS 2-279
object
Opening the OSI State Reporting window 2-282
Navigating from the OSI State Reporting window to the Equipment Monitor 2-283
Requesting an FM audit 2-284
Launching a manual FM audit 2-285
Launching an FM Synchronize 2-286
Configuring the server for Sendemail and SendSMS 2-288
Customizing external alarms 2-289
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
The section describes the GUIs in Fault management.
Prerequisites
Start the following fault management tools through the 9353 WMS window menu bar,
from the contextual menus or from the Equipment Monitor window for one NE or a
group of NEs.
Contents
Resource Browser 2-5

Alarm display 2-35
Alarm Manager 2-57
Historical Fault Browser 2-136
Equipment monitor 2-138
OSI State Reporting 2-190
FM Audit Request 2-194
Manual FM Audit 2-195
FM Synchronize 2-196
Notifications Log Tool 2-197
Incorrectly provisioned Node B list 2-203
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
Overview
The Resource Browser enables the user to monitor the managed network and also
observe the alarm state of the network.
The Resource Browser along with the Navigator, presents the managed network as a
hierarchy of resource groups, in a layout format. The layout is constructed using the
Layout Editor in the following manner:
• At the lowest level are individual resources, such as NEs and links.
• At the highest level is the managed network.
• In between is a configurable hierarchy of nested groups, called the Network tree.
The Network tree is shown in the Navigator.
The state of each group in the hierarchy is viewed in detail in a Resource Browser
window, several of which can be on the screen at the same time.
The Resource Browser is the primary tool for graphically locating and isolating problems
in real-time on the UMTS network. The alarm information displays directly on the NE
icons (as well as on group icons), see “Alarm information displayed on NEs” (p. 2-40).
The Resource Browser displays alarm information directly on these icons, using a range
of visualization techniques including colors, to distinguish alarm severity. Balloons
indicate new alarms and text indicates both the number and severity of alarms.
To access the Resource Browser in the view mode, see “Opening a Resource Browser
window” (p. 1-150).
Navigator with the Resource Browser

The Navigator tool aids in finding information quickly. It automatically opens when you
open a layout from the Layout Selector. The Navigator window display changes
depending on whether the layout is opened in the View mode (see Figure 2-1, “Resources
tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6)) or in the Edit mode (see Figure 1-20, “Layout in Edit mode”
(p. 1-64)).
The Resources tab in the Navigator window consists of the following elements. See
Figure 2-1, “Resources tab in Navigator” (p. 2-6).
• “Navigator Resources alarm column” (p. 2-54)
• “NE store” (p. 2-6)
• “Network tree” (p. 2-6)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-1 Resources tab in Navigator
NE store
The NE store is a location for the NEs that have not yet been placed in a group.
Network tree
The network tree displays the hierarchy of groups and subgroups of the network (see
Figure 2-2, “Network tree” (p. 2-7)). All groups are listed in an alphabetical order.
To display a group or subgroup in a Resource Browser window, see “Opening a
Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150) and “Opening several Resource Browser
windows” (p. 1-151).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 Network tree
Right-click any group in the network tree to view a list of object menu commands (see
Table 2-1, “Navigator with Resource Browser object menu commands” (p. 2-7).
Table 2-1 Navigator with Resource Browser object menu commands
Command Description
Open Group Opens the selected group in a currently open instance of the
Resource Browser. The group is displayed in the top most
instance of the Resource Browser that is currently open.
Open Group in a New Opens the selected group in a new instance of the Resource
Window Browser window.
Find Opens the Find window.
Show Access Control Opens the Access Control window to set access permissions for
resources or user groups.
Show Alarms Displays the Alarm Manager with the alarms for the selected
group displayed.
Show Alarms in New Displays the Alarm Manager with the alarms for the selected
Window group displayed. You can open up to five Alarm Manager
windows.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser window
To see the Resource Browser window display in “Viewing the managed network”
(p. 1-10):
• See Figure 2-3, “Resource Browser window: Topology view” (p. 2-8)
• See Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid view” (p. 2-9)
• See Figure 2-5, “Resource Browser window: RNS view” (p. 2-10).
For a description of the Resource Browser window, see the following:
• “Menu bar” (p. 2-11)
• “Network panel” (p. 2-12)
• “Resource Browser display filters” (p. 2-24)
• “Details pane” (p. 2-32)
• “User preferences” (p. 2-33)
Figure 2-3 Resource Browser window: Topology view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Figure 2-3, “Resource Browser window: Topology view” (p. 2-8) displays the
topology view of the Resource Browser window with the Details pane collapsed.
Figure 2-4 Resource Browser window: Grid view
The Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid view” (p. 2-9) displays the grid view
of the Resource Browser window with the Details pane collapsed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-5 Resource Browser window: RNS view
The Figure 2-5, “Resource Browser window: RNS view” (p. 2-10) displays the RNS view
of Resource Browser window with the Details pane collapsed.
For an example of the Details pane, see Figure 2-19, “Details pane: General tab”
(p. 2-33).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Menu bar
The contents of the Resource Browser menu bar vary depending on the applications
installed. The default menu bar contains the File, View, and Go menus. Installation of
additional applications may add menu items. See Table 2-2, “Resource Browser menu
bar” (p. 2-11).
Table 2-2 Resource Browser menu bar

File New Window Opens a new Resource Browser window displaying the
same group as the current window.
Open Group Opens the currently selected group.
Open Group in New Opens the currently selected group in a new window.
Window
Close Window Closes the current window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-2 Resource Browser menu bar (continued)

View Global Settings Contains the following command submenus:
• Filter Pane-toggle display of the filter area
• Background-toggle display of the layout background
image (topology view only)
• Node State Management-toggle display of node state
labels
Resource View Contains the following submenus:
• Topology
• Grid
• RNS
Filters Contains the following command submenus for toggling
display of specific technology layers (similar to
technology layer filter):
• Wireless
• Circuit switch
• IP
• ATM/FR
• SDH/Sonet
• Optical
Refresh Group Updates the current group with network changes.
Most network changes are immediate. However, a
change to a link requires a refresh.
Changes made using the network definition tool (adding,
deleting, and editing links or NE properties) are not
immediately propagated to other users and require a
refresh to appear.
Go Open Parent Group Opens the parent group of the current group.
Open Top Group Opens the group at the top of the layout.
Network panel
The network objects are represented in the network panel. Right-click the network objects
to perform various commands. Additional actions can be added to any object by other
applications. For information on other applications, press F1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The network panel can display network objects in the following view:
• topology view
• grid view
• RNS view
For more information on the view selection, see “Viewing the managed network”
(p. 1-10).
To choose the Resource Browser graphical view, see “Choosing the Resource Browser
graphical view” (p. 2-259)
Figure 2-6 View selection icons
When you select an NE or a group and then change views, the NE or group remains
selected.
Depending on the view type, the following network objects are displayed in the network
panel (in topology view):
• “Network elements” (p. 2-13)
• “NE shortcuts” (p. 2-19)
• “Links” (p. 2-20)
• “Loop links” (p. 2-21)
• “Groups” (p. 2-21)
• “Images, text and the background image” (p. 2-23)
Network elements
Network elements (NEs) are displayed in all the views. Right-click any NE icon to
display the available commands (Table 2-3, “Resource Browser NE object menu
commands” (p. 2-13)). WMS can be deployed with other applications that add commands
to this menu.
Table 2-3 Resource Browser NE object menu commands
Command Description
Equipment Monitor Opens the NE Equipment monitor window, to display all the NE
hardware components.
(NA for ESE/RSP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-3 Resource Browser NE object menu commands (continued)
Command Description
Show Alarms Opens the Alarm Manager window (or brings an open window to
the top), to display a list of alarms affecting the selected NE(s).
Show Alarms in New Opens a new Alarm Manager window to display a list of alarms
Window affecting the selected NE(s). You can open up to five Alarm
Manager windows.
5620 EMS Opens the 5620 EMS.
(ESE or RSP selected)
Telnet on NE Launches a Telnet on a NE.
Configuration Contains the following submenus:
• Logical and Physical Resource
• Set NEs' OAM Link Administrative State
• MIB (NA for POC, ESE/RSP, and 939x OneBTS):
– Audit (RNC or BTS selected)
– Audit All BTSs (RNC selected)
– Rebuild (RNC or BTS selected)
• Object Editor (RNC, POC, or BTS selected)
• CM XML:
– Export NE
– Export NE Grouping (RNC selected)
• Backup (939x OneBTS selected),
• Enable pre-provisioning Mode (939x OneBTS selected)
• Synchronize (POC selected)
• CM Synchronize (939x OneBTS selected)
• TIL (BTS selected and 939x OneBTS)
• Reset BTSEquipment (BTS selected, NA for 939x OneBTS)
• Reset OneBTSEquipment (939x OneBTS selected)
• RNC Backup (RNC selected)
• Reset RNC (RNC selected)
• Software (RNC or BTS selected)
– Activate
– Download
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-3 Resource Browser NE object menu commands (continued)
Command Description
Fault Contains the following submenus:
(NA for RNC I-node) • FM Audit Request (RNC or BTS selected, NA for 939x
OneBTS)
• Manual FM Audit (SR or SAR selected)
• OSI State Reporting (RNC or BTS selected)
• FM Synchronize (939x OneBTS selected)
Preventive Maintenance Contains the following submenu:
(939x OneBTS selected) • Diagnose
Information Opens an information window on NE
Set Maintenance Mode Sets the selected NE to maintenance mode state, which prevents
On any further alarms from being displayed in the Alarm Manager,
and in the Resource Browser for NEs when Alarm Stream
Management is turned on.
This state does not necessarily mean that maintenance is being
performed on the corresponding NEs. However, you can set this
state in the software to indicate that maintenance is being
performed on the hardware for the corresponding NEs (see
“Maintenance mode” (p. 2-46)).
Set Maintenance Mode Turns off maintenance mode for a selected NE currently in
Off maintenance mode. This resumes the display of alarms in the
Alarm Manager, and in the Resource Browser for NEs.
Schedule Maintenance Enables to schedule the Maintenance Mode
Mode On
Schedule Maintenance Disables to schedule the Maintenance Mode
Mode Off
Depending on the view type, for information on the NE display properties, see:
• Topology view
• Grid view
• RNS view
Topology view
The topology view is the original view provided by the Resource Browser that shows
relative placement of NEs in the network. This view is useful to understand the relative
location of NEs but can be impractical to view large numbers of NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An NE is represented by a square icon in the Network panel. Icons are usually small but
when they are selected or when an alarm is received, they become large (see Figure 2-7,
“NE icons” (p. 2-16)). The information displayed on the icon varies with its size. The
unalarmed color of the icon shows the technology layer it belongs to. See “Technology
layer filter” (p. 2-24).
Figure 2-7 NE icons
When an alarm is received, the icon changes from small to large, an alarm balloon is
added, and the Alarm cues and Alarm indicators (including alarm count and severity,
outline and fill colors) appear or are updated (see Figure 2-8, “Alarmed NE icon”
(p. 2-16)). When the associated alarms are acknowledged or cleared, the large icon
changes back to a small icon. For detailed examples, see Table 2-13, “Details of alarm
information displayed on NEs” (p. 2-41).
Figure 2-8 Alarmed NE icon
Grid view
The grid view enables to manage the entire network in a single view, which provides an
additional flexibility on how best to manage the networks. For domains such as UMTS
access, where there is a large set of NEs to be managed, use the grid view to see easily
within one window the status of the access network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Grid View includes the following capabilities:
• In a Grid View only NEs and groups are displayed. They are automatically displayed
in a grid pattern of uniform rows and columns of objects. All NEs are displayed in
front of all groups. The links interconnecting the NEs are not displayed.
• The grid size of a Grid View can be altered. Changing the grid size enables you to
control the number of objects that are visible in a single window. After selecting a
smaller grid size, the information displayed for each NE or group (alarm balloons,
labels, icons, etc.) is reduced to enable more objects to be visible in the window.
• Information in a Grid View can be sorted and filtered according to certain options
such as sorting both NEs and groups by name, or filtering so that only the ones with
new alarms are displayed.
For information on changing this view, see “Choosing the Resource Browser graphical
view” (p. 2-259).
NEs are positioned from left to right and top to bottom. The width of each row is
determined by the window size. Horizontal scroll bars are not used in grid view. Use the
grid view display to filter and sort NE display. See “Resource Browser display filters”
(p. 2-24).
To configure the amount of NE information displayed, with the Grid Size value select:
• the NE icon size (see Table 2-4, “Grid view NE information” (p. 2-18)) to display
more NEs but with less information, as follows:
– Large (default), which is the same display and behavior as for NE icon in
topology view
– Medium
– Small
– Tiny
As you reduce the Grid Size, the NE icon becomes smaller.
• the size between NEs to fully display long NE names, as follows:
– 400% for NE names with a maximum length of 32 characters
– 200% for NE names with a maximum length of 16 characters
– Large and Medium for NE names of a maximum length of 10 characters
With 400% and 200%, the NE icon display is the same as Large, but the space
between NEs is wider.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The information displayed for each Grid view is shown in the Table 2-4, “Grid view NE
information” (p. 2-18). An x shows that the item is supported for that view.
Table 2-4 Grid view NE information
Grid size Information Displayed

Large Medium Small Tiny
x x x x State and status information

indicated by NE icon border
x x x x Alarm Severity indicated by NE icon
body color
x x x x Alarm acknowledgement
information indicated by the NE
icon border and body color
combination
x x x x Technology layer information
indicated by the NE icon body color
x x x Technology layer and NE type
information indicated by NE symbol
displayed on the NE icon
x x State information indicated by
secondary state icons
x x NE name displayed under the NE
icon
x Alarm count and impact indicated by
text
x Alarm count indicated in alarm
balloons
x NE type information indicated by
the NE short label on the NE icon
x x NE label
x x x Small NEs all the time
x Large NEs when selected and with
New Alarms
x Small NEs when OK and deselected
RNS view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The RNS view shows only RNC and NodeB type NEs. All the other resources are
excluded: NEs that are not RNC nor NodeB, groups, links, text, images, background map,
and NE shortcuts.
The RNS view shows RNCs and NodeBs in groups. Each RNC group consists of one
RNC and its related NodeBs. The RNC is placed at the top-level position for each RNC
group, and NodeBs are displayed below the RNC.
The purpose of the RNS view is to show a large number of RNCs and NodeBs for a quick
overview of the RNS. You can scroll the RNS view horizontally or vertically to see many
groups or a large group. The number of RNC groups in the view is shown in the label
above the network panel in the Resource Browser window. The maximum number of
NEs that can be included in one RNC group is 1000. For very large networks, it is
recommended that more than one RNS view layout be created.
The RNS view has sorting and filtering capabilities. For more information and examples,
see “RNS view display filter and sort” (p. 2-28).
The size of NEs in the RNS view cannot be changed. The size is equivalent to the tiny
size in Grid view, and the information displayed is the same as for the tiny size in Grid
view, except for technology layer information, because all RNS NEs are in the same
technology layer. As a result, the amount of information for each NE does not vary.
The RNS view can be turned on or off in the Access Control window.
Before you can display a large number of NEs in the RNS View, you must create the RNS
layout and groups. In addition, the groups must satisfy the following rules:
• Each group must contain both types of NEs: RNC and NodeB.
• Each group must contain at least one RNC and a related NodeB.
Alcatel-Lucent strongly recommends you apply these rules, but they are not mandatory.
You can open a layout that does not comply with these rules in RNS View mode, but will
not see the expected RNS View; for example, the Resource Panel in RNS View is empty.
For instructions on how to create a group for the RNS View, see “Creating a group for
RNS View” (p. 1-138).
NE shortcuts
An NE shortcut is a duplicate icon of the original NE icon. NE shortcuts enable you to
represent NEs in multiple locations in your network layout. Shortcuts display the same
state information as the original NE icon. All commands that can be performed on an NE,
can be performed on an NE shortcut. All alarm information is duplicated on the shortcut,
but appears only once in the alarm monitoring tools. The NE shortcut icon contains a
small arrow in the bottom left corner (see Figure 2-9, “NE shortcut icon” (p. 2-20)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Right-click on any NE shortcut icon to display available commands, see Table 2-3,
“Resource Browser NE object menu commands” (p. 2-13) and Table 2-5, “NE shortcut
object added menu commands” (p. 2-20) for added commands. WMS can be deployed
with other applications that add commands to this menu.
Figure 2-9 NE shortcut icon
Table 2-5 NE shortcut object added menu commands
Command Description
Go to Original NE in Opens the group containing the original NE in the current window.
Current Window The original NE is selected and the window scrolls to display the
NE.
Go to Original NE in New Opens the group containing the original NE in a new Resource
The original NE is selected and the window scrolls to display the
NE.
Links
Connectivity in the network is represented by links between NEs, which are shown as
colored lines. The color of the link and the icon it displays shows the technology layer it
belongs to, see “Technology layer filter” (p. 2-24).
Links can connect NEs within the same group, or in different groups. When the link
connects to NEs in another group, a link continuation icon (see Figure 2-10, “Link
continuation icon” (p. 2-21)) or an NE shortcut appears at the end of the link.
Double-click a link continuation icon to open the link continuation icon, see “Opening a
link continuation icon” (p. 2-261).
Right-click one or more link continuation icons to display available commands (see Table
2-6, “Link continuation object menu commands” (p. 2-21)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-10 Link continuation icon
Table 2-6 Link continuation object menu commands
Command Description
Open Group Opens the group containing the terminating NE in the current
window.
Open Group in New Opens the group containing the terminating NE in a new Resource
Loop links
A loop link is a link created from an NE to itself. When an NE has a loop link, a loop link
icon appears above the NE in the Resource Browser (see Figure 2-11, “Loop link icon”
(p. 2-21)).
To create a loop link, see “Creating a link from an NE back to itself (loop link)”
(p. 1-142).
Figure 2-11 Loop link icon
Groups
Group icons are displayed in both topology view and grid view. Select one or more group
icons, and right-click to display available commands (see Table 2-7, “Group object menu
commands” (p. 2-22)).
A group represents several network objects. The grouping can be functional (for example,
system-level network components such as ring and linear systems), or representational
(for example, a geographical area or a physical location). Group icons can be rectangular,
polygonal, or linear (see Figure 2-12, “Topology view groups” (p. 2-22)). They use
“Alarm severity colors” (p. 2-37) and Alarm counts as alarm text cues.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Groups can contain individual NEs as well as other groups. Nesting groups within other
groups is a powerful way to present several layers of detail within a network.
When you double-click a group icon, the content of the network panel changes to show
the network objects in that group. When you shift-double-click, a new Resource Browser
window is opened, to show the network objects in that group.
NEs can appear in any group, regardless of where the controller to which the NE belongs
is placed. However, an NE can appear in only one location in the network hierarchy. Use
Figure 2-9, “NE shortcut icon” (p. 2-20) to represent an NE in multiple groups. In
topology view, a group icon can have a unique shape, unalarmed color, fill pattern
(polygon only), and name (see Figure 2-12, “Topology view groups” (p. 2-22)). Grid
view groups are always rectangles and the shape cannot be changed. Grid view group size
and appearance depend on the information level selected. Groups and the hierarchy of
groups are created and edited using the Layout Editor.
Figure 2-12 Topology view groups
Table 2-7 Group object menu commands
Command Description
Open Group Opens the group in the current window.
Open Group in New Opens the group in a new Resource Browser window.
Window
Show Alarms Opens the Alarm Manager window (or brings an open window to
the top), to display a list of alarms affecting the selected NEs or
elements.
Show Alarms in New Opens a new Alarm Manager window to display a list of alarms
Window affecting the selected NEs or elements.
You can open up to five Alarm Manager windows.
Find Opens the Find window to find a resource in the network.
Show Access Control Loads the resources associated with a specific layout group into
the Access Control window.
You must have appropriate permission settings to see this
command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-8 Grid view Group information
Grid size Information displayed

Large Med. Small Tiny
x x x State and status information indicated by
group icon border
x x x x Alarm information indicated by the group
icon body color
x x x x Alarm acknowledgement information
indicated by the group icon border and body
color combination
x x x State information indicated by secondary
state icons
x x Group name displayed under the group icon
x x Alarm count and impact indicated by text
x Alarm count indicated in alarm balloons
Images, text and the background image

When in Topology view, images and text are part of the layout displayed in the Network
panel. They can be placed next to network objects, and provide information about these
objects, but are not connected to those objects. All images and text are added using the
Layout Editor.
The background image is a special kind of image that can be turned on and off. When it is
turned on, it always appears behind all other objects in the Network panel. Typically, the
background image is a map, although any GIF or JPEG file can be used.
Right-click the Network Panel background, when no object is selected, to access the
object menu commands (see Table 2-9, “Network panel object menu commands”
(p. 2-23)).
Table 2-9 Network panel object menu commands
Command Description
Open Parent Group Opens the parent group in the current window (if you are in the
parent group, a beep sounds and the display does not change).
Refresh Group Updates the current Resource Browser window with the latest
network layout edits.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-9 Network panel object menu commands (continued)
Command Description
Background Displays background image (Topology view only). This is a global
option: all Resource Browser windows display the background
when this command is selected.
If no background image is specified for a layout, setting this
command has no effect.
Grid Size Selects the grid size (Grid view only).
Grid size can be Large, Medium, Small, or Tiny.
Resource Browser display filters

In both topology view and grid view, you can filter the display of NEs based on
technology type. See “Technology layer filter” (p. 2-24). In grid view, display of NEs and
groups is more flexible as the network connectivity information is removed. You can sort
and filter the grid view display using a number of criteria. See “Grid view display filter
and sort” (p. 2-26).
Technology layer filter
NEs and links support particular technologies. For example, some NEs and links support
narrowband switching, others support IP. The network management platform for WMS
organizes the technologies it supports into layers. Six technology layers are supported:
• Wireless
• Circuit Switching (Narrowband Switching)
• IP
• ATM/Frame Relay (Wideband Switching)
• SDH/SONET
• Optical
NEs can be in more than one technology layer. Links are always in a single layer (see
Figure 2-13, “Technology layer filter” (p. 2-25)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-13 Technology layer filter
This concept allows the Resource Browser to present a unified view of network
resources from multiple technology layers in the Network panel. The color of a node or
link in the network panel shows the technology layer it belongs to.
The Technology layer filter provides controls to show or hide the various technology
layers (see Figure 2-14, “Show/Hide layer check boxes” (p. 2-25)).
Figure 2-14 Show/Hide layer check boxes
The network resources shown or hidden in the network panel are determined by the
technology layers selected in the Technology layer filter. The following rules determine if
an individual network resource is displayed:
• An NE is visible if it is in a technology layer that is currently selected.
• An NE that has no technology layer information associated with it is visible only if all
the technology layers are selected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• A link is visible if it connects two currently visible NEs or if it connects one visible
NE and an NE in another group, and
– it is in a technology layer that is currently selected and it is a physical resource
(for example, a SONET cable), or
– it is a virtual link and the technology layer it belongs to is the lowest technology
layer currently selected in the filter (for example a virtual SONET link is
displayed if SDH/SONET is selected and Optical is not selected)
• Group objects, text objects, images, and backgrounds are always visible, regardless of
which technology layers are currently selected.
• Link continuations are displayed according to the same rules as links.
Whenever a Resource Browser window is opened, all layers are selected in the
Technology layer filter.
You can change the technology layer for an NE or a link. See “Changing the technology
layer and physicality of a link” (p. 1-144) and “Changing the technology layer of an NE”
(p. 1-146).
On occasion, NEs may appear regardless of the Technology layer filter settings. This
occurs only when the Topology server that stores layer information is not functioning. To
check this, select an NE and open the Details pane. In this case, you see a message
"Layers: Not Available". Inform your system administrator that the Topology server is not
available.
Grid view display filter and sort
When you select grid view, additional display options become available below the
technology layer filter (see Figure 2-15, “Grid view display options” (p. 2-26)). See Table
2-10, “Grid view display options” (p. 2-27) for a description of each display option.
Figure 2-15 Grid view display options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-10 Grid view display options
Display option Description

Grid Size The grid size determines the amount of information displayed on each NE
icon.
The smaller the grid size, the smaller the space between NE icons, and the
smaller NE icon, resulting in a larger number of NEs displayed in the
Network Panel with less information for each NE. The grid sizes are:
• 400%
• 200%
• Large
• Medium
• Small
• Tiny
See Grid view under “Network elements” (p. 2-13) for a description of the
information displayed at each level.
Sort NEs and groups are sorted from left to right and top to bottom.
You can sort by:
• Name: NE and group name in alphabetical order
When an NE is provisioned with a valid local name, the NE can be
sorted by its local language name. Different sorting rules apply to
different languages
• Severity: alarm severity
You can sort in:
• ascending order
• descending order
The Default order is the order defined by the user when the layout was last
saved. This order is important for the user as it is his only stable NE
positioning reference in the Layout. Use it to find a given NE in a given
position in the grid when needed. If Default order is selected, the position
of the NEs does not change when the Alarm State and Status of the NEs
changes if the Auto-refresh option is selected or if the Refresh command is
used.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-10 Grid view display options (continued)

Filter on When the Filter on box is cleared, there is no filtering of NEs and groups: all
are displayed. When the box is selected, the display of NEs and groups is
limited according to one of the following selections:
• All alarms: all NEs and groups with acknowledged or unacknowledged
alarms
• New alarms: all NEs and groups with at least one unacknowledged
alarm, plus any number of acknowledged alarms
• Acknowledged alarms: all NEs and groups with at least one
acknowledged alarm, plus any number of unacknowledged alarms
• No alarms: all
NEs and groups with no alarms NEs and groups with alarms with unknown
severity are treated as if they have no alarms.
Auto-refresh When the grid view is sorted by alarm severity or a filter is applied, the
display updates dynamically when the Auto-refresh box is selected.
Currently selected items can scroll out of view. To maintain a stable view,
deselect the box. When the box is cleared, Refresh is enabled.
RNS view display filter and sort

You can sort NodeBs by name or by alarm severity, by ascending or descending order,
and you can filter NEs by alarm criteria. When you sort or filter the NodeBs, the
operation is applied to the NodeBs within each RNS group. The sort or filter operation
does not change how the RNC and NodeBs are grouped. The groupings of RNCs and
their related NodeBs always remain the same.
With the RNS view, the first icon row of each cluster represents the RNCs. The second
icon row represents the NodeBs.
Figure 2-16, “NEs sorted by name in RNS view” (p. 2-29) shows the results of sorting by
NodeBs by name. The groupings of RNCs with their related NodeBs do not change
following the sorting.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-16 NEs sorted by name in RNS view
Figure 2-17, “NEs sorted by severity in RNS view” (p. 2-30) shows the results of sorting
NodeBs by descending severity.
In the second row of each cluster, the NEs are placed in order from left to right (and from
top to bottom). The NEs with the highest severity (sort by descending order selected) of
alarms are placed in the top-left corner. To the right (and below) are the NEs with
decreasing alarm severity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-17 NEs sorted by severity in RNS view
Additional information about the RNS view filtering and sorting functionality is provided
below:
• The RNS View does not have technology layer filtering, because all NEs are in the
same technology layer.
• The RNCs and the RNC groups are always sorted in order of the RNC name. The
RNCs remain in the network panel display; they are not filtered out.
• The sorting and filtering for the RNC view is different from that of the Grid View.
When you select RNS view, additional display options become available as shown in the
following figure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-18 RNS view sort and filter options
Table 2-11 RNS view display options

In Focus When you move the mouse cursor to an item in the RNS view, the In Focus
field provides the following details about the selected item:
• Name: the NE name or Local name if applicable
• RNS Info: describes the relationship between the RNC and the NodeBs;
for example, it can show the name of the related RNC
• Total Alarm Count: available when Maintenance mode is off, and
indicates the number of alarms at the highest severity
• Maintenance Mode: on or off
Sort NodeB by NEs are sorted from left to right and top to bottom. You can sort by:
• Name: NE name in alphabetical order When an NE is provisioned with a
valid local name, the NE can be sorted by its local language name.
Different sorting rules apply to different languages
• Severity: alarm severity (default sort order)
You can sort in:
• ascending order
• descending order
Filter NodeB on When the Filter on box is unchecked, there is no filtering of NEs: all are
displayed. When the box is checked, the display of NEs is limited according
to one of the following selections:
• All alarms: all NEs with acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms
• New alarms: all NEs with at least one unacknowledged alarm, plus any
number of acknowledged alarms
• Acknowledged alarms: all NEs with at least one acknowledged alarm,
plus any number of unacknowledged alarms
• No alarms: all
NEs with no alarms NEs with indeterminate alarms are treated as if they
have no alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-11 RNS view display options (continued)

Auto-refresh When the RNS view is sorted by alarm severity or a filter is applied, the
display updates dynamically when the Auto-refresh box is checked.
Currently selected items may scroll out of view. To maintain a stable view,
deselect the box. When the box is unchecked, Refresh is enabled.
Details pane
The Details pane is a collapsible area that can be shown and hidden by toggling the
show/hide arrow between the Network panel and Details pane. The Details pane includes:
• a “General tab” (p. 2-32)
• an “Annotation tab” (p. 2-33)
General tab
The General tab (see Figure 2-19, “Details pane: General tab” (p. 2-33)) provides
information on the object or objects currently selected in the Network panel. The
information in the tab is not updated in real-time. It is refreshed only when you change
the current selection in the Network panel. The message Not Available is displayed when
no value for an item is provided to WMS. This may not be a problem, as the cause can be
unsupported data from a device adapter, or an unsupported application. The contents of
the General tab is determined by the current selection in the Network panel, when:
• a single NE is selected, information about the NE is provided, if it is available to the
Resource Browser (see Table 2-12, “NE detailed information” (p. 2-32)). When an
NE shortcut is selected, the information refers to the original NE.
• multiple objects are selected in the topology view, the number of NEs, groups, links,
and other objects currently selected is listed.
• multiple objects are selected in the grid view, the counts displayed for objects other
than NEs and groups are 0.
• a single group, link, text block, or image is selected, no information is provided.
Table 2-12 NE detailed information
Information Description
Name NE name
Local Name NE local name
Domain Name of the domain that monitors this NE
Layers Listing of the technology layers (by icon) the NE is part of
Type NE type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-12 NE detailed information (continued)
Information Description
Vendor NE manufacturer name
S/W version Software version currently running on the NE
New Id NE Identification
NE Addr NE IP address in dotted quad format or host name
Controller Addr IP address of the main server that controls this NE
State Operational and administrative state of the NE
Figure 2-19 Details pane: General tab
Annotation tab
The Annotation tab displays descriptive annotations on the object currently selected in
the Network panel. Annotations can be created and edited by opening a layout for editing
in the Layout Editor. When an NE shortcut is selected, the annotation refers to the
original NE. For information on:
• languages supported in the Annotation tab, see “Local language display setting ”
(p. 1-78).
• searching by annotation, see “Search criteria” (p. 1-14).
User preferences
When the Resource Browser is first opened, the default view is Topology View. If you
change to a different view, close, and reopen the Resource Browser; the view setting is
maintained.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When you switch the view to RNS view, close and reopen the Resource Browser; the
RNS view is displayed.
The default settings when the Resource Browser is first opened are as follows:
• sorting: by severity
• filtering selection: off
• filtering criteria: all alarms
• auto-refresh: on
• Grid View icon size: large
If you change any of the above settings, they are saved as user preference settings.
Example:
When you change the icon size to medium in Grid View, the setting is maintained the next
time you open the Resource Browser.
The following settings are saved for each user in Topology View, Grid View, and RNS
View:
• sorting
• filtering
• manual refresh/auto refresh
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm display
Overview
The alarm indicators appear in numerous Alarm display tools that alert you to faults in the
managed network (see Figure 2-20, “Alarm monitoring displays” (p. 2-36)).
• The Figure 1-11, “UTRAN Service View window” (p. 1-22) shows in a table format
alarm counts as well as status counts on radio cells and interfaces.
• The “Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators” (p. 2-53) show a summary of
the alarms in the current layout.
• The “Navigator Resources alarm column” (p. 2-54) shows a summary of the alarms in
each group of the layout.
• The “Resource Browser alarm indicators” (p. 2-55) show alarms on the group and NE
icons
• The “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57) shows an alarm summary for alarms of all severity
levels, and details on each alarm that is displayed (see Figure 2-20, “Alarm
monitoring displays” (p. 2-36)). There is no alarm summary for alarms of unknown
severity. The Alarm Manager is used to investigate, acknowledge, unacknowledge,
and manually clear alarms.
You might not be able to view all alarms if access permissions have not been reset
following the addition of a new server instance, or the moving of NEs from one server to
another one.
Alarm monitoring is an important function that involves many of the displays and display
elements. The fault management tools use alarm indicators to identify the alarm state for
monitored NEs. The alarm indicators use various cues to indicate the presence of active
(uncleared) alarms. Each indicator provides a different range of alarm summaries. For
details on alarm display, see:
• “Alarm cues” (p. 2-36)
• “Tooltips showing alarm count details” (p. 2-39)
• “Loss of communication indicator” (p. 2-40)
• Table 2-13, “Details of alarm information displayed on NEs” (p. 2-41)
• “Node state” (p. 2-42)
• “OSI Node state” (p. 2-44)
• “Maintenance mode” (p. 2-46)
• “Mapping NE alarm types to 9353 WMS alarm types” (p. 2-52)
• “Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators” (p. 2-53)
• “Navigator Resources alarm column” (p. 2-54)
• “Resource Browser alarm indicators” (p. 2-55)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57)
• See also “Local language display setting ” (p. 1-78)
Figure 2-20 Alarm monitoring displays
Alarm cues
Alarm cues are the visual means by which the alarm indicators of the various Alarm
displays convey alarm information. Each alarm display differs to some degree in the
information that is displayed, but all alarm indicators use:
• “Alarm severity colors” (p. 2-37)
• “Alarm text cues” (p. 2-38)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm severity colors
When there are no alarms to display, alarm indicators display with Background alarm
severity colors. When alarms occur, colors indicate the severity of the alarm. You can use
the Default alarm severity colors or Configure alarm severity colors.
Alarm indicators can use outline and fill colors:
• outline colors, which use the alarm severity colors to indicate the highest severity
level of the active alarms. Alarm balloons do not use outline colors as they appear
only for new alarms.
• fill colors, which use the alarm severity colors to indicate the highest severity level of
the unacknowledged alarms.
Background alarm severity colors
The background color when there are no alarms appears as follows:
• gray for the “Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators” (p. 2-53), and group
icons of the “Resource Browser alarm indicators” (p. 2-55)
• white for the “Navigator Resources alarm column” (p. 2-54)
• the assigned technology layer color for NEs
The background color can vary from platform to platform and according to the colors
defined in your window manager.
Default alarm severity colors
The default colors used to indicate alarm severities are as follows:
• red: critical (C), or major alarms (M)
• orange: minor alarms (m)
• yellow: warning alarms (w)
• background color: no alarms
• grey: unknown severity
The default colors may have been changed for your network.
Configure alarm severity colors
The Figure 2-21, “Alarm Color Chooser window” (p. 2-38) window enables you to
configure the alarm severity color display, see “Configuring alarm severity colors”
(p. 2-218).
You must have the appropriate permission settings to open the tool. Alarm severity colors
apply globally to all users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-21 Alarm Color Chooser window
Alarm text cues

Alarm indicators use the following text cues:
• Alarm counts indicates the number of active alarms.
• Alarm severity letter indicates the highest severity level of active alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• A plus sign, which indicates the presence of alarms of a lower severity level in
addition to the highest severity level indicated by the color and letter.
• “Tooltips showing alarm count details” (p. 2-39) (if enabled), which indicates the
number of alarms for each severity
Alarm counts
The alarm counts within an alarm balloon include new alarms only. Alarm counts within
an alarm balloon are reduced as alarms are acknowledged or cleared. Other alarm
indicator alarm counts are reduced only when alarms are cleared.
Alarm counts are reduced by the following actions:
• filtering the Technology Layer
• clearing alarms (manual alarm clears)
• creating Alarm Manager filters
• creating and activating rules for managing the alarm stream
• setting NEs to Maintenance Mode
• imposing limits on system configuration
The display of a large number of alarms can have a negative impact on performance.
When you open a network layout for the first time, you are asked to define the maximum
number of alarms that can be displayed. See “Setting the alarm display limit” (p. 1-19).
You might not be able to view all alarms if access permissions are not reset following the
addition of a new server instance, or the moving of NEs from one server to another.
Alarm severity letter
The following letters are used to indicate severity level:
• C for Critical alarms
• M for Major alarms
• m for minor alarms
• w for warning alarms
Alarms with an unknown severity do not have a letter.
Tooltips showing alarm count details

If tooltips are enabled, alarm count details are displayed for NEs and groups. To see the
tooltips, move the mouse cursor to the NE or group object, or to the alarm balloon. The
tooltips show the number of alarms at each alarm severity for new and outstanding
alarms. Tooltips are not available for the RNS view. However, if you move the mouse
cursor to an NE in the RNS view, the In Focus field displays the details on that NE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loss of communication indicator
When an NE becomes unreachable, the loss of communication is indicated by:
• the loss of communication icon
• the color of the NE in the Resource Browser
The network administrator can configure the color that indicates the loss of
communication.
The loss of communication icon appears in the 9353 WMS window status bar and in the
Network Banner (see Figure 2-22, “Loss of communication indicator” (p. 2-40)). If the
loss of communication indicators are active in both the Network Banner and the 9353
WMS window status bar, alarm counts may not be accurate.
Figure 2-22 Loss of communication indicator
Alarm information displayed on NEs

Alarm information appears directly on the NEs and group icons in the Resource
Browser. The State Change information can be observed at this level
The icon color indicates if the link between the NE and the Access OAM is established, if
not, the icon color is blue. If the OAM link is established, alarms and events can go
through the Access OAM module and the icon color changes depending on the severity of
the NE alarm.
This color coding allows you to identify problems at a glance.
A total count of the highest severity alarms is displayed on the main icon; for example
"1C" indicates that there is one critical alarm. If there are also alarms of a lower severity,
then this is indicated by a "+" sign.
Alarm balloons indicate the number of new alarms for an NE that have not yet been
acknowledged by the user. Alarm counts are displayed in the same way on the main icon.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples are detailed in the Table 2-13, “Details of alarm information displayed on NEs”
(p. 2-41) table.
When one or more alarms are correlated and a root cause identified, the icon displays a
light bulb. This indicator is only available if the optional Problem Advisor (PA) feature is
installed.
Table 2-13 Details of alarm information displayed on NEs
Icon Main icon information Balloon information
• The blue icon color 1w indicates that:

indicates that the • the warning alarm is not
communication link acknowledged
between this BTS and the
Access OAM is lost
• The yellow icon border
indicates that this BTS
includes warning alarm(s)
• 1w indicates that this BTS
has one warning alarm only
11C+ indicates that this RNC 9C+ indicates that:
includes: • 9 critical alarms are not
• 11 critical alarms acknowledged (2 critical
• alarm(s) of lower severity alarms have been
acknowledged)
• alarm(s) of lower severity
are not acknowledged
1C+ indicates that this BTS 1M indicates that:

includes: • one major alarm is not
• one critical alarm acknowledged
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-13 Details of alarm information displayed on NEs (continued)
Icon Main icon information Balloon information
• The reduced size icon No balloons indicate that all the

shows that all of the BTS alarms are acknowledged
alarms are acknowledged
• The red border indicated
that the BTS includes
critical or major alarms
Click the icon to display the
full-size icon.
7M+ indicates that this BTS
includes:
• seven major alarms
Node state
Node state display is available for NEs that report their state label and severity. UTRAN
NEs do not support node state reporting.
Node state indicators identify the raw state information for active alarms on data NEs
monitored by the 9353 WMS. The indicators look like small boxes containing text labels
that are displayed in the top corner of a node icon (see Figure 2-23, “Node state display”
(p. 2-42)).
Figure 2-23 Node state display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data NEs usually operate with a high rate of active alarms. The alarm notification
associated with data NEs can be distracting when you perform network surveillance for
the entire network. Use the node state display for data NEs to:
• display a color-coded, text state label on the NE
– the color represents the state severity
• minimize the alarm highlighting on the NE, if any
– color highlighting changes from full highlighting of the NE to a highlighted
border
– alarm balloon and alarm count display are still active
• display technology layer filter color associated with the NE, if any
Node state labels use the following colors to indicate the state severity:
• red: critical and major alarms
• orange: minor alarms
• yellow: warning alarms
• grey: no alarms
Colors for these indicators are always based on the node state severity colors. They are
not affected by alarm color configuration, and they are independent of the managed or
unmanaged alarm stream.
The Table 2-14, “Node state labels” (p. 2-43) table details the node state display text
labels.
Table 2-14 Node state labels
9353 State value Description

WMS
label
UNK unknown 9353 WMS is not receiving state information from the NE
INS in-service The NE is operational
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSI Node state
9353 WMS uses OSI node state indicators to identify the operational, usage, and
administrative state for all monitored NEs. The OSI node state is determined by the
values of these states as described in the following table:
Table 2-15 OSI node state attributes
OSI node Values NE condition

state
attributes
Operational Disabled Inoperable
Enabled Operable
Usage Idle Not in use (that is, carrying traffic)
Active In use
Busy In use with no spare capacity
Administra- Unlocked Permitted to perform user services
tive Locked Administratively prohibited from performing user services
Shutting Servicing current users but not accepting new traffic
down
The eight OSI node states are detailed in the following table:
Table 2-16 OSI node states
NE display OSI node state attributes Description

Status Usage Admin.
Disabled Idle Unlocked The resource is not available or depends
on another source that is not available.
Disabled Idle Locked The resource is not available and is

administratively prohibited from
performing user services.
Enabled Idle Unlocked The resource is available and has the

capacity to accept services from another
source.
Enabled Idle Locked The resource is available but is
administratively prohibited from
performing user services.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-16 OSI node states (continued)

Status Usage Admin.
Enabled Active Unlocked The resource is in use, operable, and
available.
Enabled Active Shutting The resource is administratively

down permitted to existing users only (the
resource is shedding traffic)
Enabled Busy Unlocked The resource is in use with no spare

capacity.
Enabled Busy Shutting The resource is in use with no spare

down capacity (the resource is shedding traffic)
Some NEs do not report usage state information. 9353 WMS uses the operational and
administrative state values to determine the probable usage state for the NE as described
in the following table:
Table 2-17 OSI node states for NEs not reporting usage state information

Operational Usage
Value assumed Value ignored
Disabled Idle None Unlocked
Disabled Idle None Locked
Enabled Idle None Locked
Enabled Active Idle, Busy Unlocked
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-17 OSI node states for NEs not reporting usage state information
(continued)

Operational Usage
Value assumed Value ignored
Enabled Active Busy Shutting down
When an NE reports state information that does not match one of the OSI node states, the
default node state that appears is:
• operational: enabled
• usage: active
• administrative: unlocked
If more than two node state indicators apply to a single NE, the multiple indicators are
replaced by one Information indicator. The italicized Information indicator reduces the
clutter caused by multiple indicators.
Example:
When the locked, busy, and maintenance mode indicators apply to a single NE, they are
replaced by the Information indicator.
Clicking the Information indicator displays the information window, which provides text
descriptions of the indicators that are summarized by the Information indicator. If an NE
is at the edge of a layout, the information window can be only partially displayed. In this
case, scroll to see the full contents of the information window.
Maintenance mode
Set an NE to maintenance mode to prevent any further alarms from being displayed in the
Alarm Manager, and in the Resource Browser for NEs. Maintenance mode is a state that
indicates that the NE is not reporting alarms. It does not necessarily mean that
maintenance is being performed, and does not require any additional actions.
Example:
When you perform an upgrade while NEs are in maintenance mode, no actions are
required following the upgrade.
When an NE is in maintenance mode, a small, white hand icon is displayed in the top left
corner of the NE icon or the NE shortcut icon.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If any of the NEs in a group are in maintenance mode, the white-hand Maintenance Mode
icon is displayed on the group, as well as on the NEs in the group. If there are any NE
shortcuts in maintenance mode in a group, the Maintenance Mode icon is displayed on
the group of the original NE.
The maintenance mode icon is:
• white, when maintenance mode is enabled for the NE (see Figure 2-24, “Maintenance
Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management On” (p. 2-47))
• grey, when the NE is in the Pending state; that is, maintenance mode is neither on nor
off for the NE (see Figure 2-25, “Maintenance Mode icon in pending state” (p. 2-48))
When Alarm Stream Management is enabled:
• the NE icon displays the Not Reporting label-NR (see Figure 2-24, “Maintenance
Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management On” (p. 2-47)
• alarms for NEs in maintenance mode are not displayed in the Alarm Manager or in
the Resource Browser for NEs
• alarm counts are reflected accordingly; they are reduced in the Utran Service View,
Alarm Manager, Navigator, Network Health indicator, an Network Banner
• the only available alarm management actions are Inhibit and Modify Severity
When Alarm Stream Management is disabled:
• the maintenance mode icon is displayed, but the NR label is not displayed, and all
alarms are reported (see Figure 2-26, “Maintenance Mode icon when enabled and
Alarm Stream Management off” (p. 2-48),
• alarm counts are increased in the Utran Service View, Alarm Manager, Navigator,
Network Health indicator, and Network Banner.
When you disable maintenance mode, the maintenance mode icon disappears, as does the
NR label. The display of alarms resumes in the Alarm Manager window. Maintenance
mode does not apply to the Historical Fault Browser application.
Figure 2-24 Maintenance Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management
On
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-25 Maintenance Mode icon in pending state
Figure 2-26 Maintenance Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management
off
You can Schedule the Maintenance Mode ON/OFF, see:

• Figure 2-27, “Schedule Maintenance Mode ON window” (p. 2-49)
• Figure 2-28, “Schedule Maintenance Mode OFF window” (p. 2-51)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-27 Schedule Maintenance Mode ON window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Schedule Maintenance Mode ON window includes:
• a Schedule Information pane, see details in Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window”
(p. 3-136) window.
• a Schedule Detail pane, see details in Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window”
(p. 3-136) window.
• a Maintenance Information pane:
– Maintenance Duration, which enables to enter the estimated duration of the
maintenance task. This duration is for information purpose only.
– Comment, which enables to enter information on the Maintenance task.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-28 Schedule Maintenance Mode OFF window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Schedule Maintenance Mode OFF window includes:

• a Schedule Information pane:
– the Task Type, which details the type of action to schedule.
– the Recurrence option value is Once, the job is launched at a specific date and
time:
– Start Time (mandatory), which enables to define or clear the schedule starting
time with a calendar.
–NN Estimated Duration(min) (optional), which enables to book a duration in
the Job Scheduler calendar. The default value is 60 minutes.
– Reminder, which enables to send a reminder Email xx minute(s) before the job is
launched.
This option is available for Unix users declared in the oamgroup only.
• a Schedule Detail pane, see details in Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window”
(p. 3-136) window.
• a Maintenance Information pane:
– Comment, which enables to enter information on the Maintenance task.
Mapping NE alarm types to 9353 WMS alarm types

Use the following table when viewing NE alarms. The table shows the mapping between
the name that appears in NE fault systems and the name that appears as an alarm type on
the 9353 WMS.
Table 2-18 Mapping NE alarm types to 9353 WMS alarm types
NE alarm type 9353 WMS alarm type

communicationsAlarm TmnCommunicationAlarm
communications TmnCommunicationAlarm
environmentalAlarm TmnEnvironmentalAlarm
environmental TmnEnvironmentalAlarm
equipmentAlarm TmnEquipmentAlarm
equipment TmnEquipmentAlarm
qualityOfServiceAlarm TmnQualityOfServiceAlarm
qualityOfService TmnQualityOfServiceAlarm
processingErrorAlarm TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
processingError TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
processing TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-18 Mapping NE alarm types to 9353 WMS alarm types (continued)
NE alarm type 9353 WMS alarm type

security TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
operator TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
debug TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
unknown TmnProcessingErrorAlarm
Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators

The Network Banner is the highest-level alert window. It is designed as a small first-alert
panel, and reports a real-time summary of alarm counts for the entire layout in current use
(see Figure 2-29, “Network banner” (p. 2-54)). It uses the same alarm color coding and
text convention as the Alarm Manager and Resource Browser to display alarms.
To open the Network Banner, see “Opening the alarm Network Banner” (p. 2-247).
The Network Banner remains displayed when the 9353 WMS window is minimized. Use
it when you want to minimize the 9353 WMS window to do other work, and want to
continue to monitor the alarm state.
To display the “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57) window with all active alarms in the network
displayed, click Details in the Network Banner. If the Alarm Manager window is already
open, the alarms that were displayed in it are replaced by these alarms.
The Status bar at the bottom of the 9353 WMS window contains alarm counts for each
alarm severity level for the entire layout in current use. The Figure 2-30, “9353 WMS
window status bar” (p. 2-54) shows the same information as the Figure 2-29, “Network
banner” (p. 2-54), for detailed information see “Status bar” (p. 1-57).
Attention: If the “Loss of communication indicator” (p. 2-40) are active in the
Network Banner and 9353 WMS window status bar, alarm counts may not be
accurate.
As there is an indicator for each alarm severity, the alarm indicators in both the Network
banner and the status bar area are modified from the standard alarm display as follows:
• “Alarm severity colors” (p. 2-37) - outline color does not change and fill color
changes to grey only when there are no active alarms
• “Alarm text cues” (p. 2-38) - the plus sign is not needed because there is an alarm
count for critical, major, minor, and warning severity levels. There is no count for
alarms of unknown severity.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-29 Network banner
Figure 2-30 9353 WMS window status bar
Navigator Resources alarm column

Alarm information appears in the left column of the Resources tab in the Navigator (see
Figure 2-31, “Navigator Resources alarm column” (p. 2-55)). The alarm information
displayed is for the adjacent groups in the Network tree. Expanding and collapsing groups
with subgroups has the following effect on the alarm information that is displayed:
• Expanding a group that has subgroups with alarms decreases the alarm information
displayed in the parent group by subtracting alarm information for the NEs in its
subgroups.
• The expanded subgroups have adjacent indicators displaying alarm information for
their NEs.
• Collapsing the view of subgroups increases the alarm information displayed in the
parent group by adding all alarm information for the NEs in the subgroups.
The Navigator Resources alarm column displays one count for all network alarm
severities (alarms of unknown severity do not appear in this total). To display the “Alarm
Manager” (p. 2-57) with the alarms for the selected group displayed, right-click a group
alarm indicator and select Show alarms. If the Alarm Manager is already open, the alarms
that were displayed in it are replaced by these alarms. To open a new window, select
Show Alarms in New Window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-31 Navigator Resources alarm column
Resource Browser alarm indicators

Group and NE icons in the Resource Browser use standard “Alarm cues” (p. 2-36) to
convey alarm information about that group or NE. In addition, alarm balloons appear on
these icons to emphasize the presence, severity, and number of new alarms (see Figure
2-32, “Resource Browser alarm indicators” (p. 2-55)). When working in grid view with a
small grid size, alarm cues are reduced.
Figure 2-32 Resource Browser alarm indicators
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Manager
Overview
The Alarm Manager provides a list of active alarms for a card, a board, a single NE, a
specific set of NEs that you defined, all the NEs within a group, or all the NEs in the
current layout.
To open the Alarm Manager window, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing
alarms” (p. 2-220).
The alarms are updated automatically or on demand. In automatic mode, alarms are
updated when a new alarm is raised, an existing alarm is cleared at the NE, or an alarm is
acknowledged or cleared by another user.
Alarm Management functions enable to manage the alarm feed displayed in the Alarm
Manager. The goal is to reduce the number of redundant or insignificant alarms
displayed. The content of the alarm feed is controlled by a set of rules in the Fault
Management Building Block (FMBB). For more information on FMBB, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Fault Management,
9YZ-04157-0010-ACZZA. The raw alarm feed continues to be available to a controlled
set of users.
For more details on rules for alarm management, see Section “Action pane” (p. 2-93).
The 9353 WMS indicates graphically which alarms are acknowledged through a colored
border displayed around the NE and a number written inside the main icon. Alarms that
are not acknowledged have a solid color alarm balloon, in the appropriate color for the
alarm severity, and icons for acknowledged alarms are displayed with a colored border
only.
Some NEs can generate alarms without generating alarm clear notifications. For these
NEs, you can manually clear these alarms using the same mechanism described above for
alarm acknowledgement. This option is only available for those alarms that require
manual alarm clearing, preventing you from clearing other valid, active alarms.
For detailed information on alarm management, see
• “Alarm Manager description” (p. 2-58)
• “Advanced Filters window” (p. 2-78)
• “Manage advanced filters” (p. 2-85)
• “Manage the alarm stream sent from the server” (p. 2-87)
• “Alarm Stream Management window” (p. 2-88)
• “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window” (p. 2-89)
• “Rule Definition window” (p. 2-91)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Configuring Application Launch for alarm management” (p. 2-127)
• “Alarm Correlation” (p. 2-132)
Alarm Manager description

The Alarm Manager window displays a list of alarms for the selected NEs, it includes:
• “Menu bar” (p. 2-59)
• “Alarm list” (p. 2-61)
• “Alarm List options pane” (p. 2-65)
• “Alarm Details” (p. 2-66)
• “Alarm Record Viewer window” (p. 2-71)
• “Multiple Alarm Manager windows” (p. 2-72)
• “Alarm Manager window preferences” (p. 2-75)
• “Alarm List display preferences” (p. 2-75)
You can open the “Alarm Record Viewer window” (p. 2-71) window, the Figure 2-44,
“Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window” (p. 2-79) window, and the “Advanced
Filters window” (p. 2-78) window from the Figure 2-33, “Alarm Manager window”
(p. 2-59).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-33 Alarm Manager window
Menu bar
The Alarm Manager menu bar contains commands (items in the menus may not always
be selectable) detailed in the following table:
Table 2-19 Alarm Manager menu bar

File Close Closes the Alarm Manager window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-19 Alarm Manager menu bar (continued)

Actions Acknowledge Acknowledges an alarm
Unacknowledge Unacknowledges a previously acknowledged alarm
Manual Alarm Clear Manually clears an alarm
Open Group Opens the group that the alarm is part of
View Raw Details Opens the Alarm Record Viewer
Sort Alarm List Opens the Sort Alarm List window
Expand Selected Groups Opens another Alarm Manager window that
in New Window displays the selected groups only, which includes
(optional) all the alarms with the same correlation group Id
Uncorrelated alarms are not displayed
Expand Selected Groups Update the Alarm Manager window that displays
in Current Window the selected groups only, which includes all the
(optional) alarms with the same correlation group Id
Uncorrelated alarms are still displayed
Expand All Groups in New Opens another Alarm Manager window that
Window displays all groups, which includes all the alarms
(optional) with the same correlation group Id
Uncorrelated alarms are not displayed
Expand All Groups in Update the Alarm Manager window that displays
Current Window all groups, which includes all the alarms with the
(optional) same correlation group Id
Uncorrelated alarms are still displayed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-34 Trouble Ticket information
For detailed information on Trouble Ticketing, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Management

System - Trouble Ticketing, 411-5221-212.
Alarm list
The Alarm List provides a one-row summary for each alarm (see Table 2-20, “Alarm list
information” (p. 2-62) table). To perform actions from the Alarm List, right-click an
alarm in the list and select one of the following menu commands:
• Acknowledge
• Unacknowledge
• Manual Alarm Clear
• Open Group
• View Raw Details
• Expand Selected Groups in New Window, if this application is installed only
• Expand Selected Groups in Current Window, if this application is installed only
• OSI State Reporting
• Selected Item Help
• Create Trouble Ticket (when the Trouble Ticketing application is installed only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on these commands, see:
• “Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms” (p. 2-234)
• “Manually clearing an alarm” (p. 2-228)
• “Viewing raw alarm details” (p. 2-225)
• “Alarm Correlation” (p. 2-132)
• “Equipment monitor” (p. 2-138)
• “Notifications Log Tool” (p. 2-197)
• “OSI State Reporting” (p. 2-190)
Table 2-20 Alarm list information
Column Description
Alarm status An alarm balloon icon that is color-coded to the “Alarm severity
colors” (p. 2-37).
The regular and bold font styles represent acknowledged and
unacknowledged alarms respectively to display the alarms. There
is no difference in acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms
based on the alarm status.
Note Displays an icon when an annotation is defined for the alarm type
related to the selected alarm.
Helps you to identify that an annotation on this alarm type exists.
Alarm Code Defines the alarm identification number with the following format:
• <equipment type>_<4 digits (0-9)>_<5 digits (0-9)>
For more information on the format, see “Customizing external
alarms” (p. 2-289).
The Alarm Code is also named Fault Code.
NE ID Defines the ID of the NEs the alarm is associated with.
NE Name Defines the name of the NE the alarm is associated with.
Correlation Group Id Identifies an alarm group that are linked to the same root cause.
This column appears if the Alarm Correlation application is
installed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-20 Alarm list information (continued)
Column Description
Correlation Alarm type Alarms are classified as follows:
• PrimaryMain, which designates the alarm root cause of the
correlation group
• Main, which designates other alarm cause, than the primary
one, of the correlation root
• Symptom, which designates an alarm consequence of a
Primary or Main alarm
This column appears if the Alarm Correlation application is
installed.
Component Defines the subcomponent ID.
Type Defines the alarm type (as defined in ITU and TMN standards),
which can be one of the following:
• communication
• environment (alarms such as open doors, cooling fan failures,
or fire alarms)
• equipment (alarms indicating a problem with hardware
components)
• quality of service
• processing error
• integrity violation (alarms such as an information missing or a
duplicate information)
• operational violation (alarms such as a procedural error or a
denial of service)
• physical violation (alarms such as an intrusion reason or a
cable tamper)
• security service or mechanism violation (alarms such as an
authentication failure or an unauthorized access attempt)
• time domain violation (alarms such as an out of hours activity
or a delayed information)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-20 Alarm list information (continued)
Column Description
Correlation Group Count Number of alarms correlated to the PrimaryMain alarm.
The Correlation Group Count is displayed at the PrimaryMain
alarm row and includes:
• Main alarm count
• Symptom alarm count
Symptoms already correlated in other correlation groups and also
correlated to this PrimaryMain are included in the count.
The PrimaryMain alarm is not included in the count (this value is
only available on the Primary Main alarm).
The CorrelationGroupCount enables to identify the PrimaryMain
alarm with the highest impact on the UTRAN system QoS. This
column appears if the Alarm Correlation application is installed.
Probable Cause Defines the probable cause text for the alarm (see Table 2-40,
“Probable cause mapping derived from standard X.721”
(p. 2-122)).
Additional Text Displays more information about the alarm. The text displayed is
the same as the text in the Additional Text tab of the Alarm
Details pane (Figure 2-37, “Alarm Details - Additional Text tab”
(p. 2-68)).
Severity Defines the severity level of the alarm (Critical, Major, minor,
unknown, or warning).
Time Raised (Local) Defines the time when the alarm was raised, converted to your
system local time zone.
For example, the date and time format is: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss
The local time is calculated in relation to Universal Time
Coordinated (UTC) - the international time standard-formerly
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
For example: Local (UTC - 04:00)
When the mouse cursor remains on the Time Raised (Local)
header, a tooltip is displayed in yellow.
Warning: A difference exists in all RNC alarms because the alarm
raise time is relative to the RNC’s local time zone, but the WMS
treats the RNC as if it were in the same time zone as the WMS.
Therefore, there is a discrepancy with the alarm times.
Trouble Ticket ID This column appears if the Trouble Ticketing application is
installed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To modify the Alarm List information display, see “Modifying the Alarm List display”
(p. 2-224).
See Alarm counts under “Alarm text cues” (p. 2-38) for details on what affects the
number of alarms that are displayed.
Alarm List options pane
Use the check boxes and buttons in the Alarm List options pane to select what type of
alarms are displayed in the Alarm List as described in the following table. Additional
summary information on the alarms listed is displayed in this area (see Figure 2-35,
“Alarm List options pane” (p. 2-66).
Table 2-21 Alarm List options pane
Item Description
Show alarms Select:
• each severity level you want to display in the Alarm List
• Show Acknowledged to display acknowledged, but active,
alarms
• each Correlation Alarm type you want to display in the Alarm
List (only visible if Alarm Correlation application is installed)
Advanced Filtering check Indicates if an advanced filter is applied. The text field displays the
box currently applied filter.
Advanced Filters Opens the Advanced Filters window.
Alarm Stream Indicates if Alarm Stream Management is on or off.
Management
Total alarms Displays alarm counts for each severity level based on all of the
alarms in the Alarm list (alarms of unknown severity do not
appear in this field).
n Alarm(s) loaded Displays the total number of alarms that are shown in the Alarm
List.
Auto-refresh list If the Auto-refresh list is checked, the Alarm List updates
automatically whenever an alarm is raised, acknowledged, or
unacknowledged, and the total alarm count information is
displayed without the time stamp.
If the Auto-refresh list is unchecked, the Alarm List considers the
last updated alarm.
Refresh List Enables to manually update the Alarm List
(disabled when you select the Auto-refresh list).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-35 Alarm List options pane
Alarm Details
The Alarm Details pane (see Figure 2-36, “Alarm Details - Details tab” (p. 2-67)) is a
collapsible area that can be shown and hidden by toggling the show/hide arrow. It
includes:
• the Details tab
• the Additional Text tab
• the Note on Alarm Type tab
The figure shows the default fields; depending on the alarm type, other fields can be
displayed. Other applications may add information to the Alarm Details pane in
additional tabs.
Details tab
The Details tab contains information on the currently selected alarm as detailed in the
following table.
Field Description
Alarm Code Identification number of the alarm.
Alarm Code format:
• <equipment type>_<4 digits (0-9)>_<5
digits (0-9)>
For more information on the format, see
“Customizing external alarms” (p. 2-289).
The Alarm Code is also named Fault Code.
Notification ID Alarm ID number.
NE Name Name of the NE the alarm is associated with.
Local NE Name Local name of the NE the alarm is associated
with.
Component The subcomponent ID.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Field Description
NE Type NE type.
Specific Problem Alarm name and additional information about
the impacted equipment type, if available.
Acknowledged by User ID of the user who acknowledged the
alarm condition.
Host IP IP address of the host from which the alarm
was acknowledged.
Host name Name of the host from which the alarm was
acknowledged.
Acknowledged at Local time at which the alarm was
acknowledged. The time is determined by the
main server time or the device adapter server
time
Toggle rate If a toggling alarm is in effect, the toggle rate
is displayed, as well as the count and time
specified in the rule for detection.
Threshold rate If a threshold alarm is in effect, the threshold
rate is displayed, as well as the count and time
specified in the rule for detection.
Figure 2-36 Alarm Details - Details tab
Additional Text tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Additional Text tab contains additional information about the currently selected
alarm (see Figure 2-37, “Alarm Details - Additional Text tab” (p. 2-68)). The text is the
same as that displayed in the Additional Text column of the alarm list, although the
column might not display the full text.
Figure 2-37 Alarm Details - Additional Text tab
Note on Alarm Type tab

From the Note on Alarm Type tab (see Figure 2-38, “Alarm Details - Note on Alarm
Type tab” (p. 2-69)), you can:
• View the annotation for an alarm type that is associated with a particular alarm, after
selecting that alarm in the Alarm List. Annotations are not displayed if multiple
alarms are selected. An annotation is present only if a user has previously saved an
annotation for the specific alarm type.
• Edit the annotation of an alarm type, if they have been assigned permissions for
editing these annotations. To modify or create an annotation, click Edit in the Note on
Alarm Type tab (see “Annotating an alarm” (p. 2-236)).
The permissions for creating or editing alarm type annotations are set in the Access
Control window. An alarm type annotation shows the Alarm Code (also named Fault
Code), Help Volume, information on the last user that made the annotation modification
(user name, host name, time of modification), and the annotation text.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-38 Alarm Details - Note on Alarm Type tab
Following are few characteristics of Alarm Details pane:

Functional requirements for annotations
A valid fault code and help volume are required to view or edit an annotation. The fault
code is mandatory, while the help volume is optional. See also Data refreshes for
annotations.
Supported characters in fault codes and help volume fields
Fault codes and help volume names are case-sensitive and have the following
requirements:
• All characters must be visible characters
• All characters must be UNICODE characters between /u0020 and /u001E.
• The following formula is used to calculate the maximum number of characters in a
field:
251 - n x 5 - m
where:
– n represents the number of space characters contained in a fault code or help
volume field
– m represents the number of characters that require entering Escape beforehand.
The characters that require Escape are: * ? [ ] $ & < > | ( ) { } ; / " ' '
Example:
The following shows how to calculate the maximum number of characters in a fault code
field, if the fault code contains the characters:
* *?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Calculation:
251 - 1 x 5 - 3 = 243
Unsupported characters in fault codes and help volume fields
The following characters are not supported in the Fault Code and Help Volume fields:
Table 2-22 Unsupported characters in the fault codes and help volume fields
Character Example or comment

back slash /
plus sign +
number sign #
equal sign =
open brace {
close brace }
invisible characters or All invisible and space characters at the beginning or at the end of
space characters a field are deleted; in other words, they are not treated as
characters
For example, "abc "and "abc" is treated as the same entry
Also, a field containing only space characters is treated as empty
text
empty fault code field The fault code field cannot be empty, but the help volume field can
be empty
For example, it is invalid if a fault code contains only spaces, but it
is valid if a help volume contains only spaces
Languages in annotations
You must create fault code and help volume in English. However, you can create note text
in several languages. For information on supported languages, and how to configure the
operating system for different languages, see Data refreshes for annotations.
Note text length limit
The number of characters in a single annotation cannot exceed 32 Kbytes. If the
annotation text exceeds this limit, an error is displayed.
Supported and unsupported characters in note text field
The alarm type annotation can support only UNICODE characters. The following
sequence of characters is not supported in the note text field: ]] >
Data refreshes for annotations
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If an annotation is saved successfully, the Note on Alarm Type tab is updated
automatically in the current user session. However, in the case of multiple user sessions,
users must reselect the alarm to refresh their views.
For example, if two clients are viewing the same annotation, and one client modifies and
saves the annotation, the other client must reselect the alarm to see the latest annotation:
the annotation is not refreshed automatically.
Only one instance of the annotation editing window can be opened at a time, even if there
are multiple Alarm Manager windows open in a user session. If one annotation editing
window is open, the user must save that annotation before opening a new annotation
editing window, either in the current Alarm Manager window, or in another Alarm
Manager window. The user is prompted to save the current unsaved changes before the
edit window is refreshed.
If the save operation fails due to network problems or system errors, contact the system
administrator.
Alarm Record Viewer window
Some alarms include text fields that are too large for the Alarm Manager. Use the Alarm
Record Viewer (see Figure 2-39, “Alarm Record Viewer window” (p. 2-72)) to view the
raw alarm fields.
To open the Alarm Record Viewer, see “Viewing raw alarm details” (p. 2-225).
The Alarm Record Viewer window includes:
• all the alarm fields in a scrollable text field
• an Edit menu with a Copy command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-39 Alarm Record Viewer window
Multiple Alarm Manager windows

Each user can open up to five Alarm Manager windows at a time. To open a new window,
select Show Alarms in New Window from:
• the Fault menu
• a Group list menu
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• an NE list menu
• the Navigator (see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms” (p. 2-220))
This section describes the behavior of multiple Alarm Manager windows and contains the
following topics:
• Show Alarms
• Show Alarms in New Window
• Alarm Stream Management
• Advanced Filters
• Sorting
Show Alarms
If you select this menu item when no Alarm Manager windows are open, a new window
opens to display the context in which it was launched.
If one or more Alarm Managers are open, then the top-most window changes to display
the context in which it was launched.
Show Alarms in New Window
If you select this menu item when less than five Alarm Manager windows are open, then
a new window opens to display the context in which it was launched.
If five Alarm Manager windows are currently open, and you try to open a sixth, the Open
Window Limit dialog box appears, allowing you to close one or more to open new Alarm
Manager window(s) (see Figure 2-40, “Open Window Limit dialog box” (p. 2-73).
Figure 2-40 Open Window Limit dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Stream Management

If Alarm Stream Management is enabled, it applies to all open Alarm Manager windows.
Advanced Filters
You can open only one Advanced Filters window at a time. If you have an Advanced
Filters window open for one Alarm Manager, and then try to open a second Advanced
Filters window for another Alarm Manager, a warning is displayed.
Figure 2-41 Maximum advance filter dialogs open
If you create a filter in one Alarm Manager window, it is available in other Alarm
Manager windows for use. However, it does not apply to other open Alarm Manager
windows.
If you edit a filter in a window that has already been applied in another window, the
previously applied filter is not updated unless you reapply the filter with the changes you
made.
The last applied filter becomes the default one for all subsequent Alarm Manager
windows in one view session. If you close, and then reopen a layout, you must reapply
the advanced filter.
For example:
• Open a layout for viewing, then open an Alarm Manager window, from which you
open the Advanced Filters window. No filter is selected.
• Define, save, and apply Filter 1. Close the Advanced Filters window.
• Open a second Alarm Manager by selecting Show Alarms in New Window from the
Navigator or Resource Browser. Advanced Filters is activated and the filter selected
is "Filter 1". If you deactivate Advanced Filters, it is deactivated in any Alarm
Manager opened with Show Alarms. However, in Alarm Manager windows opened
with Show Alarms in New Window, Advanced Filters remains active and the filter
selected is "Filter 1".
• Close, then reopen the layout.
• Open an Alarm Manager window, from which you open the Advanced Filters
window. No filter is selected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information on advanced filters, see “Advanced Filters window”
(p. 2-78) window.
Sorting
If you sort the list in one Alarm Manager window, it is not sorted in other currently open
Alarm Manager windows.
Alarm Manager window preferences
You can set user preferences for the Alarm Manager window. Preferences are set based on
the last time a change was made, regardless of which window the change was made in. If
the same user launches multiple Alarm Manager windows in separate logon sessions, it
might take up to 30 seconds for the preference changes to take effect. You can set
preferences for the following:
• window size
• window position
See also “Alarm List display preferences” (p. 2-75).
Alarm List display preferences
You can set user preferences for the Alarm List display in the Alarm Manager window.
User preferences are applied to all subsequent Alarm Manager windows opened in the
current session and are saved and applied to future logon sessions. User preferences
include:
• column size
• column order
• column sort order
User preferences are set by modifying the display in an Alarm Manager window. You can
also configure multiple column sorting using the Sort Alarm List dialog box (see
“Modifying the Alarm List display” (p. 2-224)).
Sort Alarm List dialog box
Use the Sort Alarm List dialog box to sort the Alarm List columns in the Alarm Manager,
changing the order of the alarms displayed. You can sort up to three columns in ascending
or descending order.
To open the Figure 2-42, “Sort Alarm List dialog box” (p. 2-76), from the Alarm Manager
menu bar, select Actions > Sort Alarm List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-42 Sort Alarm List dialog box
Sort selection
Each of the three lists in the Sort Alarm List dialog box contains the column names of the
Alarm List in the Alarm Manager, see Table 2-20, “Alarm list information” (p. 2-62). The
first list will be filled with the last sort criteria. The second and third list is (None) by
default.
When setting sort criteria, you cannot select a column name more than once. Following
are some examples of this rule:
• The item that you select in the first list cannot be selected in the second. Similarly,
items that you select in the first and second lists are not selectable in the third.
• If you select an item in the second menu, then select the same item in the first menu,
the second menu changes to display None.
• If you skip a field, then close and reopen the dialog box, the sort selections are
reordered correctly. For example, if you select items in the first and third menus, click
OK to close the dialog box, then reopen it, the selected items are shown in the first and
second menus.
Results of sorting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you have selected three columns to sort on, the alarm list is sorted as follows:
• Following the first sort, if multiple results have values matching both the first and
second criteria, then the second sort is carried out on that sublist.
• Following the second sort, if multiple results have values matching both the second
and third criteria, then the third sort is carried out on that sublist.
The following table shows an example of a list of alarms prior to sorting.
Table 2-23 Unsorted alarm list
NE ID Severity Probable cause

3 M enclosure door open
1 m AIS
2 C AIS
1 C enclosure door open
The following table shows the same list that has been sorted according to the following
criteria:
• first criteria is NE ID in ascending order
• second criteria is Severity in descending order
• third criteria is Probable Cause in Ascending order
NE ID Severity Probable cause

1 m AIS
2 C AIS
3 M enclosure door open
Sort indicators
If multiple sorting is selected, the column headers of the Alarm Manager window display
the following:
• numbers corresponding to the sort order; for example: 1, 2, 3
• arrows pointing up if the sort order is ascending
• arrows pointing down if the sort order is descending
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example, Figure 2-43, “Sorted Alarm List showing numbered columns”
(p. 2-78) shows:
• 1st sort criteria: Severity (descending order)
• 2nd sort criteria: Time (ascending order)
• 3rd sort criteria: Type (ascending order)
To modify the Alarm List display, see “Modifying the Alarm List display” (p. 2-224).
Figure 2-43 Sorted Alarm List showing numbered columns
Advanced Filters window

Use the Alarm Manager - Advanced Filters window (see Figure 2-44, “Alarm Manager:
Advanced Filters window” (p. 2-79)) to apply an alarm filter. Apply a configurable filter
to reduce the number of alarms displayed in the Alarm List of the Alarm Manager
window. If you want to use an advanced filter, you must apply the filter each time you log
on and each time you open a new layout. A filter applies only to the Alarm Manager
window in which it was applied. For information on using advanced filters with multiple
Alarm Manager windows, see “Multiple Alarm Manager windows” (p. 2-72).
You can use an advanced filter in combination with the filtering options available in the
“Alarm List options pane” (p. 2-65) pane. Alarm List filters do not change the alarm
display in the UTRAN Service View, Network Banner, Navigator, Equipment Monitor,
and Resource Browser.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the Alarm Manager window, in the Alarm List pane, click Advanced Filters to
open the Alarm Manager - Advanced Filters window. For an overview of the Alarm
Manager - Advanced Filters window, see:
• “Retrieve Saved Filters pane” (p. 2-79)
• “Advanced Filter Settings pane” (p. 2-80)
To apply advanced filters, see “Managing advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-230) procedure.
Figure 2-44 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window
Retrieve Saved Filters pane

The Retrieve Saved Filters list contains all filters available to the current user ID. The
filters are separated into private and public filters:
• private filters, which are saved locally on PC or on user station, are available only to
the user ID that created them,
• public filters, which are saved on main server, are available to all user IDs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The filter list is loaded only once, the first time a layout is opened in each GUI session.
After that, any filter changes made in other GUI sessions are not displayed in the current
GUI session. To see the most up-to-date Advanced Filter data, log out, and then log on
again.
Selecting a filter in the list populates the “Advanced Filter Settings pane” (p. 2-80) with
the properties for the filter.
You can make a private filter public by selecting a private filter in the list and clicking
Share this filter as Public. You must have the appropriate access control permission
settings to see the check box.
You can rename or delete private filters using Rename and Delete. Administrators with
the appropriate permission settings can rename and delete public filters. Administrators
can also use the Private Filter Management window to delete filters owned by other user
IDs.
To manage filters see “Managing advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-230)
Advanced Filter Settings pane
Use the Advanced Filter Settings pane to:
• Define advanced filter attributes
• “Manage advanced filters” (p. 2-85)
Define advanced filter attributes
The Advanced Filter Settings pane contains three tabs that display the filter properties. If
a filter is currently selected in the “Retrieve Saved Filters pane” (p. 2-79), the properties
for that filter are displayed. The filter criteria tabs are:
• Alarm Specific, for alarm attributes
• NE Specific, for NE attributes
• Problem Specific, for Alarm Code, Probable Cause and Specific Problem attributes
How attributes are joined for filters
The filtering attributes selected are cumulative. That is, all attributes selected are
concatenated into a single filter. The filter is formed using Boolean AND and OR logical
operators, placing an AND value between attribute types and an OR value between
variations of the same attributes.
Example:
If you select the following filter attributes:
• Alarm Type is Communication
• Alarm Type is Equipment
• NE Name contains west
The following alarm filter is created:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display alarms with (Alarm Type equal to Communication OR Equipment)

AND (NE name contains west)
How positive and negative operators are joined
If the attributes you select include negative operators, the attributes are joined by AND.
The negative operators are:
• Does not contain
• Does not equal
If the attributes you select include both positive and negative operators, the positive ones
are joined by OR, the negative ones are joined by AND, and the two groups are then
joined by AND.
The variations of an attribute in a query can include either positive or negative operators.
A combination of both is not supported for the same attribute. For example, the following
query is not supported:
NE ID contains 1 OR NE ID contains 2, AND NE ID does not contain 1

AND NE ID does not contain 2
Filtering criteria in the Alarm Specific tab
In the Alarm Specific tab (see Figure 2-44, “Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window”
(p. 2-79) window, you can add filtering criteria on:
• Notification ID to match
• Alarm Type
• Time Raised (Local)
• Acknowledged by
• Manual Alarm Clearing
Attention: Notification ID
Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend you to filter only on the notification ID, because
in rare cases a second alarm can have the same ID as an existing alarm on the same
NE; in this case, the original notification ID changes.
Filtering criteria in the NE Specific tab
In the NE Specific tab (see Figure 2-45, “Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window - NE
Specific tab” (p. 2-83)), you can add filters on:
• NE Name
• NE ID
• Component
• NE Type
• CLFI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can select the following filtering criteria from the lists:
• contains
• does not contain
• equals
• not equal to
The filtering criteria are available for all items in the NE Specific tab.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-45 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window - NE Specific tab
Filtering criteria in the Problem Specific tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Problem Specific tab (see Figure 2-45, “Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters
window - NE Specific tab” (p. 2-83) pane), you can add filters on:
• Alarm Code
• Probable Cause
For probable cause values, see Figure 2-43, “Sorted Alarm List showing numbered
columns” (p. 2-78) and Table 2-40, “Probable cause mapping derived from standard
X.721” (p. 2-122)
• Specific Problem
When you select the Problem Specific tab, you can select the following filtering criteria
from the lists:
• contains
• does not contain
• equals (available for Alarm Code only)
• not equal to (available for Alarm Code only)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-46 Alarm Manager: Advanced Filters window - Problem Specific tab
Manage advanced filters

All user IDs can use the Advanced Filters window to manage filters for filtering the
alarm display.
To modify the display in the Alarm List, you can:
• apply advanced filter:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can apply a filter (see “Managing advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-230) procedure) at
any time, even if the current filter settings were not saved. If you apply a filter that
was modified but not saved, the Advance Filtering text field displays the name
custom (see Figure 2-48, “Filter name in Alarm Manager Advanced Filtering text
field” (p. 2-87)).
• disable advanced filter:
To disable an applied advanced filter, unselect Advanced Filtering in the Alarm List
options panel.
When an applied filter is disabled, it remains as the pending filter until another filter is
applied. If an applied filter is deleted and no other filters are applied, Alarm Managers
launched (by selecting Show alarms in new window) after that do not have any
applied filter.
• create, modify, delete, share, and rename advanced filters:
See “Managing advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-230) procedure.
• delete private filters:
Administrators can delete private filters using the Figure 2-47, “Private Filter
Management window” (p. 2-87) window. You must have the appropriate access
control permission settings to open the window.
To open the Private Filter Management window, from the 9353 WMS window menu
bar, select Admin > Private Filter Management.
To delete Private Filters see “Deleting private advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-233).
For more information on advanced filter management, see “Managing advanced alarm
filters” (p. 2-230).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-47 Private Filter Management window
Figure 2-48 Filter name in Alarm Manager Advanced Filtering text field
Manage the alarm stream sent from the server

You can manage the alarm stream sent from the server to reduce the number of alarms
displayed in the GUI clients, or perform other actions on alarms.
Example:
Delay alarms, or change alarm severity. Reduce the number of displayed alarms to help
focus alarm monitoring tasks and improve the performance of the GUI clients.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To implement alarm stream management, you define alarm rules. A rule or multiple rules
can then be applied to the managed alarm stream. Once you apply a rule and enable alarm
stream management, you can reduce, delay, or modify the severity of incoming alarms in
the current Alarm Manager window, and any subsequent Alarm Manager windows that
you launch. Alarms already present in the alarm display do not change.
You must set Alarm Stream Management to on, and activate the rules for the rules to
take effect. All rules are applied per Fault Management domain. Pay special attention to
rules that include results from multiple domains; in particular, threshold rules. When
alarm stream management is turned on, the alarm display changes in:
• the Alarm Manager
• the Navigator
• the Network Banner
• all Resource Browser windows
The Historical Fault Browser application is always connected to the unmanaged alarm
stream. You must have the appropriate access control permissions to configure and enable
alarm stream management. Perform alarm stream management with the following
windows:
• “Alarm Stream Management window” (p. 2-88)
• “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window” (p. 2-89)
• “Rule Definition window” (p. 2-91)
To manage the alarm stream, see “Managing the alarm stream” (p. 2-238).
Alarm Stream Management window

You can turn alarm stream management on or off in the Alarm Stream Management
window (see Figure 2-49, “Alarm Stream Management window” (p. 2-89)). From the
9353 WMS window, select Fault > Manage Alarm Stream menu to open the Alarm
Stream Management window. You must open a layout to access the Fault menu.
The current state of alarm stream management is displayed:
• in the 9353 WMS window status bar, see “Network Banner and status bar alarm
indicators” (p. 2-53).
• in the Alarm Manager, see “Alarm List options pane” (p. 2-65).
The default setting for alarm stream management is on. However, you must define and
activate a rule to filter the alarm stream. If you only turn on alarm stream management,
the alarm display does not change (see Figure 2-49, “Alarm Stream Management
window” (p. 2-89)). For information on activating a rule set, see “Alarm Stream
Management Rule Set window” (p. 2-89).
Depending on the extent of the alarm filtering applied, turning off alarm stream
management can result in a flood of alarms to the display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-49 Alarm Stream Management window
Figure 2-50 Alarm stream management
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window

For an overview of alarm stream management, see “Manage the alarm stream sent from
the server” (p. 2-87).
Use the Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window (see Figure 2-51, “Alarm Stream
Management Rule Set window” (p. 2-91)) to enable or disable specific alarm rules.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To open the Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window, from the 9353 WMS window
menu bar, select Fault > Alarm Stream Rule Set.
Only administrative users can access the Rule Set window. In addition, administrative
users must ensure that only one administrative user accesses the Rule Set window at a
time. If two administrative users attempt to simultaneously access the Rule Set window,
the last user to save overrides the operations of the first user. If this happens, the system
does not display a warning message.
The Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window contains three main elements:
• Inactive Rules list
• Active Rule Set list
• Rule Details field
The Inactive Rules list displays all the alarm rules that are defined but that are not
currently applied to the managed alarm stream. Rules can be deleted from the Inactive
Rules list using Delete.
The Active Rule Set list displays the alarm rules currently applied to the managed alarm
stream.
Use Activate and Deactivate to move rules between the two lists. If alarm stream
management is turned on, moving a rule to the Active Rule Set list applies the rule to
incoming alarms in all GUI clients.
Rules added to the Active Rule Set list are added to the bottom of the list. Rules are
applied to the alarm stream in the order they appear in the list from top to bottom. Use the
arrow buttons below the list to change the order.
Rule Details is a read-only text field that displays the attributes of the currently selected
rule.
To edit a rule, select the rule and then click Edit. The “Rule Definition window”
(p. 2-91) opens with the settings for the selected rule. When editing an active rule, saving
the changes applies the new definition to any incoming alarms.
To create a new rule, click New to open the “Rule Definition window” (p. 2-91).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-51 Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window
Rule Definition window

For an overview of alarm stream management, see “Manage the alarm stream sent from
the server” (p. 2-87).
Use the Figure 2-52, “Rule Definition window” (p. 2-92) to define alarm rule settings.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To open the Rule Definition window, in the Figure 2-51, “Alarm Stream Management
Rule Set window” (p. 2-91) window:
• click New.
• select a rule and click Edit.
The Rule Definition window appears and displays the selected rule settings.
For detailed steps on defining a rule, see “Managing the alarm stream” (p. 2-238).
The Rule Definition window contains three panes:
• “Rule Name pane” (p. 2-93)
• “Action pane” (p. 2-93)
• “Alarm criteria pane” (p. 2-117)
Figure 2-52 Rule Definition window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rule Name pane
The Rule Name pane contains an editable text field for the rule name. Do not use the
following special characters in the Rule Name field.
Table 2-24 Unsupported characters in Rule Name field
Character Example
open brace {
close brace }
open parentheses (
close parentheses )
semicolon ;
If an unsupported character is entered in the Rule Name field, an error message appears.
Action pane
The Action pane list contains alarm stream management actions for creating alarm stream
rules. The fields in the Action pane change according to the action selected.
Table 2-25, “Items in the Action pane of the Rule Definition window” (p. 2-93) contains a
description of each alarm stream management action. More detailed information for each
action is contained in the following sections:
• “Action: Inhibit alarms” (p. 2-96)
• “Action: Delay alarms” (p. 2-97)
• “Action: Modify Severity of alarms” (p. 2-97)
• “Action: Acknowledge” (p. 2-99)
• “Action: Manage as Toggling” (p. 2-100)
• “Action: Manage as Threshold” (p. 2-104)
• “Action: Launch Application” (p. 2-108)
• “Action: Send email” (p. 2-109)
• “Action: Send short message (SMS)” (p. 2-115)
Table 2-25 Items in the Action pane of the Rule Definition window
Action Description
Inhibit Removes the alarm from the managed stream. Supersedes all other
actions, so if an incoming alarm matches the criteria of multiple
actions, only the inhibit action is applied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-25 Items in the Action pane of the Rule Definition window (continued)
Action Description
Delay Delays display of alarms that match the rule criteria for a specified
period of time. If you select Delay, the Action panel displays
additional text fields to enter minutes and seconds.
Modify Severity Replaces the default severity value of alarms that match the rule
criteria with a value selected in the Action pane. If you select
Modify Severity, the Action pane displays a second list with alarm
severity values.
Acknowledge Changes alarm status to acknowledged for alarms that match the
rule criteria.
Manage as Toggling Creates a generated alarm when rule conditions are met, so that
one alarm is displayed in the Alarm Manager instead of having the
same alarm being raised and cleared on the same NE. Alarms
matching the rule criteria that preceded the activation of the
toggling rule are cleared. Matching alarms that are suppressed
while the toggling alarm is in effect continue to be counted.
If you select this action, the Action panel displays additional fields
and lists.
Manage as Threshold Creates a generated alarm when rule conditions are met, so that
one alarm is displayed instead of multiple alarms. The alarms can
be on one or many NEs, and they can be raised without having
been cleared. For example, during a catastrophic event, a rule can
be written to create a threshold alarm that inhibits a "storm" of
alarms in the Alarm Manager. Alarms matching the rule criteria
that preceded the threshold alarm are cleared. Matching alarms
that are inhibited while the threshold alarm is in effect continue to
be counted.
If you select this action, the Action panel displays additional fields
and drop-down lists.
Launch Application Launches an application when rule conditions are met.
If you select this action, the Action pane displays an additional list
and field.
The configuration files for this action must be installed for the
item to appear.
Send email For alarms that match the rule criteria, alarm information is
automatically forwarded by email. See “Limitation for Send
Email, send SMS actions” (p. 2-95).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-25 Items in the Action pane of the Rule Definition window (continued)
Action Description
Send SMS For alarms that match the rule criteria, alarm information is
automatically forwarded by Short Message Service (SMS). See
“Limitation for Send Email, send SMS actions” (p. 2-95).
When NEs are in maintenance mode, the only actions available are Inhibit and Modify
Severity. For more information, see “Maintenance mode” (p. 2-46).
Precedence of rules
Rules, and actions that compose the rules, are always applied to the original alarm.
It is possible for an alarm to apply to more than one action. For this reason, there is an
order in which the actions are applied (see Table 2-26, “Precedence of actions in rules”
(p. 2-95)). The Inhibit rule is an exception: it supersedes all other actions, meaning that if
an alarm is being inhibited, then none of the other actions are applied, because an alarm
that is inhibited is removed from the managed alarm stream.
Table 2-26 Precedence of actions in rules
Rule priority Action

1 Inhibit
2 Severity change
3 Acknowledgement
4 Delay
5 Manage as threshold
6 Manage as toggling
7 Application launch / Send email / Send SMS
More than one action can apply to one alarm, depending on the time periods specified in
the rules. For example, if the time period defined in a delay rule is less than the time
period defined in a toggle rule, then it is possible for both actions to be applied to the
same alarm. On the other hand, if the time period set for the delay rule is greater than the
time period set for the toggle rule, then only the delay rule is applied, because the
detection period for the toggle rule cannot be achieved.
Limitation for Send Email, send SMS actions
The alarm forwarding actions Send Email and Send SMS rely on the stand-alone
third-party service called send_mail. The send_mail service requires considerable
knowledge to set up. If implementing these alarm forwarding actions, users must be
knowledgeable about the send_mail service. For example, the main command-line
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
interface for the send_mail service is the mailx script. The 9353 WMS application launch
system calls this script successfully; however, the expected receivers do not receive any
emails. In such cases, the 9353 WMS GUI or logs do not provide any warnings or errors:
you must check the logs of the interface of the send_mail service.
Action: Inhibit alarms
You can define a rule to remove alarms matching certain criteria from the managed alarm
stream (see Table 2-27, “Inhibit Alarm rule definition settings” (p. 2-96)).
To create the recommended rules regarding Action: Inhibit alarms, see UTRAN
The Inhibit action supersedes all other actions, so if an incoming alarm matches the
criteria of multiple actions, only the inhibit action is applied. When you first open the
Rule Definition window, the Inhibit default action appears (see Figure 2-53, “Rule
Definition window - Inhibit action” (p. 2-96)). If you do not define any conditions, all
alarms are inhibited.
Table 2-27 Inhibit Alarm rule definition settings
Settings for defining Mandatory Default

rules to inhibit alarms
Enter the rule name Yes None
Specify alarm criteria.
For information on alarm criteria settings, see the following tables:
• Table 2-37, “Alarm Specific tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-118)
• Table 2-38, “NE Specific tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-119)
• Table 2-39, “Problem Specific tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-121)
• Table 2-41, “Alarmed Component tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-127)
Figure 2-53 Rule Definition window - Inhibit action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action: Delay alarms
You can define a rule to delay alarms matching certain criteria in the managed alarm
stream for a specified period of time ( Table 2-28, “Delay Alarm rule definition settings”
(p. 2-97)). If you do not define any conditions, all alarms are delayed.
When you select the Delay action, the Action pane of the window displays the fields for
this action (see Figure 2-54, “Rule Definition window - Delay action” (p. 2-97)).
Table 2-28 Delay Alarm rule definition settings

rules to delay alarms
Enter minutes (0-999) and Yes None
seconds (0-59) to delay
alarms matching alarm
criteria.
Figure 2-54 Rule Definition window - Delay action
Action: Modify Severity of alarms

You can define a rule to modify the severity of alarms matching certain criteria in the
managed alarm stream (see Table 2-29, “Modify Severity rule definition settings”
(p. 2-98)).
To create the recommended rule regarding Action: Modify Severity, see UTRAN
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When you activate the rule, the severity value of alarms that match the rule criteria is
replaced with the value specified in the Action pane. If you do not define any conditions,
all alarm severities are modified.
When you select the Modify Severity action, the Action pane of the window displays the
fields for this action (see Figure 2-55, “Rule Definition window - Modify Severity action”
(p. 2-99)).
Note: If more than one severity rules are matching the same NE alarm, the first rule
from the top in the Active Rule Set is applied only.
Example:
• Rule 1 includes a severity change from minor to major for a specific alarm type.
• Rule 2 includes a severity change from major to critical for the same specific
alarm type.
When a minor alarm matching the specific alarm type is generated, it is modified in
major type alarm (rule 1).
Although this major alarm is now matching rule 2, this rule is not applied.
Table 2-29 Modify Severity rule definition settings

rules to modify alarm
severity
Set the severity to which Yes Critical
alarms matching the alarm
criteria will be modified
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-55 Rule Definition window - Modify Severity action
Action: Acknowledge
The Acknowledge action changes the alarm status to acknowledged for alarms that match
the rule criteria. The Acknowledge action works with all other alarm actions and criteria.
When you select Acknowledge from the Action list, there are no additional parameters
(see Figure 2-56, “Rule Definition window - Acknowledge action” (p. 2-100)). If you do
not define any conditions, all alarms are acknowledged.
Table 2-30 Acknowledge Alarms rule definition settings

rules to acknowledge
alarms
Enter the rule name yes None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-56 Rule Definition window - Acknowledge action
Action: Manage as Toggling

You can define a rule to create a Toggling Alarm instead of a single alarm that is raised
and cleared continually for the same condition on the same NE (see Table 2-31, “Toggling
Alarm rule definition settings” (p. 2-101)).
When the rule conditions for the toggling alarm are met, the toggling alarm is created and
subsequent alarms matching the rule conditions do not display. The toggling alarm
appears for as long as the condition exists.
Example:
Specify rule conditions to create a toggling alarm when five alarms matching the criteria
are raised and cleared on the same NE within 30 minutes. After the fifth alarm is raised
(following four raise-clear cycles), the toggling alarm appears in the Alarm Manager. No
other raise/clear events appear for the NE while the toggling alarm remains in effect. The
toggling alarm remains in effect for the remainder of the 30-minute interval.
If you do not define any conditions, all alarms are treated as potential toggling alarms,
and they might never reach the toggling state; the result can be increased processing time,
processing requirements, or data storage requirements.
Modifying or deactivating a toggling rule ends the current toggling scenario.
If you activate multiple toggle alarms on the same NE, the settings must be detailed and
specific enough to differentiate between alarms.
Example:
When toggle rules overlap or are otherwise not well defined, the generated alarm
corresponds to the first activated toggle.
If you use only severity to differentiate multiple toggle rules, then alarms corresponding
to all the toggle rules are included in toggle detection. Only one alarm is generated for all
alarms included in the activated toggle rules. The generated alarm depends on which
toggle rule is triggered.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See the following subtopics for more information on toggling alarms:
• Initial detection period before toggling condition is met
• When toggling condition is met
• Sustained detection of toggling condition
• End of current scenario if initial condition is not detected
• End of current scenario-if toggling condition met, but rule modified
When you select the Manage as Toggling action, the Action pane of the window displays
the fields for this action (see Figure 2-57, “Rule Definition window - Toggling action”
(p. 2-102)).
Table 2-31 Toggling Alarm rule definition settings
Settings for defining rules for Mandatory Minimum Maximum Default

toggling alarms
Enter the rule name Yes Not Not None
applicable applicable
Set the number of alarm Yes Second Tenth alarm None
raise-and-clear cycles, after which a alarm raised,
toggling alarm is created raised, following
following nine
one raise-clear
raise-clear cycles
cycle
Set the detection time Yes 1 second 60 minutes None
Set the severity of the toggling alarm No Not Not Highest
applicable applicable severity
raised
during
detection
time,
shown as
Default in
list
Select the application to be launched No Not Not None
when the toggling alarm condition is applicable applicable
detected
If there are no applications to
launch, this field is not shown
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-31 Toggling Alarm rule definition settings (continued)

toggling alarms
Figure 2-57 Rule Definition window - Toggling action
Initial detection period before toggling condition is met

Alarms that match the condition specified in the toggling rule before the condition is met
are displayed in the Alarm Manager.
When toggling condition is met
All alarms that contributed towards detecting the toggling condition are cleared from the
Alarm Manager, and a Toggling Alarm is generated (see Figure 2-58, “Toggling alarm in
the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab” (p. 2-104)). The toggling alarm displayed in the
Alarm Manager consists of the following:
• The Additional Text column and the Additional Text tab in the Details pane display
the following in the Alarm Manager (see Figure 2-58, “Toggling alarm in the Alarm
Manager: Additional Text tab” (p. 2-104)):
Toggling:<alarm>
• The Time Raised (Local) column displays the time of the first alarm that matched the
toggling condition.
• The Severity column displays what the rule condition specifies. If no severity was
specified in the rule, the alarm displays the highest severity raised during the detection
time; this is the Default item shown in the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• The Details tab in shows the following in addition to the information displayed with
regular alarms:
– the toggle rate: the number of alarms per minute involved in detecting the
condition
– the count: reflects the rule criteria-the number of alarm raises in the raise-clear
cycle-required for the condition to be met
– the time: reflects the rule criteria-the time during which the alarm count must be
met
If an application launch was specified as part of the toggling rule action, the specified
application is launched when the Toggling Alarm is generated.
Sustained detection of toggling condition
Once the toggling condition is met and the toggling alarm is generated, subsequent alarms
that match and sustain the toggling condition are inhibited.
End of current scenario if initial condition is not detected
If the toggling condition specified in the rule is not met, the toggling detection ends. The
raise-clear events can still occur, even if they do not meeting rule criteria. If an alarm in a
raise-clear cycle does not clear, the alarm is displayed in the Alarm Manager.
Toggling detection restarts with the first alarm that successfully meets the criteria
specified in the rule.
End of current scenario-if toggling condition met, but rule modified
The current toggling condition expires immediately, and the generated toggling alarm is
cleared from Alarm Manager. If a clear event did not occur for the original alarm before
the rule was modified, the toggling alarm is replaced by the last alarm that contributed
towards sustaining the toggling condition. If a clear event occurred, the last alarm is
cleared.
A new toggling alarm is generated when the new conditions are met.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-58 Toggling alarm in the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab
Action: Manage as Threshold

You can define a rule to create a Threshold Alarm that prevents a flood of alarms from
being displayed in the Alarm Manager (see Table 2-32, “Threshold Alarm rule definition
settings” (p. 2-105)).
To create the recommended rule regarding Action: Manage as Threshold, see UTRAN
When the rule conditions for the threshold alarm are met, the threshold alarm is created
and subsequent alarms matching the rule conditions do not appear. The threshold alarm
appears for as long as the condition exists.
For example, you specify rule conditions to create a threshold alarm when five alarms
matching the criteria are raised within 10 minutes. The first four alarms appear in the
Alarm Manager and the fifth alarm is replaced with the threshold alarm. Subsequent
alarms matching the rule conditions do not appear. In a managed Alarm Manager, the first
four alarms are removed from the display. In an unmanaged Alarm Manager, the first four
alarms continue to appear.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you do not define any conditions, all alarms are treated as potential threshold alarms,
and they might never reach the threshold state; the result can be increased processing time
and increased processing and data storage requirements. Modifying or deactivating a
threshold rule ends the current threshold scenario.
See the following sub-topics for more information on threshold alarms:
• Applying a threshold rule to a single Fault Management domain
• Notification IDs
• Initial detection period before threshold condition is met
• When threshold condition is met
• Sustained detection of threshold condition
• End of threshold scenario if initial threshold condition not detected
• End of current scenario if threshold condition met, but rule modified
When you select the Manage as Threshold action, the Action pane of the Rule Definition
window displays the fields for this action (see Figure 2-59, “Rule Definition window -
Threshold action” (p. 2-106)).
Table 2-32 Threshold Alarm rule definition settings

threshold alarms
Enter the rule name Yes Not Not None
applicable applicable
Set the number of alarms after which Yes 2 alarms 100 alarms None
a threshold alarm is created
It is not necessary for alarms to be
raised and cleared, as is the case
with Toggling alarms
Set the detection time Yes 1 second 120 None
minutes
Set the severity of the threshold No Not Not Highest
alarm applicable applicable severity
raised
during
detection
time,
shown as
Default in
the list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-32 Threshold Alarm rule definition settings (continued)

threshold alarms
Select the application to be launched No Not Not None
when the threshold alarm is raised applicable applicable
If there are no applications to
launch, this field does not appear
Figure 2-59 Rule Definition window - Threshold action
Applying a threshold rule to a single Fault Management domain

If a threshold rule is created that applies across multiple Fault Management domains, the
condition specified in the threshold rule is satisfied on each Fault Management domain,
resulting in multiple threshold alarms where one alarm might be expected. Alcatel-Lucent
recommends that threshold rules be written in such a way that they are specific to one
Fault Management domain.
Notification IDs
When the FMBB restarts, the notification IDs of threshold alarms reset to previous
notification ID - that is, of the previously created threshold alarm.
Initial detection period before threshold condition is met
Alarms that match the condition specified in the threshold rule before the condition is met
are displayed in the Alarm Manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When threshold condition is met
All alarms that contributed towards detecting a threshold condition are cleared from the
Alarm Manager, and a Threshold Alarm is generated (see Figure 2-60, “Threshold alarm
in the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab” (p. 2-108)). The threshold alarm displayed in
the Alarm Manager consists of the following:
• The Additional Text column and the Additional Text tab in the Details pane display
the following in the Alarm Manager (see Figure 2-60, “Threshold alarm in the Alarm
Manager: Additional Text tab” (p. 2-108)):
Alarm Threshold:<alarm>
• The Time Raised (Local) column displays the time of the last alarm that matched the
threshold condition.
• The Severity column displays what the rule condition specifies. If no severity was
specified in the rule, the alarm displays the highest severity raised during the detection
time; this is the Default item shown in the list.
• The Details tab in the Alarm Details pane shows the following in addition to the
information displayed with regular alarms:
– the threshold rate: the number of alarms per minute involved in detecting the
condition
– the count: the number of alarms required for the condition to be met
– the time: the time during which the alarm count must be met
If an application launch was specified as part of the threshold rule action, the specified
application is launched when the Threshold Alarm is generated.
Sustained detection of threshold condition
Once the threshold condition is met and a Threshold Alarm is generated, subsequent
alarms that match and sustain the threshold condition are inhibited.
End of threshold scenario if initial threshold condition not detected
If the threshold condition specified in the rule does not continue to be met, the threshold
detection ends. The alarms raised after the condition ends are visible in the Alarm
Manager.
Threshold detection restarts with the first alarm that successfully meets the criteria
specified in the rule.
End of current scenario if threshold condition met, but rule modified
The current threshold condition expires immediately, and the generated threshold alarm is
cleared from Alarm Manager. None of the original alarms are visible in the Alarm
Manager.
A new threshold alarm is generated when the new conditions are met.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-60 Threshold alarm in the Alarm Manager: Additional Text tab
Action: Launch Application

You can define a rule to launch an application once the condition is met (see Table 2-33,
“Launch Application rule definition settings” (p. 2-109)). If no applications are available,
you cannot create a rule. To configure an Application Launch, see “Configuring
Application Launch for alarm management” (p. 2-127).
If the rule specifies an application that can no longer be launched, the Alarm Stream Rule
Set window displays the following:
<?> Invalid Rule
You can either:
• deactivate and delete the rule
• edit the rule, only if other applications are available to launch
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When you select the Launch Application action, the Action pane of the window displays
the fields for this action (see Figure 2-61, “Rule Definition window - Launch Application
action” (p. 2-109)).
Table 2-33 Launch Application rule definition settings
Settings for defining rules for launching applications Mandatory Default

Select application: for example, email Yes None
If there are no applications to launch, this field is not shown. The
action is not available.
Blank field for application-specific information; for example, No Empty
email address.
If there are no applications to launch, this field is not shown.
This value is used in the additional_string attribute as explained in
Table 2-42, “Attribute value assignments” (p. 2-130).
Figure 2-61 Rule Definition window - Launch Application action
Action: Send email

Attention: Alarm forwarding relies heavily on the standalone third-party Send email
service. Send email is a complex service. The system administrator must have
considerable understanding of the service to set up Send email properly. In addition
the system administrator must be able to troubleshoot problems that arise. The validity
of email addresses that are entered by users (using the Send email service) are not
checked by the 9353 WMS. In addition, 9353 WMS does not indicate the failure of
email delivery.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An example of a typical troubleshooting scenario involves the script mailx. Mailx is
the major command line interface of the Send email service. In this troubleshooting
scenario, mailx is invoked by ALBB successfully, but the expected receivers do not
receive any emails. In such cases the GUI or logs of 9353 WMS do not provide any
warning or error information to the system administrator. Therefore, the system
administrator must check the appropriate user interface or logs of the Send email
service to resolve the problem. This document does not provide any specific
guidelines for resolving such problems. Instead, the system administrator must rely on
their understanding of the Send email service to correct the issue.
Attention: Email destination
To avoid the OAM /var/mail folder from exceeding the recommended disk capacity
and impact the OAM performance (for example: backups and purge mechanisms) it is
forbidden to choose an internal unix email destination on the OAM.
You can define a rule to automatically forward by email, alarms that match the specified
criteria. For each Send email rule, you can specify up to five destination addresses.
Separate each address with a semicolon (;). You can also append text to the email by
clicking Append Text.
When you select the Send Email action, the Action pane of the Rule Definition window
displays the to field for destination addresses and Append Text (see Figure 2-62, “Rule
Definition window - Send Email action” (p. 2-114)). A text field displays the first line of
appended text. For email field formats, refer to Table 2-35, “Fields in emails that are sent
when rule conditions are met” (p. 2-113).
See “Limitation for Send Email, send SMS actions” (p. 2-95).
Attention: The Send mail originator is the user netmgr on the server. It is advisable to
redirect mails if the receiver account is closed or no longer valid.
Unsupported characters in address field
Double quotation marks (") are not supported in the email address field.
An empty address field is also not supported.
The character strings listed in Table 2-34, “Unsupported character strings in Address field
or Appended Text field” (p. 2-111) are not supported in the address field.
Unsupported character strings in address field or appended text field
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following character strings are not supported in the address field or appended text
field:
Table 2-34 Unsupported character strings in Address field or Appended Text

field
Word
//LINEFEED0a
//OPENBRACE7b
//CLOSEBRACE7d
//TAB9 //WHITESPACE20
Supported characters in the Appended text field

The following characters are supported in the Appended Text field:
Character Example
letters a-z, A-Z
numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, etc.
comma ,
period .
colon :
semicolon ;
plus sign +
minus sign -
asterisk *
back slash /
forward slash /
question mark ?
exclamation mark !
at symbol @
number symbol #
dollar sign $
percent symbol %
ampersand &
open parentheses (
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Character Example
close parentheses )
underscore _
equal sign =
open brace {
close brace }
open square brace [
close square brace ]
option symbol |
left angled bracket <
right angled bracket >
single quotation mark '
double quotation marks "
line feed
Text length in Appended Text field

The maximum number of characters that can be entered as Appended Text in the
appended field is 1024.
The maximum number of characters that can be displayed in the Appended Text field
(next to the Append Text button) without scrolling is 300 characters, if the first sentence
is longer than 300 characters.
If the first sentence ends with any of the following, then the Appended Text field displays
the first sentence; you do not need to scroll:
Character ending first sentence Example

period .
exclamation mark !
question mark ?
line feed
Rule Details area format

The Rule Details area contains the following entries:
• Rule Name
• Condition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Action
• Send Email to
• Text appended to email
Email format
The email that is sent by the system is in the following format. Emails cannot be edited
outside of the Rule Definition window.
Table 2-35 Fields in emails that are sent when rule conditions are met
Email field Format

From Example address:
netmgr@<hostname>
netmgr is the source address of the email
To A maximum of five addresses can be entered in this recipient field.
If the same address is entered more than once, only one email is
sent. Email addresses are not validated.
Subject OAM:<AlarmNotificationID>:<Severity>:<Probable Cause>
Explanation:
• OAM indicates that the email is sent by the OAM system
• AlarmNotificationID, Severity, Probable Cause are extracted
from an alarm, and identify the alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-35 Fields in emails that are sent when rule conditions are met
(continued)
Email field Format

Message body Message body format is divided into three areas:
• fields extracted from the alarm
• three empty lines
• additional text
Message body fields:
• Node Name =
• Node Id =
• Node Address =
• Managed Object Class =
• Managed Object Instance =
• Notification Id =
• Event Time =
• Specific Problem =
• Equipment Type =
• Unknown Status =
• Probable Cause =
• Additional Text =
• Severity =
• Alarmed Component =
• Vendor Specific Info =
Figure 2-62 Rule Definition window - Send Email action
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Action: Send short message (SMS)
You can define a rule to automatically forward by short message, alarms that match the
specified criteria. For each Send SMS rule, you can specify up to five destination
addresses. Separate each address with a semicolon (;).
When you select the Send SMS action, the Action pane of the Rule Definition window
displays the to: field for destination addresses (see Figure 2-63, “Rule Definition window
- Send SMS action” (p. 2-117)). For email field formats, refer to Table 2-36, “Fields in
short messages that are sent when rule conditions are met” (p. 2-115).
See “Limitation for Send Email, send SMS actions” (p. 2-95).
Attention: The SMS originator is the user netmgr on the server. Alcatel-Lucent
recommends you to redirect mails if the receiver account is closed or no longer valid.
Unsupported characters in address field
Double quotation marks (") are not supported in the address field.
An empty address field is also not supported.
The words listed in Table 2-34, “Unsupported character strings in Address field or
Appended Text field” (p. 2-111) are not supported in the address field.
Maximum number of characters
A short message is limited to 160 characters, including the From, To, Subject, and
Message body fields. Therefore, fields in the body of a short message can be truncated.
They can also be reorganized according to priority.
Rule Details area format
The Rule Details area contains the following entries:
• Rule Name
• Condition
• Action: Send SMS to
SMS format
The short message that is sent by the system is in the following format.
Table 2-36 Fields in short messages that are sent when rule conditions are met
SMS field Format

From Example address:
netmgr@<hostname>
netmgr is the source address of the short message
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-36 Fields in short messages that are sent when rule conditions are
met (continued)
SMS field Format

To A maximum of five addresses can be entered in this recipient field.
If the same address is entered more than once, only one email is
sent. Email addresses are not validated.
Subject OAM:<AlarmNotificationID>:<Severity>:<Probable Cause>
Explanation:
• OAM indicates that the email is sent by the OAM system
• AlarmNotificationID, Severity, Probable Cause are extracted
from an alarm, and identify the alarm
Message body Message body format is divided into three areas:
• fields extracted from the alarm
• three empty lines
• additional text
Message body fields:
• Node Name =
• Event Time =
• Severity =
• Probable Cause =
• Specific Problem =
• Alarmed Component =
• Additional Text =
• Node Address =
• Node Id =
• Managed Object Class =
• Notification Id =
• Vendor Specific Info =
• Unknown Status =
• Equipment Type =
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-63 Rule Definition window - Send SMS action
Alarm criteria pane

The Alarm Criteria pane contains four tabs that display the criteria for an alarm rule. The
alarm criteria tabs are:
• Criteria: Alarm Specific
• Criteria: NE Specific
• Criteria: Problem Specific
• Criteria: Alarmed Component panel
The attributes selected are cumulative. That is, all attributes selected are concatenated into
a single rule. This rule is formed using Boolean AND and OR logical operators, placing
an AND value between attribute types and an OR value between variations of the same
attributes. For example, if you select the following attributes:
• Alarm Type is Communication
• Alarm Type is Equipment
• NE name contains west
The following alarm rule is created:
Apply to alarms with (Alarm Type equal to Communication OR

Equipment) AND (NE name contains west)
If the attributes you select include negative operators, the attributes are joined by AND.
The negative operators are:
• Does not contain
• Does not equal
If the attributes you select include both positive and negative operators, the positive ones
are joined by OR, the negative ones are joined by AND, and the two groups are then
joined by AND.
The variations of an attribute in a query can include either positive or negative operators.
A combination of both is not supported for the same attribute. For example, the following
query is not supported:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE ID contains 1 OR NE ID contains 2, AND NE ID does not contain 1

AND NE ID does not contain 2
Criteria: Alarm Specific
You can define the following alarm-specific criteria (see Table 2-37, “Alarm Specific tab
in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-118)) in the Alarm Specific tab (see Figure 2-64, “Rule
Definition window - Alarm Specific tab” (p. 2-118)). When the FMBB restarts, the
notification IDs of threshold alarms reset to previous notification ID - that is, of the
previously created threshold alarm. Alcatel-Lucent recommends you to filter only on the
notification ID, because in rare cases, a second alarm can arrive with the same ID as an
existing alarm on the same NE; in this case, the original notification ID changes.
Table 2-37 Alarm Specific tab in Rule Definition window
Settings for defining alarm criteria Mandatory Default

If required, you can define the following Alarm Specific criteria: No None
• Notification ID to match
• Alarm Type
• Severity
• Time Raised (Local)
Figure 2-64 Rule Definition window - Alarm Specific tab
Criteria: NE Specific
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can define the following NE specific criteria (see Table 2-38, “NE Specific tab in
Rule Definition window” (p. 2-119)) in the NE Specific tab (see Figure 2-65, “Rule
Definition window - NE Specific tab” (p. 2-119)).
Table 2-38 NE Specific tab in Rule Definition window

If required, define NE Specific criteria that contain, do not contain, No None
equal, or do not equal:
• NE Name
• NE ID
• Location
• Component
• CLFI
• NE Administrative - locked or unlocked
• NE Operational State - enabled or disabled
• NE Type-short or long label - click Lookup to select labels
Figure 2-65 Rule Definition window - NE Specific tab
To enter the NE Type, click Lookup and select the NE in the Short Label Lookup
window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-66 Short Label Lookup window
Criteria: Problem Specific

You can define the following problem-specific criteria (see Table 2-39, “Problem Specific
tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-121)) in the Problem Specific tab (see Figure 2-67,
“Rule Definition window - Problem Specific tab” (p. 2-121)).
Problem Specific panel - Probable Cause values
Probable cause values correspond to messages displayed in the Alarm Manager and
Alarm Record Viewer Probable Cause column/field. The probable cause values are
derived from the X.721 standards (see Table 2-40, “Probable cause mapping derived from
standard X.721” (p. 2-122)). If a piece of equipment has its own value and text string, the
Alarm Manager and Alarm Record Viewer display the text value automatically.
When creating filters or rules that search on probable cause, you must enter the text
string, not the number or identifier. Supported characters are: [a-z] | [A-Z] | [0-9] | , | . | -
When an alarm is raised with a probable cause value that cannot be mapped, the Alarm
Manager displays the value in the Probable Cause column. The Alarm Record Viewer
displays Probable Cause: Unknown.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You cannot create a filter or rule to search on the probable cause text string unknown.
The probable cause values are the same as the ones used in the Historical Fault Browser
application.
Table 2-39 Problem Specific tab in Rule Definition window

If required, define Problem Specific criteria that contain or do not No None
contain:
• Alarm Code
• Probable Cause-the text string
• Specific Problem
• Additional Text
Figure 2-67 Rule Definition window - Problem Specific tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-40 Probable cause mapping derived from standard X.721
Value or identifier Message displayed

arfProbableCause.1 Adapter Error
arfProbableCause.2 Application Subsystem Failure
arfProbableCause.3 Bandwidth Reduced
arfProbableCause.4 Call Establishment Error
arfProbableCause.5 Communications Protocol Error
arfProbableCause.6 Communications Subsystem Failure
arfProbableCause.7 Configuration Or Customization Error
arfProbableCause.8 Congestion
arfProbableCause.9 Corrupt Data
arfProbableCause.10 CPU Cycles Limit Exceeded
arfProbableCause.11 Data Set Or Modem Error
arfProbableCause.12 Degraded Signal
arfProbableCause.13 DTE-DCE Interface Error
arfProbableCause.14 Enclosure Door Open
arfProbableCause.15 Equipment Malfunction
arfProbableCause.16 Excessive Vibration
arfProbableCause.17 File Error
arfProbableCause.18 Fire Detected
arfProbableCause.19 Flood Detected
arfProbableCause.20 Framing Error
arfProbableCause.21 Heating Or Ventilation Or Cooling System
Problem
arfProbableCause.22 Humidity Unacceptable
arfProbableCause.23 Input Output Device Error
arfProbableCause.24 Input Device Error
arfProbableCause.25 LAN Error
arfProbableCause.26 Leak Detected
arfProbableCause.27 Local Node Transmission Error
arfProbableCause.28 Loss Of Frame
arfProbableCause.29 Loss Of Signal
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-40 Probable cause mapping derived from standard X.721 (continued)

arfProbableCause.30 Material Supply Exhausted
arfProbableCause.31 Multiplexer Problem
arfProbableCause.32 Out Of Memory
arfProbableCause.33 Output Device Error
arfProbableCause.34 Performance Degraded
arfProbableCause.35 Power Problem
arfProbableCause.36 Pressure Unacceptable
arfProbableCause.37 Processor Problem
arfProbableCause.38 Pump Failure
arfProbableCause.39 Queue Size Exceeded
arfProbableCause.40 Receive Failure
arfProbableCause.41 Receiver Failure
arfProbableCause.42 Remote Node Transmission Error
arfProbableCause.43 Resource At Or Nearing Capacity
arfProbableCause.44 Response Time Excessive
arfProbableCause.45 Retransmission Rate Excessive
arfProbableCause.46 Software Error
arfProbableCause.47 Software Program Abnormally Terminated
arfProbableCause.48 Software Program Error
arfProbableCause.49 Storage Capacity Problem
arfProbableCause.50 Temperature Unacceptable
arfProbableCause.51 Threshold Crossed
arfProbableCause.52 Timing Problem
arfProbableCause.53 Toxic Leak Detected
arfProbableCause.54 Transmit Failure
arfProbableCause.55 Transmitter Failure
arfProbableCause.56 Underlying Resource Unavailable
arfProbableCause.57 Version Mismatch
securityAlarmCause .1 Authentication Failure
securityAlarmCause .2 Breach Of Confidentiality
securityAlarmCause .3 Cable Tamper
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

securityAlarmCause .4 Delayed Information
securityAlarmCause .5 Denial Of Service
securityAlarmCause .6 Duplicate Information
securityAlarmCause .7 Information Missing
securityAlarmCause .8 Information Modification Detected
securityAlarmCause .9 Information Out Of Sequence
securityAlarmCause .10 Intrusion Detection
securityAlarmCause .11 Key Expired
securityAlarmCause .12 Non Repudiation Failure
securityAlarmCause .13 Out Of Hours Activity
securityAlarmCause .14 Out Of Service
securityAlarmCause .15 Procedural Error
securityAlarmCause .16 Unauthorized Access Attempt
securityAlarmCause .17 Unexpected Information
securityAlarmCause .18 Unspecified Reason
5640 enclosure Door Open
5641 excessive Vibration
5642 flood Detected
5643 fire Detected
5644 Heating Or Ventilation Or Cooling
System-Problem
5645 humidity Unacceptable
5646 leak Detected
5647 material Supply Exhausted
5648 pressure Unacceptable
5649 pump Failure
5650 receive Failure
5651 temperature Unacceptable
5652 loss Of Signal
5653 loss Of Frame
5654 framing Error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5655 local Node Transmission Error
5656 remote Node Transmission Error
5657 call Establishment Error
5658 degraded Signal
5659 communications Subsystem Failure
5660 communications Protocol Error
5661 lAN Error
5662 dTEDCE Interface Error
5663 toxic Leak Detected
5664 transmit Failure
5665 unspecified Reason
5672 response Time Excessive
5673 queue Size Exceeded
5674 bandwidth Reduced
5675 retransmission Rate Excessive
5676 threshold Crossed
5677 performance Degraded
5678 congestion
5679 resource At Or Nearing Capacity
5692 storage Capacity Problem
5693 version Mismatch
5694 corrupt Data
5695 cpu Cycles Limit Exceeded
5696 software Error
5697 software Program Error
5698 software Program Abnormally Terminated
5699 file Error
5700 out Of Memory
5701 underlying Resource Unavailable
5702 application Subsystem Failure
5703 configuration Or Customization Error
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5712 power Problem
5713 timing Problem
5714 processor Problem
5715 data Set Or Modem Error
5716 multiplexer Problem
5717 receiver Failure
5718 transmitter Failure
5719 output Device Error
5720 input Device Error
5721 input Output Device Error
5722 equipment Malfunction
5723 adapter Error
5732 duplicate Information
5733 information Missing
5734 information Modification Detected
5735 information Out Of Sequence
5736 unexpected Information
5742 denial Of Service
5743 out Of Service
5744 procedural Error
5752 cable Tamper
5753 intrusion Detection
5762 authentication Failure
5763 breach Of Confidentiality
5764 non Repudiation Failure
5765 unauthorized Access Attempt
5772 delayed Information
5773 key Expired
5774 out Of Hours Activity
Criteria: Alarmed Component panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can define the following alarm component-specific criteria (see Table 2-41,
“Alarmed Component tab in Rule Definition window” (p. 2-127)) in the Alarm
Component tab ( Figure 2-68, “Rule Definition window - Alarmed Component tab”
(p. 2-127)).
Table 2-41 Alarmed Component tab in Rule Definition window

If required, define Alarmed Component criteria: No None
• Component DN name containing or equaling a specified value
Figure 2-68 Rule Definition window - Alarmed Component tab
Configuring Application Launch for alarm management

Use the Alarm Management Application Launch (AMAL) utility to define a rule in the
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window to launch a predefined application from an
alarm that meets a specified condition.
The list of applications are defined in .cfg files which are read by the Rule Builder
window and ALBB to determine the needed parameters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This section describes developer considerations for these of the AMAL utility in 9353
WMS. It includes the following:
• “Configuration files for alarm stream management” (p. 2-129)
• “Installing configuration files for launching applications in Alarm Management”
(p. 2-131)
For applications to be displayed in the Rule Definition window, you must:
• Create a configuration file for each application that you want to be available to users
when they are defining rules for certain alarm conditions.
• Place the configuration files in the Web server directory defined in “Installing
configuration files for launching applications in Alarm Management” (p. 2-131).
When the Alarm Stream Rule Set window starts up, it calls the CGI script
ListApplications.cgi to read the configuration files, and then display the list of
applications to the user when the Rule Definition window is opened. The CGI script is
stored in the same directory as the configuration files. Do not change or move this file.
If the application associated with a defined rule is not available on the 9353 WMS server
at the start time of the Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window, the question mark
< ? > is displayed before the rule name in the list of rules in the Alarm Stream
Management Rule Set window. When you select an invalid rule in the rule list, a mark "-
invalid -" appears in the Rule Details pane. When you edit the invalid rule, a warning
message appears.
The Figure 2-69, “Rule Definition window - Action list after adding a configuration file”
(p. 2-129) shows a Rule Definition window after creating a configuration file. It displays
the added Launch Application selection in the Action list of the Rule Definition window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-69 Rule Definition window - Action list after adding a configuration file
Configuration files for alarm stream management

The AMAL utility uses configuration files supplied by the Partners to implement the
required functionality. These files provide the AL utility with all of the detailed
information required to manage the launching of the various applications. The AMAL
utility is designed to support the use of multiple configuration files, one file per each
application. ALBB does not cache any information. It re-reads AMAL files when it
receives a request from FMBB.
You must create one configuration file per application, set the permissions as readable,
and store the file in the defined directory “Installing configuration files for launching
applications in Alarm Management” (p. 2-131).
Alarm Manager Configuration File format
An Application Launch configuration file consists of one command block. A command
block provides the necessary configuration information for a single AMAL command.
The AMAL configuration file format is:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# Denotes comments
{
Command Block 1
}
Each command block includes a set of attribute value assignments. Table 2-42, “Attribute
value assignments” (p. 2-130) describes each of the attributes and the valid attribute
values. Each command block must list all attributes; however, you do not have to assign a
value to each one. For example, if you do not define a value for the Remote Host
attribute, the local host (the 9353 WMS server) is used.
ALBB logs and FMBB logs are created whenever an application is launched, and
whenever a launch attempt fails. If you want an application that is run by ALBB (netmgr
user) to create its own log files, the application writes logs to a directory where it has
valid permissions for netmgr user, such as /tmp/logs.
The application does not write logs to /opt/nortel/logs.
Table 2-42 Attribute value assignments
Attribute Values Description

CommandLabel <labe> Label displayed for the application name in GUI Rules
Builder
Command <Command Command to be launched.
string> alarmInfoFile and additional_string will be appended
to the command and then executed, where:
• alarmInfoFile is the first command line parameter. It
is a file name in absolute path form, where the path
is /opt/nortel/logs/PresideNSP/. This file contains
alarm information fields such as Rule Name, Node
Name, and Node Id. The alarmInfoFile is deleted
when launch is finished.
• additional_string: is the second command line
parameter. It is the string entered in the blank field
in the Rule Definition window. There is no string
replacement at run time.
Examples:
• /user/local/bin/xterm.sh
• /user/local/bin/email.sh
• echo '/usr/bin/date' '/usr/bin/id' >> /tmp/info.txt
RemoteHost <hostname> This attribute is for use with remote launch commands
only. It contains the host name or IP address of the
remote server host. This field must be left blank to
execute local or web commands from the 9353 WMS
server.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-42 Attribute value assignments (continued)
Attribute Values Description

Non- <Integer value in To prevent repeat launch of the same application form
LaunchInterval seconds> the same rule during NonLaunchInterval seconds. If it is
blank, the value is 3600 seconds.
Display <IpAddress> XDisplayAddress for GDI application only.
Example: 196.235.321.106:0:0
Installing configuration files for launching applications in Alarm Management

The configuration files for launching applications from an alarm are installed in the
following location:
/opt/nortel/data/PresideNSP/apache/ftp/docs/alarmActionLaunchScripts
The permissions for the directory are set as read and write during installation. Permissions
for the CGI file are set as executable. Permissions for the configuration files must be set
as readable.
Following are example configuration files.
Example 1: E-
{
CommandLabel = Email
Command = /usr/local/bin/email_test.sh
RemoteHost = potiron
NonLaunchInterval = 4
Display =
}
The e-mail_test.sh script is customized. It is not installed on the server by default.
Example 2: GUI
{
CommandLabel = GUI
Command = /usr/local/bin/xterm.sh
RemoteHost = potiron
Display = 47.128.185.155:0.0
}
The xterm.sh script is customized. It is not installed on the server by default.
Example 3: GUI_Access
{
CommandLabel = GUI_Access
Command = /usr/local/bin/xterm.sh
RemoteHost =
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Display =
}
Where /home/netmgr/xterm_script is: /usr/bin/xterm -display
47.163.149.205:0.0.
Alcatel-Lucent recommends you use an intermediary script, as shown in the previous
example, to launch an xterm window.
Alarm Correlation
Alarm correlation is an optional application that performs alarm grouping and finds
dependencies between root causes and symptoms.
Groups of correlated alarms are reported to the Alarm Manager and identified in the
Correlation Alarm Type column.
For information on Alarm Correlation type and Alarm Correlation Group Id, see Table
2-20, “Alarm list information” (p. 2-62).
The Alarm Correlation types are:
• PrimaryMain, which designates the alarm root cause of the correlation group
• Main, which designates other alarm cause, than the primary one, of the correlation
root
• Symptom, which designates an alarm consequence of a Primary or Main alarm
You can:
• add filter on correlated alarms, see “Managing advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-230),
• sort Alarm List columns, see “Modifying the Alarm List display” (p. 2-224),
• acknowledge all the alarms belonging to the same alarm correlation group Id, see
“Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms” (p. 2-234),
• display or hide correlated alarms according to their type, see “Applying alarm severity
filters” (p. 2-229),
• display all the alarms belonging to a group only, see “Viewing all correlated alarms of
a group only” (p. 2-254).
Alarm Correlation rules are based on topology links, which are automatically and daily
updated at 03:10 a.m. You can manually update topology links, see “Refreshing topology
links manually (Alarm Correlation)” (p. 2-256) procedure.
Attention: OAM installation and OAM upgrade
You must update topology links after each OAM installation and each OAM upgrade,
see “Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation)” (p. 2-256) procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Correlation Alarm Type are highlighted (see Figure 2-70, “Alarm Manager -
Correlated alarms sorted by correlation alarm type” (p. 2-133)) as follows:
• PrimaryMain alarm type is displayed in bold white on dark blue
• Main alarm type is displayed in regular black on light blue
• Sympton alarm type is displayed in regular black on grey
Figure 2-70 Alarm Manager - Correlated alarms sorted by correlation alarm type
Alarm Correlation Rule Set

The Alarm Correlation Rule Set window enables you to activate/deactivate predefined
correlation rules.
To open the Figure 2-71, “Alarm Correlation Rule Set window” (p. 2-134), from the 9353
WMS window menu bar, select Fault > Alarm Correlation Rule Set.
You must have the permission to open the Alarm Correlation Rule Set window, see
“Managing users and user permissions” (p. 4-2).
All of the rules are activated by default when the Alarm Correlation application is
installed. To deactivate a rule or the Alarm Correlation unselect all the Alarm Correlation
rules in the Active Rule Set pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-71 Alarm Correlation Rule Set window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rules must be activated or deactivated by group. Predefined rules are detailed Table 2-43,
“Predefined Rule Group rules” (p. 2-135).
Table 2-43 Predefined Rule Group rules
Rule Group Definition Rule names

UTRAN_BTS_ Correlates BTSEquipment alarms with related UTRAN_BTS_01_1
01 FDDcell state changes. UTRAN_BTS_01_2
Primary Main alarms are:
• BTSEquipment alarms, or
• in case of Loss of Supervision (LoS), the
LoS alarms,
Symptom alarms are:
• state change alarms on FDDcells
UTRAN_BTS_ Correlates HSDPA or E-DCH alarms with UTRAN_BTS_02_1
02 related FDDcell state changes. UTRAN_BTS_02_2
Primary Main alarms are:
• HSDPA alarms
• E-DCH alarms
Symptom alarms are:
UTRAN_ Correlates alarms generated on PCM link UTRAN_ONEBTS_01_1
ONEBTS_01 (E1/T1) port due to various faults reported on UTRAN_ONEBTS_01_2
the transmission link between RNC and
UTRAN_ONEBTS_01_3
NodeB, depending on the severity.
UTRAN_ONEBTS_01_4
UTRAN_RNC_ Correlates RNC board and transmission failure UTRAN_RNC_01_01
01 with related FDDcell state changes. UTRAN_RNC_01_02
Primary Main alarms are: UTRAN_RNC_01_03
• RNC alarms UTRAN_RNC_01_04
Symptom alarms are:
For detailed information on alarm rules, see UTRAN Alarm correlation rules definition,
UMT/SYS/DD/022602 and UTRAN Alarm correlation rules definition for 939x OneBTS,
UMT/SYS/DD/024426.
To activate a rule, see “Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules” (p. 2-252).
Important! Do not activate or deactivate partially a rule group, for this rule to remain
consistent.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Historical Fault Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Historical Fault Browser

Overview
To access this optional application, from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault ->
Launch Historical Fault Browser.
The Historical Fault Browser (HFB) is an optional application that gives you access to a
full set of fault data for historical analysis, incident reporting, and customer impact
analysis (see the following figure).
In WMS, all fault information flows from Device Adapters (DAs) through the Fault
Management Building Block (FMBB), which distributes the information to client fault
applications including HFB. This architecture ensures complete consistency of fault
information, so that historical information accurately reflects the real-time alarm
information originally reported to you.
The HFB collects fault information from the FMBB and stores the information in a
standard relational database (Oracle), with a capacity of up to 31 million events. This
database contains a complete set of alarm information for each event, including:
• Alarm Code
• NE ID, NE name, unit (where available) and Common Language Facility Identifier
(CLFI)
• alarm type, severity, status, probable cause and additional text
• date and time
• acknowledgement information
• correlation group information
This database can be accessed for queries using the HFB client, which is a web-based
Java client that provides easy access to historical fault information in network operation
centers or remote locations. You can sort and search for information criteria using any
field in the HFB database.
You can run and display multiple concurrent searches. Search results can be printed or
saved into files in HTML and plain text format.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Historical Fault Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-72 Historical Fault Browser
For detailed information on the HFB, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - Historical Fault Browser, 9YZ-04157-0059-UFZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Equipment monitor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment monitor
Overview
The Equipment Monitor is a contextual menu available on the Resource Browser for
any NE. An Equipment Monitor is available for an RNC, a BTS, and a POC NE in the
UTRAN. The tool provides a graphical display of the equipment in the NE (cabinets,
shelves and circuit packs). The alarms are displayed both in the Windows Explorer type
tree and on the Equipment Monitor directly.
The Equipment Monitor provides:
• a double-tree view, displaying managed objects
• a graphical view of all the hardware NE components specific to a particular piece of
hardware equipment
About equipment monitor

To open the Equipment Monitor window, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
If the NE consists of several nodes, the Equipment Monitor uses tabs to display one node
at a time. The following list provides the Equipment Monitor windows for various NEs
and other applications:
• RNC - Figure 2-73, “Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370)” (p. 2-139),
with two tabs displaying the CNode/INode and WNode
Figure 2-74, “Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9771)” (p. 2-140) displays the
Equipment Monitor for the RNC 9771
• BTSEquipment - Figure 2-75, “Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment”
(p. 2-141)
• AISG device - Figure 2-79, “Equipment Monitor window with AISG Devices tab”
(p. 2-145)
• WCE platform - Figure 2-80, “Equipment Monitor window for WCE platform”
(p. 2-146)
When you open a BTSEquipment - Equipment Monitor window, the NodeB
corresponding to the BTSEquipment is automatically highlighted in the RNC resource
tree view and the AISG Devices tab is visible on the Equipment monitor window only
when the AISG inventory component is present at iBTS level.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-73 Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-74 Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9771)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-75 Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-76 Equipment Monitor window for OneBTSEquipment
A temperatureCheck Action window is generated through the Equipment Monitor on

the WMS as shown in Figure 2-77, “temperatureCheck Action Window” (p. 2-143).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-77 temperatureCheck Action Window
This feature provides new PM counters to monitor and report the temperature inside the
9391 Macro NodeB. The temperatureCheck provides early warning of higher than
normal temperatures and enables investigation and corrective action to be taken before
the condition becomes critical. This improves NodeB availability, improves hardware
usage, and reduces the need for emergency site visits.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-78 Scan Bus Action Window
The Figure 2-78, “Scan Bus Action Window” (p. 2-144) is generated on the RFHead of
the OneBTSEquipment. The Scan Bus Action is used to scan the AISG interface of the
RRH for AISG devices.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-79 Equipment Monitor window with AISG Devices tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-80 Equipment Monitor window for WCE platform
Contextual menus on the AISG devices tab - BTSEquipment

The Equipment Monitor window is a starting point for executing operations. A
contextual menu starts the operation from an object of the tree view or from an NE of the
physical part. The available actions vary depending on the object type.
To view the actions that are performed from the Equipment Monitor contextual menus,
see “WMS contextual menus” (p. 1-43).
Calibrate
In the AISG devices tab, right-click an AISG device and choose Calibrate as shown in
Figure 2-81, “Calibrate AISG device” (p. 2-147).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-81 Calibrate AISG device
The Calibrate Action Window appears as shown in Figure 2-82, “Calibrate Action
Window - BTSEquipment” (p. 2-148) and Figure 2-100, “Calibrate Action Window -
OneBTSEquipment” (p. 2-162).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-82 Calibrate Action Window - BTSEquipment
The Figure 2-76, “Equipment Monitor window for OneBTSEquipment” (p. 2-142) shows
the Equipment Monitor on a OneBTSEquipment.
Figure 2-83 Reset Action Window - BTSEquipment
Scan
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Scan contextual menu appears when you right-click the AISG device. This menu is
used to scan new AISG devices on the RRH. Only the particular device on which the
Scan command is applied gets scanned. Click Manual Refresh to view the changes.
To scan for new devices on RRH, select an RET and click Scan as shown in Figure 2-84,
“Scan Action Window” (p. 2-149):
Figure 2-84 Scan Action Window
A pop up window appears with an action successful message. Click OK and Refresh.
Set TILT
The Set TILT contextual menu is available when you right-click an RET device.
To set the Tilt value, select an RET and enter the Tilt value ranging from range from -90°
to 90° with an increment of 0.1° and click Set TILT as shown in Figure 2-85, “Set TILT
Action Window” (p. 2-150):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-85 Set TILT Action Window
Set TMA Gain
The Set TMA Gain contextual menu is available when you right-click a TMA device and
is used to set TMA gain of one device on an AISG interface (for iBTS only).
To set TMA Gain, select the TMA device and enter the Gain value ranging from 0 to 50
with an increment of 0.25 dB and click Set TMA Gain as shown in Figure 2-86, “Set TMA
Gain Action Window” (p. 2-151):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-86 Set TMA Gain Action Window
Set TMA Mode
The Set TMA Mode contextual menu is available when you right-click a TMA device. In
the case of OneBTS this operation performs as 'setonline' operation through Object Editor
or WICL.
To set the mode of a TMA device, select the TMA device and choose the mode from the
Mode drop-down list and click Set TMA Mode as shown in Figure 2-87, “Set TMA Mode
Action Window” (p. 2-152):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-87 Set TMA Mode Action Window
The available modes are normal and byPass. A pop up window appears with an action
successful message. Click OK and Refresh.
To remove the NE from the above windows, select the NE to be removed and click
Remove From List.
Get Device Data
In the AISG devices tab, right-click an AISG device such as an RET or TMA and choose
Get Device Data as shown in Figure 2-88, “Select AISG device” (p. 2-153).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-88 Select AISG device
The Figure 2-89, “Get Device Data Action Window” (p. 2-154) appears. The new AISG
Device Data tab is visible on the Equipment Monitor details window only when the Get
Device Data command is launched. See Figure 2-90, “AISG Device Data” (p. 2-154).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-89 Get Device Data Action Window
Figure 2-90 AISG Device Data
Set Device Data

In the Figure 2-90, “AISG Device Data” (p. 2-154) values can be changed by selecting
the attribute line and entering a new value in the text box. Click the Set button. The
Figure 2-91, “Set Device Data Action Window” (p. 2-155) appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-91 Set Device Data Action Window
Get Alarm Status

Get Alarm Staus as shown in Figure 2-88, “Select AISG device” (p. 2-153). The Figure
2-92, “Get Alarm Status Action Window” (p. 2-156) appears.
Click the Get Alarm Status, the Figure 2-93, “AISG Alarms Code” (p. 2-156) appears.
The AISG Alarms Code tab is visible on the Equipment Monitor details window only
when the Get Alarm Status command is launched.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-92 Get Alarm Status Action Window
Figure 2-93 AISG Alarms Code
Clear Alarm
Clear Alarm as shown in Figure 2-88, “Select AISG device” (p. 2-153). The Figure 2-94,
“Clear Alarm Action Window” (p. 2-157) appears.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-94 Clear Alarm Action Window
Figure 2-95 AISG devices tab - OneBTSEquipment
The Figure 2-95, “AISG devices tab - OneBTSEquipment” (p. 2-157) is displayed only
when AISG devices are connected to the NodeB. After startup, the NodeB scans the AISG
devices automatically.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The NodeB supports the management of the AISG 2.0 Antenna Line Devices (ALDs) that
are connected to RRH2x60 in a 9396 (OneBTS distributed) d2U and d4U. For
information on the errors in the AISG devices, see ALD and non-ALD errors.
An ALD of type RET is used to set the elevation tilt of a single antenna (single-RET) or
one or more antennas (multi-RET). An ALD of type TMA is a low-noise amplifier
mounted close to the antenna and it is used to improve the sensitivity of the uplink.
ALDs are connected to an RF Transceiver Unit (RTU) of type RRH2x60, which contains
the function of an ALD controller. The ALD controller communicates with the proxy
RFHead inside the NodeB controller.
The WMS controls the AISG devices (ALD) connected to the MC-RRH when operated in
3G-only mode. This enables in improved network availability and coverage.
Three new managed objects (MOs) AISGCtrl, RET, and TMA are auto-created as shown
in Figure 2-95, “AISG devices tab - OneBTSEquipment” (p. 2-157). A managed object
(MO) is a conceptual model of an entity represented in the management interface of a
network element. The majority of managed objects represent hardware units.
Note: While scanning, if the Equipment Monitor window is already opened, the AISG
tab is not displayed. Close the Equipment Monitor and reopen again to view the AISG
tab.
The AISG GUI is reorganized. The number of columns displayed in the window is
reduced in order to avoid using the scroll bar to display them.
The AISG device details are displayed in a tabular format. The fields in the table are listed
as follows:
• Type defines the type of AISG device such as, a controller, an RET or a TMA.
• SectorId defines a string commissioned on the AISG device and it indicates a device
identification scheme.
• DeviceId defines the ID of the controller. A controller is linked with an RET and two
controllers are linked with the TMA, if the TMA is in AISG 1.1. The link between the
controller and the device is given by the DeviceId column. The controller has the
same Device ID as in the device.
• Id/Sub Id defines the ID of the device attached to the controller.
• Antenna Bearing is commissioned on the AISG device by using the TIL.
• Min Tilt and Max Tilt are information in the antenna configuration file uploaded in the
RET device.
• Electrical Tilt, TMA Gain, and TMA Mode are configurable values that can be
modified. Once the Tilt modification is complete, the column Electrical Tilt is directly
refreshed without waiting for the Tilt result. Use the manual refresh button to ensure
that the command is applied.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The AISG tab automatically refreshes. Also, manual refresh button ( ) can be used to
refresh or retrieve the updated values.
Contextual menus on the AISG devices tab - OneBTSEquipment

The AISG contextual menus are described as follows:
Activate AISG Software
In the AISG devices tab, right-click the AISGCtrl device and choose Activate AISG
Software as shown in Figure 2-96, “Activate AISG Software” (p. 2-159).
Figure 2-96 Activate AISG Software
The Figure 2-97, “Activate AISG Software Action Window” (p. 2-160) appears. Select
the NE from the NEs list and click Activate AISG Software to activate the software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-97 Activate AISG Software Action Window
Apply AISG ACF

In the AISG devices tab, right-click the RET device and choose Apply AISG ACF as shown
in Figure 2-98, “Apply AISG ACF” (p. 2-161).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-98 Apply AISG ACF
The Figure 2-99, “Apply AISG ACF Action Window” (p. 2-161) appears.
Figure 2-99 Apply AISG ACF Action Window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-100 Calibrate Action Window - OneBTSEquipment
Click Calibrate, a pop-up window appears with an action successful message displayed
as shown in Figure 2-101, “Action succeeded” (p. 2-162).
Figure 2-101 Action succeeded
Click OK to exit.
Reset
The Reset contextual menu is available when you right-click an AISGCtrl device and is
used to reset the selected AISGCtrl device. See Figure 2-83, “Reset Action Window -
BTSEquipment” (p. 2-148) and Figure 2-102, “Reset Action Window -
OneBTSEquipment” (p. 2-163).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-102 Reset Action Window - OneBTSEquipment
To reset the AISGCtrl device, select the AISGCtrl device and click the Reset button.
Restart Reference RTWP Self Learning
The OneBTS supports a noise floor self-learning algorithm which helps the user in the
UL load management. The algorithm automatically determines the reference Received
Total Wideband Power (RTWP) (the noise floor) in OneBTS. The RTWP is the total
received power in a cell which avoids the need for the user to guess and provide a value
adapted to each cell, or the workaround to rely on a constant value.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-103 Restart Reference RTWP Self Learning Action Window
LightRadio Outdoor Cabinet

The lightRadio™ Outdoor Cabinet is used in mono and multi technologies. These
cabinets are monitored through the OAM center, for the inventory and cabinet or user
alarms.
The lightRadio outdoor cabinet collects external user alarms and cabinet related alarms.
These alarms are transmitted to the central OAM repository and displayed on the operator
terminal window.
The following cabinet alarms are generated in the lightRadio outdoor cabinet controller:
• Door Intrusion
• Fan unit failure
• Filter unit 1
• Filter unit 2
• Over temperature
• Under temperature
• TRDU fan tray failure
• Air flow
The lightRadio outdoor cabinet is displayed as shown in Figure 2-104, “LightRadio
Outdoor Cabinet” (p. 2-165):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-104 LightRadio Outdoor Cabinet
The power related alarms are generated for the primary rectifier shelf if present:
• AC Main
• Rectifier Minor failure
• Rectifier major failure
• Battery Major failure
• Battery Minor failure
• PSU Controller failure
• Surge protection
LightRadio Indoor Cabinet

The lightRadio Indoor Cabinet is small and compact as compared to the lightRadio
Outdoor cabinet. With the LR13.3.W release, the lightRadio indoor cabinet supports the
MC-TRX.
ALD and Non-ALD errors

The antenna line device (ALD) provides a standard interface through which functional
parameters of the device are remotely controlled. The ALD devices include remote
electrical tilt (RET) antennas, tower masthead amplifier (TMA), and other tower-top
equipments.
The ALD errors are the error messages sent by these ALD devices that are electrically
controlled by an RRH and the antenna through the AISG protocol.
Non-ALD errors are most likely, time-out or scan failures, defined by the radio in a
scenario where AISG messages are exchanged with AISG devices.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: In WMS only one ALD operational error can be visible at a time. If there are
multiple operational errors for the same object the user should check the historical
file.
The Table 2-44, “ALD errors” (p. 2-166) describes the ALD errors displayed in the Error
State column of the AISG devices window.
Table 2-44 ALD errors
Error Alarm Description Maintenance procedure

code
1 Actuator Detection Signals from the actuator 1. Reset and calibrate
Fail are detected but are
2. Change the ALD
abnormal. For example,
due to failed calibration.
514 motorJam Actuator cannot be moved. 1. Reset and calibrate
2. Change the ALD
515 actuatorJam Actuator jam is detected. 1. Reset and calibrate
No movement is detected
2. Change the ALD
in response to the normal
stimulus.
4 Block Number This is used in 1. Send the data
Sequence Error combination with the
2. Reset and send the data
software download. The
block number sequence is 3. Change the ALD
wrong
517 busy The device is busy and 1. Wait and try the
cannot execute the command
procedure until an ongoing
2. Reset and try the
activity is completed command
8 Data Error Layer 7 data fault, for 1. Send the data
example, length of the data
2. Reset and send the data
is inconsistent with the
field length. 3. Change the ALD
9 Device Disabled Device is in the logical 1. Reset and try the

disabled state and cannot command
execute the set commands.
2. Scan and try the
command
3. Change the ALD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-44 ALD errors (continued)

code
10 EEPROM Error EEPROM error is 1. Reset and try the
detected. command
2. Scan and try the
command
3. Change the ALD
523 fAIL Abnormal response. This 1. Reset and try the
indicates that a procedure command
is not executed
2. Scan and try the
successfully. command
3. Change the ALD
526 notCalibrated The device has not 1. Calibrate
completed a calibration
2. Download the antenna
operation, or the
file and calibrate again
calibration is lost.
3. Reset and calibrate
4. Change the ALD
527 notConfigured No setup table is stored in Download an antenna file and
the device. reset.
529 hardwareError This occurs when any 1. Reset and try the
hardware error cannot be command
classified.
2. Scan and try the
command
3. Change the ALD
531 outOfRange A parameter provided by Change the value to the
the operator (for example, appropriate range.
tilt value or memory
offset) is out of range.
20 Position Lost The RET controller is 1. Calibrate
unable to return a correct
2. Change the ALD
position value. For
example, a power failure
occurs while a SetTilt
command is executed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

code
21 RAM Error An error is detected when 1. Reset and try the
reading data to/from the command
RAM.
2. Scan and try the
command
3. Change the ALD
23 UART Error This error may be sent 1. Reset and try the
after recovery from a command
temporary error, that
2. Scan and try the
prevents data transmission. command
3. Change the ALD
537 unknownProcedure The received procedure 1. Reset and try the
code is not defined. command
2. Scan and try the
command
3. Contact ALU support
538 minorTMAFault An occurred event affects Check the OMC-B alarm.
the TMA performance.
The TMA continues to
function and the bypass is
not implemented. (The
actual performance
degradation criteria must
be vendor specified.)
539 majorTMAFault An event occurred renders Check the OMC-B alarm.
the TMA performance as
unacceptable. If the bypass
is fitted, the TMA will
switch into bypass mode.
540 unsupportedValue The requested value is not Change the value to the
supported. appropriate range.
541 readOnly Invalid device data 1. Reset and try the
parameter usage command
2. Scan and try the
command
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

code
542 unknownParameter Specified parameter is not 1. Reset and try the
supported for the used command
procedure.
2. Scan and try the
command
543 bypassMode The TMA sub-unit is in Check the OMC-B alarm.
the bypass mode and
cannot report a correct
gain value.
545 workingSoftware- Check the OMC-B alarm. 1. Wait and try the
Missing command
2. Reset and try the
command
3. Scan and try the
command
4. Check the antenna
consistency file
546 invalidFileContent The data downloaded is 1. Reset and try the
detected to have incorrect command
format or size.
2. Scan and try the
command
consistency file
548 formatError The procedure message is 1. Reset and try the
inconsistent if an command
addressed field or antenna
2. Scan and try the
is invalid or the data command
parameter field length is
inconsistent with the
consistency file
corresponding field length
parameter.
549 unsupportedProce- The procedure is optional 1. Reset and try the
dure and is not supported or the command
procedure does not apply
2. Scan and try the
to this device type. command
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

code
550 invalidProcedureSe- The procedure sequence is 1. Reset and try the
quence expected but not command
experienced by the
2. Scan and try the
secondary device. command
551 actuatorInterference An actuator movement is 1. Reset and try the
detected outside the command
control of the RET unit.
2. Scan and try the
The probable cause is command
manual interference.
3. Change the ALD
The Table 2-45, “Non-ALD errors” (p. 2-170) describes the non-ALD errors.
Table 2-45 Non-ALD errors
Error code Alarm Maintenance procedure

258 requestNotSzupported 1. Reset and try the command
2. Scan and try the command
260 softwareError 1. Reset and try the command
269 incorrectState 1. Reset and try the command
276 timeout 1. Reset and try the command
3. Change the ALD
32769 Unknown State Scan and wait for the screen refresh
32880 Incorrect State 1. Reset and try the command
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General description
The Equipment Monitor window includes the following main components:
• “Window header” (p. 2-171)
• “Main pane headers” (p. 2-171)
• “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171)
• “Filtering and search options” (p. 2-174)
• “Navigation capabilities” (p. 2-179)
• “Physical pane” (p. 2-180)
• “Parameter display panes” (p. 2-186)
• “Help on states and statuses” (p. 2-188)
• “Status bar” (p. 2-189)
Window header
The Equipment Monitor window header displays the type of object (RNC,
BTSEquipment, OneBTSEquipment, or POC) represented in the Equipment Monitor
window, followed by the name of this NE.
Main pane headers
Both of the main pane headers display:
• the icon corresponding to the type of NE displayed in the corresponding tree view
pane
• the type of NE displayed in the corresponding tree view pane
• the name of the NE
Double object tree view panes
The Equipment Monitor window contains independent double-object tree view panes:
• RNC resource tree view pane (left-hand pane), which shows the NodeB, Iu interface,
and NeighbouringRNC instances.
Click the left- or right-oriented arrows to hide or show the RNC resource tree view
pane.
The RNC tree view pane does not appear when POC is selected.
• NE logical tree view pane (right-hand pane), which shows the logical view of the
selected NE.
Click the left- or right-oriented arrow to hide or show the tree view panes.
The double object tree view panes are automatically refreshed every 45 sec.
Each tree view pane contains a graphical representation (see Table 1-38, “Object
associated icons” (p. 1-88)) of the logical objects and parameters of the NE. This gives
you a visual representation of the hierarchical relationships among the elements. The
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
arrow symbol near an element indicates that the object is not a child but only an
associated object of the NE, see Figure 2-105, “Equipment Monitor, Element
relationship” (p. 2-172).
Figure 2-105 Equipment Monitor, Element relationship
You can navigate from an associated object to its target object. The “Opening an RNC-
Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-273) procedure shows an example with Node B/<BTS name> associated object.
For an easier view, when the number of instances of an object class exceeds 10, all of
these objects are included in a summary object, see Figure 2-106, “Equipment Monitor,
summary objects” (p. 2-173). The summary object name details the number of instances
included in the summary object and the object class name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-106 Equipment Monitor, summary objects
To expand the sub-levels of any element, click on the symbol "+" near the element.
Some objects not relevant for supervision purpose are not displayed in the sub-tree, you
can display these objects: select Display whole objects tree in the right-hand tree view
pane to display the entire sub-tree of a node, without object filtering.
The two columns to the left of the object tree display:
• object alarms:
Alarms are always displayed. Their color and label indicate the alarm severity.
The color code is the same as the one used in the Resource Browser.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The column displays an alarm summary when you move the cursor over the alarm
cell; a tooltip appears showing the number of alarms and the subtree alarms summary
count, see Figure 2-107, “Equipment Monitor, information on object alarms”
(p. 2-174).
• object states and statuses:
If up to two states and/or statuses apply to an object, the corresponding icons are
displayed, for the meaning of the icon see “State display” (p. 1-81). If more than two
states and/or statuses apply to an object, an “Overview” (p. 1-81) is displayed instead.
Click “Overview” (p. 1-81) to see the detailed information on the object states and
statuses, see Figure 2-108, “Equipment Monitor, information on object states and
statuses” (p. 2-174).
Figure 2-107 Equipment Monitor, information on object alarms
Figure 2-108 Equipment Monitor, information on object states and statuses
Filtering and search options

Each tree view pane of the Equipment Monitor window contains independent filtering
and search options to improve operational effectiveness. The filtering and search options
are useful for troubleshooting operations. If the NE tree view pane contains several panes,
the filtering and search options apply for all of them.
Only one Filter or Search window can be open at the same time for each Equipment
Monitor window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-109 Filtering and search options
The filtering and search options include:

• Use filter, to activate or deactivate the filter.
Once at least one criterion filter is defined Use filter is enabled. When Use filter is
selected, the object tree view is automatically refreshed according to your filter
criteria in the tree view.
• Filter, to open the Figure 2-110, “Equipment Monitor, Filter window” (p. 2-176) and
create filter criteria.
• Search, to open the Figure 2-112, “Equipment Monitor, Search window”
(p. 2-178) and find a component instance in the whole object tree view.
• a text field, to find a character string in the displayed components of the object tree
view.
You can use the wild card.
• right- and left-oriented arrows, to navigate in the search result when performing a
search with the text field.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-110 Equipment Monitor, Filter window
The Filter window contains:

• filter tabs, to compose a filter criteria list
• Criteria list pane
The filter tabs contain the following options:
• Component tab (RNC selected), which includes:
– Ran component list
• Alarm tab (RNC, BTS, or POC selected), which includes:
– alarm types
Do not select Indeterminate alarm type
– alarm statuses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• States and Status tab (RNC or BTS selected), which includes:
– administrative and operational states
– availability, standby, control, and unknown statuses.
The Criteria list pane is updated according to the added filters. You can select or unselect
the added filter.
To filter the display in the Equipment Monitor window, see “Filtering the display in the
Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-268).
Once a filter is created, in the Equipment Monitor window:
• move the mouse on Filter to view the detailed filter criteria, see Figure 2-111,
“Equipment Monitor, detailed filter criteria” (p. 2-177).
• the object tree view is continuously and automatically refresh according to the filter
criteria:
– objects that do not meet any filter criterion disappear from the object tree view,
– new objects that meet the filter criterion appear in the object tree view.
Figure 2-111 Equipment Monitor, detailed filter criteria
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-112 Equipment Monitor, Search window
The Search window contains:

• a Search Criteria pane, which includes:
– a Search For list, which contains all of the object class names,
– a Containing Text field.
• a Search Results pane, which displays the search results.
The first 5000 results are displayed. Enter more precise criteria for a more accurate
result.
You can perform search on:
• component name,
• part of component name (you can use the wild card).
To find a component instance in the tree view, see “Finding a component instance from an
Equipment Monitor tree view” (p. 2-270).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To find a string in the displayed components of the object tree view only, see “Finding a
character string in the displayed components of an Equipment Monitor tree view”
(p. 2-271).
You must deactivate the filter when you perform a search on a component instance that
match the filter criteria.
Navigation capabilities
From the Equipment Monitor, depending on the NE/object selected, you can open:
• another Equipment Monitor window,
• an Alarm Manager window,
• the Object Editor window,
• the Notifications Log Tool window,
• the Set Administrative State Action window,
• the Set NE's OAM Link Administrative State Action window,
• the OSI State Reporting window.
You can perform actions from the Equipment Monitor double object tree view, physical
view, and Details panes, see “Contextual menus on the Equipment Monitor” (p. 1-45).
You can navigate from an RNC- Equipment Monitor window to a BTSEquipment-
Equipment Monitor window. You can:
• replace the RNC- Equipment Monitor window by the BTSEquipment- Equipment
Monitor window.
In the NE logical tree view pane, the BTSEquipment is shown instead of the RNC
C-node and I-node.
• open a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window in a new window.
See “Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from an RNC- Equipment
Monitor window” (p. 2-272).
You can navigate from a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window to an RNC-
Equipment Monitor window. You can:
• replace the BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window by the RNC- Equipment
Monitor window.
In the NE logical tree view pane the RNC C-node and I-node are shown instead of the
BTSEquipment.
• open an RNC- Equipment Monitor window in a new window (from the Node B
Figure 2-105, “Equipment Monitor, Element relationship” (p. 2-172))
See “Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- Equipment
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can navigate from an associated object to its target object. The target object can
belong to the same NE or to another NE.
Example:
The “Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- Equipment
Monitor window” (p. 2-273) procedure shows an example from a BTSEquipment-
Equipment Monitor window, with Node B/<BTS name> associated object, whose target
object belongs to the RNC.
When you open a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window, the NodeB
corresponding to the BTSEquipment is automatically highlighted in the RNC resource
tree view.
Physical pane
The physical pane of the Equipment Monitor window contains the graphical
representation of the hardware equipment (RNC, BTS, POC, d2U or d4U with RRH,
TRDU and MC-TRX). The graphical view of the hardware displays the inventory
information such as:
• cabinet
• shelves
• modules or cards/passive components
Contextual menus used on these graphical representation is detailed under “Contextual
menus on the Equipment Monitor” (p. 1-45).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-113 Graphical view of hardware inventory
A set of icons enables user to zoom or center the shelf level display. See Shelf level
display functions described below and “Modifying the shelf level display” (p. 2-275).
Alarm balloons on each hardware module also indicate the number and severity of
alarms, using the standard scheme (for example "1C+" indicates one critical alarm and
one or more alarms of lower severity).
WMS supports MC-TRX, TRDU, and d2U or d4U modules. This is represented in Figure
2-115, “MC-TRX graphical representation” (p. 2-184) and Figure 2-116, “RRH and
TRDU graphical representation” (p. 2-184).
With LR14.2.W:
• Only the 9396 d4U supports six CPRI ports, the d2U has only 3 CPRI ports
• OneBTS supports CPRI rate1 for both RRH1 (1 TX port) and RRH2 (2 TX ports)
The d4U provides the hardware to support up to 12 cells. This is possible by the extension
of the number of CPRI ports, an improved OCM and the possibility to equip additional
UCU’s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
dDAS
The CDIU (CPRI Digital Interface Unit) is part of TE FlexWave distributed antenna
system (DAS) solution and is connected to the digital unit through the optical CPRI
interface. The digital distributed antenna system (dDAS) includes the CDIU inside a host
unit and a spatially distributed set of antenna nodes to provide wireless coverage in
buildings or other cluttered areas or where zoning prohibits a single antenna installation.
The TE dDAS solution can be connected to a CPRI interface and represents the RF unit
when using the 9396 digital unit. The CDIU is displayed as RFHead from WMS. It gets
autodetected similar to the RRH1x/2x.
For iBTS:
• With the dDAS feature, new 4 carrier x 1900MHz configurations are added. In
addition to this, new OAM capabilities such as improved OAM representation on
CDIU and additional CPRI alarms are also added.
• WMS supports two NodeBs inside one d4U. This configuration provides higher
signaling capacity than what can be offered by a single logical NodeB supporting up
to 6 modem boards. The NodeBs are referred to as dual NodeBs.
The current NodeB configurations are limited to a maximum of 12 cells (sector-carriers).
As NodeB capacities increase, and as larger configurations are needed to support dual
band systems, a higher limit is required. In the current release LR14.2.W support is
provided for the NodeB to support 12 cells. 12 cells means configurations of three sectors
up to eight carriers or six sectors up to four carriers, or 12 sectors up to two carriers, or
similar.
The W-CDMA and LTE technology will now operate in parallel inside a single d4U
subrack. The d4U is logically split to accommodate the W-CDMA NodeB and the LTE
NodeB. The dual-technology allows the customer to introduce LTE inside WCDMA
NodeBs with d4U without adding an additional digital subrack. This allows the reuse of
existing d4U subrack, providing a smooth evolution path towards LTE.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-114 LTE board in a d4U rack
The MC-TRX 67-09 module supports 2.0MHz carrier spacing between 2G and 3G
services in the allocated 900MHz bandwidth. For more information on MC-TRX
architecture, activation, and configuration, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - MC-TRX Configuration and Activation, 9YZ-04157-0042-PGZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-115 MC-TRX graphical representation
Figure 2-116 RRH and TRDU graphical representation
Note: MC-TRX, TRDU, and d2U or d4U are also supported through 2G legacy
cabinets such as Nortel S8000 or S18000 Outdoor BTS. WMS NSP is used to manage
only the 3G module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSI state information is also available. If up to two states and/or statuses apply to an
object, the corresponding icons are displayed on the object, for the meaning of the icon
see “State display” (p. 1-81). If more than two states and/or statuses apply to an object, an
“Overview” (p. 1-81) replaces the icons. Click the Information indicator to display the
detailed information on the object states and statuses, see Figure 2-117, “Equipment
Monitor, information on equipment states and statuses” (p. 2-185).
Figure 2-117 Equipment Monitor, information on equipment states and statuses
See “WMS contextual menus” (p. 1-43) for actions that you can perform from the
Equipment Monitor Physical pane.
Shelf level display functions
You can zoom in or out of the physical cabinet view by clicking on the icon buttons above
the cabinet pane. You can zoom in for a closer look at the cards or zoom out for a more
general view. You can also fit the shelf display to the window, see “Modifying the shelf
level display” (p. 2-275).
Table 2-46 Description of the display functions
Icon Action
Zooms in one level of magnification on the shelf display.
Zooms out one level of magnification on the shelf display.
Returns the magnification to the last setting selected.
Returns the zoom to the original level of magnification.
Sets the zoom level so that the shelf display fits the entire window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter display panes
The parameter display panes show:
• Details for <object icon> <object type/object name>, the header that displays:
– the icon corresponding to the type of object selected in the corresponding tree
view pane,
– the type of selected object,
– the name of the selected object.
In case of multiple selection, the header displays the number of objects only.
• General tab,
• Feature activation tab (for FDDCell object only),
• Dynamic Data tab (for NE tree view pane only).
For more information on dynamic data, see “Monitoring logical & physical resources”
(p. 3-187).
The main parameters are displayed (name, state, status and other relevant information). If
several objects are selected, no information is displayed except the number of selected
objects.
To refresh the parameter display information, click the Refresh icon:
Click up or down arrows to show or hide the parameter display pane.

General tab and Dynamic Data tab give important information for NE supervision. Click
the left- and up-oriented arrows to display the NE parameter display pane only, see Figure
2-118, “Equipment Monitor, Details for <object icon> <object type/object name> pane”
(p. 2-187).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-118 Equipment Monitor, Details for <object icon> <object type/object
name> pane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For FDDCell objects, in addition to the General and Dynamic Data tabs, the Equipment
Monitor window shows the cell feature activation status.
Figure 2-119 Feature activation tab for FDDCell object
Note: For more details on parameters, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - Node B Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-04157-0023-RKZZA.
Help on states and statuses
In the Equipment Monitor window, select Help > States and statuses icons meaning to
open the following Figure 2-120, “State and status icon meaning” (p. 2-189) that lists the
state and status icon meaning.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-120 State and status icon meaning
Note: For detailed information on sleepy cell degraded availability state, see UTRAN
Status bar
The status bar displays the NE name when you move the cursor over a managed object.
see an example Figure 2-73, “Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370)”
(p. 2-139).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management OSI State Reporting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSI State Reporting

Overview
Use the OSI State Reporting window to visualize all of the objects that are not in a
correct state.
About OSI State Reporting

The OSI State Reporting window lists all the NEs and their subcomponents that are not
in a correct OSI state. The correct OSI state and status combinations are as follows:
• operational state: enabled
• administrative state: unlocked
• availability status: empty (idle)
• control status: empty (idle)
States and statuses that are not included in an object are not taken into account.
To open the OSI State Reporting window, see “Opening the OSI State Reporting
window” (p. 2-282).
You can perform actions from the OSI State Reporting window, see “Contextual menus
on the OSI State Reporting” (p. 1-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-121 OSI State Reporting window
The Figure 2-121, “OSI State Reporting window” (p. 2-191) includes:
• an upper part, which includes:
– a “Progress bar” (p. 2-192),
– “Suspend/Resume buttons” (p. 2-192),
– “Stop/Refresh All and Stop/Refresh buttons” (p. 2-192),
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– “Last update information” (p. 2-192),
– an “The NE table” (p. 2-192), which lists for each NE the number of objects that
are in bad state.
• a lower part, which includes:
– a “Progress bar” (p. 2-192),
– “Suspend/Resume buttons” (p. 2-192),
– “Stop/Refresh All and Stop/Refresh buttons” (p. 2-192),
– “Last update information” (p. 2-192),
– an “The object table” (p. 2-192), which details for the selected NE in the NE table,
all the objects that are in bad state.
Progress bar
The progress bar gives an approximate indication for the retrieval progress of the objects.
The number of NEs already covered (with their sub-components) and the total number of
NEs in the current 9353 WMS layout determine the progress.
Suspend/Resume buttons
Click Suspend to suspend the retrieval. When you click Suspend, it changes to Resume.
Click Resume to resume data retrieval.
When the retrieval of information is completed, the Suspend/Resume buttons appear
dimmed. Otherwise, they are enabled.
Stop/Refresh All and Stop/Refresh buttons

Click Stop to stop the retrieval process. The objects already loaded are kept in the table,
but no new NEs are covered. After the stop or the end of the retrieval of information,
these buttons switch to Refresh All/Refresh.
Last update information

Last update indicates the date and time at which the retrieval of the information began.
The NE table
The NE table displays for each NE the number of sub-objects that are in bad state.
The object table

The object table details for the NE selected in the NE table all the objects that are in bad
state. This table displays the following information:
• Object Name
• NE Name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Operational State
• Administrative State
• Availability Status
• Control Status
• Standby Status
Click on a column header to sort the column content.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management FM Audit Request
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FM Audit Request
Overview
Launch the FM Audit Request command to:
• retrieve OSI state values from the selected 931x, 932x, and 933x BTSs and store them
into WMS database, or
• retrieve OSI state values from the RNC C-node and store them into WMS database, or
• retrieve active alarm list from the RNC C-node and update WMS alarm list.
When you launch an FM Audit Request on an RNC, warning alarms non-cleared
automatically by the RNC are purged during FM audit operation.
To launch an FM Audit Request command, see “Requesting an FM audit” (p. 2-284).
Alternatively, you can launch an FM audit with a WICL command (fmSnapshot
command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Manual FM Audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manual FM Audit
Overview
Launch the Manual FM Audit command to retrieve active alarm list from an NE (SR or
SAR) and update WMS alarm list.
When you launch a Manual FM Audit on an NE, warning alarms non-cleared
automatically by the NE are purged during FM audit operation.
To launch a Manual FM Audit command, see “Launching a manual FM audit” (p. 2-285).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management FM Synchronize
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FM Synchronize
Overview
Launch the FM Synchronize command to:
• retrieve OSI state values from the selected OneBTSs and store them into WMS
database.
• retrieve active alarm list from the selected OneBTSs and update WMS alarm list.
FM Synchronize command can be launched even if another job or session is currently in
progress.
To launch an FM Synchronize command, see “Launching an FM Synchronize”
(p. 2-286).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Notifications Log Tool
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notifications Log Tool

Overview
The Notifications Log Tool displays the notification log and notification history.
To open and manage the Figure 2-122, “Notifications Log Tool window” (p. 2-198), see
“Managing the Notifications Log” (p. 2-249).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-122 Notifications Log Tool window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Notifications Log Tool window includes:
• a Retrieval Criteria pane, which contains:
– an NE's List, which lists all the objects selected in the active window. You must
re-select the objects for which you want to get the notifications.
Click Select All to select all the NEs and click Remove From List (active if, at
least, an NE is selected) to remove some of them.
– an option pane, to limit the amount of found and displayed notifications (the first
1000 results are displayed only). You can add filters on:
– date: From Date is pre-filled with the current date and time - 6 hours and To
Date is pre-filled with the current date and time.
Click the date to open a calendar and change the settings.
– alarm and/or state parameters. Click Filters to open the Figure 2-123,
“Notifications Log Tool - Advanced Filter window” (p. 2-201) and add filters.
– Display to start the search.
– Export to save the search result in .csv or .text format.
• a Notifications List pane, which details all the notifications that match the retrieval
criteria:
– Event Time, which displays the date and time of the notification
– Record Type (Alarm or State Change)
– Notification Id
– NE Name
– Object Name
– Specific Problem (see Table 2-40, “Probable cause mapping derived from
standard X.721” (p. 2-122))
– Severity / State (depending on the Record Type)
You can sort the items by column header.
A Detailed Export action is available in the pop-up menu for you to export additional
column in the .CSV or .txt format.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• a Details pane, which displays the details of the notification(s) selected in the
Notifications List pane. Its contents automatically update with the new notification
selection in the Notifications List pane.
In the Notifications List pane, you can select:
– one notification by one
– several notifications at a time (press [CTRL] or [SHIFT])
– all notifications (press [CTRL] + [A]).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To expand the Details pane, click the right-oriented arrow.
Additional options
You can perform the following actions:
• add filters to your search criteria, see Figure 2-123, “Notifications Log Tool -
Advanced Filter window” (p. 2-201),
• navigate among the displayed notifications and displayed notification details,
• export, save, and print the notification logs, see “Contextual menus on the
Notifications Log Tool” (p. 1-49),
• find a string in the search result, see Figure 2-124, “Notifications Log Tool - Find
window” (p. 2-202).
Figure 2-123 Notifications Log Tool - Advanced Filter window
In the Retrieval Criteria pane, click Filters to add filters on notification log search. You
can add filter on:
• Alarm parameters:
– notification type value,
– severity value,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– specific problem value,
– probable cause value.
• State Change parameters:
– administrative state value,
– operational state value,
– standby status value.
To delete all the filter criteria, click Reset All.
To save a notification(s) from the Notifications List pane, see “Managing the
Notifications Log” (p. 2-249).
You can save selected or all retrieved notifications in CSV or text format. If you select
CSV format, the notification table is saved in ASCII format compatible with Excel. If you
choose text format, the notifications are saved in the same format as they appear in the
Details pane.
To print notification(s) from the Notifications List pane, see “Managing the Notifications
Log” (p. 2-249).
You can print selected or all retrieved notifications in text or tabular format.
Figure 2-124 Notifications Log Tool - Find window
In the Details pane, right-click Find to open the Find window, which contains:
• a Find String field, to enter any text you want to find in the Details pane,
• a Match Case option for the search string,
• Next, to get the search results and navigate in the result list,
• a navigation Direction option, to move forward or backward in the results.
Note: If no notifications are found, an information dialog No notifications have
been found is displayed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Incorrectly provisioned Node B list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Incorrectly provisioned Node B list

Overview
To open the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window see “Opening the Incorrectly
provisioned NodeB list window” (p. 2-248).
Use the Incorrectly Provisioned NodeB List window (or Not/Multi-provisioned NodeBs
window) to display:
• Node Bs multi-provisioned: an "NE Connect Request" returns several answers.
• Node Bs not provisioned: an "NE Connect Request" returns no answer.
Figure 2-125 Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window
The Incorrectly Provisioned NodeB List window displays the NodeB list, which details
for all Node Bs that are multi- and non-provisioned, the following information:
• date of the last Node Bs request
• NE Id
• error type (not provisioned or multi-provisioned)
• NE IP address
• OMC IP address
• user label
• additional text
Click Refresh to update the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm customization
Overview
Purpose
To customize external alarms, see “Customizing external alarms” (p. 2-289) procedure.
Contents
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set 2-205

Auto-acknowledgement of alarms 2-207
Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations 2-208
Operator annotation on alarm type 2-210
Persistent Alarm Manager user preferences 2-212
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm Stream Management Rule Set
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm Stream Management Rule Set

Overview
Use the Alarm Stream Management Rule Set (ARS) to configure a set of rules applied to
each alarm received by the 9353 WMS. It allows you to create, remove or update rules
and specify whether a rule is applied to the received alarms or not. Select, create, delete,
and edit the rules from the Figure 2-126, “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window”
(p. 2-206).
Prerequisite
You must be logged in as administrator to have full rights to change the settings of alarm
stream management rules.
Attention: Send email action: email destination
Use the Alarm Stream Management Rule Set to configure a set of rules applied to each
alarm received by the 9353 WMS. It allows you to create, remove or update rules and
specify whether a rule is applied to the received alarms or not. The following figure
shows the window from which the rules can be:
• selected
• created
• edited
• deleted
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm Stream Management Rule Set
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-126 Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window
A rule consists of two parts, criteria and action.

• An alarm triggers a rule after and only after meeting the criteria specified in the rule.
• An action specifies what the 9353 WMS shall do after the rule criteria is met.
Set filtering criteria on the alarms to reduce the number of alarms to deal with.
For more detailed information, see “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window”
(p. 2-89).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Auto-acknowledgement of alarms
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auto-acknowledgement of alarms
Overview
You can set alarms to be automatically acknowledged based on an alarm type. For details
on managing the auto-acknowledgement feature see “Managing the alarm stream”
(p. 2-238).
Configure the Auto-acknowledgement function from the “Alarm Stream Management
Rule Set ” (p. 2-205) menu.
Set the filtering criteria in the Figure 2-127, “Rule definition window - auto-acknowledge
options” (p. 2-207) window.
To automatically acknowledge an alarm select the Acknowledge option in the Action
field. This acknowledge action applies to the alarms matching the criteria defined in the
Alarm criteria pane.
Figure 2-127 Rule definition window - auto-acknowledge options
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations

Overview
Forward an alarm to multiple destinations based on alarm “Alarm criteria pane”
(p. 2-117) so that, if a serious problem occurs, people are notified in the minimum amount
of time.
You can forward alarms to up to five email or SMS recipients. For details on the use of
this feature, see the “Forwarding an alarm” (p. 2-243) procedure.
Attention: Send email action: email destination
This feature is accessed via the “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set ” (p. 2-205). You
can select the action to send an E-mail or SMS from the Action list, shown Figure 2-128,
“Rule Definition window - Alarm forwarding” (p. 2-208).
Figure 2-128 Rule Definition window - Alarm forwarding
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Alarm forwarding to multiple destinations
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS has the ability to send notifications to different destinations for various defined
events. For example, the relevant people can be notified for specific hardware issues at
different locations. When notified, relevant personnel can find out the exact sequence of
events, and take action accordingly.
The Figure 2-129, “Alarm Details” (p. 2-209) shows an example of an alarm being
forwarded to multiple destinations.
Figure 2-129 Alarm Details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Operator annotation on alarm type
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operator annotation on alarm type

Overview
You can annotate an alarm type (not the alarm instance) from the Alarm Manager
window. The alarm note is applied to all alarms of this type (same alarm code).
To open the Figure 2-130, “Note on Alarm Type window” (p. 2-210) and annotate an
alarm, see “Annotating an alarm” (p. 2-236).
Annotated alarms are identified in the Alarm Manager window with a pencil icon in the
Note column, see Figure 2-131, “Alarm Manager - Note on alarm type” (p. 2-211).
The last user to edit the annotation can edit the entire annotation.
The Figure 2-130, “Note on Alarm Type window” (p. 2-210) and Note on Alarm Type tab
detail:
• Alarm Code
• Help Volume
• user name, hostname, date, and time of annotation.
Figure 2-130 Note on Alarm Type window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Operator annotation on alarm type
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-131 Alarm Manager - Note on alarm type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Persistent Alarm Manager user preferences
Alarm customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Persistent Alarm Manager user preferences

Overview
The 9353 WMS GUI maintains the size, shape, ordering and column positions of the
Alarm Manager window on closing. These are restored on reopening the window. This
occurs even if you log out and hence save the login time duration.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information to manage alarm or events.
Contents
Opening the UTRAN Service View window 2-215

Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display 2-216
Configuring alarm severity colors 2-218
Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms 2-220
Updating the Alarm List 2-223
Modifying the Alarm List display 2-224
Viewing raw alarm details 2-225
Viewing the alarm description with the online help 2-226
Manually clearing an alarm 2-228
Applying alarm severity filters 2-229
Managing advanced alarm filters 2-230
Deleting private advanced alarm filters 2-233
Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms 2-234
Annotating an alarm 2-236
Navigating from the Alarm Manager to the Equipment Monitor 2-237
Managing the alarm stream 2-238
Modifying an alarm rule 2-240
Creating an alarm rule 2-241
Forwarding an alarm 2-243
Toggling the audible alarm tone 2-245
Opening the alarm Network Banner 2-247
Opening the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window 2-248
Managing the Notifications Log 2-249
Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules 2-252
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only 2-254

Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation) 2-256
Enabling Maintenance Mode 2-257
Disabling Maintenance Mode for an NE 2-258
Choosing the Resource Browser graphical view 2-259
Filtering the display of the technology layers 2-260
Opening a link continuation icon 2-261
Opening an Equipment Monitor window 2-262
Launching a Diagnose command on a OneBTS 2-264
Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window 2-268
Finding a component instance from an Equipment Monitor tree view 2-270
Finding a character string in the displayed components of an Equipment 2-271
Monitor tree view
Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from an RNC- 2-272
Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a BTSEquipment- 2-273
Localizing an NE in the Resource Browser from the Equipment Monitor 2-274
Modifying the shelf level display 2-275
Launching a PowerTest / an rxAntennaTest action on a OneBTSCell 2-276
Launching a cancelSelfSurvey / an inititateSelfSurvey action on a OneBTS GRS 2-279
object
Opening the OSI State Reporting window 2-282
Navigating from the OSI State Reporting window to the Equipment Monitor 2-283
Requesting an FM audit 2-284
Launching a manual FM audit 2-285
Launching an FM Synchronize 2-286
Configuring the server for Sendemail and SendSMS 2-288
Customizing external alarms 2-289
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening the UTRAN Service View window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the UTRAN Service View window

Overview
Use this procedure to re-open the UTRAN Service View window.
Prerequisite
A layout is selected, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Window -> Show UTRAN Service View.
Result: The Figure 1-11, “UTRAN Service View window” (p. 1-22) appears with
your last configuration settings.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display

Overview
Use this procedure to modify the UTRAN Service View window display. UTRAN Service
View window display preferences are saved as your profile settings and apply to your
future logon sessions.
It is useful to reduce the size of the UTRAN Service View window while still leaving it in
a corner of the 9353 WMS window, so that you are always aware and easily alerted when
objects change state.
Prerequisite
A UTRAN Service View window is open, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111) or
“Opening the UTRAN Service View window” (p. 2-215).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can:
• show or hide columns:
1. In the UTRAN Service View window, right-click a column header and select
Show/Hide Columns.
The Figure 1-13, “UTRAN Service View - show/hide columns ” (p. 1-26) appears.
2. In Show/Hide Columns window, select/unselect the object(s) you want to
show/hide in the UTRAN Service View window.
3. Click OK.
The Show/Hide Columns window disappears and the Figure 1-11, “UTRAN
Service View window” (p. 1-22) is automatically updated.
• sort the rows by object:
1. Click a column header to sort the rows according to this object.
The table is automatically sorted according to the selected object and a sort
indicator arrow appears on the right-hand side of the selected column header.
2. Click the arrow if you want to reverse the sort order.
• resize the columns:
Drag the column header separator bar(s) to resize column width.
• reorganize column order:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Modifying the UTRAN Service View window display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drag and drop the column header to the selected place.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Configuring alarm severity colors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring alarm severity colors

Overview
Use this procedure to configure alarm severity colors. For overview information, see
Configure alarm severity colors under “Alarm severity colors” (p. 2-37).
Prerequisites
To configure alarm severity colors:
• You must have the appropriate permission settings to access the Alarm Color Chooser.
• You must close all layouts before you can access the Alarm Color Chooser.
Alarm severity colors apply globally to all users.
Alarm severity color changes apply immediately in the GUI where the Alarm Color
Chooser is opened. Other users must restart their GUI session before changes apply.
Procedure
To configure alarm severity colors, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Admin > Configure Alarm Colors.
Result: The Figure 2-21, “Alarm Color Chooser window” (p. 2-38) opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alarm Color Chooser window, select one of the following tabs:
• the Swatches tab to set a predefined color from a palette of swatches
• the HSV tab to set the hue, saturation, and value attributes
• the HSL tab to set the hue, saturation, and lightness attributes
• the RGB tab to set red, green, and blue values
• the CMYK tab to set the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values define red, green, and
blue values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select additional alarm severity types and configure colors as required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Configuring alarm severity colors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Do one of the following:

• Click Apply to set the configured colors.
• Click Cancel to discard any changes and revert to previous settings.
• Click Load Default Colors to apply the 9353 WMS default alarm severity colors, and
click Apply.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms

Overview
Use this procedure to open the “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57) window, view alarm details
and perform actions such as:
• acknowledge alarms, see “Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms” (p. 2-234).
• unacknowledge alarms, see “Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms”
(p. 2-234).
• manually clear alarms, see “Manually clearing an alarm” (p. 2-228).
You can choose to display all alarms for the current layout or limit the display to only
alarms relating to a specific group, NE, or card/board.
You can open up to five Alarm Manager windows at a time, after which the Open
Window Limit dialog is displayed (see Figure 2-40, “Open Window Limit dialog box”
(p. 2-73)).
Plug-in applications can be added that determine the display of the Alarm Manager
window based on the current activity in the application. The Alarm Manager can be
launched from the application or from either the Show Alarms command or the Show
Alarms in New Window command in the 9353 WMS window Fault menu while the
application is open and selected.
9353 WMS has two displays that show all of the alarms in the current layout: the
“Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators” (p. 2-53).
When the system receives alarm information, all alarm totals in the current layout are
updated in both displays. See Alarm counts under “Alarm text cues” (p. 2-38) to
understand what affects the number of alarms that are displayed.
Alternatively, you can get alarms with a WICL command (FM getAlarms command). For
detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands
Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisites
To open:
• a UTRAN service view window, see “Opening a Network Layout” (p. 1-111) or
“Opening the UTRAN Service View window” (p. 2-215).
• a Resource Browser, see “Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150).
• an Equipment Monitor, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-262).
• a Network Banner, see “Network Banner and status bar alarm indicators” (p. 2-53).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can display the alarms:

• for the current layout, either:
– in the UTRAN service view window, right-click the layout row and select Show
alarms or Show Alarms in New Window, or
– in the Figure 2-29, “Network banner” (p. 2-54), click Details, or
– with no icon selected in the Resource Browser, from the 9353 WMS window
menu bar select Fault -> Show alarms or Show Alarms in New Window.
If there is a large number of alarms in the network, opening the Alarm Manager
this way may cause significant delays.
• for a group of NEs, either:
– in the UTRAN service view window, right-click the group name row and select
Show alarms or Show Alarms in New Window, or
– in the Navigator, right-click the group name and select Show Alarms or Show
Alarms in New Window, or
– in the Resource Browser, right-click the group icon and select Show Alarms or
Show Alarms in New Window, or
– in the Resource Browser, select the group icon and from the 9353 WMS window
menu bar, select Fault -> Show Alarms or Show Alarms in New Window. If you
do not click on a group before selecting an option from the Fault menu, all alarms
for the current layout are displayed.
• for an NE:
From the Resource Browser or the Equipment Monitor, either:
– right-click the NE icon and select Show Alarms or Show Alarms in New Window,
or
– select the NE icon and then from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault >
Show Alarms or Show Alarms in New Window.
If you do not click an NE before selecting an option from the Fault menu, all
alarms for the current layout are displayed.
• for a card/board:
From the Equipment Monitor, in the “Physical pane” (p. 2-180), right-click the
element and select Show Alarms or Show Alarms in New Window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To display multiple Alarm Manager windows:
• from the Fault menu, select Show Alarms in New Window
• from the Navigator, right-click a resource and select Show Alarms in New Window
• from the Resource Browser, right-click a resource and select Show Alarms in New
Window
Result: The “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57) window appears and displays the list of
active alarms for the selected NE(s).
If an Alarm Manager window is already open and you chose:
• Show Alarms, the Alarm Manager window shows the alarms of all the selected
NE(s) according to the filters defined for this Alarm Manager window only.
• Show Alarms in New Window, the Alarm Manager window shows all the alarms
of all the selected NEs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Alarm Manager window - Alarm List pane, you can:
• view detailed information on the selected alarm, see “Viewing raw alarm details”
(p. 2-225).
• view detailed description of the selected alarm, see “Viewing the alarm description
with the online help” (p. 2-226).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Updating the Alarm List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Updating the Alarm List

Overview
Use this procedure to update the Alarm List. The Alarm List can be updated manually or
automatically. If you enable automatic updates, the Alarm List is updated when the
following events occur:
• new alarms arrive
• alarms are acknowledged or unacknowledged
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the Alarm Manager window, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing
alarms” (p. 2-220).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To update the Alarm List, you can either:

• Enable Alarm List automatic updates: select Auto-refresh list in the “Alarm List
options pane” (p. 2-65), or
• Manually update the Alarm List: click Refresh List.
To enable Refresh List, deselect Auto-refresh list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Modifying the Alarm List display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying the Alarm List display

Overview on the Alarm List display
Use this procedure to modify the display of the Alarm List in the Alarm Manager
window. Alarm List display preferences are applied to all subsequent Alarm Manager
windows opened in this session and are saved and applied to future logon sessions.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarms” (p. 2-220).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can:
• resize the columns: drag the separator bars between the column headings,
• reorder the columns: drag the column headers to the left or right,
• sort columns: select a column as the key for sorting the Alarm List by clicking on a
column heading
You cannot sort the Alarm List using the Alarm status column. The Alarm status
column displays color-coded alarm balloons that correspond to the alarm severity.
• perform a multiple-column sort:
1. From the Actions menu, select Sort Alarm List.
2. From the Sort Alarm List dialog window select the columns to sort by in one or
more of the three lists.
Default values are Time Raised (Local) in the top field, (None) in the middle and
bottom fields.
3. For each of the sort selections, click either Ascending or Descending.
4. Click OK.
• view alarm details:
1. If the Alarm Details pane is collapsed, toggle the arrow below the Alarm List to
expand the display of the Alarm Details pane.
2. Select an alarm in the Alarm List to display alarm details.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Viewing raw alarm details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing raw alarm details

Overview on raw alarm details
Use this procedure to view raw alarm details in the Alarm Record Viewer. The viewer
displays all the alarm data in a scrollable text field. You can open a maximum of five
Alarm Record Viewer windows.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarms” (p. 2-220).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alarm List, select one or more alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Alarm Manager menu bar, select Actions -> View Raw Details, or right-click an
alarm and select View Raw Details.
Result: The Figure 2-39, “Alarm Record Viewer window” (p. 2-72) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 You can copy text from the Alarm Record Viewer to another application. Select the text
you want to copy, and in the View Raw Details menu bar, select Edit -> Copy.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Viewing the alarm description with the online help
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing the alarm description with the online help

Overview on alarm description with the online help
Use this procedure to view the alarm description detailed in the online help.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarms” (p. 2-220).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alarm List, select an alarm raw.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Alarm Manager menu bar, select Help -> Selected Item Help, or right-click the
alarm raw and select Selected Item Help.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Viewing the alarm description with the online help
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 2-132, “Online help of a selected alarm” (p. 2-227) window
appears with detailed description of the selected alarm.
Figure 2-132 Online help of a selected alarm
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Manually clearing an alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually clearing an alarm

Overview on clearing an alarm
Use this procedure to manually clear an alarm displayed in the Alarm Manager window.
Manually clearing an alarm removes all notification associated with the alarm. The alarm
counts and alarm severity colors of the alarm balloons on any impacted NEs or groups
change accordingly when you manually clear an alarm. Your system administrator uses
the Access Control window to assign permission to manually clear an alarm. The Manual
Alarm Clear command is disabled for alarms that you cannot manually clear on an NE.
Respond to the alarms according to your local operating procedures.
Attention: Turning off the Auto-refresh List option
Alcatel-Lucent recommends you turn off the Auto-refresh List option before you
perform this operation. This avoids an alarm list selection change because of an
automatic update to the alarm list as a result of a new alarm being raised.
Alternatively, you can clear an alarm with a WICL command (FM clearAlarm command).
For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System -
Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click the alarm you want to clear. You can select a range of sequential alarms by holding
the Shift key while clicking the alarms you want to clear. Similarly, you can select
multiple individual alarms by pressing [Ctrl].
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click an alarm and select Manual Alarm Clear, or select this item from the Actions
menu in the Alarm Manager window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Applying alarm severity filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Applying alarm severity filters

Overview on alarm severity filters
Use this procedure to limit the types of alarms that are displayed in the Alarm list of the
Figure 2-33, “Alarm Manager window” (p. 2-59). You can use the alarm severity filters in
combination with advanced filters.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarms” (p. 2-220).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To display alarms of a given severity, from the Alarm List pane, select the corresponding
Show alarms check boxes. To hide alarms of a given severity, clear the corresponding
Show alarms check boxes.
Result: The Alarm Manager window is automatically updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To display acknowledged alarms in the Alarm List, select Show Acknowledged. To hide
acknowledged alarms, unselect Show Acknowledged.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To display correlated alarms in the Alarm List, select the corresponding Show alarms
check boxes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Managing advanced alarm filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing advanced alarm filters

Overview on advanced alarm filters
Use this procedure to limit the types of alarms that appear in the Alarm List of the Alarm
Manager window. You can use advanced alarm filters in combination with severity filters.
For an overview of advanced filters, see “Advanced Filters window” (p. 2-78).
Prerequisites
You must have the appropriate access control permission settings to modify the type
(private/public) of an advanced filter.
Administrators with appropriate permission settings can rename and delete public filters.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarms” (p. 2-220) procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Alarm Manager window, in the Alarm List options pane, click Advanced
Filters.
Result: The Alarm Manager - Advanced Filters window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can:
• apply an advanced filter:
1. In the Retrieve Saved Filter pane, select a filter from the list.
2. Click Apply Advanced Filter to apply the filter to the alarm display.
• share an advanced filter:
2. Select Share this filter as Public.
The selected filter can be used by other users. To change the filter from public to
private, unselect Share this filter as Public.
The Alarm Manager - Alarm List option pane indicates if an advanced filter is
being applied and the name of the filter.
• rename an advanced filter:
2. Click Rename.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Rename Filter window appears.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Click OK.
• delete an advanced filter:
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click Yes.
The filter is deleted from your list.
• create or modify an advanced filter:
1. In the Alarm Manager - Advanced Filters window you can:
– select a filter to modify from the Retrieve Saved Filter pane list,
– click Clear Criteria to clear all existing settings and create a new filter.
2. In the Advanced Filter Settings pane, click one of the filter criteria tabs.
3. Use the available filter criteria in the tab to define an alarm filter.
For descriptions of the tabs, and how the rule is formed using Boolean AND and
OR logical operators, see “Advanced Filter Settings pane” (p. 2-80).
4. If required, click on another tab to define additional filter criteria.
The filter is formed using Boolean AND and OR logical operators, placing an
AND value between attribute types and an OR value between variations of the
same attributes.
If the attributes you select include negative operators, the attributes are joined by
AND. The negative operators are:
– Does not contain,
– Does not equal.
If the attributes you select include both positive and negative operators, the
positive ones are joined by OR, the negative ones are joined by AND, and the two
groups are then joined by AND.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 If you do not want to name the filter go to Step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save As.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Save As window, you can:

• select an existing filter name to overwrite it,
• enter a new name to create a new filter.
Result: If you do not click Save As, you receive a prompt to save the filter when you
close the Advanced Filters window, the Alarm Manager window, or the network
layout, and when you exit the 9353 WMS window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 You can apply the current filter settings without saving the settings to a named filter.
Result: The current settings are applied to the alarm display and the Advanced
Filtering field in the Alarm Manager window Alarm List options pane displays
custom. You receive a prompt to save the filter when you close the Advanced Filters
window, or when you close the Alarm Manager. Click No.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Apply Advanced Filter.

Result: The Alarm List displays is updated according to your filter.
The filter name appears in the Alarm Manager window - “Alarm List options pane”
(p. 2-65) - Advanced Filtering text field.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Deleting private advanced alarm filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting private advanced alarm filters

Overview on private advanced alarm filters
Private advanced alarm filters are created by specific user IDs and are only visible to the
user ID that created them. Administrators can use this procedure to manage private alarm
filters for all user IDs.
Each user can delete their private filters, see “Managing advanced alarm filters”
(p. 2-230).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Admin -> Private Filter Management.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To delete all the private filters created by a user, select the user in the list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Delete
Result: When you delete a filter in the Private Filter Management window after the
Advanced Filter data is loaded in the current GUI session, the filter list in the
Advanced Filters window does not change, neither in the current GUI session, nor in
other GUI sessions. To see the updated filter list, log out, then log on again.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms

Overview on acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms
Use this procedure to acknowledge or unacknowledge one or more of the alarms that are
displayed in the Alarm Manager window:
• Acknowledge an alarm to indicate that actions are being taken to correct the alarm
condition, or that the alarm condition is of no concern.
• Unacknowledge an alarm to reverse a previous acknowledgment.
You can use this procedure to acknowledge all the alarms belonging to the same
correlation group at the same time.
Respond to the alarms according to your local operating procedures.
Alternatively, you can acknowledge specific alarms with a WICL command (FM
acknowledgeAlarm command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
RKZZA.
Prerequisites
An Figure 2-33, “Alarm Manager window” (p. 2-59) is open, see “Opening the Alarm
Manager and viewing alarms” (p. 2-220).
Attention: Alcatel-Lucent recommends you turn off the Auto-refresh List option
before you perform this operation. This avoids an alarm list selection change because
of an automatic update to the alarm list as a result of a new alarm being raised.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Alarm Manager window, in the Alarm List, click the row of the alarm you want
to acknowledge.
You can select a range of sequential alarms by holding the Shift key while clicking the
alarms you want to acknowledge or unacknowledge. Similarly, you can select multiple
individual alarms by holding the [Ctrl].
To acknowledge all the alarms belonging to the same correlation group, sort the Alarm
List by Correlation Group Id (see “Modifying the Alarm List display” (p. 2-224)) and
select all the alarm rows belonging to the same correlation group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the alarm row(s) and select Acknowledge or Unacknowledge, or from the
Alarm Manager window, select Actions - Acknowledge or Actions - Unacknowledge.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Acknowledging and unacknowledging alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: In the Alarm Manager window:
• acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms are identified by using regular and
bold styles respectively for the font used to display the alarms as shown in the
figure.
• all acknowledgements are tagged with the name, host IP and host name of the user
who acknowledged the alarm, as well as the time of acknowledgement. This
information is displayed as part of the alarm details and logged for historical
display (see “Historical Fault Browser” (p. 2-136) description).
In the Resource Browser window, the unacknowledged numbers in the alarm
balloons change, see Table 2-13, “Details of alarm information displayed on NEs”
(p. 2-41).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Annotating an alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Annotating an alarm
Overview on annotating an alarm
Use this procedure to add your own annotations to a generic alarm type. This procedure is
not for annotating individual alarms.
Prerequisite
An “Alarm Manager” (p. 2-57) window is open, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and
viewing alarms” (p. 2-220).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Alarm Manager window, select any alarm instance which is of the type you want to
view or change an annotation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In Alarm Details pane, select Figure 2-38, “Alarm Details - Note on Alarm Type tab”
(p. 2-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In Note on Alarm Type tab, click Edit.

Result: The Figure 2-130, “Note on Alarm Type window” (p. 2-210) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter you annotations in the text field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Save.
Result: Your annotations are added in the Note Text in Note on Alarm Type tab.
In the Alarm List - Note column, a pencil icon is displayed for each alarm type
corresponding to the note, see Figure 2-131, “Alarm Manager - Note on alarm type”
(p. 2-211).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Navigating from the Alarm Manager to the Equipment
Analyzing alarms and faults Monitor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigating from the Alarm Manager to the Equipment Monitor

Overview on Alarm Manager
In addition to the ability to open the Alarm Manager from the Equipment Monitor (see
“Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing alarms” (p. 2-220)) you can also navigate to
the Equipment Monitor from the Alarm List.
Prerequisite
An Alarm manager window is open, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing
alarms” (p. 2-220).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Alarm Manager window, select an alarm in the Alarm List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Equipment Monitor.

Result: The Figure 2-73, “Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370)”
(p. 2-139) window appears and displays the NE on which the alarm is located and also
highlights the component of this NE (card on the view physical or logical object on
the left hand part of the Equipment Monitor window).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Managing the alarm stream
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing the alarm stream

Overview on alarm stream
Use this procedure to limit the types of alarms that are displayed in the GUI clients. For
an overview of alarm stream management, see “Manage the alarm stream sent from the
server” (p. 2-87). Only administrative users can access alarm stream management
windows. In addition, administrative users must ensure that only one administrative user
accesses the Alarm Management Rule Set window at a time.
When managing the alarm stream, you can perform one or more of the following tasks:
• turn alarm stream management on or off,
• apply an alarm rule to the managed alarm stream,
• modify an alarm rule,
• create a new alarm rule.
Prerequisites
You must be logged in as administrator to have full rights to change the setting of
automatic acknowledgment of alarms.
A layout must be open to access the Manage alarm stream command.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Manage Alarm Stream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Alarm Stream Management window, select Turn On.

Result: The alarm stream management is turned on.
If you do not define or apply any rules, all alarms are displayed: no filtering takes
place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the 9353 WMS window, select Fault -> Alarm Stream Rule Set.
Result: The Figure 2-126, “Alarm Stream Management Rule Set window”
(p. 2-206) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Alarm Stream Management Rule window, you can create, delete, activate,
deactivate or edit a rule.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Managing the alarm stream
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The system checks the rule definition file every two minutes. It can take up to two
minutes for a rule to become active.
If you want to... then...

activate an existing rule in the Inactive Rules list, select a rule and
click Activate.
deactivate an existing rule in the Active Rule Set list, select a rule and
click Deactivate.
delete a rule in the Inactive Rules or Active Rule Set list,
select a rule and click Delete.
edit an existing rule in the Inactive Rules or Active Rule Set list,
select a rule and then click Edit.
modify a rule see “Modifying an alarm rule” (p. 2-240).
create a new rule click New, see “Creating an alarm rule”
(p. 2-241).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Modifying an alarm rule
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying an alarm rule

Overview on alarm rule
Use this procedure to modify an alarm rule.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window, select Fault -> Alarm Stream Rule Set.
(p. 2-206) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Alarm Stream Management Rule window, in the Inactive Rules or Active
Rule Set list, select a rule and click Edit.
Result: The Rule Definition window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can modify one or more of the rule criteria:

• Rule Name,
• Action type,
• Alarm criteria types: use the window elements in the tabs to modify the alarm rule.
For descriptions of the tabs, and how the rule is formed using Boolean AND and OR
logical operators, see “Alarm criteria pane” (p. 2-117).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Save.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Creating an alarm rule
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating an alarm rule

Overview on creating an alarm rule
Use this procedure to create an alarm rule.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window, select Fault > Alarm Stream Rule Set.
(p. 2-206) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Alarm Stream Management Rule window, click New.

Result: A Rule Definition window opens.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the Rule Name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select an Action to apply to all alarms that are filtered with this rule. For descriptions of
available actions, see:
• Figure 2-127, “Rule definition window - auto-acknowledge options” (p. 2-207)
• “Action pane” (p. 2-93)
• “Action: Inhibit alarms” (p. 2-96)
• “Action: Delay alarms” (p. 2-97)
• “Action: Modify Severity of alarms” (p. 2-97)
• “Action: Acknowledge” (p. 2-99)
• “Action: Manage as Toggling” (p. 2-100)
• “Action: Manage as Threshold” (p. 2-104)
• “Action: Send email” (p. 2-109)
• “Action: Send short message (SMS)” (p. 2-115)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Alarm Criteria pane, click one of the rule criteria tabs. For descriptions of these
tabs, see “Alarm criteria pane” (p. 2-117).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Complete the required fields in the tab to define an alarm rule. For descriptions of the
tabs, and how the rule is formed using Boolean AND and OR logical operators, see
“Alarm criteria pane” (p. 2-117).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Creating an alarm rule
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 If required, click on another tab to define additional settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Save.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Close.
Result: The new rule appears in the Alarm Stream Rule Set window in the Inactive
Rules area. To activate the rule, see Apply an alarm rule to the managed alarm stream.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Forwarding an alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Forwarding an alarm
Overview on forwarding an alarm
Use this procedure to forward an alarm automatically.
Prerequisite
The user must ensure that the mail can be sent from the server. For more information on
configuring the server for sending an Email and SMS, see“Configuring the server for
Sendemail and SendSMS” (p. 2-288).
The user must be logged in as administrator to have full rights to forward alarms.
Attention: Email destination
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Alarm Stream Rule Set.
(p. 2-206) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 View the list of rules. The rule must be in the Active Rule Set box for the forwarding
action to work.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select an existing rule from the Active Rule Set box and click Edit. If there are no
existing rules you must create a new one.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Place associated configuration/script files onto the OAM server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select Launch Application from the Action pane.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select Send Email or Send SMS from the first list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Input the E-mail address or the mobile number.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Forwarding an alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Save to return to the Alarm Stream Management Rule window.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Toggling the audible alarm tone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Toggling the audible alarm tone

Overview on toggling the audible alarm tone
You can set an audible tone to sound when an alarm notification is generated. Different
tones can be set for the severities: critical, major, minor, warning and unknown.
Use this procedure to activate or deactivate an audible tone to sound at your PC when an
alarm occurs on the network. Different tones can be specified according to the alarm
severity.
Prerequisite
Attention: Only one user should perform this procedure at a time. If two users
attempt to simultaneously perform this procedure, the operations of one user can
override those of the other user. If this happens, the system does not display a warning
message.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open a Resource Browser window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Manage Audible Alarms.
Result: The Settings: Audible Alarms window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In Settings: Audible Alarms window, select the severity class(es) for which you want to
have an audible tone. If you want to stop an audible tone for a specific type of alarm,
deselect the severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the required tone for each severity using the list or locate an alternative using
Browse.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To choose a tone other than the default one, click Browse and locate a .wav file on your
computer.
Click Play to listen to the sound.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Toggling the audible alarm tone
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select a duration for each alarm with an activated tone:

• Once: the tone sounds once when the alarm occurs
• For - - - - Seconds (Min: 5, Max: 3600): the tone continues to sound for the duration
entered
• Continuous: the tone sounds until the alarm is cleared or acknowledged
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Ok.
Result: The tone sounds as soon as a new audible alarm raises.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening the alarm Network Banner
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the alarm Network Banner

Overview on opening the alarm Network Banner
Use this procedure to open the Network Banner and view the counts of all the active
alarms for each severity level in the current layout.
Alarm indicators appear in numerous Alarm display tools that alert you to faults in the
managed network, for more information on viewing alarms, see “Opening the Alarm
Manager and viewing alarms” (p. 2-220).
Attention: The Figure 2-29, “Network banner” (p. 2-54) can be hidden behind the
9353 WMS window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Open Network Banner to open
the Figure 2-29, “Network banner” (p. 2-54).
Result: The Network Banner window appears.
You can move the Network Banner window outside the 9353 WMS window.
As the banner remains displayed when the 9353 WMS window is reduced. Use it
when you need to reduce the 9353 WMS window to do other work, and want to
continue to monitor the alarm state reported by 9353 WMS.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window

Overview on incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window
Use this procedure to display the Node Bs (NA for 939x OneBTS) that are not
provisioned by an OAM (Node Bs that have no answers after an NE Connect Request) or
that are multi-provisioned (Node Bs that have several answers after an NE Connect
Request).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Radio Access -> Incorrectly
provisioned NodeB list.
Result: The Incorrectly provisioned NodeB list window appears, automatically
displaying the list of Non provisioned/Multi provisioned Node Bs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Refresh.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Managing the Notifications Log
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing the Notifications Log

Overview on Notifications Log
Use the Notifications Log Tool to manage the notification log.
For a detailed description of the Notifications Log Tool window, see “Notifications Log
Tool” (p. 2-197).
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Resource Browser window, select an NE or a group of NEs (use [Shift] for
multiple selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Open the Figure 2-122, “Notifications Log Tool window” (p. 2-198), either from:
• the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Notifications Log Tool.
• the contextual menu, right-click the selected NE(s) and select Fault -> Notifications
Log Tool.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click an object and select Fault ->
Notifications Log Tool.
Result: The Notifications Log Tool window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the NE's List, select one or more NE/object names.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Modify the default date information (if needed).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To filter the notification list result according to criteria (if needed), click Filters.
Result: The Figure 2-123, “Notifications Log Tool - Advanced Filter window”
(p. 2-201) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 In the Advanced Filter window, select one or more filter criteria, and click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The filter criteria are saved.
To reverse the step click Reset All.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 You can either:

• click Display, which enables to display, in the Notifications List, all the notifications
that match the search criteria, or
• click Export, which enables to export and save all the notifications that match the
search criteria in CSV ou Text format, without displaying them in the Notifications
List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Notifications List (if you chose Display Step 7), select one or more notifications.
Result: The Details pane automatically expands displaying the details of the selected
notifications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From the Notifications List, you can:

• perform actions on notification lines:
1. Select notification lines.
2. Right-click the selected lines and select either:
– Detailed export,
– Export,
– Copy, or
– Print.
3. According to your choice, either:
– click Save,
– paste the selected lines, or
– click OK.
• save the entire notification list:
1. Click Save.
2. In the Save window, enter a file name and select the output format.
3. Click Save.
• print the entire notification list:
1. Click Print.
2. In the Page setup window, select the printing criteria.
3. Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From the Details pane, you can:

• search for a specific string:
1. Right-click and select Find.
The Figure 2-124, “Notifications Log Tool - Find window” (p. 2-202) appears.
2. Enter a search string and click Next.
The string is highlighted in the Details window.
3. Click Next to Navigate in the results.
• save the displayed details:
1. Select the details you want to save.
2. Right-click the selected text and select:
– Export,
– Copy, or
– Print.
3. Depending on your choice, click Save, Paste the selected text, or click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules

Overview on Alarm Correlation rules
Use this procedure to activate Alarm Correlation rules.
Prerequisites
The Alarm Correlation application is installed.
By default all the predefined Alarm Correlation rules are activated.
Important! Do not activate or deactivate partially a rule group, for alarm correlation
for this rule to remain consistent.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault -> Alarm Correlation Rule Set.
Result: The Alarm Correlation Rule Set window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 To activate:
• all the rules at the same time:
1. From the Alarm Correlation Rule Set window, select Actions -> Activate all.
All the rules are selected in the Alarm Correlation Rule Set.
• one rule, or several rules one by one:
1. In the Alarm Correlation Rule Set window - Active Rule Set pane, click a rule
row.
2. Select Actions -> Activate.
3. To activate another rule, go back to 1.
• several rules at the same time:
1. In the Alarm Correlation Rule Set window - Active Rule Set pane, select several
rule rows using [ctrl] and [Shift].
2. From the Alarm Correlation Rule Set window menu bar, select Actions ->
Activate.
Result: Rules to be activated are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Activating/Deactivating Alarm Correlation rules
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Selected rules are activated. Changes can take up to two minutes to be
applied.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only

Overview on correlated alarms
Use this procedure to view all the correlated alarms of a selected group only.
Prerequisite
An Alarm manager window is open, see “Opening the Alarm Manager and viewing
alarms” (p. 2-220).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Alarm Manager window, select a correlated alarm (PrimaryMain, Main, or
symptom).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Either:
• right-click the selected alarm and select Expend Selected Groups in New Window.
• from the Alarm Manager menu bar, select Action - Expend Selected Groups in New
Window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Viewing all correlated alarms of a group only
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The correlated alarm group is displayed in a new Alarm Manager window
only, see Figure 2-133, “Alarm Manager - Correlation alarm group” (p. 2-255).
Figure 2-133 Alarm Manager - Correlation alarm group
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refreshing topology links manually (Alarm Correlation)

Overview on topology links
Topology links are automatically and daily updated at 03:10 a.m. When the Alarm
Correlation application is activated, use this procedure to refresh manually the topology
links in special cases like Node B Reparenting, OAM upgrade or OAM installation.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform a CM XML export for a Network.

In the CM XML Export procedure, select the Compressed option and select
cmXML/scheduledExport for the directory, see “Performing CM XML Export”
(p. 3-35) procedure.
Result: Wait until the CM XML export is finished.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In an X window, on a unix client, launch the Topology Extractor script, enter:

/opt/nortel/shell/utran/utran_TopoExtract.sh
Result: Alarms Correlation rules are re-executed using the new topology files.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Enabling Maintenance Mode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enabling Maintenance Mode

Overview on Maintenance Mode
Use this procedure to set an NE to Maintenance Mode to prevent alarms from being
displayed in the Alarm List. You must have permission to access the NE.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open a Resource Browser window, see “Opening a Resource Browser window”

(p. 1-150).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Resource Browser window, select an NE icon or a shortcut.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Right-click and select Set Maintenance Mode On.

If you want to schedule the Maintenance Mode On, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
Result: The Figure 2-25, “Maintenance Mode icon in pending state” (p. 2-48) icon is
displayed initially, followed by the Figure 2-26, “Maintenance Mode icon when
enabled and Alarm Stream Management off” (p. 2-48) icon. The NE icon changes to a
grey box, and the alarm count and alarm balloon are no longer displayed. If you place
the mouse cursor to the white-hand icon, a tooltip is displayed that states
"Maintenance Mode Activated".
In addition, if Alarm Stream Management has been enabled, the NE icon displays the
NR label to indicate that the NE is not reporting, and alarm counts are reduced.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Disabling Maintenance Mode for an NE
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disabling Maintenance Mode for an NE

Overview on Maintenance Mode for an NE
When maintenance tasks are completed you can disable the Maintenance Mode for an
NE.
If one or more NEs in a group are in maintenance mode, the Figure 2-26, “Maintenance
Mode icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management off” (p. 2-48) icon is displayed
on the group. If Alarm Stream Management has been enabled, alarm counts shown on the
group icon are reduced to reflect the NEs in maintenance mode within the group.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 1-150).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Resource Browser window, select an NE icon or a shortcut that has maintenance
mode enabled: the white hand icon is displayed in the top-left corner of the NE icon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Right-click and select Set Maintenance Mode Off.

Result: The maintenance mode icon changes from Figure 2-26, “Maintenance Mode
icon when enabled and Alarm Stream Management off” (p. 2-48) to Figure 2-25,
“Maintenance Mode icon in pending state” (p. 2-48), then disappears. The alarm
count and alarm balloon are then displayed on the NE, if alarms have been received.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Choosing the Resource Browser graphical view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Choosing the Resource Browser graphical view

Overview on Resource Browser
Use this procedure to change the Resource Browser display mode according to your
preferences.
For information, see “Viewing the managed network” (p. 1-10), Topology view, Grid
view, and RNS view under “Network elements” (p. 2-13).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 1-150).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Resource Browser window, either:

• from the menu bar, select View -> Resource View and select the graphical view type,
or
• click the Figure 2-6, “View selection icons” (p. 2-13) corresponding to the “Viewing
the managed network” (p. 1-10).
Result: Depending on your choice, the Resource Browser window opens in one of
the corresponding following views:
• Figure 2-3, “Resource Browser window: Topology view” (p. 2-8)
• Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid view” (p. 2-9)
• Figure 2-5, “Resource Browser window: RNS view” (p. 2-10)
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Filtering the display of the technology layers
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filtering the display of the technology layers

Overview on technology layers
Use this procedure to change the display of the technology layers associated with a
network layout. All technology layers are visible when a layout is first opened.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 1-150).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Resource Browser window, either:

• from the Resource Browser window menu bar, select View -> Filters and select the
filter(s) to toggle the display of layers on or off, or
• from the technology layer filter panel, select the filter(s) to toggle the display of layers
on or off.
Result: Once filtering is turned on, the Resource Browser display is updated as new
alarms occur. To create a static display, deselect Auto-refresh. When auto-refresh is
off, you can use the Refresh button to update the display.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening a link continuation icon
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a link continuation icon

Overview on continuation icon
Use this procedure to open a link continuation icon in the Network panel. The Open
Group command and the Open Group in New Window command are also available on
the File menu in the Resource Browser menu bar.
Prerequisite
A Network Layout is open in Edit mode or in View mode, see “Opening a Network
Layout” (p. 1-111).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To open the group containing the node at the other end of the link:
• in the current window, double-click the Figure 2-10, “Link continuation icon”
(p. 2-21), or right-click the icon and select Open Group.
• in a new window, shift-double-click the Figure 2-10, “Link continuation icon”
(p. 2-21), or right-click the icon and select Open Group in New Window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening an Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an Equipment Monitor window

Overview on Equipment Monitor window
The Equipment Monitor plug-in automatically starts when the 9353 WMS starts. During
its initialization, it creates an instance of the Device Description Server (DDS). This
library is integrated into the equipment server plug-in. It allows the plug-in to store and
retrieve a description of the selected hardware equipment item and their components. The
DDS initializes itself by loading all the possible hardware equipment descriptions.
When a window-opening request is made, the equipment plug-in already knows the
corresponding hardware equipment description.
Prerequisite
Skip Step 1 and Step 2 to open an Equipment Monitor window from the UTRAN Service
View window. To open a UTRAN Service View window, see “Opening the UTRAN
Service View window” (p. 2-215).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

(p. 1-150).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Resource Browser window, select an NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To open the Equipment Monitor window, either:

• from the UTRAN Service View window, right-click a cell corresponding to a cell or
link information with a value different from 0, and select an RNC/RNCxxx (y).
– xxx is the RNC name of the RNC
– y is the RNC contribution value for the total value of the column type
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access >
Equipment Monitor.
• right-click the NE and select Equipment Monitor.
• from the OSI State Reporting or Alarm Manager windows, right-click the NE and
select Equipment Monitor.
• from an Equipment Monitor window, see “Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment
Monitor window from an RNC- Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-272).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening an Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 2-139) window appears.
An error message appears if there is no available equipment view for an NE. This
message is written in the log file: /opt/nortel/logs/RadioAccessGUIClient_<login>_
<user_class>_<hostname>.log".
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching a Diagnose command on a OneBTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching a Diagnose command on a OneBTS

Overview on Diagnose command
Use the Diagnose command to launch a diagnostic test on a OneBTS. This operation is
useful for a last test to check whether the OneBTS is operational before its use in the
network.
Figure 2-134 Diagnose Action Window
The Diagnose Action window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object Name
associated to the NE Name.
The testId is a reference number that helps to identify the Diagnose command result in
the Notifications Log Tool, its value is an integer included in the [1-2147483647] range.
The Diagnose command is available for UCU, Radio, CTU, OCM, RFHead, TDU, and
OneBTSEquipment objects.
Alternatively, you can launch a diagnostic test on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(Diagnose command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless
Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisites
A Resource Browser window or a OneBTS Equipment Monitor window is open, see
“Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150) or “Opening an Equipment Monitor
window” (p. 2-262).
Note: The Diagnose command is a service impacting command that needs the
OneBTS to reset.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Either:
• from the Resource Browser window, select a OneBTS NE, or
• from the OneBTS Equipment Monitor window, select the object to diagnose.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Lock the OneBTS NE / object, see “Setting Administrative State” (p. 3-98).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Right-click the OneBTS NE / object, and select Preventive Maintenance > Diagnose,
Result: The Figure 2-134, “Diagnose Action Window” (p. 2-264) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter a testId number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Diagnose.
Result:
• The Figure 2-135, “Command Manager - Diagnose” (p. 2-266) window
automatically appears to show the progress of the command.
• The Figure 2-136, “Notifications Log Tool - test result” (p. 2-267) result is
available in the Notifications Log Tool, see “Managing the Notifications Log”
(p. 2-249).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-135 Command Manager - Diagnose
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-136 Notifications Log Tool - test result
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window

Overview on Equipment Monitor window
Use the filtering option of the Equipment Monitor window to view easily NE and
improve operational effectiveness. You can filter on both tree view of the Equipment
Monitor window.
You can add filters on:
• component instances (RNC only)
• alarm severity
• alarm acknowledgement status
• states and statuses (RNC and BTS only)
Prerequisite
An Equipment Monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In one of the Equipment Monitor window tree view panes, click Filter.
Result: The Figure 2-110, “Equipment Monitor, Filter window” (p. 2-176) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the <NE name> - Filter window, select a filter tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the filter tab, select one or more filter criteria and click Add to List.
Result: The filter criteria are added in the Criteria List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 To add criteria belonging to another tab in your Criteria List, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.
Result: Your Criteria List is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Criteria List:

• to activate or deactivate a filter criterion from the list: select or unselect the criterion
• to remove a criterion from the list, click a criterion in the Criteria List, and click
Remove Selections
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Filtering the display in the Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result: The tree view display appears according to your filter criteria. When the tree
view is not fully expanded, some objects can be hidden, click all the "+" to view all of
the results of your filter criteria.
The tree view is automatically refresh according to new objects that meet the filter
criteria or objects that do not meet anymore the filter criteria.
Unselect Use filter to reverse the procedure.
The Criteria List is saved until the Equipment Monitor window is closed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Finding a component instance from an Equipment Monitor
Analyzing alarms and faults tree view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Finding a component instance from an Equipment Monitor

tree view
Overview on Equipment Monitor tree view
Use the search options to retrieve or localize a component instance in an Equipment
monitor tree. This procedure is useful when you do not know RAN model hierarchy or
relationships between RAN components. You can search on both trees of the Equipment
Monitor window.
To find a component instance in the displayed components of the Equipment Monitor tree
view only, see “Finding a character string in the displayed components of an Equipment
Monitor tree view” (p. 2-271).
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In one of the Equipment Monitor window tree view panes, click Search.
Result: The Figure 2-112, “Equipment Monitor, Search window” (p. 2-178) appears.
Only one Filter or Search window can be open at the same time for each Equipment
Monitor window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Search window, enter your search criteria:

• in the Search for list, select a RAN class name
• if needed, in Containing Text: enter a search string
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Search.
Result: The search results are displayed in the Search Results pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Search Results list, select an instance line and click OK.
Result: The corresponding object is highlighted in the tree view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Finding a character string in the displayed components of
Analyzing alarms and faults an Equipment Monitor tree view
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Finding a character string in the displayed components of an

Equipment Monitor tree view
Overview
Use the search options to localize a character, a character string, or a component instance
in the displayed components of an Equipment Monitor tree view without opening the
Figure 2-112, “Equipment Monitor, Search window” (p. 2-178). You can search on both
trees of the Equipment Monitor window.
To find a component instance in the whole object tree view, see “Finding a component
instance from an Equipment Monitor tree view” (p. 2-270).
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the text field of the Figure 2-109, “Filtering and search options” (p. 2-175), enter your
search criterion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Press Enter, or click one of the arrows.

Result: The first result is highlighted in the tree view. The right and left arrows
enable user to navigate into the results.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click the right- or left-oriented arrows to navigate into the results.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from
Analyzing alarms and faults an RNC- Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window from an

RNC- Equipment Monitor window
Overview
With its double object tree view panes, the Equipment Monitor window enables to
navigate from the RNC tree view pane to the NE tree view pane. Once an Equipment
monitor window is open, you can navigate between the RNC resource tree view pane and
the NE logical tree view pane.
Prerequisite
For more information on tree view panes in the Equipment Monitor window, see
“Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open an RNC- Equipment monitor window, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor

window” (p. 2-262).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 You can open a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window:

• from the RNC resource tree view, right-click a NodeB object, and select either:
– Open BTS Equipment Monitor.
To reverse the procedure, see “Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window
from a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-273).
– Open BTS Equipment Monitor in New Window.
• from the NE logical tree view pane, right-click a NodeB object and select Open BTS
Equipment Monitor in New Window.
Result: The Figure 2-75, “Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment”
To reverse the procedure, see “Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a
BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-273).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a
Analyzing alarms and faults BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window from a

BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window
Overview
With its double object tree view panes, the Equipment Monitor window enables to
navigate from the RNC tree view pane to the NE tree view pane. Once an Equipment
monitor window is open, you can navigate between the RNC resource tree view pane and
the NE logical tree view pane.
See “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171) for a description of
• tree view panes in the Equipment Monitor window,
• associated objects.
Prerequisite
A BTSEquipment- Equipment monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the RNC resource tree view, right-click the RNC object and select Open RNC
Equipment Monitor.
(p. 2-139) window appears, replacing the Figure 2-75, “Equipment Monitor window
for a BTSEquipment” (p. 2-141) window.
To reverse the procedure, see “Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor
window from an RNC- Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-272).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Else in the BTSEquipment resource tree view, select the associated Node B/<BTS name>
object and either:
• right-click and select Follow, or
• double-click the Node B/<BTS name> object.
Result: An Figure 2-73, “Equipment Monitor window for an RNC (9370)”
(p. 2-139) window appears in another window and displays the Node B/<BTS name>
object in the RNC logical tree view.
To reverse the procedure, see “Opening a BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor
window from an RNC- Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-272).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Localizing an NE in the Resource Browser from the
Analyzing alarms and faults Equipment Monitor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Localizing an NE in the Resource Browser from the Equipment

Monitor
Overview
Use this procedure to localize an NE in the Resource Browser window when you are
navigating in the Equipment Monitor window.
Prerequisite
An Equipment monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select an NE type object in one of the tree view panes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and depending on the selected NE type object, select:

• Find in its group (RNC, BTSEquipment/OneBTSEquipment, or POC selected),
• Find BTSEquipment (nodeB selected).
Result: The Resource Browser window appears highlighting the NE.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Modifying the shelf level display
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying the shelf level display

Overview
You can zoom in or out of the physical cabinet view by selecting the icon buttons right
under the cabinet tab.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open the “Opening an Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-262).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the icons listed under the cabinet folder tab to obtain the zoom effect wanted. See
the Table 2-46, “Description of the display functions” (p. 2-185) table for more details.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching a PowerTest / an rxAntennaTest action on a
Analyzing alarms and faults OneBTSCell
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching a PowerTest / an rxAntennaTest action on a

OneBTSCell
Overview
Use this procedure for preventive maintenance purpose on a OneBTS (OneBTSCell
objects), either to trigger:
• a power test, or
• an RX antenna test on a specific frequency channel number.
Figure 2-137 PowerTest Action window
The PowerTest Action window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object Name
The testId is a reference number that helps to identify the PowerTest command result in
the Notifications Log Tool, its value is an integer included in the [1-2147483647] range.
Alternatively, you can perform a power test on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(OneBTS powerTest command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-138 rxAntennaTest Action window
The rxAntennaTest Action window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object Name
The testId is a reference number that helps to identify the rxAntennaTest command
result in the Notifications Log Tool, its value is an integer included in the [1-2147483647]
range.
Alternatively, you can perform an RX antenna test on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(OneBTS rxAntennaTest command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
RKZZA.
Prerequisite
A OneBTS Equipment Monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor
window” (p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the OneBTS logical tree view pane, select one or more OneBTSCell objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected OneBTSCell object(s) and select Preventive Maintenance >
PowerTest / Preventive Maintenance >rxAntennaTest.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 2-137, “PowerTest Action window” (p. 2-276) / Figure 2-138,
“rxAntennaTest Action window” (p. 2-277) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter a testId number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click PowerTest / rxAntennaTest.

Result:
• The Command Manager window automatically appears to show the progress of
the command.
• The test result is available in the Notifications Log Tool, see “Managing the
Notifications Log” (p. 2-249).
In case of multi selection, the testId value is the same for all the selected
OneBTSCell objects.
• for rxAntennaTest, the test result is a single test event even if the cell contains
more than one antenna. The test fails if one or more antennas failed
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching a cancelSelfSurvey / an inititateSelfSurvey action
Analyzing alarms and faults on a OneBTS GRS object
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching a cancelSelfSurvey / an inititateSelfSurvey action

on a OneBTS GRS object
Overview
Use this procedure to launch/cancel a GPS self survey on a OneBTS:
• initiateSelfSurvey action, which triggers a GPS self survey whereby the position of
the GPS antenna is established with high precision.
• cancelSelfSurvey action, which cancels the GPS self survey.
Figure 2-139 initiateSelfSurvey Action window
The initiateSelfSurvey Action window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object
Name associated to the NE Name.
Alternatively, you can initiate a GPS self survey on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(OneBTS initiateSelfSurvey command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent
9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL),
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-140 cancelSelfSurvey Action window
The cancelSelfSurvey Action window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object
Name associated to the NE Name.
Alternatively, you can cancel a GPS self survey on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(OneBTS cancelSelfSurvey command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisite
A OneBTS Equipment Monitor is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the OneBTS logical tree view pane, select one or more GRS objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected GRS object(s) and select Preventive Maintenance >
initiateSelfSurvey / Preventive Maintenance > cancelSelfSurvey.
Result: The Figure 2-139, “initiateSelfSurvey Action window” (p. 2-279) / Figure
2-140, “cancelSelfSurvey Action window” (p. 2-280) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click initiateSelfSurvey / cancelSelfSurvey.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Command Manager window automatically appears to show the progress
of the command.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Opening the OSI State Reporting window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening the OSI State Reporting window

Overview
Use this procedure to open the OSI State Reporting window and view the BTS, RNC, or
POC objects that are in bad or failed state. The retrieval of objects in bad or failed state
occurs only on the 9353 WMS layout that is currently open. Retrieval of this information
begins as soon as the OSI State Reporting window is open.
Prerequisites
To open:
• a Resource Browser window, see “Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150),
• an Equipment Monitor window, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To view the failed OSI states of:

• all the NEs:
from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault > Radio Access > OSI State
Reporting On Whole Layout.
• one or more NEs:
from the Resource Browser window or the Equipment Monitor window, right-click
the object, and select Fault> OSI State Reporting.
Result: The Figure 2-121, “OSI State Reporting window” (p. 2-191) opens and
displays the list of objects that are in bad or failed state.
When the OSI State Reporting window is open, each time you launch the OSI State
Reporting command, the selected object is added in the NE list in the OSI State
Reporting window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Navigating from the OSI State Reporting window to the
Analyzing alarms and faults Equipment Monitor
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigating from the OSI State Reporting window to the

Equipment Monitor
Overview
In addition to the ability to open the OSI State Reporting window (for specific NEs) from
the Equipment Monitor, you can also navigate to the Equipment Monitor from both the
upper part (equipment part) and lower part (sub components part) of the OSI State
Reporting window.
Prerequisite
An OSI State Reporting window is open, see “Opening the OSI State Reporting window”
(p. 2-282).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the OSI State reporting window, select a card or a sub-object.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Equipment Monitor.

Result: The Equipment Monitor window opens and the selected card or sub-object is
highlighted indicating the correct object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 If you have opened an Equipment Monitor for a particular card of an NE (from the OSI
State window) highlighting the selected card, and, if you select another card on the same
NE and started the Equipment Monitor, then the previously highlighted card is
deselected and the new card highlighted instead.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Requesting an FM audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Requesting an FM audit
Overview
Use the FM Audit Request command to synchronize:
• all active alarms and all OSI states between an RNC C-node and WMS (for example
in case of reparenting), or
• all OSI states between a BTS (NA for 939x OneBTS) and WMS.
Prerequisites
(p. 1-150).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
multiple selections.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the FM Audit Request command either from:

• the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault > Radio Access > FM Audit Request.
• the contextual menu, right-click the selected NE(s) and select Fault > FM Audit
Request.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click on an object and select Fault > FM
Audit Request.
Result: The Figure 3-1, “Command Manager, Current Commands tab”
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching a manual FM audit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching a manual FM audit

Overview
Use the Manual FM Audit command to synchronize all active alarms between an NE (SR
or SAR) and WMS.
Prerequisites
(p. 1-150).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
multiple selections).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the Manual FM Audit command either from:

• the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault > Radio Access > Manual FM Audit.
• the contextual menu, right-click the selected NE(s) and select Fault > Manual FM
Audit.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching an FM Synchronize
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching an FM Synchronize
Overview
Use the FM Synchronize command to synchronize all active alarms and all OSI state
values between a OneBTS and WMS.
Alternatively, you can synchronize all active alarms and all OSI state values between a
OneBTS and WMS with a WICL command (OneBTS fmsynchronize command). For
Prerequisites
(p. 1-150).
The OneBTS pre-provisioning mode is False.
The OAM link is open.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Resource Browser window, select one or several OneBTSs (use [Shift] for
multiple selections).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the FM Synchronize command either from:

• the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Fault > Radio Access > FM Synchronize.
• the contextual menu, right-click the selected OneBTS(s) and select Fault > FM
Synchronize.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click the OneBTSEquipment object and
select Fault > FM Synchronize.
(p. 3-7) window appears displaying the synchronization action progress.
The WMS database is synchronized according to all active alarms and OSI state
values of the OneBTS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Launching an FM Synchronize
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OneBTSEquipmentMIB object attributes are as follows:
• cmSyncState = statusAudit_complete
• fmSyncState= synchronized
• preprovisioned = false
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Configuring the server for Sendemail and SendSMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the server for Sendemail and SendSMS

Overview
Use this procedure to enable the Send email and Send SMS features if DNS is disabled on
the server. The following steps apply to both the primary server and secondary server.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enable WMS to use the SMTP server and record the SMTP server IP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Search for DNS_DOMAIN in the file /opt/nortel/config/iut_tools/roc/iut_rocconfig.cfg.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Contact customer support to add the following command to the DNS:

mailhost.DNS_DOMAIN
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Log in to the WMS as root user.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the file /etc/mail/sendmail.cf, add the following SMTP IP:

# "Smart" relay host (may be null)
DSSMTP_IP
Example: DS10.1.2.53
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Add mailhost.DNS_DOMAIN to /etc/mail/local-host-names

echo mailhost.DNS_DOMAIN > /etc/mail/local-host-names
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 svcadm start svc:/network/shell:default

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Restart sendmail service and send E-mail or SMS successfully.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fault management Customizing external alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customizing external alarms

Overview
Alarms sent to a BTS from external modules connected to this BTS are called external
alarms.
You can customize these external alarms with any BTS type (except with 9313/9314
Node Bs) and with OneBTS:
• for a “Vocabulary conventions” (p. xxxvi), see “External alarms for a BTS”
(p. 2-289).
• for a “Vocabulary conventions” (p. xxxvi), see “External alarms for a OneBTS”
(p. 2-290).
For information on how to create or modify external alarm attributes with WPS, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning System - User Guide for W-CDMA,
9YZ-06348-0005-PCZZA.
If you modify the customization of an external alarm while the alarm is already displayed
in the Alarm Manager, the alarm is not modified dynamically.
For an example of how to customize external alarms (severity, alarmMessage, and
alarmCode attributes) for a BTS, see procedure “Prerequisite” (p. 2-291).
External alarms for a BTS

Depending on their type, you can configure the following external alarms for a BTS:
• ExternalAlarm per BTS, per extension cabinet, and per RRH.
ExternalAlarm instance is under:
– BTSEquipment/ExternalAlarms object for BTSs,
– BTSEquipment/ExtensionCabinet/ExternalAlarms object for BTS extension
cabinet,
– BTSEquipment/RemoteRadioHead/ExternalAlarms object for BTS Remote Radio
Heads.
• UserAlarm per BTS and per extension cabinet instances (not available for OneBTS).
UserAlarm instance is under:
– BTSEquipment/UserAlarms object for BTSss,
– BTSEquipment/ExtensionCabinet/UserAlarms object for BTS extension cabinet.
Although the OAM enables to create and manage up to 24 external alarms, a BTS
manages up to 16 external alarms only.
Each external alarm is identified with a specific ID, which is an integer included in:
• the [1..3] range for user alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UserAlarm/[ID]
• the [1..16] range for external alarms.
ExternalAlarm/[ID]
This ID is included in the <alarm_connector_id> part of the Alarm Code. It is used as
unique identifier of a BTS external alarm connector.
The alarm code format is
<EquipmentType>_<is_user_alarm><alarm_connector_id>_<alarmCode>:
• <EquipmentType> is BTSEXT for an external alarm.
• <is_user_alarm> on the first left digit is:
– 0 for external alarms.
– 1 for user alarms.
• <alarm_connector_id> on the last 3 digits is the ID value padded with zeros on the
left.
• <alarmCode> is the alarmCode value padded with zeros on the left.
If not specified, the default value is 00000.
Example:
• BTSEXT_1003_00024 is a user alarm with an ID value of 3 and an AlarmCode value
of 24.
• BTSEXT_0012_00036 is an external alarm with an ID value of 12 and an AlarmCode
value of 36.
You can configure the following external alarms attributes:
• alarmMessage (mandatory), which is the Additional Text value of this alarm (default
value is Alarm[ID]),
• severity (optional),
• alarmCode (optional).
External alarms for a OneBTS

For a OneBTS you can configure external alarms per Radio Frequency head, alarm hub,
and input/output unit.
ExternalAlarm instances are under:
• OneBTSEquipment/RFHead object for Radio Frequency heads,
• OneBTSEquipment/Frame/DigitalShelf/AlarmHub object for alarm hub,
• OneBTSEquipment/Frame/DigitalShelf/IOU object for input output unit.
Depending on the external module, you can configure the following external alarm
numbers:
• 32 external alarms for AlarmHub,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Although the OAM enables to configure up to 40 AlarmHubexternal alarms, the
OneBTS manages up to 32 AlarmHub external alarms only.
• 32 external alarms for IOU,
• 6 external alarms for RFHead.
Each external alarm is identified with a specific ID (ExternalAlarm/[ID]), which is an
integer included in [1..32] for AlarmHub or IOU, and [1..6] for RFHead.
The alarm code format is <EquipmentType>_<AlarmCode>_<Object_Id>:
• <EquipmentType> is OneBTS for a OneBTS external alarm,
• <AlarmCode> is the alarm code of the equipment type,
• <Object_Id> is the object Id value of the alarmed component, padded with zeros on
the left.
Example:
OneBTS_4041_00018 is an external alarm on a OneBTS with an alarm code value of
4041 and a managed object ID value of 18 (18 for an external alarm on IOU).
You can configure the following external alarm attributes:
• activateState (mandatory)
• additionalText (mandatory)
• portNumber (mandatory)
• probableCause (mandatory)
• severity (optional)
• specificProblem (mandatory)
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Resource Browser window, select a BTS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the BTS and select Equipment Monitor.

Result: The Figure 2-75, “Equipment Monitor window for a BTSEquipment”
(p. 2-141) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171), expand the ExternalAlarms object.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select all the ExternalAlarm instances you want to customize.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Right-click the selected ExternalAlarm instances and select Configuration > Object
Editor.
Result: The Figure 3-11, “Object Editor window” (p. 3-23) appears and displays
information for all the selected ExternalAlarm instances.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the Object Editor window, select an ExternalAlarm in the NE Objects list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Attributes For: BTSEquipment/<BTSEquipment name> ExternalAlarm/[ID]>

pane, select the severity attribute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Details For: severity (BTSEquipment/<BTSEquipment name>

ExternalAlarm/[ID]>) pane, select a severity value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Set.
Result: The severity value is added in the Attributes For:
BTSEquipment/<BTSEquipment name> ExternalAlarm/[ID]> pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

pane, select the alarmMessage attribute.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ExternalAlarm/[ID]>) pane, enter a message.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Click Set.
Result: The message is added in the Attributes For: BTSEquipment/<BTSEquipment
name> ExternalAlarm/[ID]> pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

pane, select the alarmCode attribute.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ExternalAlarm/[ID]>) pane, enter an alarmCode value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Click Set.
Result: The alarmCode value is added in the Attributes For:
BTSEquipment/<BTSEquipment name> ExternalAlarm/[ID]> pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Repeat Step 7 to Step 15 for each ExternalAlarm you want to customize.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Select Online Commands Mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Click Apply All Changes.

Result: The Command Manager window appears and displays the command progress.
External alarms are customized.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 3 onfiguration
C
management
Overview
Purpose
UMTS Access Network configuration is uploaded on the Access OAM to perform the
integration of the various NEs.
Use the 9353 WMS to perform online configuration of the UTRAN in real time. This
function is designed to support operations personnel making real-time adjustments to NE
configuration.
The Access OAM can manage transactions with NEs. These transactions are based on an
object model definition as described in the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - RAN Model Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-04157-0020-RKZZA.
To make these transactions possible, you must perform a list of actions to ensure the
running view is synchronized with the NE Managed Information Bases (MIBs).
For detailed information on MIB management, see OAM CM operational guidelines,
UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
Use configuration commands to apply provisioning changes to the network.
Configuration tasks are performed throughout the lifecycle of the network:
• initial network rollout,
• network extension,
• network optimization.
To perform configuration commands on one or more objects, select the action in the
Configuration menu bar of the 9353 WMS, or in the Configuration contextual menus.
Contents
Command Manager 3-5

RNC 9771 3-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager overview 3-7

Opening a Command Manager window 3-18
Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization 3-19
Configuration from the Object Editor 3-21
Object Editor overview 3-22
Opening an Object Editor window 3-30
Modifying a parameter online 3-31
Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager 3-33
Performing CM XML Export 3-35
CM XML Export overview 3-36
Configuration from the Sessions Manager 3-40
Configuration overview 3-41
Creating a session 3-47
Verifying session details 3-53
Performing actions on a session 3-61
Aborting a session 3-64
Terminating a session 3-67
Scheduling a session 3-68
Interrupting a session 3-70
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the Resource 3-74
Browser
Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration 3-75
Auditing a MIB 3-77
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window menu bar 3-81
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command Manager window 3-83
Canceling a MIB rebuild 3-85
Rebuilding a MIB 3-87
Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM cache 3-89
Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB 3-91
Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS 3-96
Setting Administrative State 3-98
Shutting down an FDDCell 3-100
Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State 3-102
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting a board or a card 3-104

Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps 3-107
Performing a Switchover LP 3-108
Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment 3-110
Resetting a RNC 3-113
Launching SSH for SR and SAR 3-115
Launching SSH for OneBTS 3-117
Creating a CM image for a OneBTS 3-119
Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS 3-122
Backup RNC 3-125
Configuration with the Job Scheduler 3-127
Job scheduler configuration 3-128
Scheduling a job 3-135
Viewing a scheduled job details 3-142
Viewing pending jobs 3-144
Managing the scheduled jobs 3-147
Modifying or Rescheduling a job 3-149
Deleting a scheduled job 3-152
Aborting a pending job 3-153
Displaying the scheduled job result 3-154
Configuration from the Node B Address GUI 3-156
Node B address GUI 3-157
Opening a Node B Address GUI window 3-163
Displaying Node B site information 3-164
Customizing Province and City 3-166
Adding Site Name information to a Node B 3-168
Updating NodeB site information 3-170
Unsetting or deleting a Node B site 3-171
Exporting site information in HTML format 3-173
IPv6 3-174
Network boundary data synchronization activation 3-175
Configuring Network boundary data 3-183
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching the network boundary data synchronization 3-184

Related Feature Activation Procedures & Network Reconfiguration 3-185
Procedures
Reference list 3-186
Monitoring logical & physical resources 3-187
Resource monitoring 3-188
RSSI Monitoring 3-200
RSSI monitor 3-201
Monitoring ATM interface status and VPI/VCI occupancy 3-210
Status and occupancy monitoring 3-211
Configuration of RET on OneBTS via WMS 3-218
Check onebts alarms 3-219
Download traditional software to OneBTS 3-223
Download ALD/ACF software to OneBTS 3-235
Activate traditional software 3-246
Activate ALD/ACF software 3-252
Configuration of RET on iBTS via WMS 3-258
Download & Activate ALD/ACF software to Node B 3-258
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management RNC 9771
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
RNC 9771
RNC 9771 protocols
RNC 9771 provides two interfaces:
• CNode
CNode is managed through a specific protocol, SEPE. This protocol is used for
communication with the Control Node similar to the RNC 9370. SEPE is not secured
but this is a restriction accepted.
• WNode
WNode is managed through a specific protocol, NETCONF. This protocol is used for
secured communication with both the WNode and WcePlatform.
Note: For the RNC 9771 upgrade, the Vserver load associated to the RNC 9771 must
be available on the management server before downloading or activating the
RNC9771 load.
CNode and WNode model management

CNode model management
Starting with LR14.1.W, the only difference between the CNode of an RNC 9370 and the
CNode of a RNC 9771 is the dimensioning. The RNC 9771 comes with a greater
dimensioning on CNode as it supports up to 12000 cells instead of 2400 cells, which is
the limit of the RNC 9370.
WNode model management
The WNode is a new node and the WNode model is supported as a new model. As the
NETCONF interface used for WNode is based on Yang syntax, the WNode model is
delivered in the format of RMD model as Yang model. It comes with a new CM model
(RMD model and Yang model), a new FM model (RMD model).
MIB and CDB management

The term MIB is used for CNode database and the term CDB is used for WNode
database.
On RNC 9771, the implementation of MIB build is different from what is done on RNC
9370. With RNC 9370, the main principle is to build the MIB on the OMC side into a file
and transfer the file through FTP onto RNC, and later activate it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management RNC 9771
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
With RNC 9771 the solution is to build the MIB onto the RNC 9771 by directly calling
the MIB builder after the TGE file is transferred. This is done by relying on a specific
NETCONF action available on the NETCONF interface. After the MIB is built and
available, a Shadow mechanism is triggered to activate it. For both MIB and CDB the
Shadow tenant mechanism must be used in case of "MIB build" or "CDB critical
activation". On the WMS side, both databases are managed with a mechanism of
"provisioning and running" database.
Link management
The communication between WMS and CNode is based on the SEPE protocol, while
communication between WMS and WNode is based on the NETCONF Protocol.
From WMS perspective the link management consists of:
• Opening the NETCONF connection with WNode
• Opening the SEPE connection with CNode
Note: Note: Both connections can be opened simultaneously by WMS. However, with
current RNC 9771 implementation, the WNode connection ID is accepted first after
which the CNode connection will be opened.
The following are three types of NETCONF sessions that are active at the same time on
the RNC 9771
• NETCONF display session: This session enables querying the Running view
• CM Up Synchronization: This session enables uerying the Running view
• NETCONF Configuration: This session modifies the Candidate View
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Command Manager overview
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager overview

Overview
Use the Command Manager window to supervise a command progress and its status.
To open the Command Manager window, see “Opening a Command Manager window”
(p. 3-18).
Figure 3-1 Command Manager, Current Commands tab
The Command Manager window automatically appears when you launch, for example,
one of the following commands:
• FM Audit Request
• Audit/Rebuild MIB
• Cancel Reset Online
• Synchronize
• FM/CM Synchronize
• Reset Board / Card / BTSEquipment
• Apply All Changes
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• cmXML Export
• system user commands
When an Audit, Rebuild, Cancel Reset Online or Synchronize command is running, you
can supervise its progress in the Status column of the Command Manager window. For
more information on the success or failure of a command, select a line from the
Command Manager window and open the Details pane (click the left-oriented arrow).
When the commands encounter a failure, a message appears stating there was a problem
and the Status column is updated.
You can use the Filters option to easily supervise a command progress. For example, see
“Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization” (p. 3-19).
You can perform actions from the Command Manager window, see “Contextual menus
on the Command Manager” (p. 1-48).
The Figure 3-1, “Command Manager, Current Commands tab” (p. 3-7) window includes
the following parts:
• an upper part, which includes the following items:
– a Current Command tab (default tab), see Figure 3-1, “Command Manager,
Current Commands tab” (p. 3-7),
– a Filters options, see Figure 3-2, “Command Manager - Filters” (p. 3-9) / Figure
3-3, “Command Manager - Filters” (p. 3-10),
– a Commands History tab, see Figure 3-6, “Command Manager, Commands
History tab” (p. 3-14),
Note: The Command Manager History duration is 90 days.
– an Errors tab, see Figure 3-9, “Command Manager, Errors tab” (p. 3-17).
• a lower part details the selected item in the upper part and includes the following tabs:
– Steps, which details the command steps and its progress,
– Logs (shown by default), which details the command result or any information or
warnings generated during the command process (see Figure 3-31, “Command
Manager - Commands History - Logs tab” (p. 3-84)).
For examples of information you can display through links in the Logs tab, see
Figure 3-4, “Upgrade download RNC software - validation report information”
(p. 3-12) and Figure 3-5, “BTS software download information” (p. 3-13).
The Figure 3-1, “Command Manager, Current Commands tab” (p. 3-7) details all the jobs
launched.
The jobs are sorted by date and are detailed as follows:
• Command Type
• Start Time
• End Time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Duration
• User Name, which is the name of the command originator
• Host Name, which is the client host name from where the job was launched
• NE Name, which is the NE name on which the job was started
• Object Name, which is the NE associated object name
• Session Name, which is the name of the session including the job when applicable
• Status
• Progression
To filter the displayed job list, click Filters and select in the Filter window the types of
job you want to be displayed.
The Filters window content changes depending on your network and on the available
current commands. For example, it includes the following filters:
• for a network that includes any kind of BTSs except OneBTS, see Figure 3-2,
“Command Manager - Filters” (p. 3-9).
• for a network that includes OneBTS only, see Figure 3-3, “Command Manager -
Filters” (p. 3-10).
For an example of the filter use, see “Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization”
(p. 3-19).
Figure 3-2 Command Manager - Filters
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 Command Manager - Filters
View as Tree and View as Table enable to select the Command Type column display.
View report enables to display the Figure 3-4, “Upgrade download RNC software -
validation report information” (p. 3-12).
Cancel and Clear are enabled or disabled depending on the job status:
• to clear job(s), select the job(s) and click Clear.
You can only clear jobs that have the following Status:
– Successful
– Stopped with errors
– Completed with errors
– Completed with warnings
– Cancelled
• to cancel running job(s), select the job(s) in the upper part and click Cancel.
You can only cancel jobs that are running.
Multiple selections are available by holding the Shift key while selecting commands. To
select all commands at a time, press [Ctrl]+[A].
To view the details of a job global progress and status, select the job in the upper part and
click Steps tab in the lower part.
To filter the displayed logs, unselect Error messages, Warning messages, and/or
Information messages.
To view the details of a job result, or any information or warnings generated during the
job process, select the job in the upper part and click Logs tab in the lower part.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following are examples of information that can be displayed through the link in the
Logs tab:
• upgrade - download RNC software, see Figure 3-4, “Upgrade download RNC
software - validation report information” (p. 3-12),
• BTS software download information, see Figure 3-5, “BTS software download
information” (p. 3-13).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-4 Upgrade download RNC software - validation report information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-5 BTS software download information
For the BTS software download, the Detail Download Information window includes for
each application:
• the action result (complete or not)
• the size of the package downloaded (in B)
• the start time and completion time
• the throughput of the package (in B/s)
To sort the column, click a column header to sort the table according to this item.
To filter the detail result, click the icon in the column header and select a filter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 Command Manager, Commands History tab
Use the Figure 3-6, “Command Manager, Commands History tab” (p. 3-14) to filter the
current jobs displayed according to the following filters:
• a time range, enter a start time range and an end time range
• a command type
• a user name
• an NE name
• an object name
• a host name
• a session name
• a command status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To filter the displayed jobs, enter one or more filters and click Display.
You can use a wildcard "*" with either Command Type, User name, NE Name, Object
Name, Host Name, or Session Name filter. Click Help to open the Wildcards Support
Help window.
Figure 3-7 Wildcards Support Help window
To export and save the displayed jobs, click Export.

From OAM08.1, it is possible to export the Command Manager History in Office Open
XML(*.xlsx) format, in addition to .csv or .txt format.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-8 Command Manager - Commands History - Export
This Office Open XML file format is compliant with Microsoft OfficeTM 2007 or higher
and OpenOfficeTM 3.0 or higher. This reduces time to analyze command history in a
powerful spreadsheet editor (no need to configure the csv or txt file loader).
Errors can occur during an Audit, Rebuild, Set Administrative State, Set OAM Link State,
FM Audit Request, Synchronize, and FM/CM Synchronize commands (MIB is not built,
link is closed, and so on). Most errors appear in the Current Commands / Commands
History tab. For some errors a message appears. Any command that is stopped with
errors is shown in the Logs tab of the Details pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-9 Command Manager, Errors tab
The Errors tab includes errors that are exceptions. Each error line is made up of the
following information:
• Severity icon (error or warning)
• Date and time
• Error Name
• Command Type
• NE Name
• Object Name
Select one or several errors in the Error list to show details of the errors in the Error
Details part. Multiple selection is allowed, press Ctrl + A to select all errors at a time.
You can perform the following actions:
• Click Remove to remove the selected error from the displayed Error list.
• click a column header to sort errors according to this header.
• click Save Errors to save the displayed error details in html format.
• click Print Errors to print the displayed error details.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Opening a Command Manager window
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Command Manager window

Overview
Use this procedure to open a Command Manager window. This is useful to supervise
command progress and its status.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Command Manager.
(p. 3-7) window appears and displays all the current job.
You can perform actions, see “Contextual menus on the Command Manager”
(p. 1-48).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization

Overview
Use this procedure to supervise the OneBTS CM synchronization.
Prerequisite
A CM Synchronize command has been launched, see “Manually synchronizing WMS CM
database with OneBTS MIB” (p. 3-91).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar select Configuration > Command Manager.
(p. 3-7) window appears and displays all the current commands.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Filters.
Result: The Figure 3-3, “Command Manager - Filters” (p. 3-10) window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Filters window, select System user.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Type Filters pane, select the following filters only:

• CM_Synchronize
• OneBTS Status Audit Job Type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click Apply.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Supervising a OneBTS CM synchronization
Command Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-10, “Command Manager - CM Audit jobs” (p. 3-20) window is
updated and displays the current CM Audit jobs only.
Figure 3-10 Command Manager - CM Audit jobs
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides the information on configuration from the object editor.
Contents
Object Editor overview 3-22

Opening an Object Editor window 3-30
Modifying a parameter online 3-31
Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager 3-33
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Object Editor overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Object Editor overview

About Object Editor
The Object Editor displays the parameters of an object or a set of objects. Use it to
modify parameters of RNC (C-node, I-node), BTSEquipment, OneBTSEquipment, or
POC objects.
Whether the modification of object parameters has any impact on service depends on the
class of the parameter.
Use the Object Editor to easily navigate and modify customer and customer restricted
parameters.
The Figure 3-11, “Object Editor window” (p. 3-23) includes the following main
components:
• NE Objects pane, which includes:
– on the left hand part: NE Name list and its associated Object Name list,
– on the right hand part: all the Attributes of the selected objects,
– Filter and Apply type selection area on the bottom part.
• Details for: <Attribute> (<NE Name><Object Name>) pane.
You can perform actions from the Object Editor window, see “Contextual menus on the
Object Editor” (p. 1-49).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 Object Editor window
NE Name/Object Name part lists the objects for which the Object Editor command was
invoked. It details:
• Object state
Icon Description
The Pencil icon is displayed if an attribute is modified
The full attribute line is displayed in bold type
The Check mark icon is displayed when an attribute is tagged by Send
Always and is not modified
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Jobs
Icon Description
The Refresh icon indicates that a "Refresh" operation on this object is
required after the job is finished
This icon is removed after a "Refresh" and a "Reset All" operation
The On-going job icon indicates that a job is in progress on this object or
its parent
• NE Name.
• Object Name.
You can select or deselect objects. Multiple selections are allowed and can be on
non-contiguous objects. When you select an object, its attributes are displayed in the
Attributes pane.
Click Refresh to load object data from the base; by doing so you discard any changes you
have not yet applied.
Click Remove to remove one or several objects from the list.
Click Search to find and add objects to the NE Name / Object Name list. The Figure
3-13, “Object Editor, Search Panel window” (p. 3-28) appears.
Attributes part lists attributes for the selected object(s). It details:
• Object State
Icon Description
The Pencil icon is displayed if an attribute is modified
The Check mark icon is displayed when an attribute is tagged by Send
Always and is not modified
• NE Name
• Object Name
• Attribute, which contains attribute names
• Value, which contains the attribute value. Values are displayed as follows: element 1,
element 2
• Class, which contains the attribute class: 0, 2, 3, RO (Read Only), NA (attribute class
non available) or SC (can be set at Creation only)
Attributes that cannot be modified are displayed in gray tint.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Search in attributes table enables to filter the list of selected object attributes. Enter a
text string in Search in attributes table and click Search to display attributes including
this text string only. This search is not case sensitive. The following is an example of a
search with "number".
Figure 3-12 Object Editor, search in Attributes
Some attributes can be set using regional alphabets, for example NE names and cities.
These attribute types are based on unicode standard.
The Show option filters displayed objects. When you select:
• All: all the objects for which the Object Editor command was invoked appear.
• Changes Only: the list of objects contains only modified objects (having at least one
modified attribute) and Send Always tagged objects (having at least one attribute
tagged by Send Always). Attributes part displays only the modified attributes for
these objects.
When you change the filter state, the first object contained in the NE Name/Object Name
list is selected.
The Mode option enables to select the modification mode and perform the Apply All
Changes/Reset All changes commands. Select:
• Online Commands to modify class 3 and class NA (OAM parameter) attributes.
All modified attributes and Send Always tagged attributes are set online.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See “Modifying a parameter online” (p. 3-31).
• Activation Session or Activation Session with Auto Release to modify the following
attributes through the Sessions Manager:
– class 0 and class 2 attributes (mandatory),
– class 3 and class NA attributes,
– class 3 and class NA attributes mandatory in case of mixed (class 3 and/or class
NA, and other class attributes) class attribute modification in one transaction,
– RNC I-node and POC parameters (mandatory), although they are displayed as NA
attributes.
All modified attributes and Send Always tagged attributes are set through the Sessions
Manager.
In the Sessions Manager, the Auto. Release option is checked by default. In that case
a Fallback is not possible once the activation of changes has been successfully
applied. Select:
– Activation Session mode if you want to be able to perform a Fallback after the
activation of changes.
In this case, the Auto. Release option is deselected in the Sessions Manager, see
Figure 3-20, “Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane” (p. 3-50).
– Activation Session with Auto Release if you do not need to perform a Fallback
after the activation of changes.
In this case, the Auto. Release option remains selected in the Sessions Manager,
see Figure 3-20, “Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane” (p. 3-50).
See “Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager” (p. 3-33).
• Apply All Changes, which is enabled if at least one attribute is modified or tagged by
Send Always.
If a request fails, a dialog box that indicates the failure reason appears. The objects
and their attributes are no longer marked "modified" but the specific icons indicating
that the parameters are modified are removed. The filter is forced to "All", the first
object displayed in the Object Selection part and its first attribute displayed in the
Attribute Selection part are selected. The Send Always tags remain.
• Reset All Changes, which is enabled if at least one attribute is modified or tagged by
Send Always.
When you click Reset All Changes, a confirmation message appears. After this action
is performed, object editor cache memory is emptied and all icons are removed. The
state columns for the objects and the attributes are refreshed.
When you close the Object Editor window, if some attributes are modified but not
applied using Apply All Changes, a confirmation message appears. If you choose OK, all
un-applied modifications are lost.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Details for: <Attribute> (<NE name> <Object name>) pane includes:
• an Edit field, which enables you to modify the attribute value.
• an Information part, which details information on the selected attribute in the
Attributes pane.
When you select a single attribute (or multiple attributes selection with the same
attribute name), the Edit field and Information part appear. In all other cases, only a
list of selected attributes appears.
• command buttons:
– Set, which enables you to validate changes made in the Edit field. In case of
multiple selection, this button is "enabled" if attributes have the same name and if
they are consistent (they have the same type and consistent constraints). If the
value entered into the Edit field is not compatible with the constraints displayed
into the Information part, an error window is displayed when you click Set. It
indicates the reason why set was refused.
– Set Default Values, which enables you to set the selected attribute(s) to its default
value only if a default value is available for the attribute (at least one of the
attributes in case of multiple selection).
– Set No Value, which enables you to set optional attributes to "Set to None" if the
selected attribute is optional (at least one of the selected attributes in case of
multiple selection).
– Send Always, which enables you to tag the attributes "send always." If one or
more attributes are selected, the button is enabled. If the selected attribute is
already modified, the button has no effect. If you modified an attribute which was
tagged "send always," the tag is lost. To remove the tag "send always" from an
attribute, use the reset button.
– Reset, which enables you to set the attribute to the value it had before any
modification. Tooltip indicates the value that is set.
These command buttons are disabled if:
• attribute selection contains at least one "Read Only" or "SC" (Settable at Creation
only) attribute,
• attribute selection contains at least one attribute that cannot be modified through the
Object Editor plug-in; in this case, all buttons are disabled,
• no attribute is selected.
For more information about attributes see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
System - Node B Parameters Reference Guide, 9YZ-04157-0023-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 Object Editor, Search Panel window
The Search Panel window contains:

• a search parameter area, which includes:
– Select Root Instance, which lists all the root objects declared in WMS,
– Enter Root DN to enter the instance DN on which the search operation is
launched,
– Search to launch the search operation.
• a result area, which includes:
– Number of instances retrieved, which lists the instances matching the search
criteria
– Number of instances selected, which displays the number of selected instances
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Select All to select all the instances in the result list
– Select None to reset the selection in the result list
• Append to add the selected instances to the NE Name/Object Name list in the Object
Editor window.
• Replace to replace all of the instances in the NE Name/Object Name list in the
Object Editor window by the selected instances.
BTSEquipment CM parameters
The following configuration management (CM) parameters are generated on the
BTSEquipment in the WMS:
• externalLogStorageActivation
• externalLogTransferTime
• externalLogRootDirectory
• externalLogServerIPV4Address/externalLogServerIPV6Address
– externalLogServerFtpPort
– externalLogUserPassword
External alarm logic management

The CM parameter BTSEquipment: :isExternalAlarmLogicInversionAllowed is
introduced in WMS. This parameter enables or disables the active state management for
the BTS external alarms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Opening an Object Editor window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an Object Editor window

Overview
Use this procedure to open an Object Editor window for an RNC, a BTS, or a POC NE.
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150).
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to modify parameter attributes.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Resource Browser window, select the Object(s), and either:
• from the 9353 WMS menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Object Editor,
or
• right-click the selected Object(s) and select Configuration > Object Editor.
Alternatively, from an Equipment Monitor window, select the Object(s) and:
• right-click the selected Object(s) and select Configuration > Object Editor.
Result: The Figure 3-11, “Object Editor window” (p. 3-23) appears with all the
objects selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Modifying a parameter online
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying a parameter online

Overview
Use this procedure to modify a parameter online.
You can modify class 3 and class NA attributes either online or through the Sessions
Manager.
You must modify the following attributes through the Sessions Manager:
• RNC I-node and POC parameters although are displayed as NA attributes,
• other class attributes, or mixed (class 3 and/or class NA, and other class attributes)
class attributes.
To modify a parameter through the Sessions Manager, see “Modifying a parameter
through the Sessions Manager” (p. 3-33).
Prerequisite
An Object Editor window is open, see “Opening an Object Editor window” (p. 3-30).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Object Editor window, in the NE Objects list, select an NE Name/Object Name
to display all its associated attributes in the Attributes part.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Attributes part, select the attribute you want to modify the value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Details for: <Attribute (NE name)>, modify the value according to the parameter
type (String, Int, Enum) and boundaries detailed in the information window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Set.
Result: The modifications are highlighted in the NE Objects pane.
• in the NE Name / Object Name list part:
A pencil icon appears in the first column and the modified NE raw appears in bold
type.
• the Attributes For: <NE name> part:
A pencil icon appears in the first column and the modified attribute raw is
highlighted in bold type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Modifying a parameter online
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Go to Step 2, if you want to change another class 3 or class NA attribute value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the Online Commands Mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Apply All Changes to validate all the modifications entered on one or several
objects. The editor stays open.
Reset All Changes cancels all the modifications entered.
Result: The parameters are modified online, immediately and without any impact on
service.
The Command Manager window is launched to show the progress of the modification
and the success or failure of that modification.
The pencil icon is removed once the online command is executed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager

Overview
Use this procedure to modify a parameter through the Sessions Manager.
You can modify class 3 and class NA attributes either through the Sessions Manager or
Online (see “Modifying a parameter online” (p. 3-31)).
You must modify the following attributes through the Sessions Manager:
• class 0 and class 2 attributes,
• class 3 and class NA attributes in case of mixed (class 3 and/or class NA, and other
class attributes) class attribute modification in one transaction,
• RNC I-node and POC parameters, although they are displayed as NA attributes.
In the Sessions Manager, the Auto. Release option is checked by default. In that case a
Fallback is not possible once the activation of changes has been successfully applied. In
the Object Editor, select:
• Activation Session mode if you want to be able to perform a Fallback after the
activation of changes.
In this case, the Auto. Release option is deselected in the Sessions Manager, see
• Activation Session with Auto Release if you do not need to perform a Fallback after
the activation of changes.
In this case, the Auto. Release option remains selected in the Sessions Manager, see
Prerequisite
An Object Editor window is open, see “Opening an Object Editor window” (p. 3-30).
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to modify parameter attributes.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Object Editor window, in the NE Objects list, select an NE Name/Object Name
to display all its associated attributes in the Attributes part.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Attributes For: <NE name> part, select the attribute you want to modify the value.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Details for: <Attribute> (<NE name>), modify the value according to the
parameter type (String, Int, Enum) and boundaries detailed in the information window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Modifying a parameter through the Sessions Manager
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Set.
Result: The modifications are highlighted in the NE Objects pane:
• in the NE Name / Object Name list part:
A pencil icon appears in the first column and the modified NE row appears in bold
type.
• the Attributes For: <NE name> part:
A pencil icon appears in the first column and the modified attribute row is
highlighted in bold type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Go to Step 2, if you want to change another attribute value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select Activation Session or Activation Session with Auto Release mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Apply All Changes to validate all the modifications entered on one or several
objects. The editor remains open.
Reset All Changes cancels all the modifications entered.
Result:
• The modifications are translated into a workorder (WO).
• The Command Manager window is launched to show the progress of the
modification.
• The Sessions Manager is launched automatically for validation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Activate the session, see “Performing actions on a session” (p. 3-61).

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
Use the CM XML Export Network command to export a snapshot of an NE, an NE group
or the entire network as an XML file.
Ensure that you select the appropriate UTRAN options for the export operation.
Alternatively, you can perform CM XML Export actions with WICL commands (cmXML
Export, cmXML ExportRNS, and cmXML ExportNetwork commands). For detailed
information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands
Contents
CM XML Export overview 3-36
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management CM XML Export overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CM XML Export overview

About CM XML Export
A CM XML export snapshot of the configuration is automatically and daily performed at
a specific time.
The file has the following naming format: UTRAN-SNAPyyyyMMddhhmmss.xml.zip The
files are stored under .../opt/nortel/data/cmXML/scheduledExport/ directory.
To schedule other automatic CM XML export snapshot, use the Configuration > WICL
Script Editor menu and cmXMLExportUtranNetwork.sh script.
Important! Do not perform a CM XML export that could enter in conflict with an
automatic CM XML export (00:00 a.m. for SDA(1) and 02:00 a.m for WMS). The CM
XML export duration depends on the size of the network. The time of the automatic
CM XML export completion can be obtained by subtract the UTRAN-
SNAPyyyyMMddhhmmss.xml file system time with hhmmss (hhmmss is the start
time of the CM XML export).
(1)
SDA exports are stored in .../opt/nortel/data/cmXML/sdaExport/ directory.
For a single or group of selected objects, open the Figure 3-14, “CM XML Export
window” (p. 3-38).
Each tab of the CM Export window contains:
• an NE selection pane
• an Options pane:
– General option
– UTRAN options
• a Save in pane:
– Directory location field for the exported data
– Export now, to launch the export command
– Schedule, to schedule the export
The parameter filters provided in the UTRAN domain are for RNC C-node, RNC I-node,
BTS, POC and OAM parameters only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can select the set of parameters you want to include in the exported snapshot files
according to the following properties documented in the RAN model:
• The Category option defines the type of information that is included in the exported
snapshot. It can take one of the following values:
– Provisioning (default value). These are the standard parameters excluding
Installation & Commissioning, inventory, dynamic data, and States & Status
parameters,
– States & Status
– Installation & Commissioning (I & C)
– Hardware
• The Visibility option defines the type of objects and attributes that is included in the
exported snapshot. It can take the following values:
– Customer (default value), which includes standard customer parameters and
customer restricted parameters
– Manufacturer (these parameters cannot be modified)
All Category/Visibility parameter combinations are possible to filter the parameters to be
included in the exported snapshot files, although manufacturer parameters cannot be
modified. When you select:
• Customer, the exported file contains both customer and customer restricted
parameters.
• Manufacturer, the exported file contains manufacturer parameters only.
• both Customer and Manufacturer, the exported file contains customer, customer
restricted, and manufacturer parameters.
The default filter setting is Provisioning/Customer.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > CM XML and click:
• Export NE,
• Export NE Grouping, or
• Export Network.
The Export NE and Export NE Grouping commands are also available from the
contextual menu; right-click on the NE. Hold down the Shift key and left-click for
multiple selection of NEs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-14, “CM XML Export window” (p. 3-38) appears.
Figure 3-14 CM XML Export window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 For an Export NE or Export NE Grouping only, if you do not want to export listed NEs,
select the NEs in the NE Name list and click Remove.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Depending on the export:

• Export NE or Export NE Grouping:
If you do not want to export listed NEs, select the NEs in the NE Name list and click
Remove.
Note: 9313/9314 Node B is not included in the Export NE Grouping snapshot.
In the NE Name list select the NEs you want to export.
• Export network: in the Network Option list, select UTRAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In General options, select Compressed if you want to zip the exported snapshot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the UTRAN options pane:

• select the appropriate UTRAN parameter category.
• select Customer in the Visibility option.
WPS filters Manufacturer parameters when they are included in snapshots.
Note: You can select Hardware to see the hardware inventory once you export the
XML file into WPS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click Browse to select or create the location for the exported XML file in the /CM XML
directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In File, enter a file name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click Export now, to launch the export.

To schedule the export, click Schedule, the Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window”
(p. 3-136) appears, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
Result: The Command Manager window appears and shows the progress of the
export operation. When completed, the exported snapshot file is saved in the file
entered in the previous step, in .xcm format or in xcm.zip format.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information on the configuration from the sessions manager.
Contents
Configuration overview 3-41

Creating a session 3-47
Verifying session details 3-53
Performing actions on a session 3-61
Aborting a session 3-64
Terminating a session 3-67
Scheduling a session 3-68
Interrupting a session 3-70
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Configuration overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration overview
Overview
For detailed information on recommended configuration workflow and activation session
description, see OAM CM operational guidelines, UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
Export snapshots of an NE, an NE grouping or the network with the “Performing CM
XML Export” (p. 3-35) commands.
Use the snapshot to prepare the provisioning changes into consolidated workorders using
the Wireless Provisioning System (WPS), see Alcatel-Lucent 9952 Wireless Provisioning
System - User Guide for W-CDMA, 9YZ-06348-0005-PCZZA. External planning
applications are also used to prepare workorders.
To open the Sessions Manager window, from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select
Configuration > Sessions Manager.
To apply workorders on the network, use the Sessions Manager as follows:
1. Create a session, see “Creating a session” (p. 3-47).
2. Verify the session details, see “Verifying session details” (p. 3-53).
3. Perform actions on the session, see “Performing actions on a session” (p. 3-61).
4. Terminate the session, see “Terminating a session” (p. 3-67).
To schedule the session, see “Scheduling a session” (p. 3-68).
To abort the session, see “Aborting a session” (p. 3-64).
To interrupt the session, see “Interrupting a session” (p. 3-70).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 Sessions Manager window - Sessions List pane
The Sessions Manager window includes:

• Session Tasks pane:
Command Description
button
Create new session:
Creates a session
Abort session:
Can be used at any time of the session creation. It enables to interrupt
ongoing action(s) without deleting the session
Terminate session:
Removes the session from the Available Sessions list and releases all the
associated locks
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Description
button
Start session:
Enables to start the session
• Available Sessions pane, which includes the following tabs

– Active Sessions tab, which lists all available active sessions.
Each icon color indicates the session status.
Icon color Session status

idle
in progress
activate partly realized
fallback partly realized
activated
fallback completed
For detailed information on session status, see OAM CM operational guidelines,

UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
– Sessions Repository tab, which lists all generated sessions after a Release and
available for a:
– Fallback session
– Resume session
Alternatively, you can view the list of Fallback and Resume sessions with a
WICL command (CM listGeneratedSessions [-all] command). For detailed
information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands
• Details pane, which gives the summary of the <Session Name> selected in the
Sessions list folder (see Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window - Details pane”
(p. 3-45)):
– Workorder(s) path(s), which details the workorder location,
– Status, which indicates the session status,
– Created, which indicates the starting date and time of the session,
– Owner, which indicates the user name of the session originator,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Host, which indicates the IP address or the name of the client from which the
session has been created,
– Notes, which displays the notes added at session creation (from the session
creation or at after a Release).
• Sessions List or Session <session name> pane, which details:
– all available sessions and their according status, when Sessions list is selected in
the Available Sessions pane, see Figure 3-15, “Sessions Manager window -
Sessions List pane” (p. 3-42).
Find enables to search for a specific string in the Sessions List pane. This search
is performed on all the displayed information in the Sessions List pane. The
search result is highlighted in yellow, see Figure 3-16, “Find for "RNC" in the
Sessions List” (p. 3-44).
findNext and findPrevious enable to navigate in the search result (go to the next
and previous search result).
When the searched string does not exist in the Sessions List pane, the Find field
background turns red, see Figure 3-17, “Find for "BTS" in the Sessions List”
(p. 3-45).
– individual session, when a session is selected in the Available Sessions pane, see
Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window - Details pane” (p. 3-45).
Figure 3-16 Find for "RNC" in the Sessions List
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-17 Find for "BTS" in the Sessions List
Figure 3-18 Sessions Manager window - Details pane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Creating a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a session
Overview
To start configuration with the Sessions Manager, create a session and load the
workorder(s).
You can also create or launch a session with WICL commands (CM createSession or CM
launchSession <session name> commands). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-19 Create Session window - Workorder(s) selection pane
The Create Session window includes:

• The Creation parameters pane, where you enter the Session Name.
• The Workorder(s) Selection pane, which includes:
– the cmXML folder, where the workorders are stored.
– File Name, where the workorder name can be entered directly.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– File type, which enables to filter the cmXML folder files by type (.*, .xml, or
.xwo).
– Add to list, which enables to add the selected workorder from the cmXML folder
to the Merge order / File Name list.
– the Merge order / File Name list, which details all the workorder names and path
locations included in the <Session Name>.
The workorders are merged in the indicated order.
– oriented arrows, which enable to manage the workorder order in the list.
– Remove, which enables to remove the selected workorder from the Merge order /
File Name list.
– Cancel, which enables to close the Create Session window without saving any
entered information in the <Session Name> creation.
– Next, which enables to continue the Session Name creation. The Figure 3-20,
“Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane” (p. 3-50) appears and shows the
workorder impacts.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane
The Create Session - Creation parameters pane includes the <Session Name> that you
can still modify at this step.
The Create Session - Excluded Nodes pane includes:
• for each node impacted by the <Session Name> creation:
– Activation Step, which indicates the modification time on the node,
– Workorder Actions, which indicates the action number on the node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alternatively, you can retrieve impacted nodes, their Activation Step and Workorder
Actions number on the node with a WICL command (CM getImpactedConfigNodes-
Info command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless
Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-
RKZZA.
Use this list to Exclude selected nodes from the <Session Name>.
Click the column header to sort the rows according to a column type.
The grid icon enables to:
– show/hide columns (select/unselect Exclude, Node Name, and/or Activation
Step),
– use scrollbar for the table (select column.horizontalScroll).
• Select All / Unselect All, which enables to select/unselect all the nodes from the list.
• Auto. Release selector (selected by default), which enables to automatically unlock
the node impacted by the <Session Name> creation as soon as they are activated and
before the <Session Name> is terminated.
• a progress bar, which indicates the progress of the workorder impact analysis.
Cancel enables to stop the impact analysis.
• Back, which enables to go back to the Figure 3-19, “Create Session window -
Workorder(s) selection pane” (p. 3-48).
• Schedule, which enables to schedule the <Session Name>.
See “Scheduling a session” (p. 3-68).
• Launch, which enables to launch the <Session Name> on the selected nodes.
• Close.
Prerequisite
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform a session creation.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Figure 3-15, “Sessions Manager window - Sessions List pane” (p. 3-42) window,
either:
• in Session Tasks pane, click Create new session, or
• in Available Sessions pane, right-click Sessions list and select New.
Result: The Figure 3-19, “Create Session window - Workorder(s) selection pane”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Create session - Creation parameters pane, enter a <Session Name>.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Create session - Workorder(s) selection pane,

• in the cmXML folder, select the workorder you want to activate, or
• enter the workorder name in File Name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Add to list.

Result: The selected workorder appears in the Merge order / File Name table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 if you need to add other workorder(s).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Organize the workorder(s) order with the oriented arrows if needed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Click Next.
Result: The Create session - Workorder Impacts / Exclude Nodes pane pane
appears, which displays for each impacted node its activation step details and its
number of impacted objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select Exclude for any node you do not want to configure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Click Launch.
Result: The Figure 3-19, “Create Session window - Workorder(s) selection pane”
(p. 3-48) window closes and the details of the created session are displayed in the
Sessions Manager window.
Click schedule if you want to launch the job later, see “Scheduling a session”
(p. 3-68).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Verifying session details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verifying session details

Overview
Before you activate the session you must verify the status of the session: creation logs,
steps, concerned nodes, activation status, activation type and validation result.
Verify these details from the Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window - Details pane”
(p. 3-45) window by looking at the:
• Creation tab - Creation for <session name>, see Figure 3-21, “Creation tab -
Creation for <session name> - Logs tab” (p. 3-54) and Figure 3-22, “Creation tab -
Creation for <session name> pane - Steps tab” (p. 3-56),
• Summary & Action tab - Summary for <session name> pane, see Figure 3-23,
“Summary & Action tab - Summary for <session name> pane” (p. 3-57).
To show and hide this pane click the double arrow:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab
The Creation for <session name> pane includes:

• a Creation Status pane,
• a Results pane.
The Creation Status pane details:
• the session creation Status, which can take the following values:
– In progress
– Successful
– Stopped with errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Completed with errors
– Completed with warning
– Cancelled
• the session creation Progress
The Results pane includes:
• the Figure 3-21, “Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab” (p. 3-54),
which details the message and its associated severity (error, warning, or information
message),
Find enables to search for a specific string in the Logs tab.
findNext and findPrevious enable to navigate in the search result (go to the next and
previous search result).
• the Figure 3-22, “Creation tab - Creation for <session name> pane - Steps tab”
(p. 3-56), which details the step progress of:
– Split workorders
– Dispatch workorders
Cancel is enabled during the session creation and disabled when session creation is
completed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 Creation tab - Creation for <session name> pane - Steps tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23 Summary & Action tab - Summary for <session name> pane
In the Summary & Action tab, the Summary for <session name> pane includes:
• Nodes in session pane,
• Nodes Info pane.
Nodes in session pane lists all the nodes included in the session and details for each
node:
• Activation Status, which can take the following values:
– Activated
Modifications were successfully applied on the running view of the node.
– Pre-activated
The modifications were applied on a temporary view of the node without impact
on the node running configuration.
– Activation partly realized
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Only part of the modifications were successfully activated on the node.
– Released
The node is impacted by the modifications of the workorder but is not managed
within the session. A node that was not successfully validated is automatically
released.
– Loaded
Modifications were loaded within the Activation system
– Validated
The validate operation was successfully performed on the node without any
critical error.
– Validation failed
The validate operation was successfully performed on the node and has reported
critical error.
– Aborted
Pre-activation was aborted.
– Fallback partly realized
Fallback was partly performed. New fallback operation is required to complete the
fallback process.
– Fallback completed
Fallback was successfully completed
• Activation Type, which can take the following values:
– CRITICAL
The activation is performed in a bulk fashion without considering the operational
state of the device. Use this mode when service disruption is of minor importance
with respect to the criticality of the modification, or when no other mode is
possible.
– ONLINE
When applicable, it is the default activation type.
The system activates the modifications in a sequence that minimizes the service
downtime. Use this mode when service disruption must be prevented. The
availability of this mode depends on the node type and of the modification nature.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When the activation requires a node lock action, the activation type is displayed as
ONLINE (LOCKS) instead of ONLINE. As locking objects can strongly impact the
service, for nodes with ONLINE (LOCKS) activation type, in the Validation report,
check which objects are impacted with this activation. Depending on the service
impact level, for example locking a NeighbouringCell object does not
significantly impact the service, proceed or postponed your action on this node.
– DEFAULT
Default is the activation type for RNC I-node and POC.
– SINGLE
A step by step activation mode for RNC I-node and POC.
Right-click the node Activation Type to modify its activation type when available.
For detailed information on the Activation Type, see OAM CM operational
guidelines, UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
• Validate Result, which can take the following values:
Validation Validation result icon

result
not done
not applicable
validation
passed
validation with
warnings
validation with
errors
Find enables to search for a specific string in the Nodes in session pane. This search is
performed on all the displayed information in the Nodes in session pane.
findNext and findPrevious enable to navigate in the search result (go to the next and
previous search result).
To display validated node(s) only, select Hide released node.
Node Info pane displays the information of the selected node in the Nodes in session
pane. It gives also access to the detailed Figure 3-4, “Upgrade download RNC software -
validation report information” (p. 3-12) information with the here link.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Figure 3-21, “Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab”
(p. 3-54) pane, check the Status and Progress of the session creation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select Figure 3-21, “Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab” (p. 3-54) to
view log details for the creation. Select Error messages, Warning messages and/or Info
messages to filter the displayed messages.
Result: For detailed information on errors in the Create Session log, see OAM CM
operational guidelines, UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Figure 3-22, “Creation tab - Creation for <session name> pane - Steps tab”
(p. 3-56) to display the session creation steps and corresponding progress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Figure 3-23, “Summary & Action tab - Summary for <session name> pane”
(p. 3-57), verify the following for each node impacted by the session:
• activation status
• activation type
Select a node to display its details in the Node Info pane.
Especially for a node with ONLINE (LOCKS), check the service impact level with its
full validation report. To see the full Figure 3-4, “Upgrade download RNC software -
validation report information” (p. 3-12) click the here hyperlink.
• validation result
Only BTS and RNC C-nodes are validated automatically during the session creation. For
remaining nodes the validation is done when you are “Performing actions on a session”
(p. 3-61).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To change the node activation type (if needed), select the node(s) in the Nodes in session
list. Right-click and select Set activation type. Select the activation type value.
Result: The “Command Manager” (p. 3-5) references the status of all session manager
jobs and provides additional details in case of errors.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Performing actions on a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing actions on a session

Overview
Perform an action on a session from the Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window -
Details pane” (p. 3-45) window by using the commands available from the Figure 3-24,
“Summary & Action tab - Actions for <session name> pane” (p. 3-61).
Alternatively, you can perform actions on a session with WICL commands (CM Validate,
CM preActivate, CM Activate, CM Resume, CM Fallback, and CM releaseNodes
commands). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
Figure 3-24 Summary & Action tab - Actions for <session name> pane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the Summary & Action tab, the Figure 3-24, “Summary & Action tab - Actions for
<session name> pane” (p. 3-61) includes:
• Command actions:
– Validation, which enables you to launch a validation on the selected node(s).
– Preactivation, which enables you to perform a delayed activation.
This prepares the modifications of the nodes and when convenient you can switch
the pending activation to active. This delayed activation is useful to prepare
changes to implement in a maintenance window.
– Activation, which enables you to perform an immediate activation.
– Resume, enables you to reactivate a session that has been stopped.
– Fallback, which enables you to fallback the modifications done to the network
during the activation session. This operation is possible after a partial or complete
activation process performed through a workorder. If Activation process is
successfully completed, Fallback is possible only if Automatic Release (see
Figure 3-20, “Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane” (p. 3-50)) option
was not checked during session creation.
– Release, which enables you to exclude the selected node(s) from the current
session and perform other actions on it in the mean time.
See also “Interrupting a session” (p. 3-70).
For detailed information on command actions, see OAM CM operational guidelines,
UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
• The Parameters pane, which details nodes that are activated when the session is
activated. When the nodes are activated they are no longer displayed in the list.
You can:
– Launch the action straight away, or
– Schedule the launch.
• The Status pane, which details the activation progress.
• Cancel, which enables you to stop the running action.
Prerequisites
RNC/POC must be in a layout and the OAM link must be opened before activating or
preactivating the session.
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform an action on a session.
Important! A workorder, including a MIB rebuild for the RNC, requires the RNC to
restart.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attention: Object creation is automatic for Alcatel-Lucent Multiservice Switch nodes.
When the WMS activates the workorder these objects already exist and an
information message appears in the error log stating the object already exists. This
does not affect the success of the activation process.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Summary & Action tab, in the Figure 3-24, “Summary & Action tab - Actions
for <session name> pane” (p. 3-61), select Validation and click Launch to validate the
nodes.
BTS and RNC C-nodes are already validated during the session creation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Preactivation or Activation according to your activation mode choice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Parameters pane, select the node(s) you want to activate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Launch.
Result:
• The Status pane shows the progress and the success of the activation.
• In the Available Sessions pane - Active Sessions tab, the session name icon color
changes to green.
Attention:
• In case of errors, click Fallback.
For detailed information on Fallback, see CM session troubleshooting section in
the OAM CM operational guidelines, UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
• In any case, you need to terminate the activation session to unlock impacted NEs,
see “Terminating a session” (p. 3-67).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Aborting a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aborting a session
Overview
Abort a session when you need to stop current actions and set the session in a stable
status.
You can abort a session at any time, but one session at a time only.
The Figure 3-25, “Sessions Manager - Abort tab - Abort for <session name>”
(p. 3-65) tab is displayed when you trigger an abort session action only.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-25 Sessions Manager - Abort tab - Abort for <session name>
The Abort for <session name> pane displays the same information as the Figure 3-21,
“Creation tab - Creation for <session name> - Logs tab” (p. 3-54) pane.
You can also abort a session with CM abortSession command. For detailed information,
see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide
(WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Figure 3-15, “Sessions Manager window - Sessions List pane”
(p. 3-42) window, select the session in the Available Sessions pane - Active Sessions tab,
and either:
• in the Session Tasks pane, click Abort session icon, or
• in the Available Sessions pane, right-click the selected session and select Abort.
Result: A confirmation message appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Yes to confirm your action.

Result: The Figure 3-25, “Sessions Manager - Abort tab - Abort for <session name>”
(p. 3-65) appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Terminating a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Terminating a session
Overview
Use this procedure to remove a session from the Available Sessions pane - Active
Sessions tab in the Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window - Details pane”
(p. 3-45) window, and release all the associated locks.
You can terminate several sessions at the same time.
Alternatively, you can terminate a session with a WICL command (CM terminateSession
Prerequisite
If the session is not fully activated or actions are still in progress, you need to abort the
session first, see “Aborting a session” (p. 3-64).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 3-42) window, select the session(s) in the Available Sessions pane - Active Sessions
tab, and either:
• in the Session Tasks pane, click Terminate session icon, or
• in the Available Sessions pane, right-click the selected session(s) and select
Terminate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Yes to confirm your action.

Result: The selected session(s) are deleted and removed from the list in the Available
Sessions pane.
All associated locks are released.
If you want to restore the initial configuration, go to “Creating a session”
(p. 3-47) and activate the reverse workorder. The reverse workorder
(<Filename>_reverse.xwo) is generated by WPS during the unitary workorder
(<Filename>.xwo) export. Note that this reverse workorder activation does not ensure
that the system is restored in its exact initial state.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Scheduling a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scheduling a session
Overview
Use the Schedule command to perform schedule actions. You can schedule:
• tasks included in the session creation.
The Session Creation tasks are scheduled at a defined date and time.
• the whole session creation.
The whole Session Creation is scheduled at a defined date and time.
Depending on the schedule Schedule Information pane includes:
• Task Name pane, which enables to select the schedule type:
– session creation and validation
– whole session creation.
The whole Session Creation is scheduled at a defined date and time.
– nodes activation.
The node activation is scheduled only.
– nodes activation and terminate session.
The node is activated and the session is terminated.
• Schedule information:
– Estimated Duration (min) (optional), which enables to book a duration in the Job
Scheduler calendar. The default value is 60 minutes.
Prerequisite
A session creation is in progress, see “Creating a session” (p. 3-47).
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to schedule a session.
You can start the procedure for scheduling a session procedure from:
• the Figure 3-20, “Create Session window - Excluded Nodes pane” (p. 3-50): the
session has not been created yet.
• the Figure 3-24, “Summary & Action tab - Actions for <session name> pane”
(p. 3-61): the session is already created but has not been launched yet.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Scheduling a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
To schedule a session, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Click Schedule.
Result: The Figure 3-26, “Schedulable Task window from the Create Session”
(p. 3-69) appears:
Figure 3-26 Schedulable Task window from the Create Session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the schedule type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the date and time of the schedule and the estimated duration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Interrupting a session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interrupting a session
Overview
When a user is performing actions that take time, for example for a Node B reparenting:
• all the nodes impacted by the action are locked until the action is terminated and the
nodes are released.
• any other activation session, of high priority, that needs to be performed on one of
these nodes is not possible.
In such a case, use this procedure to unblock the situation by removing the lock on
released node in the current session, to allow another activation session to use the same
node. The other action must be short.
Alternatively, you can release a node from the current session and generates a Fallback
and/or Resume on a session with a WICL command (CM releaseNodes command). For
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-27 Summary & Action tab - Action for <session name> - Release Nodes
window
The Release Nodes window includes:

• Resume Session, which enables to resume the session.
When selected, the default format is
<currentSessionName>_Fallback_<YYYMMDD-HHMMSS>
• Fallback Session, which enables to fallback the session.
When selected, the default format is <currentSessionName>_Resume_<YYYMMDD-
HHMMSS>
• Notes, which enables to add notes for the generated session. This information is
displayed in the Figure 3-18, “Sessions Manager window - Details pane” (p. 3-45).
When the current session already contains a Fallback or a Resume, "_" is added with the
date and time of the new action name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 3-42) window, in the Available Sessions pane - Active Sessions tab, select the session
that need to be interrupted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Summary & Action tab, select the Actions for <session name> pane.
Result: The Actions for <session name> pane is expanded.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Actions for <session name> pane, click Release.

Result: In the Parameters pane, all the impacted nodes are listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Parameters pane, select the node you need to unlock and click Launch.
Result: The Figure 3-27, “Summary & Action tab - Action for <session name> -
Release Nodes window” (p. 3-71) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 If needed only, in the Release Nodes window:

• select Resume Session and/or Fallback Session depending on your needs.
Modify the default Resume Session name and/or the default Fallback Session name
if needed. The session name length is 64 characters maximum.
When none of Resume Session and Fallback Session is selected the current release
behavior is applied.
• add information in the Notes field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
Result: The selected node is unlocked.
If Step 5, you selected Resume Session and/or Fallback Session the session is added
in the respective Sessions Repository tab in Available Sessions pane.
Alternatively, you can:
• view the list of Fallback and Resume sessions with a WICL command (CM
listGeneratedSessions [-all] command).
• retrieve impacted nodes, their Activation Step and Workorder Actions number on
the node with a WICL command (CM getImpactedConfigNodesInfo command).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To proceed, with this activation session, in the Sessions Repository folder, select the
<session name> and go to “Performing actions on a session” (p. 3-61).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or

the Resource Browser
Overview
Purpose
This section provides information on configuration from the equipment monitor and/or
the resource browser.
Contents
Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration 3-75

Auditing a MIB 3-77
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window menu bar 3-81
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command Manager window 3-83
Canceling a MIB rebuild 3-85
Rebuilding a MIB 3-87
Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM cache 3-89
Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB 3-91
Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS 3-96
Setting Administrative State 3-98
Shutting down an FDDCell 3-100
Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State 3-102
Resetting a board or a card 3-104
Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps 3-107
Performing a Switchover LP 3-108
Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment 3-110
Resetting a RNC 3-113
Launching SSH for SR and SAR 3-115
Launching SSH for OneBTS 3-117
Creating a CM image for a OneBTS 3-119
Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS 3-122
Backup RNC 3-125
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration

Overview
Use the Management Information Base (MIB) Audit command to control if there are any
differences between the OAM and NE MIB files. The MIB Audit command is available
for RNC and BTS (all kind of BTSs except 9313/9314 Node Bs and 939x OneBTS) NEs,
see “Auditing a MIB” (p. 3-77).
When differences are present use the MIB Rebuild command to update the MIB files on
the NE(s). See:
• “Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window menu bar” (p. 3-81)
• “Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command Manager window” (p. 3-83)
• “Canceling a MIB rebuild” (p. 3-85)
• “Rebuilding a MIB” (p. 3-87)
When an Audit, Rebuild or Reset command is running, you can supervise its progression
and its Status in the Command Manager window. For more information on the success or
failure of a command, select a command and open the Details pane (click the left-oriented
arrow). When the commands encounter a failure, a message appears stating there was a
problem and the Status column is updated.
For more information, see the “Command Manager” (p. 3-5) window description.
Use the CM synchronize command to manually synchronize the WMS CM database with
the OneBTS MIB, see “Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB”
(p. 3-91).
The OAM cache is automatically updated at each configuration change performed by
WMS. Use the Synchronize command to manually synchronize RNC I-node or POC data
with OAM cache, see:“Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM
cache” (p. 3-89).
Use the following commands to configure objects:
• “Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS” (p. 3-96)
• “Setting Administrative State” (p. 3-98)
• “Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State” (p. 3-102)
• “Resetting a board or a card” (p. 3-104)
• “Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps” (p. 3-107)
• “Performing a Switchover LP” (p. 3-108)
• “Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment” (p. 3-110)
• “Launching SSH for SR and SAR” (p. 3-115)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Equipment Monitor and Resource Browser configuration
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the CreateBackupImage and RestoreBackupImage commands to backup and restore
the data on a OneBTS, see:
• “Creating a CM image for a OneBTS” (p. 3-119)
• “Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS” (p. 3-122)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Auditing a MIB
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auditing a MIB
Overview
This operation uploads and compares the values of all managed objects contained in the
MIB database to those contained in the OAM running view. The differences are
highlighted.
You can audit either:
• the selected NE (RNC or BTS) MIBs: select Audit
• all the BTS MIBs belonging to the selected RNC: select Audit All BTSs
Auditing a MIB is not available for 9313/9314 Node Bs and 939x OneBTSs.
Alternatively, you can audit a MIB with a WICL command (Audit command). For
Figure 3-28 Audit Action window
You can Schedule the Audit action or launch it with Audit now.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prerequisite
A Resource Browser window or an Equipment Monitor window is open, see “Opening a
Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150) or “Opening an Equipment Monitor window”
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Resource Browser or the Equipment Monitor window, select an object or a list
of objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the Audit command either:

• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > MIB >
Audit or Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > Audit All BTSs (if RNC selected
only), or
• from the Resource Browser window, right-click the selected object(s) and select
Configuration > MIB > Audit or Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > Audit All
BTSs (if RNC selected only), or
• from the Equipment Monitor, right-click the selected object(s) and select
Configuration > MIB > Audit or Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > Audit All
BTSs (if RNC selected only).
Result: The Figure 3-28, “Audit Action window” (p. 3-77) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To remove an object from the NE list, select the object and click Remove From List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Audit now.

To schedule the Audit, click Schedule, the Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window”
(p. 3-136) appears, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
(p. 3-7) window appears and displays the name of the NE(s) being audited and the
audit progress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When the audit command is completed, in the Details pane:

• click Logs tab to view the audit result details, or any information or warnings
generated during the audit process,
• click the link to view the Audit Report window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-29, “Audit Result window” (p. 3-79) appears.
Whatever the Audit command results are, the XML file is stored in the AuditResult
folder. The file indicates if inconsistencies were encountered during the Audit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 To store the Audit Report locally, click Save As XML or Save As HTML and select the
destination folder.
Result: The Audit Report is saved in the local folder as well as in the AuditResult
folder.
To view the Audit Report stored in the AuditResult folder, see:
• “Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window menu bar” (p. 3-81)
• “Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command Manager window”
(p. 3-83)
Figure 3-29 Audit Result window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the menu bar
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window

menu bar
Overview
Use this procedure to view and save an Audit Result.
Prerequisites
A Network Layout is selected, see “Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150).
An Audit is successfully completed, see “Auditing a MIB” (p. 3-77).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the NSP window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > View
Audit Results.
Result: The Figure 3-30, “Audit Result Browser” (p. 3-82) appears displaying the
Audit Report list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Audit Report list, to view a report in html format, either:

• double-click the Audit Report row, or
• right-click the Audit Report row and select View
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Audit Report list, to save a report, either:

• in html format: click Save As HTML and select the local destination folder.
• in xml format: click Save As XML and select the local destination folder.
folder.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Purpose
You can perform actions from the Audit Result Browser window, see “Contextual menus
on the Audit Result Browser” (p. 1-50).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the NSP window
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the menu bar
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-30 Audit Result Browser
The Audit Result Browser window displays the following information:

• Filename in <NEtype>_<userLabel>_<yyyyMMddHHmm>_<Consistency>.xml
format,
– yyyy: year of the audit
– MM: month of the audit
– dd: day of the audit
– HHmm: time of the audit
• NE Type, which indicates the type of NE,
• NE Name, which indicates the NE user label,
• Audit Date, which indicates the date and time of the audit,
• Consistency, which indicates whether the audit is consistent or not.
Click a column header to sort the results according to this header.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the Manager window
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command

Manager window
Overview
Use this procedure to view an Audit Result from the Command Manager window.
Prerequisites
A Command Manager window is open, see “Command Manager” (p. 3-5).
An Audit is successfully completed, see “Auditing a MIB” (p. 3-77).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Command Manager window, select Commands History tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In Command Type, enter:

audit*
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Display.
Result: The Audit Result list appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the list, select an Audit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Details pane, select the Logs tab.

Result: The Audit report progress is detailed in the Logs tab (see Figure 3-31,
“Command Manager - Commands History - Logs tab” (p. 3-84)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click the link to view the Audit Report
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing and saving an Audit Result from the Command
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the Manager window
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-31 Command Manager - Commands History - Logs tab
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 To store the Audit Report locally, click Save As XML or Save As HTML and select the
destination folder.
folder.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Canceling a MIB rebuild
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Canceling a MIB rebuild

Overview
Use the Cancel Reset Online command to cancel a MIB rebuild on an RNC. Note that
this command is available for RNC 1000 type only.
Figure 3-32 Reset Action Window
The Figure 3-32, “Reset Action Window” (p. 3-85) details for each NE in the NEs List the
Object Name associated to the NE Name.
In the Reset Mode, the Cancel Reset Online command enables to cancel an ongoing
Rebuild MIB action. There is no global reset of the RNC at the end of the operation.
For detailed information on Reset Mode, see OAM CM operational guidelines,
UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
To remove an object from the NE list, select the object and click Remove From List.
To reset a MIB, use the WICL command (ResetMIB command). For detailed information,
see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide
(WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Important! Resetting a MIB is reserved for the Alcatel-Lucent support team for
specific issues that need to troubleshoot the RNC.
This action generates an outage.
State changes are no longer managed as the settings for FDDcell are lost.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Canceling a MIB rebuild
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Resource Browser or the Equipment Monitor window, select one or more
RNCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the Reset command either:

• from the 9353 WMS menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > Cancel
Reset Online, or
• from the Resource Browser window, right-click the selected Object(s) and select
Configuration > MIB > Cancel Reset Online, or
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click the selected Object and select
Configuration >MIB >Cancel Reset Online.
Result: The Figure 3-32, “Reset Action Window” (p. 3-85) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Launch.
(p. 3-7) window opens and displays the name of the NE(s) being reset and the reset
progress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 When the Reset command is completed, in the Details pane click Logs tab to view the
command result details, or any information or warnings generated during the Reset
process.
Result: When you perform a Cancel Reset Online command, the CRITICAL alarm
'MIB not built' appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Rebuilding a MIB
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rebuilding a MIB
Overview
The Rebuild action sends the MIB data of the OAM to the specified NEs (RNCs or
BTSs). They are stored in the NE MIB. You can access this command using the menu bar
or from a contextual menu.
Rebuilding a MIB is not available for 9313/9314 Node Bs and 939x OneBTSs.
Figure 3-33 Rebuild Action Window
The Figure 3-33, “Rebuild Action Window” (p. 3-87) details for each NE in the NEs List
the Object Name associated to the NE Name.
To remove an object from the NE list, select the object and click Remove From List.
You can Schedule the Rebuild action or launch it now with Rebuild now.
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform a Rebuild action.
Important! MIB rebuild can only be performed in a maintenance window, as this has
an impact on the RNC service. Ensure you schedule this activity in accordance with
maintenance planning.
Alternatively, you can rebuild a MIB with a WICL command (Rebuild command).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Rebuilding a MIB
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
To cancel an ongoing MIB rebuild, see “Canceling a MIB rebuild” (p. 3-85).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Resource Browser or the Equipment Monitor window, select an object or a list
of objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Launch the Rebuild command either:

• from the 9353 WMS menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > MIB > Rebuild,
or
• from the Resource Browser window, right-click the selected Object(s) and select
Configuration > MIB > Rebuild, or
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click the selected Object(s) and select
Configuration > MIB > Rebuild.
Result: The Figure 3-33, “Rebuild Action Window” (p. 3-87) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 To remove an object from the NE list, select the object and click Remove From List.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Rebuild now.

To schedule the Rebuild, the Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window” (p. 3-136) appears,
see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135)
(p. 3-7) window appears and displays the name of the NE(s) being rebuilt and its
rebuild progress.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 When the Rebuild command is completed, in the Details pane, click the Logs tab to view
the command result, or any information or warnings generated during the Rebuild
process.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the cache
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM

cache
Overview
Use this procedure to manually synchronize RNC I-node or POC data with OAM cache.
The RNC I-node and POC data are stored in a cache at OAM level. The OAM cache is
automatically updated at each configuration change performed by WMS. This procedure
is useful to export RNC I-node and POC data when those nodes are locked in an
activation session.
Figure 3-34 Synchronize Action window
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To synchronize:
• POC data: from the Resource Browser or the Equipment Monitor window - Logical
tree view, select the POC object.
• RNC I-node data: from the Equipment Monitor window, select the INode object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the object and select Configuration>Synchronize.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Manually synchronizing RNC I-node or POC data with OAM
Configuration from the Equipment Monitor and/or the cache
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-34, “Synchronize Action window” (p. 3-89) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the row(s) corresponding to the object(s) you want to synchronize and click
Synchronize.
Result: The Command Manager window appears displaying the synchronization
action progress.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with OneBTS MIB

Overview
Use this procedure to manually synchronize the WMS CM database with the OneBTS
MIB. With this synchronization type the OneBTS MIB is the reference.
For detailed information on the synchronization, see OAM CM operational guidelines,
UMT/OAM/INF/023960.
The Figure 3-35, “Equipment Monitor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB Details”
(p. 3-92) attribute of the OneBTSEquipmentMIB object details the CM synchronization
status of the selected OneBTS, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor window” (p. 2-262).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-35 Equipment Monitor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB Details
If an error occurs during CM synchronize command, an alarm is raised.

Alternatively, you can synchronize the WMS CM database with the OneBTS MIB with a
WICL command (OneBTS cmsynchronize command). For detailed information, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL),
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-36 CM Synchronize Action window
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
The OAM link with the OneBTS is open.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Either:
• from the Resource Browser window, select one ore more OneBTS NEs, or
• from the OneBTS Equipment Monitor window - Logical tree view, select
OneBTSEquipment object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the OneBTS NE(s) / OneBTSEquipment object and select Configuration >
CM Synchronize.
Result: The Figure 3-36, “CM Synchronize Action window” (p. 3-93) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the row(s) corresponding to the object(s) you want to synchronize and click CM
Synchronize.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-37, “Command Manager window - CM Synchronize command”
(p. 3-94) window appears displaying the synchronization action progress.
Figure 3-37 Command Manager window - CM Synchronize command
The WMS CM database is updated according to the selected OneBTS MIB.

The Figure 3-38, “Object Editor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB attributes” (p. 3-95) are as
follows:
• cmSyncState = fullTreeAudit_complete
• fmSyncState= synchronized
• preprovisioned = false
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-38 Object Editor - OneBTSEquipmentMIB attributes
To supervise CM synchronization process, see “Supervising a OneBTS CM

synchronization” (p. 3-19).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS

Overview
This action enables to activate pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS.
Use this procedure when you need to replace a OneBTS board.
Figure 3-39 Enable pre-provisioning Mode Action window
The Enable pre-provisioning Mode Action window details for each NE in the NEs List,
the Object Name associated to the NE Name, and its pre-provisioning mode.
The OneBTS pre-provisioning mode values are:
• False, which indicates that the pre-provisioning mode is not enabled.
In that mode, you can perform:
– a CM Synchronize action, see “Manually synchronizing WMS CM database with
OneBTS MIB” (p. 3-91).
– an FM Synchronize action, see “Launching an FM Synchronize” (p. 2-286).
• True, which indicates that the pre-provisioning mode is enabled and a synchronization
from the WMS CM database to the OneBTS MIB is going to be launched at next
registration.
Alternatively, you can enable the pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS with a WICL
command (OneBTS preprovision command). For detailed information, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL),
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Enabling pre-provisioning mode on a OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attention: This operation closes the related OAM link and generates a loss of service.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Resource Browser window, select one or more OneBTS NEs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected NEs and select Configuration > Enable Pre-provisioning Mode.
Result: The Figure 3-39, “Enable pre-provisioning Mode Action window”
(p. 3-96) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Enable.
Result: The selected OneBTS pre-provisioning mode values change to True.
The OAM link is closed and the service is lost.
The OneBTS MIB is going to be updated with the WMS CM database at next
OneBTS registration.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Setting Administrative State
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting Administrative State

Overview
Use the Set Administrative State command to modify the administrative state on a single
or a list of objects. This command is available on:
• any board except CCM and iCCM,
• passive components except GPSAM,
• cards,
• objects (for example FDDCell or NodeB).
Figure 3-40 Set Administrative State Action window - Lock/Unlock
The Figure 3-40, “Set Administrative State Action window - Lock/Unlock”

(p. 3-98) window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the
NE Name and its current State.
Click:
• Shutdown, to shutdown the selected FDDCell objects, see “Shutting down an
FDDCell” (p. 3-100).
• Lock, to lock the selected objects.
• Unlock, to unlock the selected objects.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Setting Administrative State
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You cannot modify a Passport component state from Shutdown state to Unlock state.
• Remove From List to remove the selected objects from the list.
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform a Set Administrative State
action.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Equipment Monitor window, in the “Physical pane” (p. 2-180) and/or in the
“Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171), select one ore more objects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected objects and select Configuration > Set Administrative State.
Result: The Figure 3-40, “Set Administrative State Action window - Lock/Unlock”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Lock/Unlock to lock/unlock the selected objects.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Shutting down an FDDCell
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shutting down an FDDCell

Overview
Use the Set Administrative State command to shutdown one or more FDDCells.
This command enables to:
• smoothly shutdown an FDDCell,
• perform a Node B soft shutdown, when all the Node B FDDCells are selected.
Active calls are not dropped, the RNC waits (up to a duration configurable by the
operator through the softShutdownTimer parameter) for call completion to completely
lock the FDDcell.
Figure 3-41 Set administrative State Action window - Shutdown
The Figure 3-41, “Set administrative State Action window - Shutdown”

(p. 3-100) window details for each NE in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the
NE Name and its current State.
Click:
• Shutdown, to shutdown the selected FDDCell objects.
• Lock, to lock the selected objects, see “Setting Administrative State” (p. 3-98).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Shutting down an FDDCell
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Unlock, to unlock the selected objects, see “Setting Administrative State” (p. 3-98).
Prerequisite
An RNC - Equipment Monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor
window” (p. 2-262).
FDDCells must be Unlocked to be shutdown, to unlock an FDDCell, see “Setting
Administrative State” (p. 3-98).
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform a Set Administrative State
action.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Equipment Monitor window, in the “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171),
select one ore more Unlocked FDDCells.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected objects, and select Configuration > Set Administrative State.
Result: The Figure 3-40, “Set Administrative State Action window - Lock/Unlock”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Shutdown.
Result:
• The Figure 3-1, “Command Manager, Current Commands tab” (p. 3-7) window
appears.
• The selected FDDCell states change to shutting down.
• Once all the calls are terminated or once the soft shut down timer has expired, the
FDDCell states change to Locked.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State

Overview
Use the Set NE's OAM Link Administrative State command to modify the OAM link
administrative state of one object or a list of objects. This command is available for RNC,
POC, BTSEquipment, OneBTSEquipment, SR, and SAR.
Figure 3-42 OAM Link Administrative State Action window
The Figure 3-42, “OAM Link Administrative State Action window” (p. 3-102) details for
each NE in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE Name and its current
State.
Click:
• Lock, to stop the parent to communicate with the OAM.
• Unlock, to enable the parent to communicate with the OAM.
Alternatively, you can unlock/lock an NE OAM link administrative state with WICL
commands (OpenLink/OneBTS OpenLink and CloseLink/OneBTS CloseLink commands).
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Setting NE's OAM Link Administrative State
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to perform a Set NE's OAM Link
Administrative State action.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the Set NE's OAM Link Administrative State command either:
• from the Resource Browser window, select one or more objects.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration >Radio Access > Set
NE's OAM Link Administrative State or right-click the selected objects, and select
Configuration > Set NE's OAM Link Administrative State.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click an NE in one of the “Double object
tree view panes” (p. 2-171) and select Configuration > Set NE's OAM Link
Administrative State.
Result: The Figure 3-42, “OAM Link Administrative State Action window”
(p. 3-102) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Lock/Unlock to stop/enable the parent to communicate with the OAM.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Resetting a board or a card
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting a board or a card

Overview
Use the Reset Board command to reset a board and the Reset Card command to reset a
card on a BTS.
Use the Reset OneBTSEquipment Board command to reset a board on a OneBTS.
Figure 3-43 Reset Hardware Action window
The Figure 3-43, “Reset Hardware Action window” (p. 3-104) details for each NE in the
NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE Name.
Force is enabled when a Passport card is selected only. Select Force when you launch a
Reset Card command on Passport cards.
Click:
• Reset Hardware, to reset the selected objects.
Alternatively, you can reset a board/card on a BTS with a WICL command (Reset
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-44 Reset OneBTSEquipment Board Action window
The Figure 3-44, “Reset OneBTSEquipment Board Action window” (p. 3-105) details for
each NE in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE Name.
You can Force the reset action at OneBTS level.
Click:
• Reset OneBTSEquipment Board, to reset the selected objects.
Alternatively, you can reset a board on a OneBTS with a WICL command (OneBTS Reset
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Equipment Monitor window, select one or more objects in the “Physical pane”
(p. 2-180).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected objects and select Configuration > Reset Board / Configuration
> Reset Card / Configuration > Reset OneBTSEquipment Board.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-43, “Reset Hardware Action window” (p. 3-104) / Figure 3-44,
“Reset OneBTSEquipment Board Action window” (p. 3-105) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Force, when needed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Reset Hardware / Reset OneBTSEquipment Board.

(p. 3-7) window appears when you selected Reset Board / Reset OneBTSEquipment
Board command.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing a Retrieve Associated Lps

Overview
Use the Retrieve Associated Lps command to retrieve CP associated Lps of an RNC.
Prerequisite
An RNC Equipment Monitor window is open, see “Opening an Equipment Monitor
window” (p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From an RNC Equipment Monitor window, in the “Physical pane” (p. 2-180), select a
CP card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the CP card, and select Configuration > Retrieve Associated Lps.
Result: Associated Lps are selected in the “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Performing a Switchover LP
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing a Switchover LP
Overview
Use the Switchover LP command to perform an Lp switchover on a CP card.
Figure 3-45 Switchover LP Action window
The Figure 3-45, “Switchover LP Action window” (p. 3-108) details for each NE Name
(RNC and POC) in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE.
Force is enabled when a Passport card is selected only. Select Force when you launch a
Reset Card command on Passport cards.
Click:
• Switchover LP, for an LP switchover in the selected objects.
Alternatively, you can perform an Lp switchover on a CP card with a WICL command
(switchover command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless
Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Performing a Switchover LP
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Equipment Monitor window, in the “Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171),
select one or more objects (Lp/x).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click the selected objects and select Configuration > Switchover LP.
Result: The Figure 3-45, “Switchover LP Action window” (p. 3-108) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Force, when needed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Switchover LP.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment

Overview
Use the Reset BTSEquipment / Reset OneBTSEquipment command to trigger the
re-initialization of a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment.
Figure 3-46 Reset BTSEquipment Action window
The Figure 3-46, “Reset BTSEquipment Action window” (p. 3-110) details for each NE
in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE Name.
The Reset Mode includes:
• Reset whole Bts, to reset the whole BTS.
• Reset Active CCM, to reset the active CCM card only.
• Reset Passive CCM, to reset the CCM card only.
You can Schedule the Reset BTSEquipment action or launch it with Reset now.
Alternatively, you can reset a BTSEquipment with a WICL command (Reset command).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-47 Reset OneBTSEquipment Action window
The Figure 3-47, “Reset OneBTSEquipment Action window” (p. 3-111) details for each
NE in the NEs List the Object Name associated to the NE Name.
You can Force the reset action at OneBTS level.
Alternatively, you can reset a OneBTSEquipment with a WICL command (OneBTS Reset
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the Reset BTSEquipment command either:

• from the Resource Browser window, select one or more BTS objects.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration >Radio Access > Reset
BTSEquipment/Configuration >Radio Access > Reset OneBTSEquipment or
right-click the selected BTS objects, and select Configuration > Reset
BTSEquipment / Configuration > Reset OneBTSEquipment.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click the
BTSEquipment/OneBTSEquipment object in the “Double object tree view panes”
(p. 2-171) and select Configuration > Reset BTSEquipment/Configuration > Reset
OneBTSEquipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-46, “Reset BTSEquipment Action window” (p. 3-110) / Figure
3-47, “Reset OneBTSEquipment Action window” (p. 3-111) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In case of:
• reset a BTSEquipment, select the Reset Mode.
• reset a OneBTSEquipment, select Force if you want to force the reset action.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Reset now / Reset OneBTSEquipment.

To schedule the ResetBTSEquipment action, click Schedule, see the “Scheduling a job”
(p. 3-135).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Resetting a RNC
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resetting a RNC
Overview
Use the Reset RNC command to trigger the re-initialization of a RNC.
Prerequisites
To reset RNC, you must be in a user group with task "NE HW mgmt" in your task group.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the Reset RNC command from either:

• the Resource Browser window, select one or more RNC.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Reset
RNC or right-click the selected RNC, and select Configuration > Reset RNC.
• the Equipment Monitor window, right-click the RNC and select Configuration >
Reset RNC.
Result: A new RNC action window opens.
Figure 3-48 Reset RNC Action Window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Resetting a RNC
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Reset now.

To schedule the Reset RNC action, click Schedule.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Launching SSH for SR and SAR
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching SSH for SR and SAR

Overview
Use the Launch SSH command to launch the 5620 SAM client GUI (SR or SAR NE
selected).
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150).
Exceed is running on the Client.
The 5620 SAM client GUI is installed on the 5620 SAM server.
The 5620 SAM server is connected to the WMS server.
A X window Cygwin/X server must be installed on WMS client.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Resource Browser window, select an NE (SR or SAR).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right-click and select Configuration > Launch SSH.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Launching SSH for SR and SAR
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The login window appears, see for example Figure 3-49, “Launch SSH for a
7750 SR” (p. 3-116).
Figure 3-49 Launch SSH for a 7750 SR
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the Login and Password (if needed).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter the following command to navigate to the 5620 SAM client installation folder:
cd <path>/nms/bin
where <path> is the 5620 SAM client installation location, typically /opt/5620sam/client.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter the following command to start the 5620 SAM client without specifying startup
options:
./nmsclient.bash
Result: The 5620 SAM client GUI appears.
For detailed information on the 5620 SAM client GUI, see Alcatel-Lucent 5620
Service Aware Manager - User Guide, 3HE 04238 AAAA.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Launching SSH for OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching SSH for OneBTS

Overview
Use the Launch SSH command to launch the OneBTS manual SSH secure mode session.
Prerequisite
(p. 1-150).
Exceed is running on the Client.
A X window Cygwin/X server must be installed on WMS client.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Open a layout on which some OneBTS are defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Right click on a connected OneBTS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Configuration > Launch SSH (secure manual mode).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Launching SSH for OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A X terminal window appears as below:
Figure 3-50 Lauching SSH for OneBTS
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Creating a CM image for a OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating a CM image for a OneBTS

Overview
Use the CreateBackupImage command to back-up OneBTS data. This is useful in case of
emergency recovery plan for example.
Figure 3-51 CreateBackupImage Action window
The CreateBackupImage Action window details for each NE Name (OneBTS) in the NEs
List to the Object Name associated to the OneBTS.
Click:
• CreateBackupImage to create a CM image of the selected OneBTS.
Alternatively, you can back-up OneBTS data with a WICL command (OneBTS
createBackupImage command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
RKZZA.
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the CreateBackupImage command either:

• from the Resource Browser window, select one or more OneBTS NEs.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration >Radio Access >
CreateBackupImage or right-click the selected NEs, and select Configuration >
Backup > CreateBackupImage.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click a OneBTSEquipment object in
“Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171) and select Configuration > Backup >
CreateBackupImage.
Result: The Figure 3-51, “CreateBackupImage Action window” (p. 3-119) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click CreateBackupImage.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-52, “Command Manager - CreateBackupImage”
(p. 3-121) displays the command progress.
Figure 3-52 Command Manager - CreateBackupImage
The backup file is stored in /opt/nortel/data/OneBTS/snapshot.

To restore the backup file, see “Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS” (p. 3-122).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Restoring a CM image for a OneBTS

Overview
Use the RestoreBackupImage command to restore the CM image file on a OneBTS.
Figure 3-53 RestoreBackupImage Action window
The RestoreBackupImage Action window details for each NE Name (OneBTS) in the
NEs List the Object Name associated to the OneBTS and its image file path.
Click:
• restoreBackupImage to restore the CM image of the selected OneBTS.
Alternatively, you can restore the CM image file on a OneBTS with a WICL command
(OneBTS restoreBackupImage command). For detailed information, see Alcatel-Lucent
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Prerequisite
(p. 2-262).
You created the backup file of the OneBTS, see “Creating a CM image for a OneBTS”
(p. 3-119).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the RestoreBackupImage command either:

• from the Resource Browser window, select one or more OneBTS NEs.
From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access >
RestoreBackupImage or right-click the selected NEs, and select Configuration >
Backup > RestoreBackupImage.
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click a OneBTSEquipment object in
“Double object tree view panes” (p. 2-171) and select Configuration > Backup >
RestoreBackupImage.
Result: The Figure 3-53, “RestoreBackupImage Action window” (p. 3-122) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click the Browse button.

Result: The Figure 3-54, “Browser window” (p. 3-123) appears and lists all the
available backup files for the selected OneBTS.
Figure 3-54 Browser window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Browser window, select the backup image file corresponding to the selected
OneBTS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Select.
Result: The Browser window closes and the backup image file path appears in the
RestoreBackupImage Action window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click RestoreBackupImage.
Result: The OneBTS backup file is restored.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Backup RNC
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Backup RNC
Overview
Use the Backup RNC command to backup the RNC.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Perform the Backup RNC command either:

from the Resource Browser window, select one or more RNC.
from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access >
Backup RNC or right-click the selected RNC, and select Configuration > RNC Backup
.
Result: An action window opens with the RNCs list.
Figure 3-55 RNC backup action window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click on RNC Backup.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Backup RNC
Resource Browser
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The RNC backup action windows closes and a confirmation window appears.
Figure 3-56 RNC backup confirmation window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to backup the RNC. The progress and status of backup can be viewed at the
Command Manager window.
Result: The file backed up is stored under /opt/nortel/data/utran/NEImage/RNC/
<RNC-label> with a file name having the given syntax -
<RNC>_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS>.tar.gz.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section provides the information on configuration with the job scheduler.
Contents
Job scheduler configuration 3-128

Scheduling a job 3-135
Viewing a scheduled job details 3-142
Viewing pending jobs 3-144
Managing the scheduled jobs 3-147
Modifying or Rescheduling a job 3-149
Deleting a scheduled job 3-152
Aborting a pending job 3-153
Displaying the scheduled job result 3-154
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Job scheduler configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Job scheduler configuration

Overview
A job is an execution of OAM commands written in WICL format, it includes:
• user scripts, which are prepared with a script editor such as WICL Script Editor and
stored in the User folder in ScriptBrowser :: WICL browser.
• system scripts, which are created by Alcatel-Lucent and stored in the Provider folder
in ScriptBrowser :: WICL browser. The system job schedules are shown in the Job
Scheduler window, but cannot be modified through the GUI.
For detailed information on scripts, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management
To open a Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab, see “Viewing a scheduled job
details” (p. 3-142).
Use the Job Scheduler to manage the scheduled job execution. You can:
• view and filter the list of scheduled jobs, see “Viewing a scheduled job details”
(p. 3-142).
• view a scheduled job result, see “Displaying the scheduled job result” (p. 3-154).
• Reschedule a job, see “Modifying or Rescheduling a job” (p. 3-149).
• Delete a job, see “Deleting a scheduled job” (p. 3-152).
• Print a job, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
• Export a job, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
Use the Create Schedule window to schedule a job execution. You can schedule:
• a Maintenance Mode On action, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
• a CM XML Export action, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
• a MIB Audit action, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
• a MIB Rebuild action, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
• a ResetBTSEquipment action, see “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135).
• a Sessions Manager action, see “Scheduling a session” (p. 3-68).
• a script execution action, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System -
• an NE software upgrade action
The Job scheduler window includes:
• the “Schedule list tab” (p. 3-129),
• the “Pending job tab” (p. 3-130),
• the “Running job” (p. 3-131),
• the “Historical job” (p. 3-133).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Schedule list tab
The Schedule list tab enables to retrieve the list of scheduled jobs that match the
specified filters.
Figure 3-57 Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab
The Schedule list tab, includes:

• the left pane, which enables to add filter(s):
– Start Date, to add a filter on the starting date of the search.
– End Date, to add a filter on the ending date of the search.
– Task Type, to add a filter on the job type.
You can select either one of the task types, or all of the task types.
– Select user(s) list, to add a filter on the job originator(s).
Clear Filter enables to reset the specified filters.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Retrieve enables to launch the search.
• the right pane, which shows the search results:
– the list of scheduled jobs matching the filters are displayed in the upper part.
Refresh enables to update the list with the same filter criteria.
Depending on the selected job and on your rights, you can:
– Reschedule the job, see “Modifying or Rescheduling a job” (p. 3-149).
– Delete the job, see “Deleting a scheduled job” (p. 3-152).
– Print the job, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
– Export the job, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
– Schedule Detail pane, which summarizes the information of the selected job.
Pending job tab

The Pending job tab enables to view the list of pending jobs according to specific day(s).
Figure 3-58 Job Scheduler window - Pending Job tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Pending job tab, includes:
– Calendar, to specify the starting day of the search.
– the scheduled jobs matching the filters are displayed in the upper part.
Icons enable to display the scheduled jobs for one day, five days, or a week.
Table 3-1 Description of the displayed days
Icon Action
Displays the calendar view for one day
Displays the calendar view for 5 days
Displays the calendar view for one week
You can zoom in or out of the calendar display by clicking on the icons above the
calendar. You can zoom vertically or horizontally by selecting the Zoom Type.
Table 3-2 Description of the display functions
Icon Action
Zooms out one level of magnification on the calendar
view for a closer look at the jobs
Zooms in one level of magnification on the calendar
view for a more general view
Returns the zoom to the original level of magnification.
•
– Job detail pane, which summarizes the information of the selected job.
Running job
The Running job tab enables to view the list of running jobs according to specific criteria.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-59 Job Scheduler window - Running Job tab
The Running job tab, includes:

– the running scheduled jobs matching the filters are displayed in the upper part.
– Abort the job, see “Aborting a pending job” (p. 3-153).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Export the job in .csv format, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
– the Job detail pane summarizes the information of the selected job.
Historical job
The Historical job tab enables to display the list of executed jobs according to specific
criteria.
Figure 3-60 Job Scheduler window - Historical Job tab
The Historical job tab, includes:

• the left pane, which enables to add filter(s) on:
– Start time From / Start time To, to define the filter starting date range of the
search.
– End time From / End time To to define the filter ending date range of the search.
– Job Result, to add a filter on the job type.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– the scheduled jobs matching the filters are displayed in the upper part.
Icons enable to display the historical jobs for one day, five days, or a week, see
Table 3-1, “Description of the displayed days” (p. 3-131).
You can zoom in or out of the calendar display by clicking on the display icons
above the calendar. You can zoom vertically or horizontally, see Table 3-2,
“Description of the display functions” (p. 3-131).
– Display job result, see “Displaying the scheduled job result” (p. 3-154).
– Export the job in .csv format, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
– Job detail pane summarizes the information of the selected job.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Scheduling a job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Scheduling a job
Overview
Use the Schedule command included in some of the 9353 WMS windows to schedule a
job.
To schedule a Sessions Manager task, see “Scheduling a session” (p. 3-68).
The following Figure 3-61, “Create Schedule window” (p. 3-136) is an example of an
Audit action schedule.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-61 Create Schedule window
The Create Schedule window includes:

• a Schedule Information pane
• a Schedule Detail pane
• a Maintenance Information pane (for maintenance mode schedule)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Schedule Information pane includes,
• the Task Type, which details the type of action to schedule.
• the Recurrence options, which enable to chose the schedule recurrence:
– Once: the job is launched at a specific date and time.
In this case, the End Time field is disabled.
– Hourly: the job is launched every xx minute(s).
– Daily: the job is launched every xx day(s) at the specified time.
– Weekly: the job is launched every specified day(s) each week.
You can select one or more days of the week.
– Monthly: the job is launched each month at the specified day. You can specify
either:
– a specific date and time of each month, or
– a specific day of a specific week of each month (for example: the second Friday
of each month).
– Yearly: the job is launched each year at the specified day. You can specify either:
– a specific day of each year (for example: the 10th of May), or
– a specific day of a specific week of a specific month (for example: the third
Monday of April).
– End Time (optional), which enables to define or clear the schedule ending time
with a calendar.
– Estimated Duration(min) (optional), which enables to enter a duration in the Job
Scheduler calendar. This duration is for information purpose only. The default
value is 60 minutes.
• Reminder, which enables to send a reminding Email xx minute(s) before the job is
launched.
This option is available for Unix users declared in the oamgroup with an email
address only.
The Schedule Detail pane summarizes:
• the Task Information and Schedule Information entered in the Schedule
Information pane,
• the Task Parameter information entered in the job.
The Maintenance Information pane enables to detail the maintenance duration and
information.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prerequisites
Depending on the job you want to schedule, one of the following windows must be open.
To schedule:
• a Maintenance Mode On action, a Figure 2-4, “Resource Browser window: Grid
view” (p. 2-9) window must be open.
See “Opening a Resource Browser window” (p. 1-150).
• a CM XML Export action, a Figure 3-14, “CM XML Export window” (p. 3-38) must be
open.
See “Performing CM XML Export” (p. 3-35).
• a MIB Audit action, an Figure 3-28, “Audit Action window” (p. 3-77) must be open.
See “Auditing a MIB” (p. 3-77).
• a MIB Rebuild action, an Figure 3-33, “Rebuild Action Window” (p. 3-87) must be
open.
See “Rebuilding a MIB” (p. 3-87).
• a ResetBTSEquipment action, a Figure 3-46, “Reset BTSEquipment Action window”
(p. 3-110) must be open.
See “Resetting a BTSEquipment / OneBTSEquipment” (p. 3-110).
• a Sessions Manager action, see “Scheduling a session” (p. 3-68).
• a script execution action, a ScriptEditor :: WICL window must be open, see
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide
(WICL), 9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
• an NE software upgrade action, an Activation Software Wizard
You must have the appropriate authorization rights to schedule a job.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 You can schedule a job, either:

• from the Resource Browser, right-click an NE and select Schedule Maintenance
Mode On / Schedule Maintenance Mode Off.
• from the CM XML Export window, click Schedule to schedule the CM XML export
action.
• from the Audit Action window, click Schedule to schedule the Audit action.
• from the Rebuild Action window, click Schedule to schedule the Rebuild action.
• from the ResetBTSEquipment window, click Schedule to schedule the
ResetBTSEquipment action.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• from the ScriptEditor :: WICL window, click Schedule to schedule the script
execution action, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Commands
• from the Activation Software Wizard, click Schedule to schedule the NE software
upgrade activation
Result: The Figure 2-27, “Schedule Maintenance Mode ON window” (p. 2-49),
Figure 2-28, “Schedule Maintenance Mode OFF window” (p. 2-51), or Figure 3-61,
“Create Schedule window” (p. 3-136) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Create Schedule / Schedule Maintenance Mode On / Schedule Maintenance

Mode Off window, select a Recurrence.
Due to a high service impact, the Once recurrence is only available for:
• NE software upgrade activation
• RNC or BTS MIB Rebuild action
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the recurrence information.

Result: The recurrence information appears in the Schedule detail - Schedule
Information pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select Reminder if needed, and enter the reminder information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 For the Schedule Maintenance Mode On/off job, enter the Maintenance Duration and a
Comment if needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The scheduled job is added in the Figure 3-62, “Scheduled job shown in the
Job Scheduler calendar” (p. 3-140) calendar.
Figure 3-62 Scheduled job shown in the Job Scheduler calendar
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing a scheduled job details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing a scheduled job details

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler window to manage the scheduled jobs.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Job
Scheduler.
Result: The Figure 3-57, “Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select any, all, or none of the available filters according to your needs:
• Start Date and/or an End Date filter(s),
• Task Type filter,
• User List filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Retrieve.
Result: All the jobs matching your filter criteria appear in the right pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select a job in the list.

Result: The schedule details, schedule information, and task parameters of the
selected job are displayed.
Depending on the job, you can Reschedule, Delete, Print, and Export the selected
job, see “Managing the scheduled jobs” (p. 3-147).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To view the schedules of the selected job in the Pending job tab, right-click the job and
select Show pending job.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing a scheduled job details
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 3-63, “Job Scheduler - Pending job tab with the schedules of a
unique job” (p. 3-143) window appears, which displays the schedules corresponding
to the selected job only.
Figure 3-63 Job Scheduler - Pending job tab with the schedules of a unique job
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Viewing pending jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing pending jobs

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler - Pending Job tab window to view all the scheduled jobs.
To view the schedules of a selected job only, see “Viewing a scheduled job details”
(p. 3-142).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Job
Scheduler.
Result: The Figure 3-57, “Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the Pending job tab.

Result: The Figure 3-58, “Job Scheduler window - Pending Job tab”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter you filter criteria, select:

• Task Type filter,
• User List filter,
• a starting date in the calendar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Retrieve.
Result: All the pending jobs matching your filters are displayed in the right pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select the displayed day icon, see Table 3-1, “Description of the displayed days”
(p. 3-131).
Result: The selected day(s) are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Select the pending job you are looking for.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The job details are displayed in the Figure 3-64, “Job Scheduler window -
Pending job tab” (p. 3-145) pane.
Figure 3-64 Job Scheduler window - Pending job tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Managing the scheduled jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing the scheduled jobs

Overview
You can manage the scheduled job from the Job Scheduler window. You can
• print a job,
• export a job,
• modify or reschedule a job, see “Modifying or Rescheduling a job” (p. 3-149),
• delete a job, see “Deleting a scheduled job” (p. 3-152),
• abort a job, see “Aborting a pending job” (p. 3-153).
Prerequisite
A Job Scheduler window is open, see “Viewing a scheduled job details” (p. 3-142).
Figure 3-65 Job Management - Schedule list Print
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Managing the scheduled jobs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the Job Scheduler window, select the Schedule list tab, the Running job tab, or the
Historical job tab depending on the job list you need.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Print to print the chosen job list or Export to export the job list in .csv format.
Result: The printing / exporting information window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the printing / exporting characteristics and click OK / Save.

Result: The according job list is printed (see Figure 3-65, “Job Management -
Schedule list Print” (p. 3-147)) / exported (see Figure 3-66, “Job Management -
Historical job Export” (p. 3-148)).
Figure 3-66 Job Management - Historical job Export
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Modifying or Rescheduling a job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Modifying or Rescheduling a job

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler window to modify or reschedule a job.
Prerequisite
A Job Scheduler window is open, and the scheduled jobs are displayed in the right pane
of the Schedule list tab, see “Viewing a scheduled job details” (p. 3-142).
The job you want to modify is not a system job.
You are the owner of the job or you are logged in as an administrator.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Either:
• from the Figure 3-57, “Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab” (p. 3-129) window,
in the right pane, right-click the job you want to modify and select Reschedule, or
• from the Figure 3-58, “Job Scheduler window - Pending Job tab” (p. 3-130) window,
in the right pane, right-click the job you want to modify and select modify pending
job.
Result: Either:
• the Figure 3-67, “Modify Schedule window” (p. 3-150) appears showing all the
job details, or
• the Figure 3-68, “Modify pending job window” (p. 3-151).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Either:
• modify the job as detailed in the “Scheduling a job” (p. 3-135) procedure, or
• modify the start time of the job.
Result: The Job Scheduler window is automatically updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Figure 3-67 Modify Schedule window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-68 Modify pending job window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Deleting a scheduled job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Deleting a scheduled job

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler window to delete a scheduled job.
Prerequisite
A Job Scheduler window is open, and either:
• the scheduled jobs are displayed in the right pane of the Schedule list tab, see
“Viewing a scheduled job details” (p. 3-142), or
• the pending jobs are displayed in the right pane of the Pending job tab, see “Viewing
a scheduled job details” (p. 3-142).
The job you want to delete is not a system job.
You are the owner of the job or your are logged in as an administrator
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Either:
• from the Figure 3-57, “Job Scheduler window - Schedule list tab” (p. 3-129) window,
in the right pane, select the job you want to delete, or
• from the Figure 3-58, “Job Scheduler window - Pending Job tab” (p. 3-130) window,
in the right pane, select the job you want to delete
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Either:
• click Delete or right-click the job and select Delete, or
• right-click the job and select delete pending job.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Yes.
Result: The scheduled job disappears from the scheduled job / pending job list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Aborting a pending job
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Aborting a pending job

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler to abort a pending job.
Prerequisite
The Abortable value of the job is True.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Job Scheduler window, select the Running job tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the “Pending job tab” (p. 3-130) and click Retrieve.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the right pane, select the job you want to abort.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Abort.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Displaying the scheduled job result
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying the scheduled job result

Overview
Use the Job Scheduler window to display the scheduled job result.
Prerequisite
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the Job Scheduler window, select the Historical job tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter the “Historical job” (p. 3-133) and click Retrieve.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the right pane, select a job.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Display Job Result.

Result: The Figure 3-69, “Job Result window” (p. 3-154) appears, displaying the job
result.
Figure 3-69 Job Result window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Displaying the scheduled job result
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the configuration from the Node B address GUI.
Contents
Node B address GUI 3-157

Opening a Node B Address GUI window 3-163
Displaying Node B site information 3-164
Customizing Province and City 3-166
Adding Site Name information to a Node B 3-168
Updating NodeB site information 3-170
Unsetting or deleting a Node B site 3-171
Exporting site information in HTML format 3-173
IPv6 3-174
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Node B address GUI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Node B address GUI

Overview
Use the Node B Address GUI to perform the following actions:
• display site information (mapping between English name, local name, address,
topology, operator, phone, remark) of NodeBs, Extension Cabinets, and Remote
Radio Heads (RRH) of the Regional Operation Center (ROC), see “Opening a Node B
Address GUI window” (p. 3-163).
• manage site information:
– add, see “Adding Site Name information to a Node B” (p. 3-168).
– update, see “Updating NodeB site information” (p. 3-170).
– unset or delete, see “Unsetting or deleting a Node B site” (p. 3-171).
• customize the Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows”
(p. 3-161), see “Customizing Province and City” (p. 3-166).
• export the site information report, see “Exporting site information in HTML format”
(p. 3-173).
To open the Figure 3-70, “Node B Address GUI window” (p. 3-158), see “Opening a
Node B Address GUI window” (p. 3-163).
Shortcuts are available on the following Node B Address GUI window buttons:
• Search
• Refresh
• Report
• Update
• Insert
• Delete
• Exit
To activate or deactivate the button shortcuts, see “Displaying and hiding shortcuts”
(p. 1-104).
To perform actions from button shortcuts, see “Performing actions from shortcuts”
(p. 1-105).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-70 Node B Address GUI window
The BTS is identified through its name (BTS Name: character string) or alias.
The RRH is identified through its relative distinguished name identifier (rdnId: numerical
string) or alias.
The Node B Address GUI window includes the following search information:
• Type pane, which enables to select NE type search:
– All, to launch a search on all BTSs, RRHs, and Extension Cabinets.
– BTS, to launch a search on BTSs and Extension Cabinets.
– RRH, to launch a search on RRHs.
• BTS/RRH Information pane, which enables to give details on the RNC, BTS or RRH
search:
– RNC, which lists all the RNCs.
– BTS, which lists all the NodeBs belonging to the selected RNC(s), and enables to
enter the alias name of a BTS.
– RRH, which lists all the rdnIds of the RRHs (RRH type is selected, or when BTS
type is selected, a BTS Name must be selected).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Up to three RRHs (that support 2100MHz, 1900MHz, or 850 MHz) can be
allocated to a single cell for each digital unit. The digital unit can support two of
such cells. RRHs grouped as Multiple RRH Set (MRS) can be connected in a star
or daisy-chain configuration. With LR13.3.W, the capacity of multiple RRH per
cell is increased. Ideally, four MRS per digital unit and three RRHs per MRS and
two carriers inside 9926 BBU. The RRH should be connected to a d4U as d2U is
not supported. The extended capacity of the multiple RRH per cell is supported
only on the 2100MHz band.
The RRH2x60-1900A has two transmit paths, each supporting 60W RF, and
providing support of STSRx+y with four antenna paths. This feature is supported
on both 9396 d2U and d4U.
For more information on configuring multiple RRHs per cell, see Alcatel-Lucent
9353 Wireless Management System - Activation of Multiple RRHs Per Cell,
9YZ-04157-0048-PGZZA.
• Site Information pane, details on the site information:
– All, searches on all BTS equipments if there is a site available.
– Has Site and Hasn't Site, filters the search on NodeBs whose BTS equipment are
linked to a site.
– Site (available when Has site is selected only), details the Node B site name.
– Province, City, and District fields (available when Has site is selected only), to
enter Node B site information.
• Search, to launch the search.
• the search results are summarized as follows:
– NE Count, which is the number of all NodeBs found in the search.
– Site Count, which is the number of NodeBs whose BTS equipment are linked to a
site.
– Last Refreshed, which indicates the date and time of the last search.
• the search results are detailed in a table, which details for each search information on
the site:
– all the details of the search,
– street and street number,
– longitude and latitude of the site object attributes,
– operator,
– phone,
– remark.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For each type of search, results are displayed in a table, which displays:
• colored results:
– green color for NEs,
– blue color for NodeBs that have a site,
– pink color for NodeBs that do not have a site.
• Refresh, to refresh the search result display.
• Report, to save the search result locally in .html format.
• Update, to update a Node B site information with the Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object
and Update Site Object windows” (p. 3-161).
• Insert, to add site information to a Node B with the Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object
and Update Site Object windows” (p. 3-161).
• Delete, to delete a Node B.
Click a column header to sort the result display according to this item.
To show or hide columns in the table, right-click a column header and select Show/Hide
Columns. In the Figure 3-71, “Node B Address GUI - Show/Hide Columns window”
(p. 3-160), select the columns you want to display, and click OK.
Figure 3-71 Node B Address GUI - Show/Hide Columns window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-72 Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows
Shortcuts are available on the following Insert Site Object/Update Site Object window
buttons:
• OK
• Cancel
To activate or deactivate the button shortcuts, see “Displaying and hiding shortcuts”
(p. 1-104).
(p. 1-105).
The Insert site Object and Update site Object window enables the user to enter site
information:
• RNC Name (dimmed information),
• Node B Name (dimmed information),
• BTS Name (dimmed information),
• Alias (dimmed information),
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Site Name, which list all the site names already declared, and the Node B name of the
selected row (dimmed information in case of Update Site Object window),
• Province, City, District, Street, and Street Num, which define geographical location of
the Node B site.
To customize Province and City, see “Customizing Province and City” (p. 3-166),
• Longitude and Latitude, which define the absolute location of the Node B,
• Operator, which defines the operator name in charge of the Node B,
• Phone, which is the phone number of the operator in charge of the Node B site,
• Remark, which enables to enter annotations on the Node B site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Opening a Node B Address GUI window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening a Node B Address GUI window

Overview
Use this procedure to open a NodeB Address GUI window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use one of the following methods to open a NodeB Address GUI window:
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > NodeB
Address GUI,
• from the Resource Browser, right-click an NE (BTS or RNC) and select
Configuration > NodeB Address GUI.
Result: The NodeB Address GUI window appears.
If you launched the NodeB Address GUI from the Resource Browser, in BTS/RRH
Information:
• in RNC: the selected RNC or the RNC to which the selected BTS belongs to is
already selected.
• in BTS: the Name of the selected BTS is already selected.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Displaying Node B site information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Displaying Node B site information

Overview
Use this procedure, for example, to display :
• a Node B, an RRH, or an Extension Cabinet site information
• all Node Bs, RRHs, and Extension Cabinets belonging to a site
You can search by type and or by site information.
Prerequisite
A NodeB Address GUI window is open, see “Opening a Node B Address GUI window”
(p. 3-163).
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the Type information:

• to search by site only, select All.
• to search by type select BTS or RRH.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select the BTS/RRH Information:

• to search by site only, select RNC /All.
• to search by type select RNC, BTS and RRH information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the Site Information:

• to search by type only, select All.
• to search by site unselect All and select the required site information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Search.
Result: The result summary is displayed and the search results are detailed in the
table.
You can sort the row by column header.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Displaying Node B site information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can:
• save the search result information, see “Exporting site information in HTML
format” (p. 3-173).
• modify site information, see “Adding Site Name information to a Node B”
(p. 3-168), “Updating NodeB site information” (p. 3-170), “Unsetting or deleting
a Node B site” (p. 3-171).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Customizing Province and City
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Customizing Province and City

Overview
Use this procedure to create a custom file that provides Province and city information.
Figure 3-73 address.xml file format
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Create a custom file with the xml format, see Figure 3-73, “address.xml file format”
(p. 3-166).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add as many provinces and according cities as needed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Save the file as address.xml.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Connect to the OMC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Copy the address.xml file into the /opt/nortel/data/custom/utran/ directory.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Customizing Province and City
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Restart the 9353 WMS GUI to load the file.

Result: The provinces and according cities are available to customize NodeB address
GUI.
In the Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows” (p. 3-161),
Province and City are not edit fields but customized menus that display available
provinces and cities.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Adding Site Name information to a Node B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Adding Site Name information to a Node B

Overview
Use this procedure to add a site to a BTS equipment.
This procedure does not have any impacts on associated equipment.
Prerequisites
A NodeB Address GUI window is open, see “Configuration from the Node B Address
GUI” (p. 3-156).
The Node B site information is displayed in pink.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the NodeB Address GUI window, select a Node B line.

Result: The selected Node B line is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Insert.
Result: The Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows”
(p. 3-161) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Insert Site Object window, select a Site Name in the list.
Result: If the Site Name information is:
• already detailed, all the information corresponding to this site is displayed.
• not detailed, all the site information fields are empty.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 In the Insert Site Object window, either:

• Site Name information is not already filled in, enter all or part of the Site Name
information.
• Site Name information is already filled in and all the available information
corresponding to this site is displayed, see “Updating NodeB site information”
(p. 3-170) for modification.
Result: Warning: other Node B can be impacted by insert on this site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Adding Site Name information to a Node B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 3-7) window appears detailing status and progress of the job. When completed the
information is added in the NodeB Address GUI window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Updating NodeB site information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Updating NodeB site information

Overview
Use this procedure to update details to a NodeB site information and it does not impact
any associated equipment.
Prerequisites
GUI” (p. 3-156).
The NodeB site information is displayed in blue.
The BTS equipment communication is not lost.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the NodeB Address GUI window, select a NodeB line.

Result: The selected NodeB line is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Update.
Result: The Figure 3-72, “Insert Site Object and Update Site Object windows”
(p. 3-161) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Update Site Object window, enter the site update information.
You cannot modify SiteName.
Warning: Other nodeBs can be impacted by updates applied on this site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
(p. 3-7) window appears detailing status and progress of the job. When completed the
information is updated in the NodeB Address GUI window.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Unsetting or deleting a Node B site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unsetting or deleting a Node B site

Overview
Use this procedure to unset or delete a Node B site information.
This procedure does not have any impacts on associated equipment.
Prerequisites
GUI” (p. 3-156).
The Node B site information is displayed in blue.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the NodeB Address GUI window, select a Node B line.

Result: The selected Node B line is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Delete.
Result: The Unset/Delete Site window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select... to...
Unset (recommend) unset the link between BTS Equipment and the
site in the server database. The site
information is not removed from the server
database.
Delete delete the site information from the database
Warning: other Node Bs can be impacted by
delete on this site.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Unsetting or deleting a Node B site
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
(p. 3-7) window appears detailing status and progress of the job. When completed a
confirmation message indicates the job success.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result: In the NodeB Address GUI window:
• the site name information is deleted in the selected line and the Node B site
information is displayed in pink.
• the site information of the Node Bs that were linked to the deleted site is displayed
in pink but their site name is not removed (Delete selected only).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Exporting site information in HTML format
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exporting site information in HTML format

Overview
Use this procedure to export the site information displayed in the NodeB Address GUI
window.
Prerequisites
GUI” (p. 3-156).
A search result is displayed, see
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 In the NodeB Address GUI window, select a NodeB line.

Result: The selected NodeB line is highlighted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click report.
Result: The Save Table as Html For Report window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select a destination folder, and give a name to the file.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Save.
Result: The site information is saved in HTML format in the selected destination. The
report date and time are recorded in the file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management IPv6
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IPv6
Overview
During installation of WMS, the network interfaces are automatically configured in IPv4.
Starting with LightRadio Release 13 (LR13), the need to support IPv6 is necessary
because of the limited address space for IPv4 and also to configure interfaces supporting
IPv6. The IPv6 address consists of 128 bits, compared to the 32 bits in IPv4. A specific
script will apply the IPv6 configuration (temporary file provided in input) on the
corresponding interfaces. This script will be called on demand after WMS is installed.
IPv6 deployment on WMS network interfaces

WMS network interfaces can communicate with the network elements through an IPv6
network through the following interfaces. :
• OAM-NE:
This interface is only used to address IPv6 or IPv4 NEs.
• OAM-OAM
This interface is used to address other hosts such as the SDA, client PC's, NPO and so
on. The network elements are not addressed through the OAM-OAM interface as the
dedicated OAM-NE interface is configured for this purpose.
Depending on the type of configuration chosen, either OAM-OAM or OAM-NE interface
is configured in IPv6,
Node B IPv6 support

Starting LR13, the Node B (OneBTS) supports IPv6 for the OAM traffic to communicate
with the WMS. The OAM interface of the Node B is identified by an IPv6 address while
the Telecom and PTP interfaces will cpntinue to use IPv4 addresses. WMS provides
support to address both IPv4 Node Bs and dual stack (IPv4/IPv6) Node Bs.
The Node B supports two addresses for the O&M interface, a Link Local Address (LLA),
that is non-routable address to communicate with the router and to issue the DHCP
requests and a Global Unicast Address, that is a routable address to communicate with
WMS.
DHCP IPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) for IPv6 enables the DHCP servers to
pass configuration parameters such as IPv6 network addresses to the IPv6 Node Bs. It
offers the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional
configuration flexibility.The DHCP server is hosted within the WMS server to distribute
IP addresses and various connectivity parameters to the OneBTS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the network boundary data synchronization activation.
Contents

Configuring Network boundary data 3-183
Launching the network boundary data synchronization 3-184
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Network boundary data synchronization activation
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The Network boundary data synchronization activation enables to manage Network
boundaries between 2G and 3G networks:
• synchronization on WMS of 3G neighboring cells with 2G neighboring cells from an
external OMC,
• synchronization on WMS of 3G neighboring cells with 3G neighboring cells from an
external OMC,
• publication of WMS 3G cells for another WMS, for a 2G Alcatel- Lucent OMC or for
any other vendor OMC that is able to import a file with this format.
The synchronization on 3G OMC consists in:
• an automatic daily schedule of the exportCM2cells.sh shell script at 03:20, which
performs:
– the cell data publication for external OMCs.
• an automatic daily schedule of the synchronizeOMCServerFromExternalOMC.sh
shell script at 04:20, which performs:
– the cell data collection from external OMCs,
– the production of the synchronization workorder and reverse synchronization
workorder, which are automatically stored in the
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/workorders/ directory.
The synchronization workorder includes the commands to synchronize the local
WMS external cell information with the latest cell information retrieved from all
the external OMCs.
• the manual activation of the synchronization workorder.
• the manual removal of workorder.done-exec flag (to allow triggering of automatic
synchronization the next day)
To synchronize Network boundary data you first need to prepare the following files,
located in /opt/nortel/data/custom/eastwest/ directory :
• Figure 3-74, “ExternalOMC.csv file” (p. 3-177) file, which includes all the external
OMC information required to connect the external OMC hosts through SFTP, and
retrieve the 2G/3G cell data.
• Figure 3-75, “param.cfg file” (p. 3-179) file, which includes the parameters involved
in the network data boundary synchronization operations.
To activate the network boundary data synchronization, perform the following
procedures:
• “Configuring Network boundary data” (p. 3-183),
• “Launching the network boundary data synchronization” (p. 3-184).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-74 ExternalOMC.csv file
The ExternalOMC.csv file includes the following mandatory external OMC information:
• OMCId
Defines the OMC identifier. This identifier must be unique regarding its category
(external UMTS OMC or external GSM OMC): a UMTS external OMC can have the
same identifier as a GSM external OMC. In case of:
– UMTS external OMC, OMCId value must be the same as OMC_ID value in the
external OMC param.cfg file.
– Alcatel-Lucent GSM OMC (B9, B10), the OMCId is an arbitrary value.
Example:
6
• Name
Defines the name (or hostname) of the Network Manager.
Example:
papaye
• SoftwareRelease
Defines the release of the Network Manager. This parameter is for informative
purpose only.
Example:
6.0
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Standard
Describes the standard of the OMC ("UMTS" or "GSM"). The import of the cells
related to each kind of OMC is performed by specific tools (UMTS external cell
import or GSM external cell import).
Example:
UMTS
• HostAddress
Network Manager server IP address, in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.
Example:
135.120.179.199
• FtpUser
FTP login name on Network Manager host.
• FtpPasswd
Defines the encrypted value (<xxxxxxx>) of the FTP login password (<my ftp
password>) on Network Manager host.
Example:
ZWe49ose79g412
Encrypt your password as follows:
>cd/opt/nortel/shell/eastwest
>./encryptPassword.sh
Enter a password :
<my ftp password>
Encrypted password :
<xxxxxxx>
• ConfigurationDirectory
Directory where the synchronization software finds the external cell list on external
OMC. It is the path of file:
– ExternalOMC_[OMCId]_.tgz (the Cell.csv compressed file) for UMTS cells.
– AGUE_1.cap for GSM cells.
FTP User must have read access to this directory.
Example:
/opt/nortel/data/eastwest/scheduledExport/
• SynchronisationDirectory (for external UMTS OMCs only)
Directory where the synchronization software finds the file which indicates the end of
external cell list publication on external OMC.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User must have read and write access to this directory.
Example:
• Activity
Indicates whether the OMC has to be considered in the import or not (True or False).
Example:
True
• FilteringProgram (optional, not needed for Alcatel-Lucent UMTS or GSM B9/B10
OMCs)
Path to the filtering program to filter the cell file. You must have execution rights to
this binary.
Figure 3-75 param.cfg file
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the param.cfg file to configure the parameters involved in the network data boundary
synchronization operations. You can modify the following synchronization configuration
file parameters according to your needs:
• General
– OMC_ID
OMC identifier that is used in the filename for the published network boundary
data. The filenaming scheme is OMC_<OMC_ID>.tgz.
Example:
9
• CM snapshot repository
– CM_REPOSITORY
Path to the directory containing the WMS CMXML on local UMTS OMC.
Example:
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/scheduledExport/
• Workorder production
– CM_SNAPSHOT_IN_FILE_NAME
Naming scheme of the CMXML snapshot file.
Example:
UTRAN-SNAP'yyyyMMddHHmmss'.xml.zip
– GLOBAL_MODE
Defines the workorder production mode. If set to:
– false (partial mode, default mode), the workorder includes update actions only.
This mode is also automatically chosen by default in case data collection is
incomplete.
– true (complete mode), the workorder includes update and delete actions. If all
data have not been correctly collected then "partial" mode is forced during
workorder generation.
Example:
false
– WORKORDER_OUT_FILE_PATH
Path that includes the filenaming scheme for the workorders generated by the
network boundary application.
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/workorders/
boundaryDataSynchro'yyyyMMddHHmmss'.xwo
– REVERSE_WORKORDER
If set to true, the reverse workorders are generated along with the synchronization
workorders. If set to false, only the synchronization workorders are generated.
Example:
True
– REVERSE_WORKORDER_OUT_FILE_PATH
Path including filenaming scheme for the reverse workorders generated by the
E/W interface application. Only used if the REVERSE_WORKORDER parameter
is set to true.
Example:
/opt/nortel/data/cmXML/workorders/reverseBoundaryDataSynchro'yyyyMMddHHmmss'.xw
• data publication
– SNAPSHOT_OUTPUT_NAME_ZIPPED
Name of the zipped locally exported csv file containing cells info managed by the
WMS server.
Example:
ExternalOMC
• SNAPSHOT_OUTPUT_NAME_DONE
Name of the file indicating that the csv cell snapshot has been successfully exported.
Example:
Done_ExternalOMC
• SNAPSHOT_OUTPUT_NAME
Name of the locally exported csv file containing cells info managed by the WMS
server.
Example:
Cell.csv
• CELLS_OUT_DIR
Local directory for cell.csv file (the file is not compressed yet).
Example:
/opt/nortel/tmp/eastwest/out/cells/
• CELLS_REPOSITORY
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Local directory for compressed cell.csv list publication (ExternalOMC_[OM-
CId]_.tgz).
Example:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Configuring Network boundary data
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Network boundary data

Overview
Use this procedure to configure the Network before activating the network boundary data
synchronization.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Connect to the OMC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Go to the /opt/nortel/data/custom/eastwest/ directory.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 With an ASCII editor, update the ExternalOMC.csv file with all the external OMC details
and save it.
Result: The ExternalOMC.csv file is updated according to all the external OMCs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Go to /opt/nortel/shell/eastwest/ directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Launch the importExternalOmc.sh shell script.

Note: You must repeat this step after each ExternalOMC.csv file modification.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 If needed, from the /opt/nortel/data/custom/eastwest/ directory, modify the param.cfg file

and save it.
In case the OMC is used as external OMC by other OMCs, you must update OMC_ID
parameter.
Result: The param.cfg file is updated according to your needs.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Launching the network boundary data synchronization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching the network boundary data synchronization

Overview
Use this procedure to launch the network boundary data synchronization.
To synchronize the data you need to manually activate the network boundary data
synchronization workorder.
Prerequisites
The network boundary data configuration files are updated and the external OMC
information is imported.
The network boundary data synchronization workorder is generated in the
See “Configuring Network boundary data” (p. 3-183).
The data publication is done at 03:20.
The data collection and workorder production is done at 04:20.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the network boundary data synchronization workorder, either:

• from 9353 WMS, create a session, see “Creating a session” (p. 3-47).
• from WICL, launch the "CM createSession" command", see Alcatel-Lucent 9353
Wireless Management System - Commands Reference Guide (WICL),
9YZ-04157-0013-RKZZA.
Result: The network boundary data synchronization is up-to-date.
When needed, to reverse the procedure, launch the reverse workorder also stored in
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 After synchronization workorder successful activation, from /opt/nortel/data/cmXML/

workorders directory, remove workorder.done-exec file.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Related Feature Activation Procedures & Network
Reconfiguration Procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section provides the list of references to various Alcatel-Lucent 9300 W-CDMA
Product Family documentation where the Feature Activation Procedures are available.
Contents
Reference list 3-186
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Reference list
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reference list
Overview
To activate features with minimum impact, the following Feature Activation Procedures
(FAPs) are available in the Alcatel-Lucent 9300 W-CDMA Product Family
documentation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - HSxPA Feature Activation
Procedure (FAP), 9YZ-04157-0031-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - IuPC AGPS Location Services
(FAP), 9YZ-04157-0032-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Orthogonal Channel Noise
Simulation (FAP), 9YZ-04157-0034-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Activation of IuPS over IP,
9YZ-04157-0035-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Activation of Hybrid Iub,
9YZ-04157-0036-PGZZA
To implement network reconfiguration with minimum impact, the following Network
Reconfiguration Procedures (NRPs) are available in the Alcatel-Lucent 9300 W-CDMA
Product Family documentation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Intra-ROC NE Rehoming (NRP),
9YZ-04157-0051-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - WMS Scrambling Code Update
(NRP), 9YZ-04157-0052-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - 93xx Node B Addition (NRP),
9YZ-04157-0053-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Node B Reparenting (NRP),
9YZ-04157-0054-PGZZA.
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - LAC/RAC Plan Update (NRP),
9YZ-04157-0056-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - 3G to 2G Handover with or
without Compressed Mode (FAP), 9YZ-04157-0033-PGZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Neighboring Plan Update (NRP),
9YZ-04157-0055-PGZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure to monitor logical and physical resources.
Contents
Resource monitoring 3-188
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Resource monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource monitoring
Introduction
The resource monitoring service available in the WMS servers provides resource
utilization and enables to identify the origin of key server resources issues and prevents
them from occurring in future.
For more information on the resource monitoring services, refer to Chapter 4, System
management services, of the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System -
Administration: System Management, 9YZ-04157-0018-PCZZA.
Logical & Physical resources

Use the Logical & Physical Resources menu to monitor each NE dynamic data for
information on NE behavior. You can view each NE retrieve data with the displayed
real-time views.
Open the Figure 3-76, “Logical & Physical Resources window” (p. 3-189) through the
following options:
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access >
Logical & Physical Resources,
• from the Resource Browser window, right-click an NE (RNC or BTS) and select
Configuration > Logical & Physical Resources,
• from the Equipment Monitor window, right-click an NE (RNC or BTS) and select
Configuration > Logical & Physical Resources.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-76 Logical & Physical Resources window
The Logical & Physical Resources window contains:

• A header area, which includes:
– RNC name list, to select and analyze the RNC
– Release version of the selected RNC
– BTS name list (BTS related tab selected), to select and analyze the BTS
– Release version of the selected BTS
– FDD Cell name list (OVSF tab selected)
– Display, to display the selected NE data in the NE information tabs
– Auto refresh (60s), to automatically refresh the display every 60 seconds
– progress bar
– Last update, which indicates the last refresh time
• A tab area, which displays the following NE resource information:
– “Logical RNC tab” (p. 3-190) (RNC selected)
– “OVSF tab” (p. 3-191) (RNC selected)
– “Physical BTS tab” (p. 3-192) (RNC and BTS selected)
– “Logical Node B tab” (p. 3-194) (RNC and BTS selected)
– “Common Channel tab” (p. 3-195) (RNC and BTS selected)
– “BTS Radio Power tab” (p. 3-196) (RNC and BTS selected)
• A status bar, which provides the error cause, when an error occurs while retrieving the
resource data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical RNC tab
From the Logical & Physical Resources window, in the Logical RNC tab, click a column
cell to display the detailed call type information in the lower pane. See Figure 3-77,
“Logical & Physical Resources - Logical RNC window” (p. 3-190).
Figure 3-77 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical RNC window
For each selected RNC, the Logical RNC tab displays the following list:
• the detailed counts (MOC, MTC, and HO) by call type displayed with a specific
color:
– AMR
– CS
– PS
– PSx/H
– AMR+PS
– AMR+H
– CS+PS
– CS+H
– PS+PS
– PS+H
– A+P+P
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– A+P+H
– total call count (MOC, MTC, and HO)
• the number of HSDPA or HSUPA call count
• the number of HandOver call for each Soft or Softer HandOver
Note: The term ETC is a misinterpretation of the ‘et cetera’ abbreviation.
A red highlighted line indicates an RNC overload. It appears when the TMU returns a
critical overload status and the data is not complete, see Figure 3-78, “Logical & Physical
Resources - Logical RNC (red line)” (p. 3-191).
Figure 3-78 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical RNC (red line)
OVSF tab
In the Logical & Physical Resources window, the OVSF tab displays the Orthogonal
Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) of the selected Frequency Division Duplex (FDD)
cell. The data displayed is free or available code count per SF level and state (free,
usedCommon, usedRadioLink, reserved, inherited, usedOcns, usedHsdpa, usedHsupa) of
each code cell. See Figure 3-79, “Logical & Physical Resources - OVSF window”
(p. 3-192).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-79 Logical & Physical Resources - OVSF window
Physical BTS tab

In the Logical & Physical Resources window, the Physical BTS tab displays the following
list for each board of the selected BTS:
• its type
• its Central Processing Unit (CPU) occupancy
• its Local Cell Group (LCG) List / LCG Pool
• its Base-Band Unit (BBU) type and occupancy
• call counts based on BBU type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-80 Logical & Physical Resources - Physical BTS window
The BBU types are:

• D-BBU: the Dedicated Channel (DCH) BBU
• H-BBU: the HSdPA BBU
• E-BBU: the Enhanced-DCH (E-DCH) BBU
• M-BBU: the Multimode BBU, which includes D-BBU, H-BBU and E-BBU
The BBU occupancy is detailed as follows:
• D-BBU: the number of allocated Channel Elements / total number of Channel
Elements
• H-BBU: the HSdPA user number / maximum number of HSdPA users
• E-BBU: the E-DCH user number / maximum number of E-DCH users
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Logical Node B tab
From the Logical & Physical Resources window, in the Logical Node B tab, click a
column cell to display the detailed call type information in the lower panel. See Figure
3-81, “Logical & Physical Resources - Logical Node B window” (p. 3-194).
Figure 3-81 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical Node B window
For each FDDcell of the selected Node B, the Logical Node B tab displays the following
list:
• the detailed counts (MOC, MTC, and HO) by call type displayed with a specific
color:
– AMR
– CS
– PS
– PSx/H
– AMR+PS
– AMR+H
– CS+PS
– CS+H
– PS+PS
– PS+H
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– A+P+P
– A+P+H
– total call count (MOC, MTC, and HO)
• the number of HSDPA / HSUPA call count
• UL/DL color
A red highlighted line indicates an RNC overload. It appears when the TMU returns a
critical overload status and the data is not complete, see Figure 3-82, “Logical & Physical
Resources - Logical Node B (red line)” (p. 3-195).
Figure 3-82 Logical & Physical Resources - Logical Node B (red line)
Common Channel tab

In the Logical & Physical Resources window, the Common Channel tab displays
common channel information for the selected Node B:
• board Id
• BBU Id
• carrier/sector
• operational state per FDDcell
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-83 Logical & Physical Resources - Common Channel window
BTS Radio Power tab

In the Logical & Physical Resources window, the BTS Radio Power tab includes the
following panes. See Figure 3-84, “Logical & Physical Resources - BTS Radio Power
window” (p. 3-197).
• a Cell Radio Power pane
• a Sector Radio Power pane
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-84 Logical & Physical Resources - BTS Radio Power window
The Cell Radio Power pane includes information on:

• Radio Frequency Unit, which details the following dynamic data attributes:
– LocalcellId, available from
BTSEquipment/getRadioPowerInfo/btsCellRfUnitPowerInfoList.
– Sector, which is the antennaConnectionList attribute. This attribute is a list of
string elements with the antennaConnection_<N> format, separated with a coma.
Example:
antennaConnection_1, antennaConnection_2, antennaConnection_3
– LCG, which is the localCellGroupId attribute available from
– UARFCN, with the < RFCarrier/@dlFrequencyNumber>-<RFCarrier/-
@ulFrequencyNumber> format.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Admin State, which is the administrativeState attribute of the FDDcell, available
from BTSCell/associatedFDDCell.
– Oper State, which is the localCellOperationalState attribute, available from
• RTWP, which is the Received Total Wideband Power, available from
BTSEquipment/getRadioPowerInfo/btsCellRfUnitPowerInfoList/receivedTotalWidebandPowerInfo:
– Main (dBm), which is the rtwpMain attribute of the main antennaConnection.
– Div (dBm), which is the rtwpDiv attribute of the diversity antennaConnection.
– Combined (dBm), which is the rtwpCombined attribute of the combined main and
diversity antennaConnection.
– Reference (dBm), which is the rtwpReference attribute used as reference by the
BTS when the cells are not loaded.
– Load (%), which is the RTWP load.
• TxPower, which is the transmitted carrier power, its following attributes are available
from
BTSEquipment/getRadioPowerInfo/btsCellRfUnitPowerInfoList/transmittedPowerInfo:
– Tx_3GPP (dBm), which is the txPowerSector-3gppRef attribute. It is the absolute
txpower measured at antenna level as defined in 3GPP.
– Tx_DDM (dBm), which is the txPowerCell-DdmRef attribute. It is the absolute
txpower measured at DDM level.
– Tx_%3GPP (%), which is the txPowerPercentageCell-3gppRef attribute. It is the
percentage of txpower used by the BTS depending on what is:
– allowed by the RNC (@maxTxPower attribute),
– possible on the BTS (physically) using 3GPP measurements.
– Tx_%DDM (%), which is the txPowerPercentageCell-DdmRef attribute. It is the
percentage of txpower used by the BTS depending on what is:
– allowed by the RNC (@maxTxPower configuration attribute),
– possible on the BTS (physically) using DDM level measurements.
The Sector Radio Power pane details, for each sector, information on transmitted carrier
power. Txpower attributes are available from
BTSEquipment/getRadioPowerInfo/antennaAccessPowerInfoList/txPowerSectorInfo/:
• Sector, which is the antennaConnection attribute, available from
BTSEquipment/getRadioPowerInfo/antennaAccessPowerInfoList/.
• Tx_3GPP (dBm), which is the txPowerSector-3gppRef attribute. The measurement
reference is the antenna connector as defined in 3GPP.
• Tx_DDM (dBm), which is the txPowerSector-DdmRef attribute. The measurement
reference is at DDM output.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Tx_%3GPP (%), which is the txPowerPercentageSector-3gppRef attribute. It
compares the transmitted carrier power for the sector to the maximumDLPowerCapa-
bility possible on this sector. The measurement reference is the antenna connector as
defined in 3GPP
• Tx_%DDM (%), which is the txPowerPercentageSector-DdmRef attribute. It compares
the transmitted carrier power for the sector to the maximumDLPowerCapability
possible on this sector. The measurement reference is at DDM output.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the RSSI Gathering function.
Contents
RSSI monitor 3-201
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management RSSI monitor
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI monitor
Overview
Use the RSSI Monitor menu to check the function for the Backward Spurious including
PIMD check that can occur in NodeB or Repeater.
To open the RSSI Monitor perform the following steps:
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > RSSI
Monitor,
• from the Resource Browser window, right-click an NE (RNC or BTS) and select
Configuration > RSSI Monitor.
There are 2 tabbed panels in the RSSI Monitor plug-in as follows:
• RSSI Gathering Scheduler Panel
• RSSI Gathering Viewer Panel
No more than 30 BTS can be monitored at the same time.
RSSI gathering is not supported by:
• 939x OneBTS and 9313 Micro / 9314 Pico BTS
• 932x and 933x BTS with d2U or d4U module
• 9100 Multi-Standard BTS with d2U or d4U module
• 93x with CCM or iCCM
RSSI gathering scheduler panel

This panel provides the scheduling function for RSSI gathering and the trigger point for
setting OCNS activation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-85 RSSI gathering scheduler panel
By clicking on Add, all the selected BTS in "All BTS List" will be added to the Selected
BTS List.
BTS not supported do not appear in the "All BTS List" (except 93x with CCM or iCCM).
The conditions to configure OCNS: Depending on HW board, the following accounts
are used by OMC-B for retrieving RSSI gathering results file (by FTP):
• iCCM2: ID: Null / Password: Null (logging without supplying credentials)
• xCCM: ID: nodeb / Password: nodeblnx
Note: RSSI gathering is supported with xCCM board only.
In the Time Setting panel, you can specify the start time, duration, and period of the
schedule. If you click on Reserve, the selected BTS and related options will be added to
the Reserve list table.
Note: If the time setting is not proper, an error message will appear as shown in
Figure 3-86, “RSSI gathering error message” (p. 3-203):
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-86 RSSI gathering error message
If you click on OCNS under the Reserved List table, a confirmation dialog will appear if
the duration is over or equals to three else, an information dialog will appear.
After the confirmation, the OCNS configuration window is displayed as shown in Figure
3-87, “OCNS configuration” (p. 3-203):
Figure 3-87 OCNS configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The OCNS configuration window provides the function for scheduling the OCNS in the
selected FDDCell in the scheduled time. The FDDCell List includes the selected BTS and
the FDDCell belongs to the seleced BTS.
You can configure the start time, duration, OCNS SF, and OCNS power for the selected
FDDCell.
If you click on Schedule, this window will close and the Reserve list table in the RSSI
Gathering Scheduler panel will be updated.
Note: If the start time or the end time for OCNS and RSSI have a margin less than an
hour, an error dialog will appear.
RSSI gathering viewer panel

Use this panel to display the collected RSSI data and the job information.
Figure 3-88 RSSI graphical viewer
The Job Information table lists all job information retrieved from the RSSI server. You
can filter the job information by selecting the check boxes Scheduled, Running, and
Completed at the bottom of the table.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
You can remove the scheduled job, stop the running job, or remove the completed job by
clicking Action in the last column of the table. A confirmation dialog will pop up before
performing these actions.
The status bar displays the disk space information. If you click Update, the job status and
disk space will be updated into the current status. If you select a job with OCNS
scheduled, the OCNS Info will be enabled to pop up an OCNS Information window as
shown in Figure 3-89, “OCNS information” (p. 3-205):
Figure 3-89 OCNS information
Graphical viewer
If you select a job with the available RSSI data in the job information table, and click
Display, the RSSI graph appear in the upper part of the viewer panel with the default
options.
The graph can be enlarged or reset by clicking the small buttons on the top left corner.
The data point can be selected to display its value as a tooltip.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-90 RSSI graph
You can change the options on the Graph Filter panel as below, the graph will be redrawn
immediately.
You can also save the RSSI data in the local client by clicking Save or reload the RSSI
data in the local client by clicking Open.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-91 RSSI graph filter
If you click Multiply, the Figure 3-92, “Multiple graph configuration” (p. 3-208) will
appear with the default option selected.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-92 Multiple graph configuration
After configuration, if you click Display, the Figure 3-93, “Multiple graph result”
(p. 3-209) will appear.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSSI Monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-93 Multiple graph result
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Monitoring ATM interface status and VPI/VCI

occupancy
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure to monitor ATM interface status and VPI/VCI
occupancy.
Contents
Status and occupancy monitoring 3-211
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Status and occupancy monitoring
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Status and occupancy monitoring

Overview
Use the Interface Monitor window to monitor the OSI states of ATM interfaces and
VPI/VCI occupancy rate on the following NEs:
• RNC (Interface Node)
• POC
To open the Figure 3-94, “Interface Monitor (RNC INode selected)” (p. 3-211) window,
from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Interface Monitor.
Figure 3-94 Interface Monitor (RNC INode selected)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-95 Interface Monitor (POC selected)
The Interface Monitor contains:

• a “Header area” (p. 3-212)
• a “Tab area” (p. 3-214)
• an “ATM Interface Information area” (p. 3-216)
Header area
The header area includes:
• NE Type, to select the type of NE (RNC or POC) to monitor
• NE (RNC or POC) name list, to select the NE to monitor
• Display/Refresh, to retrieve NE attribute information (see Figure 3-96, “RNC Basic
information” (p. 3-213)) and the ATM interface information (see “ATM Interface
Information area” (p. 3-216))
• Info, to open the selected NE Figure 3-96, “RNC Basic information”
(p. 3-213) window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Last refreshed, which indicates the last refresh time
• Page (POC selected), to select the page
• AtmIf list (POC selected), to select the AtmIf
• Page Retrieve (POC selected), to retrieve the selected page
• Refresh period, to add an automatic refresh of the display (every 30 or 60 seconds)
• Stop, to stop the progress of retrieving NE attribute information
Figure 3-96 RNC Basic information
The <NE> Basic information includes the following information:

• NE name
• NE architecture (RNC selected)
• Release (POC selected)
• NE OAM link administrative state
• Ne IP address
• Neighbouring RNC (RNC selected)
• NodeB list managed by the RNC (RNC selected)
The RNC Basic information window includes useful information like neighboring RNC
and NodeB lists to get the RNS network configuration for IuB and IuR.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Tab area
The tab area includes:
• Figure 3-94, “Interface Monitor (RNC INode selected)” (p. 3-211) tab (RNC selected)
• “Logical RNC tab” (p. 3-190) (POC selected)
Each tab details:
• the graphical view information, which details the ATM interface configuration
• the tabular view information, which details the VPI/VCI occupancy that includes for
an AtmIf and for each Vcc:
– Vcc: Vcc name
– txCell: Tx Cell
– rxCell: Rx Cell
– coTag, shows the correlation tag per Vcd
Example:
The coTag value NB+HSD+02+RNC06_NodeB01 means that:
– the AtmIf included in this Vcc is connected to the NodeB RNC06_NodeB01,
– this Vcc is used for HSDPA traffic
– the AAL2Bearer RDN ID is 02.
To display this information, double-click an AtmIf line in “ATM Interface Information
area” (p. 3-216). All Vcc are listed in the VPI/VCI occupancy table in ascending Vcc id
order.
Figure 3-97 VPI/VCI occupancy table
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Interface Monitor graphical GUI shows two INode interface boards. Each port is
symbolized with an yellow square along with the AtmIf ID as a reference. The graphical
representation of the board reflects the port placement of the board in real time.
Figure 3-98 INode port placement
In the graphical view, select a Figure 3-99, “OSI state link component information”
(p. 3-215) to display information regarding the Laps on both:
• working line
• protection line
Figure 3-99 OSI state link component information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The trend indicators such as ↑ → ↓ are displayed next to txUtil and rxUtil to indicate the
trend between the current value and the previous displayed value.
Example:
• ↑ indicates that the current value is greater than previous value
• ↓ indicates that the current value is lower than previous value
• → indicates that the value current is equal to previous value
The trend indicators are displayed only when you click the Refresh button for the first
time. If there is a change in the values of txUtil and rxUtil, click the Refresh button again
to see the change in the trend indicator.
ATM Interface Information area

ATM Interface Information area provides, for each ATM interface, the OSI state of
Lp/SDH:
• AtmIf: ATM interface name
• remoteLabel: remote label
• Ifname: Interface name
• wLine: Laps working line
• s1: SDH administrative state of Laps working line
• s2: SDH operational state of Laps working line
• s3: SDH usage state of Laps working line
• s4: SDH availability status of Laps working line
• pline: Laps protection line
• s1: SDH administrative state of Laps protection line
• s2: SDH operational state of Laps protection line
• s3: SDH usage state of Laps protection line
• s4: SDH availability status of Laps protection line
• txCell: AtmIf Tx cell
• rxCell: AtmIf Rx cell
• txutil: AtmIf Tx link utilization
• rxUtil: AtmIf Rx link utilization
A Tool Tip has been introduced to display the details for txUtil and rxUtil on the graphical
view and on the table under txUtil and rxUtil columns. The change in tool tip information
gets reflected only after clicking the Refresh button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-100 Tool Tip
In case of POC selected, the ATM Interface Information area also provides, for each
ATM interface, OSI state of Lp/SDH/path or Lp/E1/chan, and additionally:
• the link configuration information such as IMA and E1 configuration
• Aps MO for automatic protection switching
• working line and protection line for Aps
Double-click an AtmIf line to retrieve and display related VPI/VCI occupancy rate
information in the tabular view of the “Tab area” (p. 3-214).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure to configure RET via WMS GUI.
Contents
Check onebts alarms 3-219

Download traditional software to OneBTS 3-223
Download ALD/ACF software to OneBTS 3-235
Activate traditional software 3-246
Activate ALD/ACF software 3-252
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Check onebts alarms
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Check onebts alarms

Purpose
Use this procedure to check OneBTS active alarms. This procedure can be executed
periodically during the upgrade in order to detect pending alarms. It is specifically aimed
at verifying any new alarms that could be raised immediately after the upgrade.
Before you begin

Verify if the OAM main server is running and the GUI client is accessible.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 To display the alarms:

• Log into WMS GUI and open the corresponding layouts.
• Select the OneBTSs on which the alarms are checked.
• Right-click on the selection and select Show Alarms from the context menu.
Figure 3-101 How to open Alarm window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Alarm window appears. It allows the operator to investigate the alarms
that could prevent starting the upgrade on the network element.
Note: There should be no outstanding alarms on the NodeBs before and after the
upgrade. If there are some residual alarms, each alarm should be investigated before
you proceed with the upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Before the upgrade, use the OSI State Reporting window available in the menu Fault >
Radio Access > OSI State reporting on whole layout, to see the FDDCells locked. Select
the RNC parent and note all faulty FDDCells.
Result:
Figure 3-102 OSI State Reporting window
A faulty FDDCell occurs on a OneBTS that is not working properly. After the
upgrade, compare the faulty FDDCells list to the one before the upgrade. All the extra
faulty FDDCells are caused by a problem during the OneBTS upgrade and need to be
investigated.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Check active calls in progress on OneBTS or FDDCell to verify overall call processing
executed by OneBTS (For all OneBTS upgraded in parallel, check calls at RNC side and
the OneBTS upgrade and on its linked FDDCells located at the RNC side.)
• Execute How to action P2 To launch the Equipment Monitor
• Select RNC tab and Dynamic Data lower right tab
Figure 3-103 Check calls at RNC side
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-104 Check calls on linked FDDCells
Result: The OneBTS alarms and faulty FDDCells are analyzed and noted.
Note: A few OneBTS upgrades have been postponed if needed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Download traditional software to OneBTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download traditional software to OneBTS

Purpose
Use this procedure to describe the download command. This command allows the user to
download the new OneBTS software to OneBTS equipment.
Before you begin

Check the following
• The new OneBTS software to be downloaded is available on SRS.
• The WMS GUI Client is available.
• No session is currently active for the OneBTSs.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the WMS GUI, and launch Download wizard. There are two ways to launch the
Download wizard:
• From the menu bar, choose Configuration > Radio Access > Software > Download.
• From network layout right-click the selected nodes or group, choose Configuration >
Software > Download.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The first page introduces the download wizard.
Figure 3-105 Download wizard: Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Select the Network Element type page is displayed.
Figure 3-106 Download wizard: Select the Network Element type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 On the Select the Network Element type page, the following Network element types
are displayed.
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS
Select the OneBTS option and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Select the Software type page is displayed.
Figure 3-107 Download wizard: Select the Software type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 On the Select the Software type page, the following Software types are displayed.
• NE software
• ALD (AISG ALDSoftware)
• ACF (AISG Antenna configuration file)
Select the NE software option and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Select Software Version to Download page is displayed.
Figure 3-108 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the Select Software Version to Download page, select the software version from
the list and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Select Search Method page is displayed.
Figure 3-109 Download wizard: Select Search Method
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 On the Select Search Method page, the following Search method options are displayed.
• Browse all Nodes
• Define Search Filters
Select the Browse all Nodes option and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Search Criteria Summary page is displayed.
Figure 3-110 Download wizard: Search Criteria Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 On the Search Criteria Summary page, click Retrieve.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Retrieved Node(s) page is displayed.
Figure 3-111 Download wizard: Retrieved Node(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Select the OneBTSs on which the download operation should be performed and click
Next.
Note: On the Retrieved Node(s) page, when you launch it from menu bar the
retrieved nodes are all OneBTS nodes detected in network. If it is launched from
right-click menu, the retrieved nodes are the selected OneBTS nodes in network
layout.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Download Action Require page is displayed.
Figure 3-112 Download wizard: Download Action Require
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 On the Download Action Require page, the following Download options are displayed.
• Download
• Download & launch activation
Select the Download option and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the Search Criteria Summary page, check the summary of the OneBTSs on which
the download is performed.
Check the selection and click Download to validate it. Otherwise, click Back to modify
the selection.
Result: The final page of the wizard shows a success message. Check the box that
allows the Command Manager to be launched automatically and click Finish to exit
the wizard. When you launch it from right-click menu, if the selected nodes in
network layout are two or more than two kinds of element type nodes, wizard shows
the Next button, click Next to view the Select the Network Element type page
again to download the next kind of element type nodes you selected.
Once the download wizard is closed, the Command Manager appears allowing you to
monitor the download process.
The Command Manager can also be launched from the Configuration menu of the
GUI.
Note: Wait for the end of the download. When the download ends, the status indicates
Successful for each selected OneBTS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An upgrade session encapsulates a series of operations to perform an NE upgrade
(RNC or NodeB). It includes the software file transferring from OAM to the network
element and the software activation phases.
Figure 3-114 Download: Command Manager
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Software Download Exit Step

This step is performed when the software download is completed, and the OneBTS
activation of the downloaded software is not required.
OR
If a wrong software load is downloaded, use the following steps to exit the
DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED state:
• Execute How to action P3 To launch the Inventory & Upgrade Session
• Select the current running software.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Select the OneBTS where the upgrade status is DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED, in the
Details lower window. Click Abort upgrade session.
• Check OneBTS status in Details lower window that are changed from
DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED to IDLE.
Result: The download operations have been performed.
Figure 3-115 Select NE with status DOWNLOAD_COMPLETED
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Download ALD/ACF software to OneBTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download ALD/ACF software to OneBTS

Purpose
Use this procedure to describe the download command. This command allows the user to
download the ALD/ACF software to OneBTS equipment.
Before you begin

Check the following:
• The new ALD/ACF software to be downloaded is available on SRS.
• No session is currently active for the OneBTSs.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download wizard:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
are displayed.
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• NE software
Select the ALD (AISG ALDSoftware) or ACF (AISG Antenna configuration file) option,
depending on what needs to be downloaded and click Next.
Figure 3-116 Download wizard: Select the software type

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select the ALD software version from the list and click Next. For ACF, on the Select
Software Version to Download page, select the ACF software version from the list and
click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-117 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download (ALD

software)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-118 Download wizard: Select Software Version to Download (ACF
software)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you select the Browse All Nodes option and click Next, go to Step 9.
If you select the Define Search Fiters option and click Next, go to Step 7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Set Search Filter page is displayed.
Figure 3-119 Download wizard: Set Search Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 On the Set Search Filter page, fill the filters according to the Note instruction, then click
Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Set RNC Filter page is displayed.
Figure 3-120 Download wizard: Set RNC filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 On the Set RNC Filter page, add RNCs in left panel to the right panel, then click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-121 Download wizard: Retrieved Node(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the Retrieved Node(s) page, when launch from menu bar the retrieved nodes are all
OneBTS nodes detected in network; if launch from right-click menu, the retrieved nodes
just are the selected OneBTS nodes in network layout.
• wizard opened from Configuration menu
– ALD selected in Step 4
Browse All Nodes selected in Step 6
-> all AISGCtrl MOs in the network are displayed
Define Search Filters selected in Step 6
-> all AISGCtrl MOs matching the search criteria are displayed
– ACF selected in Step 4
-> all RET MOs in the network are displayed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-> all RET MOs matching the search criteria are displayed
• wizard opened with OneBTSEquipment(s) selected
-> all AISGCtrl MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s) are displayed
-> all AISGCtrl MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s), which are matching the
search criteria are displayed
-> all RET MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s) are displayed
Define Search Filters selected inStep 6
-> all RET MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s), which are matching the
Select the AISGCtrl or RET on which the download operation should be performed and
click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-122 Download wizard: Download Action Require
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 On the Download Action Require page, the Download button is selected by default.
Click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Check the selection and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Validation Summary page is displayed.
Figure 3-124 Download wizard: Validation Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Check the selection and click Download. Otherwise, click Back to modify the selection.
Result: The final window of the wizard shows a success message. Click Finish to exit
the wizard. The download progress/result can be monitored in the Command
Manager.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Activate traditional software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activate traditional software

Purpose
Use this procedure to describe how to activate the previously downloaded software.
Before you begin

• The new OneBTS software to be activated is downloaded successfully on the
OneBTS.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download wizard:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
are displayed.
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• NE software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the NE software option and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 From the Select Software Version to Download page, select the software version from
the list and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Select the Browse all Nodes option and click Next.
Result: The Set Passive Version Filter page is displayed.
Figure 3-125 Activation wizard: Set Passive Version Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 On the Set Passive Version Filter page, select the passive version of the OneBTS to be
upgraded, add it to the right-hand pane and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Set RNC filter page is displayed.
Figure 3-126 Activation wizard: Set RNC filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 On the Set RNC filter page, select the RNC where the Node Bs to be upgraded are
connected, add it to the right-hand pane and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-127 Activation wizard: Retrieved Node(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Select the OneBTSs on which the activate operation should be performed, add them to the
right-hand pane and click Next.
Note: On the Retrieved Node(s) page, when you launch it from the menu bar, the
retrieved nodes are all OneBTSs and can be activated or detected in network. If you
launch it from right-click menu, the retrieved nodes are the selected OneBTSs, and
can be activated in network layout.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-128 Activation wizard: Search Criteria Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 On the Search Criteria Summary page, consult the summary of the OneBTSs on which
the activate operation should be performed.
Check the selection and click Activate now to validate it. Otherwise, click Back to
modify the selection.
Result: The last window of the wizard shows a success message. Activate the check
box that allows the Command Manager to be launched automatically and click Finish
to exit the wizard. When you launch it from right-click menu, if the selected nodes in
network layout are two or more than two kinds of element type nodes, wizard shows
the Next button, click Next to view the Select the Network Element type page
again to activate the next kind of element type nodes you selected.
When the activation wizard is closed, the Command Manager appears, allowing you
to monitor the activation progress.
Wait for the end of the activation. When the activation ends, the status indicates
Successful for each selected Network Element.
Check the WMS GUI layout to monitor the OneBTSs’ reconnection. The Command
Manager and the Inventory & Upgrade Session windows indicate the completion of
the activation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: When the supervision is lost, the critical alarm Loss of supervision is also
generated on the oneBTSEquipment object.
Figure 3-129 Activation wizard: Command Manager
The activation operations have been performed.

Note: Once the upgrade is finished, complete the procedure Check OneBTSs’ alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Activate ALD/ACF software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Activate ALD/ACF software

Purpose
Use this procedure to describe how to activate the previously downloaded ALD/ACF
software.
Before you begin

• The new ALD/ACF software to be activated is downloaded successfully on the
OneBTS.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the WMS GUI, and launch Activate wizard. There are two ways to launch the
Download wizard:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
are displayed.
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
• NE software
Select the ALD or ACF option and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you select the Browse All Nodes option and click Next, go to Step 8.
If you select the Define Search Fiters option and click Next, go to Step 6.
Result: The Set Search Filter page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 On the Set Search Filter page, fill the filters according to the Note instruction, then click
Next.
Result: The Set RNC Filter page is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 On the Set RNC Filter page, add RNCs in left panel to the right panel, then click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-130 Activation wizard: Retrieved Node(s)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 On the Retrieved Node(s) page, when launch from menu bar, the retrieved nodes are all
OneBTSs can be activated detected in network; if launch from right-click menu, then the
retrieved nodes just are the selected OneBTSs can be activated in network layout.
• wizard opened from Configuration menu
-> all AISGCtrl MOs in the network are displayed
-> all AISGCtrl MOs matching the search criteria are displayed
-> all RET MOs in the network are displayed
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-> all RET MOs matching the search criteria are displayed
• wizard opened with OneBTSEquipment(s) selected
-> all AISGCtrl MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s) are displayed
-> all AISGCtrl MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s), which are matching the
-> all RET MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s) are displayed
-> all RET MOs for selected OneBTSEquipment(s), which are matching the
Select the AISGCtrls/RETs on which the activate operation should be performed, add
them to the right-hand pane and click Next
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The AISGCtrls/RETs is added to the right-hand pane and the Search Criteria
Summary page is displayed.
Figure 3-131 Activation wizard: Search Criteria Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the Search Criteria Summary page, click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Validation Summary page is displayed.
Figure 3-132 Activation wizard: Validation Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 On the Validation Summary page, consult the results that on which AISGCtrl or RET, the
activation can be launched. If one or more Status are yes, the Activation button is
enabled, and then click it. Or click Back to modify the selection.
Result: The last window of the wizard shows a success message. Click Finish to exit
the wizard. The activation progress/status can be monitored in the Command
Manager.
The activation operations have been performed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download & Activate ALD/ACF software to Node B

Purpose
Use this procedure to describe the download & Activate command. This command allows
the user to download the new ALD/ACF software to Node Bs and activate them.
Before you begin

• The new ALD/ACF software to be downloaded is available on SRS.
• No session is currently active for the Node Bs.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Log into the WMS GUI, and launch Activate wizard. There are two ways to launch the
Download wizard:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
are displayed.
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS
Select the NodeB option and click Next.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration management Download & Activate ALD/ACF software to Node B
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 On the Select Software type page, select the software type from the list.
• NE software
Select the appropriate software:
• For ALD, on the Select Software Version to Download page, select the ALD
software version from the list and click Next.
• For ACF, on the Select Software Version to Download page, select the ACF
software version from the list and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 On the Select Search Method page, select the Define Search Filters option and click
Next.
Note: You can skip the Define Search Filters option. In this case, select Browse All
Nodes option and goto Step 8 directly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
On the Set Search Filter page, input the following filters:
• Vendor Name
• Hw version
• Sw Version
Click Next.
Note: A warning window Your input is invalid! appears. Click OK on the warning
window and continue to input the valid filters.
Result: The Set RNC filter page appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 On the Set RNC filter page, select the RNCs to which the AISG devices to be upgraded
are parented. Add them to the right-hand pane and click Next.
Result: The Search Criteria Summary page appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 On the Search Criteria Summary page, click Retrieve:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Retrieved Node (s) page appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 From the Retrieved Node (s) page, select the Node Bs on which the download operation
should be performed, add them to the right-hand panel and, click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 From the Download Action Require page, select download & launch activation radio
button and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 On the Search Criteria Summary page, check the summary of the Node Bs on which the
download is performed.
Check the selection and click Next to validate it.
Note: Click Back, if you have to modify the selection.
Result: The Validation Summary page appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 On the Validation Summary page, check the summary of the Node Bs on which
Download & Activate is performed and click Download.
• For ALD, the device level is: BTS/RRH/AISG.
• For ACF, the device level is: BTS/RRH/AISGCtrl/RET.
See the column Selected. If the validation status is yes, the select box is enabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 The last page of the wizard appears. The status of each AISG devices upgrade is
displayed dynamically every 15s.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-133 Download Software Wizard: ALD UNA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Click Yes to confirm the closure of the windows.
Figure 3-134 Upgrade message
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The user can also check the status of the upgrade in the Equipment Monitor. The Figure
3-135, “Equipment monitor” (p. 3-262) appears when you click the Close button.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-135 Equipment monitor
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 4 MS administration and
W
security
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides information on the 9353 WMS Administration commands.
Contents
Managing users and user permissions 4-2

User and user permissions 4-3
User rights configuration 4-11
Application management and customization 4-18
Software Repository Manager (SRM) 4-22
SRM overview 4-22
Custom commands 4-26
Custom command overview 4-27
Managing custom commands 4-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure to manage the users and the user permissions.
Contents
User and user permissions 4-3

User rights configuration 4-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security User and user permissions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User and user permissions

Overview
The 9353 WMS provides centralized tools to create, modify, and view user profiles and
permissions. These tools are based on:
• the Netscape Directory Server (NDS),
• the 9353 WMS Security Suite.
For detailed information on security, see the following Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless
Management System documentation:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Security Fundamentals,
9YZ-04157-0015-TQZZA.
• Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - User Configuration and
Management, 9YZ-04157-0017-TCZZA.
You can modify the 9353 WMS Security Suite security settings with the following
menus:
• Change Password, which opens the Figure 4-1, “Change password dialog box”
(p. 4-4).
• Configure Disclaimer text, which opens the Figure 4-2, “Configure Disclaimer Text”
(p. 4-5) window.
Use the following menus to create and manage users and tasks, based on user need to
access specific management functions and NEs within the UMTS network, to prevent
unauthorized access:
• Security administration, which opens the Figure 4-3, “9353 WMS Security Suite -
User & Session Manager GUI” (p. 4-8) GUI that enables to manage:
– users
The two logical types of users are: system administrators and users. User roles are
based on the assigned permissions.
– user groups
Grouping users facilitates the process of assigning and unassigning permissions. A
user group is granted a set of tasks and/or task groups and is given access
permission to a set of entities and/or entity groups.
User groups are integral to user management since they allow you to connect
users to tasks and entities.
– task groups
A task is a system functionality that is granted to or revoked from users.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Grouping task facilitates the process of assigning multiple tasks to and
unassigning them from user groups.
– entity groups
An entity is an object created in the system that is subject to secure access control
(for example: RNC, NodeB, RNS).
Grouping entity facilitates the process of assigning and unassigning multiple
entities to user groups.
• AC Group Maintenance, which opens “Access Control Group Maintenance”
(p. 4-10) window that allows an administrator to manage user groups.
• Show Access Control, which opens the Figure 4-4, “Access Control : Network
Elements window” (p. 4-9) that allows an administrator to change and define access
control permission.
• Screen Lock, that allows to enable or disable automatic screen lock and to set the
screen lock parameters.
Change password
After initiation, the 9353 WMS Client prompts you for a username and password. The
system verifies the username and password and then starts the 9353 WMS GUI. You then
have access to the features and network resources that are configured for this user role.
To change your password:
• from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Security > Change Password.
• from the 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & session Manager GUI menu bar, select
Tools > Change password.
Figure 4-1 Change password dialog box
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disclaimer text
After you login, a disclaimer text is displayed. To modify the text, from the WMS window
menu bar, select Security > Configure Disclaimer Text.
Figure 4-2 Configure Disclaimer Text
User & Session administration

You must have the appropriate permission settings to open the Figure 4-3, “9353 WMS
Security Suite - User & Session Manager GUI” (p. 4-8) GUI.
Before giving access and authorizations to users, the administrator must create these
profiles using the 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & Session Manager GUI.
To open the 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & Session Manager GUI, from the 9353
WMS window menu bar, select Security > Security administration.
The User & Session administration enables to:
• manage:
– users
– user sessions
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– IP address
– sub-network access
• view the list of:
– users
– user groups
– entities
– entity groups
– tasks
– tasks groups
The following menus are available in the 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & Session
Manager GUI menu bar:
• File
– Print
– Print Selection
– Close User & Session Manager
• Edit
– Cut
– Copy
– Paste
• Actions
– Create
– Lock
– Delete
• View
– Details
– Users
– User Groups
– Entities
– Entity Groups
– Tasks
– Tasks Groups
– User Permissions Overview
– User Group Overview
– Refresh
– Toolbar
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Tools
– Change Password
– Monitoring Users
– Security Preferences
• Windows
– Tile
– Cascade
– Close
– CloseAll
(p. 1-105).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-3 9353 WMS Security Suite - User & Session Manager GUI
Access Control
You must have the appropriate permission settings to open the Figure 4-4, “Access
Control : Network Elements window” (p. 4-9).
With access controls, the administrator can effectively partition the network.
See the Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - User Configuration and
Management, 9YZ-04157-0017-TCZZA for detailed information on the permissions.
To open the Figure 4-4, “Access Control : Network Elements window” (p. 4-9), from the
9353 WMS window menu bar, select Security > Show Access Control.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For layouts, the administrator can control permissions to view and edit. The extension of
permissions also enables to control which group(s) can start applications. As an example,
one user role can be restricted to viewing only NEs in the UMTS access network and their
associated alarms. Another role can be given this permission, plus the permission to
acknowledge and manually clear alarms on these NEs.
Figure 4-4 Access Control : Network Elements window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Access Control Group Maintenance
You must have the appropriate permission settings to open the Figure 4-5, “Access
Control Group Maintenance window” (p. 4-10).
You can rename or delete groups from the Figure 4-5, “Access Control Group
Maintenance window” (p. 4-10). To open the Access Control Role Maintenance window,
from the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Security > AC Group Maintenance.
Figure 4-5 Access Control Group Maintenance window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security User rights configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User rights configuration

Overview
This section provides information on how to set parameter masking.
Setting the parameter mask helps to:
• Improve the security constraints in configuration management module.
• Reduce the risk of erroneous manipulation of parameters using the object editor.
• Allow the restricted user to modify only a subset of parameters.
Before you begin

Ensure that you have the permission/access to launch NG-SEC User & Session Manager.
Procedure
This procedure is executed to configure users who must not be impacted by filtering.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Launch the NG-SEC User & Session Manager window by clicking Security > Security
administration from 9353 WMS window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click View > User Groups, the User Groups window launches.
Figure 4-6 User Groups window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Create a new user group named NOParamsMaskRestriction with assigned task NE No

Param Masks (users not restricted).
To do this:
1. Click Actions > Create > User group.
The Create User Group: Assign tasks window is displayed.
2. Check the task NE No Param Masks in the list.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-7 Create User Group: Assign tasks window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Finish.
The User Groups window now displays the NOParamsMaskRestriction user group in
the Name list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Open the NOParamsMaskRestriction group and click Assign users tab.

By default all the users are restricted, and listed under Not Assigned pane.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-8 Edit User Group window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use >> or << buttons to move the users between the two panes.
Figure 4-9 Assign users
Click OK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note: The internal users (adminjaasngsec, adminRadius, bbsysaccount,
cmsysaccount, csaAdmin, schsysaccount and wiclsysaccount) and the OSS users (e.g.
ossuser or user3gpp) should NOT be assigned to this user group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The default templates (in CSV format) are stored in /opt/nortel/config/utran/GUImasks,

These templates contain one template mask per release with all parameters which can be
modified in the Object Editor window.
The operator uploads the template on the PC and updates the file by updating the first
column and by replacing n with y. This is done to apply the filter to the attribute and
cannot be modified in the Object Editor window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Copy the CSV file into /opt/nortel/data/masks to apply the mask.

Note: The CSV file can be managed only by the administrator.
Result: User belonging to the NOParamsMaskRestriction group with NE No
Param Masks (listed in Assigned Tasks tab) will not have any restricted access in the
Object Editor window. To restrict permission, launch the NG-SEC User & Session
Manager as an administrator and remove the user from the group.
To create a /opt/nortel/data/masks, do as follows on the WMS server:
drwxr-x--- 2 oamops oamgroup
# mkdir /opt/nortel/data/masks
# chown oamops oamgroup /opt/nortel/data/masks
# chmod 644 /opt/nortel/data/masks
Attention: Ensure that the CSV file is copied with
rw-r---r-- oamops oamgroup rights.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section describes the procedure for application management and customization.
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security Application management and customization
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
With the 9353 WMS you can:
• monitor CORBA based applications,
• launch other non-9353 WMS applications,
• define and set user defined custom commands.
Use these functions to fully manage the 9353 WMS itself and provide a single consistent
point of access to numerous network management applications.
The following options are available from the Admin menu of the 9353 WMS menu bar:
• “Application monitoring” (p. 4-19),
• “Application configuration” (p. 4-19),
• “Custom commands” (p. 4-19),
• “Alarm color coding configuration” (p. 4-20),
• “Private filter management” (p. 4-20).
The “Audible alarms” (p. 4-20) management option is available from the Fault menu of
the 9353 WMS window menu bar.
Application monitoring
Use the Application monitoring to view the current state of managed servers. The AM
Monitoring GUI polls all managed servers on a configurable interval and displays the
current state of each server process.
Application configuration
The Application configuration GUI is the main configuration window. Start the two
sub-windows, Edit Server window and Create Instance window from this window. It
gives the ability to create or delete servers and edit or change the server attributes.
Custom commands
The 9353 WMS allows you to start other applications directly from the 9353 WMS using
Application Launch scripts, delivering a single point of access to multiple applications.
In addition to Application Launch scripts, the 9353 WMS provides a lightweight tool for
generating Custom Commands.
Use this tool to add commands to specific menus in the Universal Resource Locators
(URLs), that specify the location of the web page or application to be started. You can
create and load multiple command sets to customize and personalize their environment
with links to specific tools or data that improve their overall effectiveness.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-10 Custom Commands window
For detailed information about the custom commands tool, see “Custom commands”
(p. 4-26).
For more information, see Alcatel-Lucent 9353 Wireless Management System - Security
Fundamentals, 9YZ-04157-0015-TQZZA.
Alarm color coding configuration

To differentiate between the different alarm severities, you can set client-configurable
colors on each type of alarm.
For more information, see Configure alarm severity colors under “Alarm cues”
(p. 2-36) and “Configuring alarm severity colors” (p. 2-218).
Private filter management

Administrators can delete private filters created by users to filter the alarm display.
For more information, see “Manage advanced filters” (p. 2-85) and “Deleting private
advanced alarm filters” (p. 2-233).
Audible alarms
To discriminate between the different alarm severities, client-configurable warning
sounds can be set on each type of alarm using the window shown in the Figure 4-11,
“Audible Alarms window” (p. 4-21). To modify the audible alarm settings, see the
“Toggling the audible alarm tone” (p. 2-245) procedure.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-11 Audible Alarms window
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security SRM overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SRM overview
Overview
Use the Software Repository Manager (SRM) tool to install or monitor the ACF,
ALDSoftware, NodeB, RNC, OAM, OneBTS, DiskAccess, VServer, or WCEPlatform
deliveries and patches from the Software Repository Server (SRS).
To use this tool, you must have a full-delivery CD-ROM or patch file located on the PC
(or one of the mounted disks).
This GUI is not part of the 9353 WMS.
Download software patches

The SRM is composed of:
• a top level summary area, which shows available categories of deliveries (RNC, Node
B, OAM)
• Install Software Release tab which enables to download the appropriate category of
software patches to the SRS.
Click on a category to view the list of deliveries. For more information, see
“Download software patches using the SRM” (p. 5-32).
• Install 3rd Party Software Release tab which enables to download and install any
third party software releases.
The following figure displays the SRM tool:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-12 Software Repository Manager window
Delete software patches

The Download Software window opens after you download the patch.
To delete a software patch, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Select the software release to be deleted from the SRM window as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-13 Delete software delivery tab
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Delete Selected.

Result: A pop-up appears as shown in Figure 4-14, “Continue deletion” (p. 4-24):
Figure 4-14 Continue deletion
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click OK to continue to delete the selected software release.

Result: The selected release will be deleted from the list.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
The Software Repository Manager window provides the following details for each
software:
• the release (the software release list is sorted first by installed date (most recent first)
and second by version name in ascending alphabetical order)
• the delivery documentation
• the disk space used for this release
• the installation date
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Downloading patch documentation
You can download patch documentation when you download the patch software. Bundle
the documentation with the patch. It can be included with the same delivery file(s) at
installation or it can be downloaded later. In either case, if documentation is available, it
is listed as a hyperlink next to the delivery. Click the link to open the related patch
documentation.
How you view the documentation depends on browser, type, behavior and configuration.
The browser always offers to download the document, in some cases the browser can
interpret or display the document directly.
There is a second level of documentation. After you looked at the delivery list for a
category you can see hyperlinks for the delivery, and also for the documentation if
present. Click on a delivery list to go to a detail page showing the delivery content. This is
made up of items called subcomponents. That is, one delivery has N subcomponents. We
can associate a document with a given subcomponent, and it is displayed next to its
subcomponent. The hierarchy of displayed web pages looks like this:
• Category page, which is a list of deliveries for a given category.
Each list item has an associated document.
• Delivery page, which is a list of subcomponents for a given delivery.
Each list item has an associated document. Each subcomponent page shows a list of
content for a given subcomponent.
A delivery can contain many patches (subcomponents), several of which can require their
own individual patch documents.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
Overview
Purpose
Administrators can add custom commands to the 9353 WMS menus to launch applications
and Universal Resource Locators (URLs) that are not part of the 9353 WMS system. They
can add commands to the menu bar of any window, and to any object (right-click) menu.
Examples of commands you can add include other network management applications,
other applications, such as word processors, as well as URLs for commonly referenced
pages on your company intranet.
Contents
Custom command overview 4-27

Managing custom commands 4-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security Custom command overview
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom command overview

Overview
A custom command can contain parameters that are substituted at runtime with context
data. For more information see “Defining a command that contains parameters” (p. 4-28).
The Figure 4-10, “Custom Commands window” (p. 4-20) is the main window for creating
commands that can be added to any Overview and Procedures menu bar or object
(right-click) menu.
In the Custom Commands window, you can:
• create and manage commands,
• specify where the commands appear in the 9353 WMS window menu bar and
right-click menus,
• organize commands into command sets.
New custom commands take effect after a client restart.
For a description of the Custom Commands window, see the following sections:
• “Menu bar” (p. 4-27)
• “Command Sets” (p. 4-27)
• “Command Set” (p. 4-28)
Menu bar

File Exit Closes the Custom Commands window
Edit New Adds a new command or command set
Delete Deletes a selected command or command set
Copy Command Copies a selected command
Paste Command Pastes the previously copied command into the current
command set
Duplicate Command Set Duplicates the currently selected command set in the
Command Set
Command Sets
The Command Sets area displays the names of all the existing command sets in a list.
Only one command set can be selected at a time. When selected, a command set is locked
out to all other users. Locked command sets appear dimmed in the list. You can edit
command set names and add new command sets.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Command Set
The Command Set displays the commands belonging to the selected command set in a
table (see Table 4-1, “Command set table” (p. 4-28) below). You can edit commands in
the table and add new commands to the table.
Table 4-1 Command set table
Table column Description

Menu type The type of menu used to display the command (choose from
Menubar or Objectmenu)
Menu/Submenu Label the If the menu type is Menubar, enter the location in the menu
name for this command as hierarchy to display the command (use a slash to separate menu
it is to appear in the menu levels, for example, View/Statistics)
If the menu type is ObjectMenu, enter the object type to attach the
command to. The valid entries are NetworkElement, Group, or
Link
Type The command type can be:
• Local Application
• Browser URL - opens the URL in the default browser window
• Desktop URL (new) - opens the URL in a new 9353 WMS
HTML viewer
• Desktop URL - opens the URL in an existing 9353 WMS
HTML viewer, if one is open
Attention:
Set the Type to "Browser URL" to display HTML that is more
recent than HTML 3.2
Command (optional) The Web page or local application that is launched when the
command menu is selected; it can contain parameters (see
“Defining a command that contains parameters” (p. 4-28))
Defining a command that contains parameters

A command can contain parameters that are substituted at runtime with context data. All
parameters start with an open angle bracket and end with a closed angle bracket. For
example, <parameter name>.
The following sections describe how to define some command parameters:
• “Example of parameter substitution in a URL” (p. 4-29)
• “Example of commands” (p. 4-29)
• “Supported parameters” (p. 4-29)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example of parameter substitution in a URL
URLs contain the following elements protocol://server_domain_ name/path_name.
where:
• protocol defines the software and method by which the browser and the host server of
the document communicate to exchange the document (such as http, https, ftp, or
telnet)
• server_domain_name defines the server where the file is located (such as
sample.com)
• path_name defines the exact directory location of the file
All the elements of a URL are case-sensitive.
If a URL in a command is defined as http://www.sample.com/performance/<nodeID and
the NE selected in the application has a resource ID of 12, then the following substitution
is made when the command is selected:
http://www.sample.com/performance/12
Example of commands
The following are examples of commands:
• http://<emsActiveAddress>/performance/<nodeId>
• telnet <nodeAddress>
• /usr/bin/local/launchUI <xDisplayAddress> neId <nodeId> -display
<xDisplayAddress> -context Show_Shelf_Level_Graphics
• wincenter -display <xDisplayAddress>
• /iws/uoc/uocrrmp -i <nodeId> -x <xDisplayAddress> -u <userId>
• xterm +sb -geometry =80x24 -bw 3 -fn 8x13 -fb 8x13B -name "Serial Connection" -T
"Serial Connection to <nodeName>" e /usr/bin/cu l <nodeAddress>
• optivity n <nodeId>
Supported parameters
The following parameters can be included in commands:
• <userId>
Example:
admin
• <userGroup>
Example:
9353 WMS Administrators
• <nodeId>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example:
9209
• <nodeName>
Example:
St-Laurent
• <nodeAddress>
Example:
135.120.179.345
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WMS administration and security Managing custom commands
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing custom commands

Overview
Only authorized users can start custom commands.
The procedures for managing custom commands can be divided into procedures for
managing command sets and procedures for managing commands in a command set.
• Managing command sets means:
– “Adding a command set” (p. 4-31)
– “Renaming a command set” (p. 4-32)
– “Duplicating a command set” (p. 4-33)
– “Deleting a command set” (p. 4-33)
• Managing commands in a command set means:
– “Adding a command to a menu bar or right-click menu” (p. 4-34)
– “Editing a command” (p. 4-36)
– “Deleting a command” (p. 4-37)
– “Copying a command within a command set” (p. 4-38)
– “Copying a command to another command set” (p. 4-39)
– “Defining a command set: Menu bar example” (p. 4-40)
– “Defining a command set: Object menu example” (p. 4-40)
Adding a command set

Use this procedure to add a command set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Admin > Custom Commands.
Result: The Figure 4-10, “Custom Commands window” (p. 4-20) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Custom Commands window, click New Set or select Edit > New > Command Set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: A new unique command set name (for example, Command Set 42) is added to
the list. It is automatically selected. An empty command set appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 You can:
• change the name of the newly created command set, see “Renaming a command set”
(p. 4-32).
• add commands to the new command set, see “Adding a command to a menu bar or
right-click menu” (p. 4-34).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Renaming a command set

Use this procedure to rename a command set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Custom commands window, double-click the name of the command set you want
to rename.
The commands in the set are displayed in the Command Set table.
Note: You cannot select locked-out command sets. These are command sets being
edited by other Custom Commands users.
After you select a command set name, its name is locked-out on the displays of all
other Custom Commands users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the new name for the command set.

For example, the name can identify the commands you plan to include.
The new name of the command set can be as long as you like and must be unique.
The new name is saved as soon as you select another command set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Once the command set name is unlocked, the new name appears on the
displays of all other users. The Command Sets list is automatically updated in the
open Custom Commands window of any other authorized user.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Duplicating a command set

Use this procedure to duplicate a command set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Custom Commands window, click the name of the command set you want to
duplicate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Edit > Duplicate Command Set.

Result: A new unique command set name (for example, Command Set 43) is added to
the list. All commands associated with the original set are copied and displayed in the
Command Set table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 You can:
• edit and modify the name of the duplicated command set, see “Renaming a command
set” (p. 4-32).
• add commands to the duplicated command set, see “Adding a command to a menu bar
or right-click menu” (p. 4-34).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Deleting a command set

Use this procedure to delete a command set.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Custom Commands window, select the name of the command set you want to
delete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select Edit > Delete > Selected Command Set.

Result: A confirmation message appears. It warns you that a deleted command set
cannot be restored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click OK.
Result: The command set is deleted. No command set name is selected, and the
Command Set table is empty.
The Command Sets list is automatically updated in the open Custom Commands
window of any other authorized user.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Adding a command to a menu bar or right-click menu

Use this procedure to add a command to a menu bar or a right-click object menu.
Before adding a command to the menu bar or a right-click menu, ensure you have the
necessary information:
• the names of the applications where the menu item is to appear,
• the place in the menu hierarchy where the menu item is to appear,
• the command itself, see “Defining a command that contains parameters” (p. 4-28) for
more information.
All of the attributes of the command must be specified, otherwise the command is not
available in the 9353 WMS window.
Attention: If the 9353 WMS window is opened, close it and reopen it to see any
newly added command in the 9353 WMS menus.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 If the Custom Commands window displays the command sets only, click the arrows
between the Command Sets list and the Command Set table to view the commands.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 From the Custom Commands window, in the Command Sets list select a Command set,
or click New Set, or select Edit > New > Command Set.
Result: A new row is added to the Command Sets list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click New Command or select Edit > New > Command.

Result: An empty row is added to the Command Set table. You can edit each cell in
the table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Double-click the Menu Type heading to select the type of menu in which you want the
command to appear: Menubar, or Object Menu (the right-click menu).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Double-click the Menu/Submenu column header:

• If the Menu Type is "Menubar" enter the location of the menu item in the menu
hierarchy. Use a slash to separate menu levels (for example: View/Statistics).
• If the Menu Type is "ObjectMenu", enter the type of object to attach the command to.
Valid entries are NetworkElement, Group and Link.
For example, if you enter Group, the command is available when you right-click a
group icon in the Resource Browser.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Double-click the Label column header to enter the name of the menu item as you want it
to appear on the menu.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Click the Type column header to select one of the following settings:
• Local application - the application must reside on the machine that hosts the 9353
WMS
• Browser URL - the URL of a site on the Internet or your intranet, for display in the
default browser
• Desktop URL (new) - the URL to an HTML file stored on a local machine. A new
HTML viewer opens in the 9353 WMS window to display the HTML file.
• Desktop URL - the URL to an HTML file stored on a local machine, for display in the
HTML viewer in the 9353 WMS window
Set the Command Type to Browser URL to display HTML that is more recent than HTML
3.2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Double-click the Command column header to enter the command to be launched: either a
URL, or the file address to an application. The command can contain parameters that are
replaced at runtime with context data. See “Defining a command that contains
parameters” (p. 4-28) for more information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Save the new command, either:

• select another command in the table, or
• select another command set, or
• the new command is automatically saved after a preset time interval.
Result: The new command is saved.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Editing a command
Use this procedure to edit a command.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the Custom Commands window, select the command set of the command you want to
edit.
Result: The commands belonging to the selected command set appear in the
Command Set table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the command you want to edit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Double-click any cell in that command to edit its contents:

• Menu Type - non-editable combo box
• Menu/Submenu - editable text
• Label - editable text
• Type - list (non-editable text)
Attention: set the Type to "Browser URL" to display HTML that is more recent than
HTML 3.2.
Attention: instead of renaming a command Type, delete the command and create a
new one.
Result: The edited command is saved as soon as you select another command in the
table.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Deleting a command
Use this procedure to delete one or more commands included in a command set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Custom Commands window, in the Command Sets list, select the command set
from which you want to delete one or more commands.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The commands belonging to the selected command set appears in the
Command Set table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the Command Set table, select one or more commands.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Custom Commands window menu bar, select Edit > Delete > Selected
Commands Delete.
Result: A confirmation message appears. It warns you that a deleted command set
cannot be restored.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Click OK.
Result: The selected command is deleted.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Copying a command within a command set

Use this procedure to copy a command within a command set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Custom Commands window, in the Command Sets list, select the command set
into which you want to copy a command.
Result: The commands belonging to the selected command set appear in the
Command Set table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select a command in the Command Set table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Custom Commands window menu bar, select Edit > Copy Command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select Edit > Paste Command.

Result: A new command is added to the Command Set table.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Copying a command to another command set

Use this procedure to copy a command from a Command Set to another Command Set.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 From the Custom Commands window, in the Command Sets list, select the Command
Set of the command you want to copy.
Result: The commands belonging to the selected Command Set appear in the
Command Set table.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select a command in the Command Set table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 From the Custom Commands window menu bar, select Edit > Copy Command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 In the Command Sets list, select the Command Set you want to copy the command into.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 From the Custom Commands window menu bar, select Edit > Paste Command.
Result: The command is added to the list in the Command Set table. It is an exact
replica of the original command.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Defining a command set: Menu bar example
Use this procedure to add a command set to the View menu of the 9353 WMS window, to
display your company's Web site in a browser window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add a command set and name it Our Company Web Site, see “Adding a command set”
(p. 4-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Add a command to the new command set, see “Adding a command to a menu bar or
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fill the following fields:

• in Menu Type, select Menubar
• in Menu/Submenu, enter "View"
• in Label, enter "Our Company Web Site"
• in Type, select Browser URL.
Attention: set the command Type to Browser URL to display HTML that is more
• in Command, enter the command, which is simply the URL of your Web site
Attention: if the 9353 WMS window is open, close it and reopen it to see the newly
defined command.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Defining a command set: Object menu example

Use this procedure to add a command set to the group right-click menu that displays your
company's Web site in a browser window.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Custom commands
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Add a Command Set and name it Our Company Web Site, see “Adding a command set”
(p. 4-31).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Add a command to the new Command Set, see “Adding a command to a menu bar or
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Fill the following fields:

• in Menu Type, select Object Menu
• in Menu/SubMenu, enter "Group" (the other valid entries are NetworkElement and
Link)
• in Label, enter "Our Company Web Site"
• in Type, select Browser URL
Attention: set the Command Type to Browser URL to display HTML that is more
• in Command, enter the command, which is simply the URL of your Web site
Attention: if the 9353 WMS window is open, close it and reopen it to see the newly
defined command.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 S5oftware administration
and security
Overview
Purpose
This chapter describes various procedures for software administration and security.
Contents
Software Inventory and Upgrade Session 5-2

NE software download 5-4
NE software upgrade 5-17
AISG upgrade 5-18
Software Backup and Restore 5-31
Download software patches using the SRM 5-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security Software Inventory and Upgrade Session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Inventory and Upgrade Session

Overview
The Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window lists all the software running and
the number of NEs on that software. Operations that can be done using this window is
described below.
Operating the Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window

To open the Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window, from the 9353 WMS
window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Software > Inventory &
Upgrade Session.
You can perform actions from the Software Inventory & Upgrade window, see
“Contextual menus on the Software Inventory and Upgrade Session” (p. 1-50).
Figure 5-1 Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window
Click the Refresh button to query the database and list the details in the window.
The Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window includes the following panes:
• Snapshot Status pane, which displays the software versions that are reported in the
OMC running view and the number of NEs reported to run this version.
• Details pane, which displays the following details about the version selected in the
Snapshot area:
– NE name
– NE type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security Software Inventory and Upgrade Session
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
– Parent NE name (BTS selected only)
– Parent NE type (BTS selected only)
– Status
– Target version
– Running software version
– Fallback version (939x OneBTS selected only)
Fallback enables to come back to the previous software version after software
activation. For more information, see Alcatel-Lucent OneBTS - Software Upgrade
Procedure Using OAM LR14.W, 9YZ-04157-0080-RJZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security NE software download
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE software download
Overview
This wizard helps to download relevant versions of the software to the UTRAN network
elements.
Note: As there is no download wizard for VServer, DIskAccess and WcePlatform
load, these software loads must be downloaded manually on the management server
disk (PC hosting application like VCenter, HPInsight, and so on).
Before you begin

Ensure that the NE and the Node to be downloaded are error free.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 From the 9353 WMS window menu bar, select Configuration > Radio Access > Software
> Download.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 5-2, “Download Software Wizard” (p. 5-5) appears:
Figure 5-2 Download Software Wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next> to display the NE types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 5-3, “Download Software Wizard - NE selection” (p. 5-6) appears:
Figure 5-3 Download Software Wizard - NE selection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Select the NE and click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 5-4, “Select Software Version to Download” (p. 5-7) appears:
Figure 5-4 Select Software Version to Download
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Click Refresh SRS Repository to list the software versions to be downloaded.

Select the software version to download and click Next>. You can also select the software
and mark it as default. See “Marking default software” (p. 5-16).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-5 Download Software Wizard - Software selection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Select a search method option from the Select Search Method wizard.
If you select... then...

Browse All Nodes go to Step 5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If you select... then...

Define Search Filters 1. Select the active version of the software to
be replaced by selecting them from the
Available pane and click Add-> or click
Add all->> to select all the versions.
The selected version is now moved to the
Selected pane.
Use <-Remove or <<-Remove all to
remove the version is not required.
2. Click Next
Note: If the NodeB is selected during Step 2,
repeat the same for RNCs for the selected
NodeBs.
Figure 5-6 Download Software Wizard - Select Search Method
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-7 Download Software Wizard - Set Active Version Filter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 The Search Criteria Summary wizard displays the selection made so far. If the selection
is correct, click Retrive, else click <Back and redo the selection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-8 Download Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 In the Retrieved Nodes wizard, select the nodes to be retrieved and click > or click >> to
select all the nodes. Click Next>.
Use < to remove a selected node or click << to remove all the selected nodes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-9 Download Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Download Action Reqire wizard, select Download or Download & Activate. Click
Next>
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-10 Download Software Wizard - Download Action Require
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 In the NodeB MIB Modification wizard, select one of the modification options and click
Next>.
If you want a new MIB, select with new MIB and click Select CM_XML File button and
select the CMXML file.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-11 Download Software Wizard - NodeB MIB Modification
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 The Search Criteria Summary wizard displays the selection made so far. If the selection
is correct, click Download, else click <Back and redo the selection.
Click Cancel to cancel this operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 In the Download Software Wizard Complete, click Finish. The status can be seen in the
Command Manager.
Figure 5-13 Download Software Wizard - Download Software Wizard Complete
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Marking default software

You can mark the software as default in the Download Software Wizard.
There is one default software per Network Element type:
• RNC
• NodeB
• OneBTS.
You can mark software as default software version selecting the Set as default software
version contextual menu. By this action the default software name changes to bold and a
(default) string is added at the end of the name.
The Clear default software version contextual menu allows to clear the default
indication on the default software version.
Note: All WMS clients share the same software markers.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security NE software upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE software upgrade
Overview
Important! No two major software maintenance actions should be performed at the
same time, as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller -
Maintenance Guide, 3MN-00507-0002-REZZA.
For more information and details on NE software upgrade, see the following publications:
• Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller documentation:
– Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller - Software Upgrade Procedure
Using OAM LR14.W: Intra Release Upgrade, 9YZ-04157-0076-RJZZA
– Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network Controller - Software Upgrade Procedure
Using OAM LR14.W: Inter Release Upgrade, 9YZ-04157-0077-RJZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent 9311, 9312, 9322, 9326, and 9332 NodeB documentation:
– Alcatel-Lucent 9300 W-CDMA Product Family Alcatel-Lucent Node B - Software
Upgrade Procedure Using OAM LR14.W: Inter Release Upgrade,
9YZ-04157-0078-RJZZA
– Alcatel-Lucent 9300 W-CDMA Product Family Alcatel-Lucent Node B - Software
Upgrade Procedure Using OAM LR14.W: Intra Release Upgrade,
9YZ-04157-0079-RJZZA
• Alcatel-Lucent OneBTS documentation:
– Alcatel-Lucent OneBTS - Software Upgrade Procedure Using OAM LR14.W,
9YZ-04157-0080-RJZZA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security AISG upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AISG upgrade
Overview
This topic describes the ACF and ALD software download and activation procedure.
Before you begin

Ensure that the software and the Nodes to be downloaded are error free.
Download ACF and ALD software

Perform the following steps to download the ACF and ALD software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
> Download.
Result: The Figure 5-14, “Download Software Wizard” (p. 5-18) appears.
Figure 5-14 Download Software Wizard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next to display the software types.

Result: The Figure 5-15, “Download Software Wizard - Select the Software type”
(p. 5-19) appears.
Figure 5-15 Download Software Wizard - Select the Software type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The following software types are displayed:

• NE software
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select ALD or ACF and click Next.

Result: The Figure 5-16, “Download Software Wizard - Select Software Version to
Download” (p. 5-20) appears:
Figure 5-16 Download Software Wizard - Select Software Version to Download
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can mark the software as default software version by selecting the Set as default
software version contextual menu. By this action the default software name appears in
bold and a (default) string is added at the end of the name.
The Clear default software version contextual menu allows you to clear the default
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the software version to download and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The Figure 5-17, “Download Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary”

(p. 5-21) displays the selection made so far. If the selection is correct, click Retrive, else
click <Back and redo the selection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Figure 5-18, “Download Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes” (p. 5-22), select the
nodes to be retrieved. Click > or >> to select all the nodes. Click Next>.
To remove a selected node click < or click << to remove all the selected nodes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-18 Download Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 In the Figure 5-19, “Download Software Wizard - Download Action Require”

(p. 5-23) select Download or Download & launch activation. Click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-19 Download Software Wizard - Download Action Require
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 The Figure 5-20, “Download Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary”

(p. 5-24) displays the selection made so far. If the selection is correct, click Download,
else click <Back and redo the selection.
Click Cancel to cancel this operation.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 In the Figure 5-21, “Download Software Wizard - Download Software Wizard Complete”
(p. 5-25), click Finish. The status can be seen in the Command Manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-21 Download Software Wizard - Download Software Wizard Complete
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Activate ACF and ALD software

Perform the following steps to activate the downloaded ACF and ALD software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
> Activate.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 5-22, “Activation Software Wizard” (p. 5-26) appears.
Figure 5-22 Activation Software Wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Click Next to display the software types.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The Figure 5-23, “Activation Software Wizard - Select the Software type”
(p. 5-27) appears.
Figure 5-23 Activation Software Wizard - Select the Software type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 The following software types are displayed:

• NE software
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select ALD or ACF and click Next.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 You can mark the software as default software version by selecting the Set as default
software version contextual menu. By this action the default software name appears in
bold and a (default) string is added at the end of the name.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Clear default software version contextual menu allows you to clear the default
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Select the software version to download and click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 The Figure 5-24, “Activation Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary”

(p. 5-28) displays the selection made so far. If the selection is correct, click Retrive, else
click <Back and redo the selection.
Figure 5-24 Activation Software Wizard - Search Criteria Summary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 In the Figure 5-25, “Activation Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes” (p. 5-29), select the
nodes to be retrieved. Click > or >> to select all the nodes. Click Next>.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To remove a selected node click < or click << to remove all the selected nodes.
Figure 5-25 Activation Software Wizard - Retrieved Nodes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 In the Figure 5-26, “Activation Software Wizard Completed” (p. 5-30), click Finish. The
status can be seen in the Command Manager.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-26 Activation Software Wizard Completed
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security Software Backup and Restore
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Backup and Restore

Overview
The backup and restore procedures are presented in the upgrade procedure documents
listed in “NE software upgrade” (p. 5-17) and in the Alcatel-Lucent 9370 Radio Network
Controller - Maintenance Guide, 3MN-00507-0002-REZZA.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software administration and security Download software patches using the SRM
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Download software patches using the SRM

Overview
Use the Software Repository Manager (SRM) tool to install or view an RNC, a Node B,
or OAM deliveries and patches from the SRS.
Before you begin

To use this tool you must have full-delivery CD-ROM or patch file located on the PC (or
one of the mounted disks).
SRM GUI is not part of the 9353 WMS GUI. It is a web server, embedding Java applet
and Java server pages and is hosted by the SRS.
Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Using a web browser, enter:

http://<server host name>:8080/srm/
Result: The SRS login window appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 In the SRS login window, enter your User ID and Password and click Login.
Result: The Figure 4-12, “Software Repository Manager window” (p. 4-23) appears.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Click Install Software Release.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Select the required delivery to install.
If Then
CD-ROM is selected enter disk name
Local software delivery file is selected enter the full path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 To view the associated documentation after the download is complete, click on the
hyperlink under the heading Documentation, see Figure 4-12, “Software Repository
Manager window” (p. 4-23).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Click OK to validate the selection or click Cancel to close window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The file transfer window appears.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 6esource Browser and
R
Alarm Manager
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the procedure for launching the resource
browser and alarm manager.
Contents
Launching a Resource Browser from an external application 6-2

Overview 6-2
Launching the Alarm Manager from an external application 6-8
Overview 6-8
ALLP 6-11
ALLP overview 6-12
Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP 6-13
Establishing communication with the Desktop UI 6-16
Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop UI 6-19
Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin 6-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching a Resource Browser from an external

application
Overview
Introduction
An external application (such as an OSS adapter) can launch the Resource Browser
launch facility by sending the facility launch requests to the Application Launch Listener
Plugin (ALLP) running inside the 9353 WMS GUI process.
The Resource Browser launch facility is installed with the NNnspgui package.
Note: The NSP GUI launch will not be supported from UNIX and Xmanager.
Facility configuration details

The Table 6-1, “Configuration information” (p. 6-2) shows the configuration information
for the facility launch request.
Table 6-1 Configuration information
Facility name Facility argument Description

NRDLaunchFacility NE DN in string format Opens a new Resource
(only single NE DN is Browser window and
permitted) highlights the specified NE
ALLP facility launch request format

Facility= NRDLaunchFacility, Args=<NE DN>
Where <NE DN> is the DN of the NE in string format (stringified DN) that has to be
displayed in the Resource Browser window.
Syntax for NE DN argument
Because the <NE DN> contains double quotes and comma characters, it must be enclosed
within a single quote when sent as an argument in the facility launch request.
Example:
<NE_DN>
The Application Launch System requires this syntax. The single quote, carriage return,
line feed and unprintable characters are not allowed within <NE_DN>.
Attention: Do not add additional quotation marks to the beginning or ending of the
command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Do not launch commands that are not conforming to this format and can cause
unpredictable results.
For an example of NE_DN in string format, from the Access Control window, in the
Resource Types, select Networks Elements and see the ID column.
Example:
Do not add any character before the start of or at the end of the command. For instance,
for the command:
"Facility=UAMLaunchFacility,Args='managedElement=
"BTSEquipmentBTSM1_601_008",network="UTRAN"'"
The system considers that the following two NE DNs are specified:
• managedElement="BTSEquipmentBTSM1_601_008",network="UTRAN",
• empty string "".
The OSS launch plugin processes the first NE DN and at the same time generates a log
entry, which indicates that "more than one NE context is given".
Launching the Resource Browser through ALLP

The prerequisites to launch the Resource Browser through the ALLP, are listed as
follows:
• Ensure that the following applications are installed:
– Java WebStart
– Desktop UI component on the Web server, and configured for JWS deployment
• Understand the Integrated Framework and the Desktop component - especially
Application launch and ALLP
• Install and configure the facility plugin to be launched using ALLP:
– Define the sandbox in the cfg file
– Install the cfg and jar files with the plugin_mgmt.sh utility
• “Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP”
(p. 6-13).
• Understand the TCP-IP socket usage at a programming level.
For further information, see the desktop UI Developer Guide.
Before you begin

Ensure that the Resource Browser is launched through ALLP.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure
To launch the Resource Browser, perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install and configure the NRDLaunchFacility plugin (JAR file and cfg file) on the
Desktop UI server. This is done as part of the activation of the NNnspgui package.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Send the following command from the external Application (such as OSS adapter) to start
the Desktop UI without initial plugin launch request:
javaws http://<host_name>:8080/UI/mft/resources/desktop /
jnlpGenerator.cgi?-DPARENT_APP_HOST=my_host+-DPARENT_ APP_PORT=12345
The following code represents sample code only to illustrate the key steps required for
integration. It is up to the OSS to fully develop a complete solution using the information
of the APIs provided here.
Example:
// Assuming that the directory containing javaws is in the PATH
// Assuming that the jnlpGenerator.cgi and jnlpGenerator.env files
// are located in "DesktopGUI/dynamicJnlp/" sub-directory under the
// web-server document root directory on <desktop_install_host> host.
String[] cmd = { "javaws", "http://<desktop_install_host>:8080/
DesktopGUI/
dynamicJnlp/jnlpGenerator.cgi?-DPARENT_APP_HOST%3D" + parentAppHost +
"+-DPARENT_APP_PORT%3D" + parentAppPort}; Process proc =
Runtime.getRuntime().exec( cmd, null );
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 In the log in dialog box, enter the user name and password.
When a user is authenticated successfully, the ALLP plugin is launched. ALLP gets the
OSS Adapter host name and the OSS adapter listening port from Java System Properties.
ALLP opens a socket on the dynamically selected port and starts listening on it.
ALLP sends its listening port number to the OSS Adapter on the OSS adapter listening
port that was received as the system properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 OSS adapter establishes TCP/IP socket communication with ALLP using the ALLP
listening port.
The following code is only a sample code fragments intended to illustrate the key steps
required for integration. It is up to the OSS to fully develop a complete solution using the
information of the APIs provided here.
Example:
public class ParentApplication
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{
private static String ALLP_PORT_TAG = "ALLP_Port=";
private int ALLPPort = -1;
...
public void startDesktopAndInitConn()
{
try
{
String myHost = "localhost" ;
InetAddress myInetAddress = InetAddress.getByName( myHost ) ;
// Create server socket to receive ALLP port number
// 0 means a free port will be chosen, backlog of 1.
ServerSocket serverSocket = new ServerSocket( 0, 1, myInetAddress ) ;
String myPort = Integer.toString( serverSocket.getLocalPort() ) ;
String[] cmd = { "javaws", "http://<desktop_install_host>:8080/
DesktopGUI/dynamicJnlp/jnlpGenerator.cgi?-DPARENT_APP_HOST%3D" +
parentAppHost +
"+-DPARENT_APP_PORT%3D" + parentAppPort };
Runtime.getRuntime().exec(cmd, null ) ;
// Wait until we get ALLP PORT number from Desktop.
// We will only wait for 5 minutes to avoid infinite wait
// and at the same time to also give sufficient time for the
// Desktop to start, user to log-in (if authentication is needed
// in Desktop) and the ALLP plug-in to send the ALLP PORT number. //
if we do not set the
time limit and for some reason // (e.g. user did not log-in
successfully) the ALLP is not
// able to send the port number then this thread will be
// blocked for ever. By setting time limit we will be
// avoiding this to happen. int timeout = 300000;
// 5 minutes ServSocket.setSoTimeout( timeout );
System.out.println( "Waiting for ALLP port at port: " + myPort ) ;
Socket socket =
serverSocket.accept();
BufferedReader In = new BufferedReader( new InputStreamReader(
socket.getInputStream() )); String inputString = In.readLine();
In.close();
String portString=null; int subStringIndex; if ( (subStringIndex =
inputString.indexOf(
ALLP_PORT_TAG )) >= 0 && inputString.length() > ALLP_PORT_
TAG.length() )
{
portString = inputString.substring( subStringIndex + ALLP_PORT_
TAG.length() ) ;
}
if ( portString != null )
{
System.out.println( "Received ALLP server port: " + portString );
}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
else { System.err.println( "Received message that does not contain
ALLP port: "+ inputString
); System.exit( 1 ) ;
}
ALLPPort = Integer.parseInt( portString ) ;
}
catch( SocketTimeoutException e )
{
System.err.println( "Did not received ALLP port from Desktop GUI
within " + "specified time
limit." ) ;
}
catch( Exception e )
{
System.err.println( "Caught exception: " + e ) ;
}
}
}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The OSS Adapter sends the NRDLaunchFacility request to ALLP through TCP/IP socket.
It also sends the launch context (NE DN) as the facility argument.
The following code represents sample code only to illustrate the key steps required for
integration. It is up to the OSS to fully develop a complete solution using the information
of the APIs provided here.
Example:
// Send my facility command to it. Should be of the format
// "Facility=<string>,Args=1 2 3 ..." (Args is optional). Socket
allpSocket = new Socket(
childInetAddress, ALLPPort ) ;
PrintWriter out = new PrintWriter( allpSocket.getOutputStream(),
true ) ; String command =
"Facility=UAMLaunchFacility,Args='managedElement="EM
BTSEquipmentBTSM1_601_008",network="NW UTRAN"'" ;
System.out.println("Sending command /"" + command + "/" to ALLP
server");
out.println( command );
System.out.println( "Waiting for command response..." ) ;
BufferedReader in = new
BufferedReader( new InputStreamReader(allpSocket.getInputStream() )
);
inputString = in.readLine(); System.out.println( "Read /"" +
inputString + "/" response from
ALLP server" ) ;
try
{
// Parse the response to know success or failure.
int index = responseString.indexOf( "-" );
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
String statusCodeString = (responseString.substring( 0, index
)).trim(); String statusMessage =
(responseString.substring( index + 1 )).trim();
int statusCode = Integer.parseInt( statusCodeString );
if (statusCode == 0)
{
// Facility was successfully launched.
System.out.println( statusMessage );
}
else if (statusCode == 1)
{
// Error while launching facility
System.err.println( statusMessage );
}
{
// Too many socket connections are made to ALLP in
// parallel. Facility was not launched. This
// generally indicate that the Desktop was not
// properly configured or this parent application
// is not behaving as expected.
System.err.println( statusMessage );
}
else
{
System.err.println( "Parent: Invalid status code in the ALLP status
message" );
}
}
catch (Exception e)
{
System.err.println( "Parent: Invalid ALLP status message" );
}
in.close();
out.close();
allpSocket.close();
Result:
ALLP passes the request to the Application Launch system. Application Launch
system launches the NRD launch facility.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Launching the Alarm Manager from an external

application
Overview
Introduction
An external application (such as, an OSS adapter) can launch the Alarm Manager by
sending the facility launch requests to the ALLP that is running inside the 9353 WMS GUI
process. See the AALP section in the Desktop UI developer guide for more information
on how to send facility launch request to ALLP. The alarm manager launch facility is
installed with the NNnspgui package.
The Table 6-2, “Alarm manager configuration information” (p. 6-8) shows the
configuration information for the facility launch request.
Table 6-2 Alarm manager configuration information
Facility name Facility argument Description

UAMLaunchFacility NE DN in string format (single Opens a new Alarm Manager
NE DN or a list of multiple NE window that lists the alarms for
DNs) the specified NE(s)
ALLP facility launch request format

Facility= UAMLaunchFacility,Args=<NE_DN>
Where <NE_DN> is the DN(s) of the NE(s) in string format whose alarms are to be
displayed in the Alarm Manager window.
Launching the Alarm Manager through ALLP

The prerequisites to launch the Alarm Manager using ALLP are listed as follows:
• Ensure that the following applications are installed:
– Java WebStart
– Desktop UI component installed on the Web server, and configured for JWS
deployment
• Understand the Integrated Framework and the Desktop component - in particular,
Application launch and ALLP
• Install and configure the facility plugin to be launched using ALLP:
– Define the sandbox in the cfg file.
– Install the cfg and jar files with the plugin_mgmt.sh utility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• “Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP”
(p. 6-13).
• Understand the TCP/IP socket usage at a programmatic level
• Users with access control permissions to use the Alarm Manager can launch
UAMLaunchFacility
For examples of code, see the “Launching a Resource Browser from an external
application” (p. 6-2).
Before you begin

Ensure that Alarm Manager is launched through ALLP.
Procedure
Perform the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Install and configure the UAMLaunchFacility plugin, jar file and cfg file. This is done as
part of the activation of the NNnspgui package.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Send the following command from the external a(such as OSS adapter) to start the
desktop UI without an initial plugin launch request:
Example:
javaws http://<host_name>name>:8080/UI/mft/resources/desktop/jnlpGenerator.cgi?-
DPARENT_APP_HOST=my_host+-DPARENT_APP_PORT=12345
Result: The desktop UI displays the logon dialog box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter the user name and password.

Result: When the user is authenticated successfully, the ALLP plugin is launched.
ALLP gets the OSS Adapter host name and the OSS adapter listening port from Java
System Properties.
ALLP opens a socket on the dynamically selected port and starts listening on it.
ALLP sends its listening port number to the OSS adapter on the OSS adapter listening
port that was received as the System Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 OSS adapter establishes TCP/IP socket communication with ALLP using the ALLP
listening port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The OSS Adapter sends the UAMLaunchFacility request to ALLP through TCP/IP socket.
It also sends the launch context (NE DN) as the facility argument (optional). ALLP passes
the request to Application Launch system.
Result: Application Launch system launches the UAM launch facility.
The Resource Browser is opened and the window is scrolled to the NE if the given
NE is found in default layout.
An error message appears when either no default layout is set for the user or the NE is
not found in the default layout when an NE context is given.
• For single NE context: Facility=UAMLaunchFacility, Args='managedElement=
5,network="umts"'.
• For multiple NE contexts: Facility=UAMLaunchFacility, Args='managerElement=
5,network="umts"' 'managerElement=6,network="umts"'.
UAMLaunchFacility launches the Alarm Manager and an alarm window appears.
UAMLaunchFacility sets the context of the alarm window to the specified NE_DN
and its domain.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 At the OSS level, when you perform a remote access launch of the Resource Browser,
and (or) the Alarm Manager for the very first time, you are prompted for authentication.
Enter the user ID of an OAM user account.
Result: The WMS solution software uses the user ID (that you input) to determine the
set of capabilities and layouts that you are allowed to use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure that there is a default layout associated with the user ID that you input. You must
also ensure that this default layout contains the set of NEs for which alarms are to be
managed at the OSS layer. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you create a new layout
specifically for the OSS remote launch feature. Ensure that this is the default layout for all
user IDs that you use with the OSS remote launch feature. Ensure that all NEs (that are
managed by WMS software) are contained within the default layout.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 At the OSS level, when you select an alarm and attempt to perform a remote application
launch, the system displays an error message if certain conditions are met. This error
message appears if there is no default layout associated with the user. The message also
appears if the specific NE associated with the selected alarm is not within the default
layout that is associated with that user.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
Overview
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide information on the ALLP.
Contents
ALLP overview 6-12

Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP 6-13
Establishing communication with the Desktop UI 6-16
Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop UI 6-19
Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin 6-20
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager ALLP overview
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP overview
Overview
Use the Application Launch Listener Plugin (ALLP) to launch the Desktop UI plugins
from an external application. Use it to develop applications that integrate with the
Desktop UI or that communicate with the Desktop UI to send facility launch requests.
ALLP plugin opens an insecure TCP/IP socket to receive the facility launch request from
the external application. Because the TCP/IP socket is insecure, it neither supports
authentication of the external application from which it receives the facility launch
request, nor the encryption of the launch request data. You can consider this security risk
and analyze it before deployment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external
ALLP application and ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external

application and ALLP
Overview
An external application, such as a parent application, can start the Desktop UI and
establish a TCP/IP communication channel for sending facility (plugin) launch requests.
The following two cases are possible while starting the Desktop UI from the parent
application:
• the parent application passes its listening port number to the Desktop UI,
• the parent application launches the Desktop UI without passing its port number.
Parent application passes its listening port number to the Desktop UI

The parent application opens a TCP/IP socket and starts listening to it. It starts the
Desktop UI on the same or on a different host. The Desktop UI can be launched on the
same host through a command line. If the Desktop UI must be launched on a different
host, then the parent application needs a launch agent (partner or third-party component)
on that host to launch the Desktop UI on its behalf.
Regardless of where the parent application and the Desktop UI are running, the Desktop
UI can be started in stand-alone mode or in Java Web Start (JWS) mode through the
command line. When the Desktop UI is started, the parent application hostname and
listening port number are specified as system properties that indicate where to contact the
parent application to set up a TCP/IP communication channel for facility launching. The
“Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop UI” (p. 6-19) procedure
describes how the parent application can set these system properties at run-time when
starting the Desktop UI.
The ALLP application launch configuration file is installed with the Desktop UI. ALLP is
launched when the Desktop UI is started. The ALLP sends the port number of its server
socket to the parent application using the hostname and port number that the parent
application provided. After sending the ALLP port number to the parent application, the
ALLP closes its end of the socket connection. As shown in the following figure, the
ALLP closes its connection to port 2106 of the parent application.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-1 Parent application launches the Desktop UI with port argument (and
optionally hostname)
If the Desktop UI is started without specifying the hostname, then the ALLP uses
"localhost" as the default value, and it allows TCP/IP connections only from the
application running on the same host.
Parent application does not pass its listening port number to the Desktop UI
This case is similar to the scenario when the Desktop UI is started without a parent
application; the Desktop UI is started manually by the end user, see Figure 6-2, “Parent
application launches the Desktop without port argument” (p. 6-15).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 6-2 Parent application launches the Desktop without port argument
If the Desktop UI is started without specifying the port number, ALLP writes the port
number of its server socket to the standard output. It listens on this server socket port for
requests to launch facilities.
Once the parent application receives the port number of the ALLP server socket, it can
open a TCP/IP socket on that port and start sending facility launch requests to the
Desktop UI. See “Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin” (p. 6-20).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager Establishing communication with the Desktop UI
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Establishing communication with the Desktop UI

Overview
To establish communication with the Desktop UI you need the following:
• If you are launching the Desktop UI in standalone mode, ensure it is installed on your
workstation.
• If you are launching the Desktop UI using Java Web Start (JWS), ensure JWS is
installed on your workstation and the Desktop UI is installed on the Web server. Also
you must know the URL for the jnlpGenerator.cgi script.
• An understanding of how to start another program from the parent application.
• An understanding of how to set the system property while launching the Desktop UI
(“Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop UI” (p. 6-19)).
• An understanding of TCP-IP socket usage at the programming level.
The parent application can set system properties while starting the Desktop UI. The
following table shows the possible system properties.
Table 6-3 System properties to set when starting the Desktop UI
System property Optional Description

PARENT_APP_HOST Yes When specified, it represents
the parent application host
name where the ALLP sends its
server port string. If not
specified, then the default value
is localhost.
PARENT_APP_PORT Yes When specified, it represents
the parent application listening
port onto which the ALLP
sends its server port string. If
not specified, then ALLP prints
its server port string on
standard output.
The following is an example of the parent application code that starts the Desktop UI and
establishes a TCP/IP communication channel with ALLP for sending facility launch
requests.
Example:
public class ParentApplication
{
.... private static String ALLP_PORT_TAG = "ALLP_Port=";
private int ALLPPort = -1; ... public void startDesktopAndInitConn()
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{
try
{
String myHost = "localhost" ;
InetAddress myInetAddress = InetAddress.getByName( myHost ) ;
// Create server socket to receive ALLP port number
// 0 means a free port will be chosen, backlog of 1. ServerSocket
serverSocket = new
ServerSocket( 0, 1, myInetAddress ) ;
String myPort = Integer.toString( serverSocket.getLocalPort() ) ;
// Child application is executed on the local host.
// Assuming StartDesktopGUI.sh is in the PATH.
// For Java WebStart deployment it would be different command String[]
desktopCommand = {
"StartDesktopGUI.sh", "-DPARENT_APP_HOST=localhost", "-DPARENT_APP_PORT=
" +
myPort, };
Runtime.getRuntime().exec( desktopCommand, null ) ;
// Wait until we get ALLP PORT number from Desktop.
// We will only wait for 5 minutes to avoid infinite wait // and at the
same time to also give sufficient
time for the
// Desktop to start, user to log-in (if authentication is needed
// in Desktop) and the ALLP plug-in to send the ALLP PORT number.
// if we do not set the time limit and for some reason
// (e.g. user did not log-in successfully) the ALLP is not
// able to send the port number then this thread will be
// blocked for ever. By setting time limit we will be
// avoiding this to happen. int timeout = 300000;
// 5 minutes ServSocket.setSoTimeout( timeout );
System.out.println( "Waiting for ALLP port at port: " + myPort ) ;
Socket socket = serverSocket.accept();
BufferedReader In = new BufferedReader( new InputStreamReader(
socket.getInputStream() ));
String inputString = In.readLine(); In.close();
String portString=null; int subStringIndex;
if ( (subStringIndex = inputString.indexOf( ALLP_PORT_TAG )) >= 0 &&
inputString.length() >
ALLP_PORT_TAG.length() )
{ portString = inputString.substring( subStringIndex + ALLP_PORT_
TAG.length() ) ;
}
if ( portString != null )
{
System.out.println( "Received ALLP server port: " + portString );
}
else
{
System.err.println( "Received message that does not contain ALLP port:
" + inputString );
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System.exit( 1 ) ;
}
ALLPPort = Integer.parseInt( portString ) ;
}
catch( SocketTimeoutException e )
{
System.err.println( "Did not received ALLP port from Desktop GUI within
" + "specified time limit." )
;
}
catch( Exception e )
{
System.err.println( "Caught exception: " + e ) ;
}
}
}
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager Setting the System Property value while starting the
ALLP Desktop UI
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting the System Property value while starting the Desktop

UI
Overview
This section explains how to set system properties, such as PARENT_APP_HOST and
PARENT_APP_PORT from the parent application while starting the Desktop UI. If the
Desktop UI system property value is known at compile or deployment time, then the
usual way is to set system properties using the plugin_mgmt.sh script. However, if the
system property must be passed at run-time, then use the method described in the
following section.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Resource Browser and Alarm Manager Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Application Launch Listener Plugin

Overview
Any external application wishing to use the ALLP must implement code that
communicates with the ALLP using TCP-IP sockets.
The ALLP plugin is started when the Desktop is started. After establishing TCP/IP
communication channel with the parent application (see “Establishing TCP/IP
communication between an external application and ALLP” (p. 6-13)), ALLP listens on
its TCP/IP server socket for the facility launch requests. The parent application knows the
port number of the ALLP server socket. The parent application connects to the ALLP port
using the TCP/IP socket. Using this socket, the parent application can send the facility
launch request to ALLP.
The parent application can simultaneously create multiple socket connections to ALLP
and send facility launch requests in parallel. The maximum number of simultaneous
connections to ALLP is configured using ALLP_MAX_CONNECTIONS system
property. If the maximum number of socket connections is reached, then any new socket
connection request to ALLP is accepted but is immediately closed by ALLP after sending
the following message: 2 - Too many connections.
After the parent application writes the request string to the ALLP socket, it can either
close its end of the socket connection or keep the socket connection open for sending
further launch requests. Each launch request must end with one of the following:
• a line feed /n
• a carriage return /r
• a carriage return followed immediately by a line feed
The ALLP returns the failure or success status of the facility launch to the parent
application using the socket connection on which it received the facility launch request.
The ALLP adds a message in the log file indicating that it has launched the facility
successfully, or an error message if it was unable to launch the facility.
Setting system property values at runtime for the Desktop UI in standalone mode
To start the Desktop GUI in standalone mode at runtime, have the parent application
execute the StartDesktopGUI.sh script, and pass the system property values using the -D
option.
Setting system property values at runtime for the Desktop UI in JWS mode
To start the Desktop UI in JWS mode at runtime, the parent application can execute the
Java Web Start command line (javaws) and set the system property using the dynamic
JNLP generator cgi script jnlpGenerator.cgi. The jnlpGenerator.cgi script is provided
with the Desktop UI. To start the Desktop UI, the parent application executes the javaws
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
command line and passes the URL of the jnlpGenerator.cgi script as a command-line
argument. The system properties that are to be set are specified as arguments of this cgi
script in the format -D<property name>=<property value>.
Following is the syntax for setting system properties:
Example:
javaws http://<hostname>:8080/UI/mft/resources/desktop/
jnlpGenerator.cgi?-D<property name>%3D<property value>+
-D<property name>%3D<property value>
Where:
• %3D represents the equal sign =
• + represents a space as required in the URL specification
Sending facility launch requests to ALLP

To send the facility launch request to ALLP, you need the following:
• Installation and configuration of the facility plugin that must be launched using ALLP
for example, installation of cfg and Jar files and the configuration of the sandboxing
variable.
• Establish TCP/IP socket communication between the parent application and ALLP:
see “Establishing TCP/IP communication between an external application and ALLP”
(p. 6-13).
• An understanding of TCP-IP socket usage at a programmatic level.
Using the TCP/IP socket, the parent application can send the facility launch request to
ALLP as a string in the following format:
Facility=<facility name>, Args=<facility argument>
The following table defines the possible values for the Facility and Args attributes.
Table 6-4 Allowable values for Facility and Args attributes
Attribute Type Valid values Optional Usage

Facility String This string must match the No Example 1:
Facility string in a plugin cfg Facility=My
file. PluginsFacility
Restriction: since commas are
treated as separators, the
<facility name> must not
contain this character.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 6-4 Allowable values for Facility and Args attributes (continued)
Attribute Type Valid values Optional Usage

Args String Arguments can contain any Yes Example 1:
string values of meaning to the Args=FR/1/37
facility being launched. The Example 2:
ALLP does not parse or check Args=network=5,
these values. The rules and managedElement =
restrictions that apply to AL "122.122.122.122"
plugin arguments also applies
here.
The following system property related to ALLP can be set in the Desktop using the
plugin_mgmt.sh script.
System property Optional Description
ALLP_MAX_ Yes The maximum number of simultaneous socket
CONNECTIONS connections that a parent application can establish
with the ALLP server socket. If not specified, the
default value is 5. The maximum value allowed is
10.
If the maximum number of socket connections is
reached, then any new socket connection request to
ALLP is accepted but is immediately closed by
ALLP after sending the message: 2 - Too many
connections.
The following is an example of a facility command as defined in an AL configuration file:

Example:
{
Facility = Echo
CommandType = Local Application
Command = xterm
-
e echo <facilityArgs>
LaunchMode = Auto
}
You can launch the "Echo" facility from the external application by typing the following
in the listening port of the Application Launch Listening Plug-in (ALLP):
Facility=Echo,Args=Hello
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Facility launch status message
The format of the message that is returned by ALLP to the parent application to indicate
the status of the facility launch is:
<status code> - <message>
Table 6-5 Status code
Status code Description

0 The facility was launched successfully
This does NOT mean that the operation that the facility was
supposed to perform is successfully completed. ALLP cannot
determine that
1 ALLP was unable to launch facility for some reason
For example, the user does not have permission to launch this
facility
2 ALLP cannot accept socket connection request from the parent
application, because the maximum number of socket connections
has been reached (ALLP_MAX_CONNECTIONS)
Example code of parent application facility launch:

Example:
...
// Send my facility command to it. Should be of the format
// "Facility=<string>,Args="1 2 3 ..."" (Args is optional).
Socket allpSocket = new Socket( childInetAddress, ALLPPort ) ;
PrintWriter out = new PrintWriter( allpSocket.getOutputStream(), true
) ;
String command = "Facility=Echo,Args=Hello" ;
System.out.println("Sending command /"" + command + "/" to ALLP
server");
out.println( command ); System.out.println( "Waiting for command
response..." ) ;
BufferedReader in = new BufferedReader( new
InputStreamReader(allpSocket.getInputStream() )
);
inputString = in.readLine();
System.out.println( "Read /"" + inputString + "/" response from ALLP
server" ) ;
try
{
// Parse the response to know success or failure. int index =
responseString.indexOf( "-" );
String statusCodeString = (responseString.substring( 0, index
)).trim();
String statusMessage = (responseString.substring( index + 1 )).trim();
int statusCode =
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ALLP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Integer.parseInt( statusCodeString );
if (statusCode == 0)
{
// Facility was successfully launched. System.out.println(
statusMessage );
}
{
// Error while launching facility System.err.println( statusMessage );
}
{
// Too many socket connections are made to ALLP in
// parallel. Facility was not launched. This
// generally indicate that the Desktop was not
// properly configured or this parent application
// is not behaving as expected. System.err.println( statusMessage );
}
else
{
System.err.println( "Parent: Invalid status code in the ALLP status
message" );
}
}
catch (Exception e)
{
System.err.println( "Parent: Invalid ALLP status message" );
}
in.close();
out.close();
allpSocket.close();
....
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Appendix A: Document issue
history
Overview
Purpose
This appendix provides reference material for this document.
Reason for revision

This appendix has been updated with the changes from LR14.2.W Release, Issue 2,
August 2015 of the document.
Contents
Reissue history A-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary A-1
Document issue history Reissue history
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Reissue history
Purpose
The reissue history of this document is described in the following paragraphs.
Issue 2
The reissue history of Issue 2 is shown in the following table.
Table A-1 Document changes from Issue 2, August 2015

Features
None None None
Document changes
Updated the document with Included a new section in “Configuration of RET on
the CR: Upgrade of TMA fail third Chapter iBTS via WMS” (p. 3-258)
from SRS repository via
WMS
Issue 1
The reissue history of Issue 1 is shown in the following table.
Table A-2 Issue 1, January 2015, Reason for reissue

Features
None None None
Document changes
Document released for GA Updated for final release Global
Issue 0.08
The reissue history of Issue 0.08 is shown in the following table.
Table A-3 Issue 0.08, October 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
None None None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table A-3 Issue 0.08, October 2014, Reason for reissue (continued)

Document changes
CR 1331084 Updates related to the alarms Global
displayed in the 3G WMS.
Issue 0.07
Table A-4 Issue 0.07, September 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
None None None
Document changes
CR 169488 Included a new section “Configuration of RET on
OneBTS via WMS”
(p. 3-218)
Issue 0.06
Table A-5 Issue 0.06, September 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
FRS 177111 - Digital DAS Updated the topic with the “Equipment monitor”
using Tyco CDIU with technical review comments (p. 2-138)
WCDMA 9396 digital Phase
2
Document changes
None None None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 0.05
The reissue history of Issue 0.05 is shown the following table.
Table A-6 Issue 0.05, July 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
FRS 125616 - Added dual technology “Equipment monitor”
Dual-technology support support (p. 2-138)
W-CDMA/LTE by D4U in
W-CDMA
FRS 174283 - AISG on Added AISG MC-RRH “Equipment monitor”
MC-RRH 900 3G-only support (p. 2-138)
(LRCC)
FRS 177111 - Digital DAS Added OAM capabilities
using Tyco CDIU with
WCDMA 9396 digital Phase
2
Document changes
None None None
Issue 0.04
Table A-7 Issue 0.04, May 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
None None None
Document changes
MIB and CDB management Added the MIB and CDB Figure 2-74, “Equipment
management description in Monitor window for an RNC
the RNC 9771 (9771)” (p. 2-140)
AISG upgrade Added the AISG upgrade “AISG upgrade” (p. 5-18)
topic
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 0.03
Table A-8 Issue 0.03, March 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
174225 - WMS support of Added the WCE platform “Introduction” (p. 1-167)
9771 RNC tenant
management
173334 - WMS LR14.W 3rd Removed Windows XP Global
party updates
172071 - WMS support of Added AISG GUI “Equipment monitor”
AISG2.0 on 9396-based enhancements and actions (p. 2-138)
RRHs Phase 1A
103942 - iBTS AISG devices
– enhancements on WMS
174085 - AISG management
enhancements (LRCC)
168705 - Noise floor Added the Noise floor “Equipment monitor”
self-learning algorithm for self-learning algorithm (p. 2-138)
oneBts
Document changes
None None None
Issue 0.02
Table A-9 Issue 0.02, January 2014, Reason for reissue

Features
173536 - WMS basic support Added new topic for RNC Figure 2-74, “Equipment
of 9771 RNC 9771 Monitor window for an RNC
(9771)” (p. 2-140)
Document changes
None None None
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Issue 0.01
Table A-10 Issue 0.01, December 2013, Reason for reissue

Features
173329 - WMS LR14.2W Replaced Solaris 10 Update “System requirements for
KPI, dimensioning and 10 with Solaris 10 Update 11 9353 WMS NSP” (p. 1-7)
hardware
Document changes
Ordering number Updated document ordering Global
number
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
A AISG devices, 2-138 alarm severity filters, 2-229

alarm alarm stream management, 2-89
analyzing, 2-213 ALD errors
See: Non-ALD errors
annotating, 2-236
application customization, 4-19
auto-acknowledgement, 2-207
custom commands, 4-19
customization, 2-204
Application Launch Listener Plugin, 6-11
display tools, 2-35
communication with Desktop UI, 6-16
node state, 2-42
TCP/IP communication, 6-13
tooltips, 2-39
application management, 4-19
alarm color configuration, 4-20
configuration, 4-19
alarm display limit
monitoring, 4-19
setting, 1-19
audible alarms, 4-20
alarm list
Audit Action window, 3-77
modifying, 2-224
auditing MIB, 3-77
updating, 2-223
................................................................................................
alarm manager, 2-57
advanced filters window, 2-79 B BTSEquipment
alarm correlation, 2-132 equipment monitor, 2-138
description, 2-58 ................................................................................................
menu bar, 2-59 C CM XML export, 3-35
user preferences, 2-212 command buttons, 1-16

window, 2-58 command manager
alarm rule tabs, 3-7
creating, 2-241 configuration management, 3-1
modifying, 2-240 Configuration of RET on iBTS via WMS, 3-258
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
contextual menus, 1-43 resizing, 1-123
custom commands, 4-26 group NEs
customizing external alarms, 2-289 window, 1-71
................................................................................................ GUI, 1-32
D default software ................................................................................................
marking, 5-16 H Historical Fault Browser, 2-136
desktop master helpset, 1-106 ................................................................................................
diagnose command on a OneBTS, 2-264 I incorrectly provisioned NodeB list, 2-203

document support, xliii interface monitor, 3-210
download ................................................................................................
NE software, 5-4
J job scheduler, 3-128
software patches, 5-32
................................................................................................
duplicating objects, 1-132
L layout editor, 1-61
................................................................................................
background commands, 1-70
E equipment monitor, 1-166, 3-74
group commands, 1-69
AISG devices, 2-138
image commands, 1-68
ALD, 2-138
NE commands, 1-67
BTSEquipment, 2-138
text object commands, 1-68
d2U, 2-138
layout management pane, 1-18
d4U, 2-138
layout selector, 1-17
LR Outdoor Cabinet, 2-138
layouts
................................................................................................
saving and closing, 1-137
F fault management GUI, 2-4 links
Find window, 1-13 creating, 1-142
finding network resource, 1-155 deleting, 1-148
FM audit request, 2-194 ................................................................................................
FM synchronize, 2-196
M maintenance mode for an NE
................................................................................................
disabling, 2-258
G GPS self survey on a OneBTS, 2-279 enabling, 2-257
group icons managed network, 1-10
adding, 1-116 manual FM audit, 2-195
changing, 1-125 manually clearing an alarm, 2-228
reshaping, 1-124 modifying layouts, 1-12
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
moving objects phone numbers
current view, 1-118 for document support, xliii
different location, 1-119 private filter, 4-20
................................................................................................ ................................................................................................
N navigator R resource browser, 1-166, 2-5, 3-74
icon, 1-58 display filters, 2-24

window, 1-60 resource monitoring, 3-188
NE RET via WMS, 3-218
automatic grouping, 1-70 RNC 9771, 3-5
store, 1-62 RSSI monitor, 3-201
network boundary data synchronization activation, 3-176 ................................................................................................
network layout, 1-111 S search

network layouts list, 1-18 criteria, 1-14
Node B address GUI, 3-157 results list, 1-15
Node B IPv6, 3-174 session manager configuration, 3-40
notifications log tool, 2-197 aborting session, 3-64
................................................................................................ creating session, 3-47
O object editor, 3-22 interrupting session, 3-70
object icons, 1-87 performing actions, 3-61
objects scheduling session, 3-68
showing, 1-131 terminating session, 3-67
occupancy monitoring, 3-211 verifying session, 3-53
OneBTSCell settings
PowerTest action, 2-276 local language display, 1-78
rxAntennaTest action, 2-276 Shadow mechanism, 1-169
opening an RNC- Equipment Monitor window, 2-273 shelf level display
opening BTSEquipment- Equipment Monitor window, modifying, 2-275
2-272
shortcuts
opening Node B address window, 3-163
displaying, 1-104
OSI state reporting, 2-190
hiding, 1-104
NE table, 2-192
software administration and security, 5-1
object table, 2-192
Software Inventory & Upgrade Session window, 5-2
................................................................................................
software repository manager, 4-22
P parameter mask, 4-11
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-3
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
software tasks ................................................................................................
NE software upgrade, 5-17 W WCE Platform, 1-167

software backup and restore, 5-31 WMS
state display, 1-81 administration, 4-1
status bar, 1-16 basic procedures, 1-94
alarm counts, 1-58 GUI, 1-31
alarm stream management indicator, 1-58 helpset, 1-90
message area, 1-58 menu bar, 1-34, 1-96
NE counter, 1-58 opening a session, 1-98
network health indicator, 1-57 security, 4-1
stop current audible alarm icon, 1-58
tooltips, 1-58
system requirements, 1-7
................................................................................................
T text objects
adding, 1-127
changing, 1-129
editing, 1-128
tools
editing, 1-51
network definition, 1-54
property, 1-52
................................................................................................
U upgrade
AISG upgrade, 5-18

user permissions, 4-3
access control, 4-8
change password, 4-4
disclaimer text, 4-5
user rights configuration, 4-11
UTRAN Service View window, 2-215
................................................................................................
V VPI/VCI occupancy, 3-211
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 9353 WMS

Wms User Guide 9yz 04157 0014 Pczza - Issue - 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Wms User Guide 9yz 04157 0014 Pczza - Issue - 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wms User Guide 9yz 04157 0014 Pczza - Issue - 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

About this document

What's new ................................................................................................................................................................................ xxxv

Intended audience ................................................................................................................................................................... xxxv

Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvi

How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxxvi

Conventions used .................................................................................................................................................................. xxxvi

Related information ............................................................................................................................................................ xxxvii

Document support .................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xliii

How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................... xliv

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xliv

1 Introduction to 9353 WMS

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

The 9353 WMS NSP

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Brief description about NSP ................................................................................................................................................. 1-5

System requirements for 9353 WMS NSP ...................................................................................................................... 1-7

Using the WMS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

Viewing the managed network .......................................................................................................................................... 1-10

Modifying layouts .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-12

Finding network resources .................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

Overview of UTRAN service view ................................................................................................................................. 1-22

9353 WMS GUI

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-30

Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-31

Graphical User Interface description ............................................................................................................................... 1-32

9353 WMS menu bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-34

WMS contextual menus ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-43

Edit toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-51

Status bar ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-57

Navigator window .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-60

Layout Editor ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-61

Local language display setting ......................................................................................................................................... 1-78

General principles .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-81

9353 WMS Helpset

Overview of 9353 WMS Helpset ..................................................................................................................................... 1-90

9353 WMS basic procedures

Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-94

About 9353 WMS .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-96

Opening a WMS session ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-98

Defining default GUI lock setting ................................................................................................................................. 1-102

Displaying and hiding shortcuts ..................................................................................................................................... 1-104

Performing actions from shortcuts ................................................................................................................................ 1-105

Performing actions from the Desktop Master Helpset ........................................................................................... 1-106

Opening the Navigator window ...................................................................................................................................... 1-110

Opening a Network Layout .............................................................................................................................................. 1-111

Opening several Layout Editor windows .................................................................................................................... 1-115

Adding new group icons .................................................................................................................................................... 1-116

Moving objects within the current view ...................................................................................................................... 1-118

Moving objects to different locations ........................................................................................................................... 1-119

Automatically grouping NEs ........................................................................................................................................... 1-120

Resizing rectangle group icons ....................................................................................................................................... 1-123

Reshaping polygon or linear group icons ................................................................................................................... 1-124

Changing a group icon fill color ..................................................................................................................................... 1-125

Changing a polygon group icon fill pattern ............................................................................................................... 1-126

Adding new text objects .................................................................................................................................................... 1-127